The Prologue

When I discover who I am, I’ll be free – Ralph Ellison

I am going to expose from 30 years of research and experience in a long list of countries what I say is really happening in the world and why. These are my perspectives and they don’t have to be yours, but in the wake of the ‘Covid-19’ police state impositions worldwide they surely become near impossible to deny any longer.

It is ever more blatantly obvious that what I have been saying for decades was planned to happen is happening as global society transforms so quickly in the image I have predicted. Events have never moved so fast in that direction than during the manufactured ‘Covid-19’ hysteria and fascistic national lockdowns in which billions were put under actual and virtual house arrest across the world. Eighty-five percent of this book was written before these draconian impositions were rolled out – based on a lie –and I have decided to hold back on the ‘Covid-19’ story and its catastrophic human impact through economic Armageddon until the late-added chapters near the end which expose in detail both the nature of the ‘virus’ scam and why it was perpetrated. I will of course refer to the ‘virus’ briefly here and there before then, but I want you to read the rest of the book and the information that I laid out before the ‘virus’ blitzkrieg because then the who and why of the ‘virus’ hoax will be devastating in their clarity and context. Nothing in my lifetime has so proved my point about global control than the staged illusion of ‘Covid-19’. To emphasise – Please note when you see my comments relating to the ‘virus’ that the text around them was written before the ‘virus’ hysteria and lockdowns began.

Figure 1: All these decades later the mainstream media is still using the same CIA propaganda term for those who are aware that governments lie to us.

Is it really random coincidence that what I have written for three decades was planned for humanity is now so clearly happening? Or is it the most glaring evidence and confirmation of a calculated agenda for total human enslavement? I vociferously say the latter and I am confident that by the end of this book with the dots and strands connected you will agree that coincidence theory is simply not credible in the face of the evidence. I’ll make it very clear what I say is going on, but I want the evidence to speak for itself and for you to decide what it means. With that said we shall begin. I have been exposing for 30 years a conspiracy to enslave humanity in an Orwellian global tyranny of total control – ultimately (and very soon if we don’t wake up fast) by connecting artificial intelligence to the human brain so that AI replaces the human mind. That’s crazy? It’s happening step-by-step before our eyes right now. ‘Human’ thinking and emotions would be history and our perceptions dictated directly by AI and those that control AI. It’s no good people screaming ‘conspiracy theory’ – a term brought into widespread use by the CIA in the 1960s as it sought to discredit those questioning the ludicrous official story of the Kennedy assassination (Fig 1 ).

These are definitions of the term ‘conspiracy’: An evil, unlawful, treacherous, or surreptitious plan formulated in secret by two or more persons; a combination of persons for a secret, unlawful, or evil purpose; an agreement by two or more persons to commit a crime, fraud, or other wrongful act; any concurrence in action or combination in bringing about a given result. On that basis the world is drowning in conspiracies at every level of society, but to the mainstream media, indeed the Mainstream Everything, conspiracies don’t exist and anyone who says so is a kook peddling a ‘conspiracy theory’. Yes, even in the light of the draconian, fascistic impositions of the ‘Covid-19’ hoax. What I have been exposing since 1990 is not multiple unconnected conspiracies (though they do exist by those definitions alone). I have uncovered one conspiracy with multiple faces driving human society to the same despicable end and what I have revealed is not a ‘theory’. It is an obvious reality unfolding by the day as AI takes over human life and freedom is deleted. The crazies in the Devil’s Playground of Silicon Valley are now telling you that what I have been warning about for so long is indeed what is planned to happen. They are doing so because they have no choice as AI takes over and cannot be hidden any longer. The sales-pitch is the emergence of a new era in which humans will be ‘gods’ thanks to a connection to AI when, in truth, the ‘new human’ will be post-human and no longer ‘human’ at all. Insiders like Google executive Ray Kurzweil even point to the year of 2030 for when this will be seriously underway and human brains will be connected to the AI ‘cloud’. He said:

Our thinking … will be a hybrid of biological and non-biological thinking … humans will be able to extend their limitations and ‘think in the cloud’ … We’re going to put gateways to the cloud in our brains … We’re going to gradually merge and enhance ourselves … In my view, that’s the nature of being human – we transcend our limitations.

As the technology becomes vastly superior to what we are then the small proportion that is still human gets smaller and smaller and smaller until it’s just utterly negligible.

Figure 2: How human perception is manipulated into a myopia of possibility. Control information and you control perception. (Image Gareth Icke.)

This is what I have called ‘the assimilation’ as human awareness is absorbed into AI and that which is truly behind AI. I don’t mean the middlemen and women of Silicon Valley. Even the tech billionaires are not the engineers of all this. They are merely the oil rags, albeit very rich ones. What is happening today is the endgame in a story that has spanned thousands of years as we perceive the illusion of ‘time’. Our human sense of reality was infiltrated long ago by a force that is not human which has created a global hierarchy of control with its representatives and agents manipulating human perception century after century on the road to total enslavement (Fig 2 ). By controlling perception you control experience individually and collectively in a cause-and-effect that I will be explaining in detail. The plan has demanded the constant centralisation of power as a bottom-line imperative. With every step in that direction fewer and fewer people seize more control over the population. Tribes became nations and nations are becoming superstates like the European Union and trading blocs controlled from the centre. Decisions are being made increasingly through global corporations and institutions like the United Nations and the World Health and Trade Organizations. People have long called this conspiracy (while not realising it’s a conspiracy) ‘globalisation’. What is this? The global centralisation of power over every aspect of human life – the very plan I have been exposing for decades. We now have the centralisation of control in Silicon Valley over the flow of information from which people form their perceptions of events and reality. Hysterical Silicon Valley censorship by Google, Facebook, Twitter, Amazon and all the rest (controlled from the shadows by the same force) is aimed at dictating everything you see and hear and, through that, manipulating your perception of everything. Even that won’t be necessary with an AI connection to your brain. Your perceptions would then be delivered directly.

This has always been the goal of the non-human infiltration of human society via its agents and operatives in apparently human form. The technological cutting edge that we see in the public arena is as nothing compared with technological knowledge in other realities where what is today called ‘smart’ was known about while history records humans knocking rocks together and living in caves. The constant flow of ‘new inventions’ that daily deepen human control have been waiting for humanity to reach a point of intellectual development where it could build and operate its own technological prison. This is where we are today. Gadgetry and communication systems required by the global prison are playing out into public awareness from underground bases and secret projects with cover stories and cover people hiding the truth of where it all comes from. The flow of technology is seamless for this reason. There are no ‘seams’ or big delays as the manipulators wait for the next stage to be ‘invented’. There are no gaps as technological limitations are pondered for decades and overcome. Almost by the week the next stages of technological AI are revealed and the pace is ever quickening. Humanity has been perceptually-manipulated to develop the intellectual capacity (‘cleverness’) to build and operate its own technological Alcatraz while not developing the wisdom to see that this is what we are doing. I have been saying for decades: Cleverness without wisdom is the most destructive force on earth. So it is proving and not by accident, but design. Cleverness is so often confused with wisdom. Cleverness knows about information while wisdom knows what it means and sees its consequences. It is clever to build an atomic weapon, but not wise to do so. I have exposed the conspiracy, ancient and modern, in enormous detail and the non-human force orchestrating from the shadows and realities unseen by the human eye. You can find this information in … And The Truth Shall Set You Free, The Biggest Secret, Children of the Matrix, Tales From The Time Loop, The David Icke Guide to the Global Conspiracy, The Perception Deception, Human Race Get Off Your Knees, Phantom Self, Everything You Need To Know But Have Never Been Told, The Trigger , and other books. My focus here is on how human perception has been manipulated to follow the path the control system has decreed and from this knowledge point to The Answer that will set us free. That answer relates to who and what we really are and to escaping the fake self-identity that we are told and pressured to believe in. To know who we are, where we are and how the two interact is the whole foundation of human freedom which is why every effort is made to keep us in ignorance of that information and awareness.

How it’s done

Figure 3: The almost infinitesimal band of frequency that we call ‘light’ or the electromagnetic spectrum. Scientists call that which we can’t see ‘dark’ which I contend is erroneous in their version of reality. ‘Dark’ should be simply considered beyond human sight.

Figure 4: Visible light, which is the only reality we can ‘see’, is a fraction of the 0.005 percent. The human five senses are aware of only one ‘TV channel’ within Infinite Existence.

Figure 5: Our ‘world’ is a band of frequency within Infinite Reality.

Some brief but essential background is required for those new to my work about the overwhelmingly hidden hierarchical structure driving the direction of human society on behalf of the non-human force that it represents. Without awareness of this structure and how it works the context of world events simply cannot be understood. I have long used the concept of the spider and the web. The Spider is the non-human force operating beyond the extraordinarily narrow frequency band of five-sense human perception. People think they can see all there is to see in the ‘space’ they are observing; but they can’t. They are seeing only a tiny fraction of what exists around us and within us. The electromagnetic spectrum (including radio waves, microwaves, infrared, ultraviolent, X-rays and gamma rays) is only 0.005 percent of what exists in the universe in various forms of energy and reality. Some scientists say it’s a bit more, but not much. The point is that the electromagnetic spectrum is a fraction of what exists beyond its band of frequency and humans can’t see the almost totality even of that spectrum. Human sight – everything we perceive as a visual reality or ‘the world’ – is confined to a micro-segment of the 0.005 percent known as visible light (Figs 3 and 4 ). We are limited in our visual perception to a minuscule band of frequency and that is only by the terms that mainstream science can currently measure or thinks it can (Fig 5 ). In truth what we ‘see’ is even more myopic in comparison to Infinite Reality that exists beyond the firewalls of visible light and the illusory limits of the speed of light. Watch television or listen to radio and you perceive only what is being broadcast by the channels and stations you have chosen. All the other channels and stations exist in the same room but you are not aware of them unless you change the channel or move the dial. When people ask why if this non-human force is real we can’t we see it – this is why. It operates from realms of frequency outside the human band of visual reality and is invisible to us in the same way that when you are tuned to TV station ‘A’ you can’t see TV stations ‘B’, ‘C’ or ‘D’ even though they exist. Change channel and you switch from station ‘A’ and connect with one of the others. Station ‘A’ doesn’t disappear when you switch; it’s only that you are no longer connected to its wavelength or output and so you can’t see it. I have just described what happens when we ‘die’ (or rather don’t – only the body does). Our consciousness changes ‘channels’ or moves its point of attention. This is that all death is – a transfer of attention from one reality to another. The source of human control is hidden from us although non-human entities representing this force can move in and out of our reality by entering our band of visual frequency and then withdrawing. Accounts are legion of people claiming to have seen entities or craft ‘appearing out of nowhere’ and then ‘disappearing’ in a flash. They don’t appear or disappear. They enter the human band of visual frequency and then leave. To the observer they have appeared from nowhere and disappeared into nowhere when it is just a case of now you see it, now you don’t, as it comes and goes from visible light. What does a TV channel do when you switch to it? What does it do when you switch away from it? The channels, or realities, appear ‘out of nowhere’ and then ‘disappear into nowhere’ when in fact they don’t go anywhere . We only connect and disconnect with them.

The Web

Figure 6: The compartmentalised web of secret societies, semi-secret and public organisations that allow the ‘Spider’ hidden at the centre to impose its agenda on human society. (Image Neil Hague.)

What I call ‘The Web’ is the interconnecting secret society structure that allows the Spider in the hidden to dictate events in the seen (Fig 6 ). Strands in The Web close to the Spider are the most exclusive secret societies and their initiates will know the detailed Spider agenda and where it is planned to go. Communication with the Spider directly and through satanic ritual allows these inner-strand initiates to know about technological possibility way before it appears in the world of the seen and to secure the transfer of technological knowledge long before its official time of release. If you have access to this inner sanctum of The Web, or penetrate it through decades of work, you can predict what we perceive as the ‘future’ – including the technology involved – because the ‘future’ in this sense is only the Spider agenda being spun. If there is a plan for the world and nothing intervenes to stop that plan then it will happen and revealing the plan becomes predicting the future. My books over the decades have proved extraordinarily accurate in predicting events for this reason – including a plan for ‘pandemics’. The whole point of what I do is to alert enough people so that humanity does intervene and stop the planned outcome of total human control. Famous ‘see-the-future’ writers such as Aldous Huxley (Brave New World , published in 1932) and George Orwell (Nineteen Eighty-Four , published in 1948) have proved to be so accurate because by whatever means they were able to penetrate the Spider agenda and could predict technology and other possibilities that didn’t exist at the time of their writing. As we move out in The Web from the Spider and the inner-sanctum initiates we meet the secret societies that we do know about in terms of name if not actions. These include the Knights Templar, Knights of Malta, Opus Dei, the Jesuit Order, Freemasons and many others which have an interlocking command structure if you go deep enough. Most of their members will not be aware of their interlocking nature and the agenda their controlling core is pursuing. Different levels or ‘degrees’ are compartmentalised from what those above them know (Fig 7 ). Human society is arranged in the same way with the great majority in any organisation kept in ignorance of what the few at the top know and are seeking to impose. They are pawns and foot-soldiers for an agenda they don’t even know exists. Intelligence agencies (themselves structured as secret societies) are classics of this compartmentalisation or ‘need to know’ technique.

Figure 7: The compartmentalised ‘degrees’ that keep each level of Freemasonry in ignorance of what the others know is the structural basis for all organisations within The Web.

Figure 8: Major ‘cusp’ organisations that take the hidden agenda of the Spider and play it out across human society.

Figure 9: What happens in the world of the ‘seen’ is hatched in the unseen.

There is a point in The Web where the hidden meets the seen and here we have what I call the ‘cusp’ organisations that include the Royal Institute of International Affairs (established in London in 1920); Council on Foreign Relations (US, 1921); Bilderberg Group (US, Europe, worldwide, 1954); Club of Rome (Europe, US, worldwide, 1968); and the Trilateral Commission (US, Europe, worldwide, 1972). These groupings and others answer to the Round Table secret society founded in London in the latter years of the 19th century by the House of Rothschild and its frontman lackey, Cecil Rhodes (Fig 8 ). The definition of ‘cusp’ describes perfectly the role of these organisations – ‘a point of transition between two different states’. In this case those two states are the hidden and the seen between which they act as a conduit. Cusp groups gather together politicians, government administrators, financiers, corporations, intelligence operatives and media to advance a common direction for the world although many of the gofers and stooges involved will have no idea because of compartmentalisation. Cusp organisations include a fantastic list of ‘think tanks’ and nongovernmental organisations (NGOs). Their role is to take the Spider agenda hatched in the hidden part of The Web and impose that in the world of the seen through governments, government agencies, banks, corporations, intelligence and military groupings, media conglomerates and all the pillars and institutions that dictate the direction of human society. We see apparently random and unconnected decisions made by governments, groups and organisations, but the society-transforming ones are not random and certainly not unconnected. They are the Spider agenda being introduced through its countless proxies which in the end all answer to the same master (Fig 9 ). At the inner-core of The Web governments and politics are the banking system are the global corporations are the Silicon Valley giants are the mainstream media are the education system are mainstream science are the pharmaceutical cartel, or ‘Big Pharma’, and so on. Key decisions that change the direction of human life are not taken randomly or independently. They are part of the Spider’s plan for total control. The vast majority of people working in these groups and organisations who daily take Spider-instigated actions are clueless about the origin of those decisions, changes and policies, and what they are designed to collectively achieve. This is the structure that allows the very few to control and manipulate the very many while the many remain in ignorance of what is really happening and why. Who is going to tell them – the mainstream media ? That is owned by The Web and most mainstream ‘journalists’ are as ignorant and often more so about the agenda than the rest of the population.

The Death Cult

The inner core of the secret society global network locks into human-sacrificing Satanism – literally making sacrifices to their hidden ‘gods’ and masters beyond human sight which are obsessed with death. They feed off the energy and terror associated with death and especially sacrificial death. Most people think that human sacrifice to the ‘gods’ came to an end in the ancient world. If they read some of my other books they will see otherwise and how many of the global rich and famous are practitioners of this horror to this day. They will also realise that Satanism involves vampiring the energy of children which is where the whole theme originates of ‘sacrificing young virgins to the gods’. This is code for children. Satanic and paedophile rings often work in unison in the targeting of children in their service to The Web and the ‘gods’. These ancient practices have passed through what we experience as history under the cover of this network and that’s why I refer to the inner elite of The Web as a Death Cult. You can read the detailed background to the Cult going back thousands of years in other books like The Trigger and Everything You Need To Know But Have Never Been Told (Everything You Need To Know from hereon). One central network within the Cult is known as Sabbatian (or Sabbatean)-Frankism which emerged in the 17th century and was the driving force behind the creation of Israel and Zionism, Saudi Arabia and the head-chopping (Death Cult) ‘ISIS’ version of extreme ‘Islam’ known as Wahhabism. Sabbatian-Frankism is named after two dark occultists, Sabbatai Zevi (1626-1676) and Jacob Frank (1726-1791) and is a form of Satanism. Jacob Frank teamed up with Sabbatian-Frankist Mayer Amschel Rothschild, founder of the Rothschild banking dynasty, to establish the infamous Illuminati in 1776 as another important strand in The Web. I expose Sabbatian-Frankism in The Trigger in relation to the real perpetrators of 9/11 (a mass death ritual) and all that has followed in regime-change wars (death of millions) and deletion of freedom. I will refer to the inner-core controlling The Web within human society throughout the book as ‘the Cult’ and it is important to keep in mind the central part played by its Sabbatian-Frankism wing in relation to Israel, the United States, United Kingdom, Europe and worldwide in the manipulation of global events. Tiny Israel has so much power and influence because it is the fiefdom of Sabbatian-Frankism (the global Cult) and no one needs to know this more urgently than the Jewish community which it has infiltrated while posing as Jewish.

Figure 10: The ever-growing obsession with death

Figure 11: Occult symbol and Extinction Rebellion (‘ER’) symbol.

The great majority of my research on Sabbatian-Frankism has come from Jewish sources that were and are well aware of how their community has been hijacked. Sabbatian-Frankism and the rest of the Cult specialise in infiltrating societies, cultures and religions by posing as members of those communities while pursuing a very different goal. This infiltration allows the Cult to create and control groups of all kinds while most of those involved have no idea there even is a Cult let alone that it is directing their organisation, religion, culture or society. How many of those who blindly repeat the official nonsense about human-caused climate change and demand the dystopian transformation of society to ‘solve the problem’ know about the Cult’s cusp-cult the Club of Rome? This was specifically created to exploit environmental concerns (real and imagined) to transform society into a global centralised Marxist-like tyranny in precisely the image demanded by ‘climate change’ protestors such as Extinction Rebellion and promotors of the ‘Green New Deal’ in America. Who string-pulls from the shadows such protests and demands? The Death Cult does. You can even see the obsession that groups like Extinction Rebellion (ER) have with death and blood (Fig 10 ). We are told that the group’s symbol represents an hourglass in a circle to mean time is running out (Fig 11 ). It is, however, a symbol long used in occultism and ‘sex magic’ and referred to as ‘The Mark of the Beast’. The O is female and X is male. ‘Ceremonial magician’ Kenneth Grant was secretary and personal assistant to the elite British occultist Aleister Crowley. He explains in his 1973 book, Kenneth Grant, Aleister Crowley & The Hidden God , that the symbol also related to a Celtic god called Nodens:

The Heart of the Sigil of Nodens is identical with the Mark of the Beast: the fusion of O and X which produces the lightning flash. Nodens is the God of the Great Deep or Abyss, microcosmically identical with subconsciousness. He reigns over the Abyss and controls and harnesses its lightnings … The Seat of Stone is Egyptian goddess lsis, and upon this foundation the Goddess is established and rules the heavens, the earth and the deeps beneath the earth. In other words, the Goddess who grants all desires is invoked by the union of the X and the O …

Extinction Rebellion protests are incredibly ritualistic with groups of people with white faces and blood-red robes walking through the streets. I am not saying that all followers of Extinction Rebellion and supporters of the Green New Deal know they are assets of the global Cult. They are still more pawns in a game they don’t understand. If they read this book to the end they might see how monumentally they are being had. Human-caused climate change is being hoaxed to justify the centralisation of global power over the fine detail of our lives and as I write so is – big time – the ‘pandemic’ which ticks every box for those seeking to impose the global Orwellian state.

Permanent government is the real government

Figure 12: Permanent governments operate nationally and globally and dictate the direction of countries and the world while ‘elected’ politicians of all parties come and go.

Figure 13: Politicians are here today and gone tomorrow, but the Hidden Hand that I call the Cult is always there and ultimately controls all of them. (Image Gareth Icke.)

Every country and the world as a whole has a permanent government controlled by the Cult through compartmentalisation and these are always in power no matter what the nature of the here-today-gone-tomorrow political parties that only appear to be the origin of societal change. Permanent government is widely referred to as the ‘Deep State’ today although that is only part of the permanent control. The Deep State consists of Cult-directed intelligence, military and law enforcement personnel along with government administrators and insider politicians that seek to advance the Cult agenda for the world. They direct, manipulate and undermine elected government and non-Cult personnel (the overwhelming majority) to ensure that what the Cult wants it gets. Other sections of permanent governments include the banking and financial networks, Big Tech, Big Biotech, Big Pharma, Big Media (and some of the ‘alternative’), Big Oil, other major corporations, the legal system and courts. Politicians come and go, but the hidden government is always there and no matter what the colour of the briefly-elected political rosettes the same direction of the world incessantly continues (Fig 12 ). America is a perfect example of how this works although it’s the same in every country. The United States is governed (at least officially) by either the Democratic or Republican parties and the Permanent Government controls both of them. Whichever you vote for the Cult is in power. The Republican Party is controlled by a group known as the Neocons or neoconservatives (major funder casino billionaire Sheldon Adelson) and the Democrats have a similar group that I call the Democons (major funder financier billionaire George Soros). Adelson and Soros both answer to those that control Israel which in the shadows is the Sabbatian-Frankist wing of the Cult. Soros would deny that Israel connection to maintain his cover of being different from Adelson. He’s not. Do these people and others always like each other? No, they don’t and there is rivalry between them. Levels above them, however, make sure that any mutual contempt doesn’t get out of hand or in the way. Woe betide them if it does. We see the US presidency passing between ‘Democrat’ Bill Clinton, ‘Republican’ Boy George Bush, ‘Democrat’ Barack Obama or ‘Republican’ Donald Trump who are described in office as the most powerful people in the world. They are in reality only temporary puppets of the Permanent Government because the Neocons and Democons both take their orders from the same Cult (Fig 13 ). Political squabbles, attacks and counterattacks are sideshows as the Cult agenda for total human control moves incessantly forward. Public squabbles played out in the media also help to convince the population that they really do have different political choices within what is called ‘democracy’. This term is used as interchangeable with ‘freedom’ when democracy is really only the ability to mind-manipulate enough people to vote for you by lying to them. You lie in election campaigns about your planned policies and then largely do the opposite once you win office. You are then free to officially run the country until the next lie-fest when you may be replaced by another party controlled from the shadows by the same force that controls you. It happens all the time across the world. People vote for Party ‘A’ and they get into power. The public don’t like what they do and next time the majority vote for Party ‘B’. People don’t like what they do because it’s pretty much the same in outcome and the only way they can remove them is to return to Party ‘A’ that they threw out the election before. Round and round the garden generation after generation. Heads you lose, tails you lose. In some countries there may be a Party ‘C’, but the principle is the same. The government that you see is subordinate to the Permanent Government that you don’t see and national Permanent Governments fuse into a global Permanent Government that dictates to the world through The Web. Against this background the massive divisions in the population between the political ‘Right’ and ‘Left’ take on a whole new light and state of ridiculousness. They are manipulated divide and rule to set the target population at war with itself while believing they have ‘choice’(Fig 14 ).

Cult wars

War after war in the Middle East is testament to the existence of the Permanent Government behind all political faces and facades. A Neocon ‘think tank’ called the Project for the New American Century (PNAC), founded and dominated by ultra-Zionists with fanatical allegiance to Israel and Sabbatian-Frankism, published a document in September, 2000, calling for American troops to ‘fight and decisively win multiple theatre wars’ in the Middle East and elsewhere to regime change governments in a list of countries including Iraq, Libya, Syria and Iran as well as bringing about regime-change in North Korea and eventually China. The Cult seeks to control the whole landmass of Eurasia from Europe to China and from Russia down to the Middle East and this further explains the constant demonisation of Russia. The PNAC document said that to justify this policy to the American public and secure the enormous required increases in military spending the United States had to experience another attack on the homeland like the one by the Japanese at Pearl Harbor, Hawaii, in 1941. To quote the document:

… The process of transformation … war and regime change … is likely to be a long one, absent some catastrophic and catalysing event – like a new Pearl Harbor.

A year to the month later America had what President Bush called ‘the Pearl Harbor of the 21st century’ – 9/11. Members of the Project for the New American Century behind the document came to office with Bush in January, 2001. They included Dick Cheney (Vice-President and de-facto President); Donald Rumsfeld (Defense Secretary); Paul Wolfowitz (Deputy Defense Secretary); Dov Zakheim (Comptroller of the entire Pentagon budget); and many others allied to Israel and committed to the PNAC list of regime-change targets. I show beyond doubt in The Trigger that the satanic Sabbatian-Frankist network of the Cult operating out of Israel and in league with its agents in the US Deep State were the real perpetrators of 9/11 which they then used as the excuse to launch the ‘war on terror’ (war of terror) to pick off their list of target countries. They invaded Afghanistan to ‘get’ the fake 9/11 villain Osama bin Laden and followed this by targeting the countries on the original PNAC list – Iraq, Libya, Syria and Iran with much finger-pointing also at North Korea and increasingly China. The nature of the Permanent Government comes into focus when you observe how those countries have been targeted by different presidents from apparently ‘opposing’ parties: George Bush (‘Republican’, Iraq); Barack Obama (‘Democrat’, Libya and Syria); and Donald Trump (‘Republican’, Iran). We also had UK Prime Minister and war criminal Tony Blair (Labour Party) working with Bush to invade Afghanistan and Iraq while David Cameron (Conservative Party) was Prime Minister when Britain supported Obama in laying siege to Libya and Syria. They may appear to be ‘different’ presidents, prime ministers and parties, but they follow the same script written by the Permanent Government.

Unhooking the mind

All this brings me to the focus of this book which is escaping the human mind-prison by taking back control of our own perceptions and self-identity. I mean by that our perceptions of everything from world events to the nature of the True ‘I’ and reality itself. The number of Cult operatives working in full knowledge of what they are doing is microscopic compared with a global population heading towards eight billion. The only way so few can control and direct so many is by hijacking their perception of everything. You can use ‘physical’ control only over relatively small groups through military and civilian law enforcement (unless the population acquiesce en masse through perception control as with the ‘pandemic’). For global control you require perception control. Behaviour comes from perception and if you control perception you control behaviour and what people will do or won’t do, challenge or support. Hijack perception and you hijack behaviour; hijack behaviour and you hijack the world. The sequence of control is perception = behaviour = collective human society. The next question is where do perceptions come from? They come from information received. We develop our perceptions through information that we absorb from personal experience, a bloke down the bar, the ten o’clock news, a posting on Facebook, and countless other sources. We can therefore extend the sequence to information = perception = behaviour = collective human society. Control information and you control that whole sequence. The Cult already overwhelmingly controls information and it seeks total control. Perceptions are assumptions based on the brain’s best guess in the light of information received. Humanity would increase by a ginormous leap its potential for knowledge and creativity if we realised that perception and truth do not have to be the same thing and in fact rarely are. What is perceived ‘truth’ anyway except assumptions that become perceptions that become ‘this is how it is’? Donald Hoffman, a professor in the Department of Cognitive Sciences at the University of California, Irvine, said that perception is a controlled illusion and reality is when we agree about our hallucinations. Yes, but who controls the illusion and elicits agreement on hallucinations by controlling information and the assumptions that come from that? The Cult is seeking to enforce total control by imposing perception directly through a brain-connection to AI, but for now they must control information to control perception to hijack collective reality. Here you have the reason the Cult is obsessed with controlling sources of information through ownership of the mainstream media and Silicon Valley while suppressing other information through the ever-increasing censorship documented at length in my other books and experienced by more people every day. The Cult seeks to delete or suppress any source of information and opinion that questions and challenges the official narrative of almost any subject, including government (Cult) policy, ‘Covid-19’, vaccines, regime-change wars, human-caused climate change, the nature of human biology and political correctness which is manipulating the population to censor itself. All these subjects and so many more are aspects of the Spider agenda and they are imposed by the Cult via The Web. The coordination of censorship by this network is obvious and it’s cheered on by the Cult-created fake-’progressive’ ‘Woke’ culture. ‘Woke’, ironically, is another word for ‘fast asleep’. The climate change hoax, the imposition of extreme transgender doctrines, beliefs and language, and the obsession with seeing racism absolutely everywhere are all facets of ‘Woke’ and, not coincidentally, facets of the Cult agenda for the world as I will be explaining.

Fake self-identity

The foundation and bottom-line of mass perception programming is to maintain humanity in ongoing ignorance of who we are and where we are. The idea is to program the belief from cradle to grave that we are cosmic accidents of random ‘evolution’ and to define self-identity only by the labels we are given and give ourselves. Life has a beginning and an end and when you’re dead you’re dead. For those who won’t buy the latter you tell them they are subject to the demands of an angry, judgemental external ‘God’ with rules and regulations (Cult rules and regulations) which must be followed to avoid the fires of hell or secure a date with multiple virgins waiting only for believers. Whether religious or atheist the labels of limitation still apply. These are the labels of ‘I-am-a’ as in: I-am-a man, woman, gay, transgender, black, white, rich, poor, Christian, Muslim, Hindu, Jew and all the rest. These labels are not who we are. They are merely what we are briefly experiencing . We – the eternal ‘I’ – are an expression of an Infinite State of Awareness having those experiences. Think how impossible it would be to pressure, frighten, intimidate and manipulate people to do what the Cult demands if we knew that we are a point of attention within a state of Infinite Awareness having a brief experience called human in whatever form, colour, race or sexuality. How even harder would it be to divide and control people aware that we are all aspects of the same consciousness and who understand that our temporary labels are illusory divisions and not real in the way that they seem to be? How would the Cult instigate the essential divide and rule and conflict between labels of race, culture, sexuality, politics and income bracket if we all knew they were temporary illusions and that our reality is just another type of ‘dream’? Or that human life is like donning a headset and playing virtual reality? Such games may seem so real, but take off the headset (symbolic of ‘death’) and you see that it was all a technologically-generated illusion, a dream or nightmare that we believed in the moment to be real. Such is the nature of human life. As Rumi, a 13th century Persian mystic, said:

This place is a dream. Only a sleeper considers it real. Then death comes like dawn and you wake up laughing at what you thought was your grief.

Figure 15: The human illusion.

These truths must be kept from us for the Death Cult conspiracy to prevail. This book is about how that is being done and how we can return to the true and eternal ‘I’ that we are and always will be beyond the illusory diversions of the five senses. The inner circle of the Cult knows what reality is and how it works and their power comes from keeping that knowledge from the population. They do this by dismissing or demonising such information in the public arena while passing it on to generations of chosen initiates in the secret society networks of The Web. Secret societies and other assets of The Web answer in the end to the Cult which itself answers to its non-human masters or Spider. We have in this way been manipulated to forget our real nature and live in an isolated ‘Bubble’ of self-identity and limitation that I call Phantom Self – label self (Fig 15 ). This is the whole foundation of human control, but it doesn’t have to be. Open your mind and it’s wakey, wakey time.

CHAPTER ONE

What is ‘reality’?

If you don’t know who you truly are, you’ll never know what you really want – Roy T. Bennett

Dictionary definitions of ‘conscious’ include: ‘The state of being aware of, and responsive to, one’s surroundings’; and ‘the state of understanding and realising something’. My definition for the purposes of this book is going to be very different.

I am making a clear distinction between what I will call ‘mind’ and ‘consciousness’. I will use the term ‘mind’ and ‘Body-Mind’ to describe the perception of five-sense reality and ‘consciousness’ for expanded awareness beyond the walls – firewalls as we shall see – of the five senses. From this perspective those two official definitions can be seen in another way. Take the first one: ‘The state of being aware of, and responsive to, one’s surroundings.’ Okay, but aware of what surroundings? Perceived ‘surroundings’ (quite the wrong term as I shall explore) are actually illusory when compared with how we appear to experience them. The world is not ‘solid’, for example. It only seems that way to senses that are not consciousness in its prime form. Our five senses, or information decoding systems, ‘sense’ our ‘surroundings’ while not in the widest meaning of the word being ‘conscious’ or ‘aware’ of what those surroundings are. If that was the case we would see through the illusions and mind-trickery to perceive the world as it really is. Then there is that other definition of conscious: ‘The state of understanding and realising something.’ Can anyone truly understand any thing, never mind some thing, when we appear to be experiencing a ‘physical’ world of ‘solidity’ which is, in fact, neither? How can we understand anything in the world if we don’t understand the nature of the world? We can’t and yet all the institutions of human society are making decisions and forming perceptions based on an illusory reality which is nothing like the one they think they are living ‘in’. How can such decisions and perceptions be anything except skewed and misguided? These are the same institutions of education, science, medicine, politics and media etc. from which all but a few glean their perceptions and make their decisions. Put all that together and it captures in its totality the meaning of the phrase ‘the blind leading the blind’ or, as I would put it, the unconscious leading the unconscious. Five-sense mind is not conscious in my definition so much as sensory – ‘relating to the physical senses’. It doesn’t perceive and instead decodes . I will explain the hows and whys as we go along. This entrapment in five-sense perception is why so many (especially in academia, science and medicine) only believe in what they can see, touch, taste, smell or hear – sense, decode . They are not conscious beyond sensory self. By my definition, therefore, such people are un conscious and slaves of five-sense mind. Our senses are not conscious any more than a computer is conscious when it decodes data and presents it on the screen in a form that we recognise.

Figure 16: The symbolic – but very accurate – depiction of the human plight. The computer operator (consciousness) becomes disconnected from the computer (Body-Mind) which is then programmed with false perceptions of everything to secure mass human control. (Image Neil Hague.)

Figure 17: Who are we? We are awareness, a state of being aware. The body is only a temporary vehicle for a brief experience by that awareness as a ‘human’.

Figure 18: We may experience ourselves as ‘individual’, but we are all expressions, too, of the same infinite flow of awareness that at one level I will call ‘The Field’. (Image Neil Hague.)

Figure 19: When our point of attention enters the human frequency band we should be guided from our expanded levels of consciousness. Instead most are manipulated to operate only in the realm of the five senses where the Cult controls what they see and hear. The result is ‘physical’ enslavement through perceptual enslavement. (Image Neil Hague.)

What I am calling ‘conscious’ is that which operates beyond the merely sensory. You could think of this as the person sitting at the computer with the keyboard and mouse while sensory mind is the computer which should be responding to that input (Fig 16 ). When a computer virus infiltrates a system and takes it over – takes ‘possession’ – the operator is tapping the mouse and banging the keys without response. The computer takes on a life of its own with something else seizing control. I say this is what has happened to humanity. A ‘virus’ – the Death Cult and it’s non-human masters – have infiltrated human perception and essentially disconnected sensory mind (Body-Mind) from expanded awareness. We are not our body or sensory perception. They are only experiences for the True Self which is simply awareness – a state of being aware (Fig 17 ). Everything in all existence is consciousness, the same consciousness in different states of awareness, and we, like everything , are an expression of that state of Infinite and Eternal Awareness (Fig 18 ). Our expression or point of attention is currently having a brief experience called human and our Body-Mind (the symbolic computer) is the vehicle for that experience. Humanity has been manipulated by the Cult to forget our true nature and identify with the ‘me’ of the five senses and all its illusory labels and sense of apartness and division (Fig 19 ). We are meant to retain a connection to the True ‘I’ (the hands on the mouse and keyboard) and we can open our minds potentially to Infinity itself. When our minds are closed that influence is lost to our experiencing awareness, or Body-Mind, and we becomes isolated in the ‘Bubble’ within which our sense of reality is dominated by five-sense perception (Fig 20 overleaf). Instead of being influenced by our expanded levels of awareness we become mesmerised by information constantly fed to the brain and five senses by Cult-controlled media, politics, science, medicine and academia while all except a few in those professions have no idea they are serving a Cult-directed agenda. They are as perceptually mesmerised by their Bubbles as everyone else. Perceptions within the isolated ‘Bubble’ are programmed to sense reality while not being conscious of reality and this allows the Cult to impose its will via manipulated ignorance on human experience. From this has come the collective madness of war, division and conflict of every kind and this possession of Body-Mind is planned to be completed through the mass-connection of AI to the human brain. That would take us beyond mere perception programming to full-blown assimilation into artificial intelligence and the force behind it. I don’t mean assimilation of the True ‘I’, but of the five-sense Body-Mind Bubble isolated from True ‘I’. It’s like a virus taking control of an entire computer network by bypassing and disconnecting the operators (True ‘I’) and connecting the system to another source (the Cult and its masters in the unseen). Everything is conscious because everything is consciousness manifesting in infinite states and forms. Not everything, however, is equally conscious and hence my distinction in this book between what I am calling Body-Mind and consciousness. Observe humanity for five minutes to see multiple states of awareness. Sensory mind is a form of awareness which is incredibly limited in its perception of reality compared with consciousness beyond the Body-Mind Bubble.

Figure 20: The whole foundation of human control – isolation in the Bubble of perception. See Neil Hague colour section.

What is this ‘God’?

Figure 21: Our ‘individual’ awareness is Infinite Awareness experiencing itself. We are the ‘individual’ and the whole.

We are a point of attention within an Infinite state of awareness/consciousness that some refer to as ‘God’. I don’t use that term with all its religious connotations and diversions. For those who do, we are not apart from ‘God’; we are a part of ‘God’. We are a unique point of attention through which Infinite Awareness, or ‘God’, can infinitely experience itself (Fig 21 ). Infinite Awareness means Infinite Possibility and Infinite Potential for Infinite Experience. We are all expressions of the same consciousness and separation is a five-sense illusion that the Cult works so hard to maintain. American cosmologist Carl Sagan said:

We are a way for the universe I prefer The Infinite to know itself. Some part of our being knows this is where we came from. We long to return. And we can, because the cosmos is also within us. We’re made of star stuff.

Figure 22:Humanity is entrapped in perceptual Bubbles and programmed by Cult-controlled mainstream information sources operating in the Bubble. Isolate and program. See Neil Hague colour section.

What is ‘human’ except a state of awareness experiencing itself in multiple ways? The level of awareness of the ‘part’ is decided by the strength of connection that it has to the whole. The more we lose a perception of self-identity with the whole (I am Infinite Awareness having a human experience) and perceive ourselves to be isolated random ‘labels’ (I am Ethel on the checkout or Charlie at the drive-through) the more the connection and influence of Infinite Awareness is lost and we become trapped in illusion and forget who we really are. This can be accurately symbolised as living in a Bubble of isolated Body-Mind in which the perception of everything is formed only from the information available within the Bubble (Fig 22 ). Beyond its walls lies infinite possibility, potential and awareness that would give you a completely different understanding of who you are and where you are. The Cult works incessantly to keep humanity entrapped in the Bubble because only then can its will prevail. Isolate Body-Mind from expanded states of consciousness and program Body-Mind with the perceptions and self-identity that allow the imposition of mass servitude. Crucial to this is to use the inner-core of the secret society network to communicate the nature of reality through the generations of the Cult while keeping that knowledge from the target population.

Descriptions of Infinite Reality that I have outlined here can be found throughout history long before the Cult instigated mainstream ‘science’ to tell us that we are all random cosmic accidents, that consciousness only comes from the brain, and death is the end. The perceptual outcome of promoting this nonsense has been to embed the belief that we are not an eternal expression of an infinite whole and only a meaningless assembly of randomly-evolved cells. We are told by ‘experts’ that the brain is the origin of consciousness and life depends on the brain being active. When it’s not then consciousness ceases to be. Selling this Bubble illusion is an essential precursor to mass control. Cult-created ‘education’ and academia download this baloney to each generation of young people who largely pass it on to the next generation. Academia and this-world-is-all-there-is ‘scientists’ have themselves downloaded the same script (otherwise they would never get the job) and their funding and authorities demand that this is what they teach to others in a perpetual-perceptual motion machine in which ignorance speaks lies unto ignorance and calls it ‘education’. For those who won’t buy this perceptual program there is the associated entrapment of religion in which some have eternal life if they do what ‘God’ (the Cult) demands while others are condemned to the Fires of Hell for having a mind – or consciousness – of their own. Religion in a sentence: ‘Do what ‘God’ (we) say or you’ll be in deep shit.’ Ancient cultures across the world knew that consciousness is eternal and their societies were founded on that understanding in the thousands of years before Cult ‘science’ and religion dropped in to tell and sell another story which was imposed by Cult-orchestrated colonisation from Britain and Europe. The Cult headquartered itself in Britain (hence the British Empire) after its journey of the centuries out of Sumer and Babylon (today’s Iraq), Egypt, Asia, and elsewhere. Italy and Germany are other major Cult centres (so is China) and it expanded into North America with colonisation while establishing itself in the pivotal land of Palestine through Sabbatian-Frankism with the creation of Israel (see The Trigger ).

Unravelling the illusion

Figure 23: The foundation of human reality is information encoded in wavefields and the illusory ‘physical’ world is a decoded projection of that information.

Figure 24: A computer decodes information from Wi-Fi radiation fields in the unseen into images on the screen that we can see.

Figure 25: The human brain and five-sense decoding systems do the same by transforming unseen wave information into holographic, illusory ‘physical’, information that only exists in our ‘heads’. (Image Gareth Icke.)

Figure 26: Different parts of the brain specialise in decoding different senses and fits them together to form perceived reality. (Image Neil Hague.)

Before I explore reality more deeply I should summarise the illusory ‘normal’ that we are told to believe in. This requires us to accept that what we appear to be experiencing is really what we are experiencing. Official reality is what the five senses are manipulated to believe in. Can I see it? Check. Hear it? Check. Touch it? Check. Smell it? Check. Taste it? Check. Okay, it exists then. But does it in the form that we think it does? Are we and the world really ‘physical’ and ‘solid’? No. The sensory system of the five senses is a decoder of information in the same way that a computer decodes Wi-Fi into a very different form on the screen. The five senses decode information in a particular way (again like a computer) which reflects what they have been encoded to do. A computer decodes information from electronic circuits and Wi-Fi electromagnetic radiation fields into pictures, colours, graphics and text on the screen as radio and television broadcasts transmit sound and images in waves which the television decodes (Fig 23 ). We perceive the Internet to be what we see on the screen when in fact the only place the Internet exists in that form is actually on the screen. Everywhere else that same information is expressed as electronic circuits, codes and Wi-Fi fields. Our human reality also consists of electromagnetic Wi-Fi-like wavefields of information and we are interacting with those fields as a computer interacts with Wi-Fi. A computer is encoded to decode Wi-Fi wave information to produce what we see on the screen while the five senses, in league with the brain, are encoded to decode information from radiation wavefields to produce the reality (the sense of reality) that we perceive as the ‘physical world’ (Figs 24 and 25 on previous page). The foundation of our reality and the human self is not ‘physical’. It is wavefield information (keep thinking Wi-Fi) which the five senses decode into the ‘world’ that we think we are experiencing as physicality. Observe each of the senses and you will see that this is true. They decode wavefield information into electrical information which is communicated to the brain to be decoded into what we experience as the physical world. There are specific areas of the brain that process input from each sense and these sources are then combined to construct what we believe to be human reality (Fig 26 ). Our sense of everything in terms of physicality and solidity is an illusion of this decoding process. What appears to be physical is really holographic – illusory physical. Holograms give the appearance of solidity while being anything but solid. This illusion can be seen in today’s holographics which can look as solid as you and me when in fact they are energetic projections that have no solidity. I’ll cover this in more detail in the next chapter. Only at the end of this wavefield-electrical-digital-holographic decoding process does the ‘external’ world exist as we perceive it (Fig 27 ). Nor is holographic ‘physical’ reality actually external to us despite what our senses may tell us. The ‘world’ that we experience apparently ‘outside’ of us only exists in that form in our heads – the brain . In the same way information on the screen of a computer only exists in that form inside the computer. I have heard scientists claim that the senses de-construct an external reality and then re-construct it in the brain. This is absolutely not the case and anyone taking even a cursory look at well-established evidence will see that. Our experienced reality, as acknowledged by more aware scientists, is like a computer screen which hides all the codes, circuits and pixels which make the sound and images possible. In our case those codes, circuits and pixels are information (consciousness) waves that when decoded form our illusory ‘physical’ reality.

Figure 27: The human decoding system transforms wave information into electrical information which becomes digital and holographic information – the illusory ‘physical’ world. (Image Neil Hague.)

Figure 28: The foundation of the human body and everything in our reality is information encoded in wavefields. See Neil Hague colour section.

The foundation of our reality – including ourselves – is wave information fields which are expressions of consciousness and so everything is conscious in some form. Information encoded in the wavefield of a tree is what makes it a tree and not a flower or a thorn bush. What is a ‘tree’ in a virtual reality game? It is information encoded to be decoded by the computer into the form of a tree. Every expression of form, every thought and emotion, transmits different wave frequencies that reflect the information the waves represent and contain. Form is inform ation – waveform inform ation. What is encoded into the human body wavefield makes us appear ‘physically’ human (Fig 28 ). Our reality is the sum total of all these wave information fields within the frequency band of the human senses and I will refer to this totality as ‘The Field’ – the energetic ‘sea’ that connects everything while our senses tell us that each ‘form’ stands apart from all other ‘form’ with ‘space’ in between. That ‘space’ is filled with the information (consciousness) of The Field which connects everything (Fig 29 overleaf). Wi-Fi technologically mimics ‘The Field’ and the reason for that will become clear later on (Fig 30 overleaf). Body-Mind fields are interacting with ‘The Field’ in the same way that we take information from the Internet and also post information. The Field affects us and we affect it. We are The Field and The Field is us – we are indivisible. The term ‘We Are One’ is not some trite esoteric phrase. It describes how everything in our reality and all realities is ultimately one field of energy/consciousness. Apparent division is an illusion of the way we experience reality. The key is to realise that everything is a wave information field which we decode into the ‘world’ that we think we live ‘in’ when ‘it’ really lives in us – Body-Mind. Understanding the foundation wave nature of ‘physical’ reality is to truly grasp what is happening in the world as will become clear.

Figure 29: Everything is connected with The Field and wave-interacts with everything else through The Field. See Neil Hague colour section.

Figure 30: A portrayal of the now ubiquitous Wi-Fi fields – a technological overlap of The Field which operates basically the same.

Ears to hear? Tongues to taste?

Figure 31: A falling tree (and everything else) literally does only make a noise when we hear it.

Figure 32: Everything is wavefield information in its base state – including food. ‘Physical’ food is decoded wavefield energy (information). See Neil Hague colour section.

The hearing sense is the most obvious example of decoding waves into electrical signals. Our ears receive wavefield information as soundwaves and transmit them to the brain as an electrical communication. Only when the brain decodes that information do we ‘hear’ sound. People talk about ‘hearing’ each other speak, but words don’t pass between us – sound waves do. Words only manifest at the end of the sequence, not the beginning. When we speak we are generating wavefields of information from the vocal chords and these soundwaves are decoded by the ears and transmitted electrically to the brain to be decoded into the words that we think we are hearing with our ears. We hear them in the brain and it’s the same with all the senses. Sound is silent to our senses in the form of sound waves until their information enters the brain. Take the example of a tree falling. A falling tree is an electromagnetic wave information field that impacts on the electromagnetic wavefield ‘sea’ or The Field. A wave disturbance is generated in the ‘sea’ from this wave interaction and if no one is there to decode that disturbance a falling tree makes no noise. If an observer is present they will pick up the wave disturbance as electromagnetic (sound) waves and transmit these electrically to the brain to be decoded into the sound of a tree falling. Hence the question ‘does a falling tree make a noise?’ can be answered by ‘only if you hear it’ (Fig 31 ). All five senses work this way. Food and drink as we perceive them are really energetic fields of information decoded by the senses into the form that we see and taste. The tongue sends electrical signals to the brain to become ‘yummy’ or ‘what’s this shit?’ It is the brain that tastes within human reality and the same with sight, touch, smell and hearing (Fig 32 ). There are pain relief techniques used today which involve blocking the point of pain from communicating electrically with the brain. Unless the brain decodes that signal into ‘ouch’ there can be no pain. Food companies, well, they call it food, add taste enhancers to their products to trick the brain into decoding more taste than the ‘food’ contains. Car seats are now being designed to further trick the brain for health reasons into believing someone sitting behind the wheel is walking. ‘Physical’ reality is an illusion and the Cult knows this. It works constantly to stop you knowing to make you a sitting duck for its perceptual manipulation. The famous scene in the first Matrix movie describes the world as it really is when the character Neo has his mind inserted into a computer program to be shown the illusory nature of physicality:

Neo: This isn’t real?

Morpheus: What is real? How do you define ‘real’? If you’re talking about what you can feel, what you can smell, taste and see, then ‘real’ is simply electrical signals interpreted by your brain.

That’s all it is and everything we believe to be real only exists in the brain or Body-Mind in the form that we experience. British philosopher Alan Watts, who became well-known in America for his Western interpretation of Eastern philosophy, said:

… Without the brain the world is devoid of light, heat, weight, solidity, motion, space, time or any other imaginable feature. All these phenomena are interactions, or transactions, of vibrations with a certain arrangement of neurons.

Outside the brain none of these foundations of ‘physical reality’ exist in that form. Mainstream scientist Robert Lanza describes in his book, Biocentrism , how we decode electromagnetic waves and energy into visual and ‘physical’ experience. He used the example of a flame which emits photons, or tiny packets of electromagnetic energy, each pulsing electrically and magnetically:

… these … invisible electromagnetic waves strike a human retina, and if (and only if) the waves happen to measure between 400 and 700 nano meters in length from crest to crest, then their energy is just right to deliver a stimulus to the 8 million cone-shaped cells in the retina.

Each in turn send an electrical pulse to a neighbour neuron, and on up the line this goes, at 250 mph, until it reaches the … occipital lobe of the brain, in the back of the head. There, a cascading complex of neurons fire from the incoming stimuli, and we subjectively perceive this experience as a yellow brightness occurring in a place we have been conditioned to call the ‘external world’.

Illusion Confusion

Even movement is a decoded illusion. There is no movement ? You experience moving around in your dreams while you don’t move at all. It all happens in your mind. You are lying in bed fast asleep. How can human experience involve ‘physical’ movement except as a holographic dream given that holographic ‘physical’ reality only exists in the brain? When people don headsets to play computer games they experience speeding along in a car or falling over a cliff while their bodies are sitting in a chair going nowhere. A British newspaper writer described how the most striking aspect of playing such a game was the physical sensation of moving without really moving: ‘My brain sends signals to my body that create the illusion that it’s shooting around like a pinball when in fact I am stationary.’ This is how the illusion of human movement works. Colours don’t exist until they are decoded by the brain. Each colour and shade is a unique frequency that requires decoding to ‘see’. Objects (wavefields) absorb some wave frequencies of colour and reflect others. What they reflect we decode and ‘see’ as their ‘colour’ and what they absorb we don’t. All that we visually perceive is reflected light which is why we can’t see in pitch black when objects (wavefields) have no light to reflect. At the two colour extremes black absorbs all light and appears black while white reflects all light and appears white. Other colours absorb some and reflect some which gives them their unique light representation that we ‘see’ (decode) as colour. Rainbows are called a spectrum which comes from a Latin word meaning an apparition or phantom (hence ‘spectre’). That sums it up, really. In the same way that sound can only manifest when waves are decoded by the brain so visual reality can only manifest through the same process. This is the real foundation of the scientific concept of the ‘Observer Effect’ which says that ‘physical’ reality only exists in that form when it is being observed or ‘measured’. When it is not being observed/measured reality remains in its wavefield state and only becomes ‘physical’ when we look at it in some form even through a measuring device. One media headline said: ‘Your entire life is an ILLUSION: New test backs up theory that the world doesn’t exist until we look at it’. Andrew Truscott, an Associate Professor at the Australian National University who has studied this phenomenon, said that at the quantum (smaller than the atom) level reality does not exist if we are not looking at it. He added that his team’s experiments revealed how ‘… the atoms did not travel from A to B … and it was only when they were measured at the end of the journey that their wave-like or particle-like behaviour was brought into existence.’ Theoretical physicist Werner Karl Heisenberg (1901-1976), the celebrated German pioneer of quantum mechanics, said that ‘a path comes into existence only when you observe it’. An article in Epoch Times described the findings of another experiment in an article headlined ‘Your Mind Can Control Matter’:

Atomic particles were shown to also be waves. Whether they manifested as waves or as particles depended on whether someone was looking. Observation influenced the physical reality of the particles – in more technical language, observation collapsed the wave function.

Figure 33: The white crest of a wave and the ocean are the same body of water. Humans and Infinity are the same body of consciousness. They just take a different visual form.

Figure 34: It all seems so ‘real’, but it is holographic illusion decoded from wave information. See Neil Hague colour section.

Scientists have long pondered on the strange phenomenon that particles are also waves at the same time . That’s impossible, surely? They have to be one or the other? They don’t when you appreciate that particles and waves are manifestations of the same information . They only appear to be different because of the form that information takes (Fig 33 ). Waves are the foundation information construct and particles are their decoded holographic representation. ‘Collapsing the wave function’ is the act of decoding holographic reality which exists in another form at the beyond-human-sight quantum level. Quantum reality is waves of possibility and potentiality and the mind decodes that into holographic actuality. Scientists say that ‘physical’ reality only exists when we observe it, but the term missing here is ‘decode it’ . Physical reality only exists when it is decoded . The act of observation triggers the decoding process. Human reality requires an observer to exist because the observer is making it exist in that form in the decoding system of the brain (Fig 34 ). Waves (‘non-physical’) and particles (‘physical’) are different forms of the same field of information. Scientist Albert Einstein said: ‘The wavefield is the sole agency of the particle matter.’

He’s behind you!

Figure 35: ‘He’s behind you’ and when observation decodes reality true reality is always ‘behind you’.

Figure 36: Look and see what’s not really there except in your ‘head’. (Image Neil Hague.)

For reasons I have explained Einstein’s contention has to be the case. The ‘observer’ principle is like the classic scene in a British pantomime show when a character faces the audience and they shout that someone ‘is behind you’. As the character turns around to check this out the person behind moves around as they do. No matter how many times the character turns what he is looking for is always behind him and so unseeable (Fig 35 ). Move your focus in any direction and wavefield becomes hologram. We don’t see what’s ‘behind you’ (wavefield reality) because the act of observation triggers holographic decoding (Fig 36 ). Writer Michael Talbot described in his book, The Holographic Universe , something he witnessed at a family party in which a stage hypnotist was invited to entertain the guests with some mind tricks. At one point a man called Tom was put into a hypnotic trance and told that when he was brought back to a waking state he would not be able to see his daughter. The hypnotist asked the daughter to stand right in front of her father and the now apparently awakened Tom was asked if he could see her. ‘No’, he said, she wasn’t in the room. He was, in fact, looking right into her belly as he sat and she stood. The hypnotist then put his hand in the small of her back and asked Tom if he could see what he was holding. ‘Yes’, Tom replied, bemused at such an easy question – ‘You are holding a watch’. He was asked to read an inscription on the watch which he did while his daughter was standing between him and the watch. A mainstream scientist would tell you that is impossible when the explanation is so simple. The base form of the daughter’s body was a wavefield of information operating at frequencies outside the human visual frequency range. Unless she was decoded into holographic form within the frequency band of Tom’s eyes/brain she would not appear in her father’s ‘physical’ reality. What’s more if she wasn’t in his mind holographically she could not block his view to the watch (Fig 37 ). The hypnotic suggestion that Tom wouldn’t see his daughter firewalled his brain’s decoding system from reading his daughter’s field and without that happening she would remain invisible to him. This is also a basic explanation for ‘ghosts’ which are wavefields of consciousness not connected to a human body field and thus cannot be decoded into ‘physical reality’. Most appear as ethereal and not ‘solid’ because of this although some can project a self-image so powerfully that they may appear to be ‘solid’, albeit briefly. Neo in The Matrix asks how he can appear to have a body while in a computer program connected to his brain and he is told that his mind is creating a ‘residual self-image’ – a ‘mental projection of your digital self’. In the context of a ‘ghost’ it’s a mental self-image of the former digital self which will still be imprinted in the ‘ghost’s’ wavefield. Even the illusory ‘world’ that the brain constructs is manifested from a fraction of the information we receive second by second. The mainstream Wonderpedia science magazine said:

Figure 37: If we don’t decode something from the waveform it cannot appear in our holographic ‘physical’ reality. (Image Neil Hague.)

Every second, 11 million sensations crackle along these brain pathways … The brain is confronted with an alarming array of images, sounds and smells which it rigorously filters down until it is left with a manageable list of around 40. Thus 40 sensations per second make up what we perceive as reality.

Figure 38:The process of decoding virtual reality games is the same in principle as how we decode the ‘physical’ world.

Figure 39: Like the ‘physical’ world it can seem so ‘real’.

Forty sensations or bits of information construct our experienced reality from 11 million received and any gaps are filled in by what the brain believes should be there. It’s hysterical to think what reality is compared with the way we experience it. We can get some insight into the process of reality-manifestation with the ever more sophisticated virtual-reality games and systems which mimic technologically the way we create reality biologically (another form of technology if the truth be told). Players wear headsets, earphones and gloves which allow electrical information and codes of the game to access and override the decoding of ‘normal’ reality and trick the same senses into decoding a fake reality (Fig 38 ). The mind-trick can be so effective that people react as if what is being played artificially to their eyes, ears and touch senses is real (Fig 39 ). I have just described human reality and how its illusions are created.

The brain is an information processor

Figure 40: The brain can decode frequency information from other realities as it can decode frequency ‘words’ from the human vocal chords. We only have to open our minds and breach the Bubble. (Image Neil Hague.)

This sub-heading may appear to be stating the obvious. Of course the brain processes information. Yes, on that we are in agreement. It’s the wider context that produces the fork in the road that takes me and many in mainstream science in different directions. This involves the contention that consciousness (information) is not only processed by the brain but also originates in the brain. I seriously don’t agree. Oh, but different parts of the brain ‘light-up’ or switch-on when people are in various perceptual states. Okay, but does that happen because the brain is generating those states? Or because it is decoding those states through specialised areas of the brain related to those states while the information being processed originates elsewhere? I say the latter. Where does the information come from which the brain decodes into what we perceive as our thoughts, emotions and perceptions? The question has multiple answers in that the nature and origin of that information can come from multiple potential sources. Those locked away in the Bubble will process information through the brain from within their Bubble while those who have breached the Cult’s perceptual firewalls and accessed expanded awareness will process information from way beyond the Bubble. As a result how they see themselves and reality will be dramatically different. Put aside what you have been told about the brain for a second and imagine it to be only a processor of consciousness and not the origin – ‘you hum it, son, and I’ll play it’, as the saying goes. Information processed by the brain comes from wavefields of consciousness outside the brain and this can be confined to the five-sense ‘Bubble’ or be any scale of expanded awareness with which your mind allows itself to connect. If you do access those expanded levels you are called crazy and insane by those in the Bubble. Information processed by the brain also comes from countless other sources including television, social media, personal experience and the ridiculously-named ‘education’ system. The brain will process anything that comes its way so long as this myriad of potential information is delivered within the frequency band of brain activity. It will decode the sound (frequency) of the human voice and also information delivered from realities way beyond the realm of the human voice if minds open to that level of awareness (Fig 40 ). When people say they ‘hear voices in their head’ they are describing the same phenomena as the brain receiving information delivered by the vocal chords as electromagnetic waves which it decodes into words. The information can originate with another human or from dimensions of reality ‘far away’ (as with psychics or mediums). It can also be delivered in the form of waves generated technologically to infiltrate the brain’s perceptions to misdirect and manipulate a target. The Cult operates just such a system worldwide today as I will be describing. The brain is a receiver, transmitter and processor of information, not the origin, and it can be a challenge to discern what is ‘you’ and what is another source of the wave information you decode as thought and emotion. There are ways of doing that though which I’ll get into later.

Figure 41: The brain becomes what it receives and processes.

The brain may be a processor of information, but it’s not a neutral one any more than a computer is neutral when it has been encoded to process information in a particular way. Program a computer to decode information ‘A’ and not information ‘B’ and that’s what it will do. We call this a ‘firewall’ and they are employed in China to prevent the population accessing large swathes of the Internet that the Chinese dictators don’t want people to see. The same can be done with the brain and a central factor in this is what is called brain ‘placidity’. It was believed until relatively recently that once the brain was formed this was how it remained for life. Scientists now know the very opposite is the case. ‘Placidity’ refers to how the brain changes the way information is processed in accordance with the information that it processes (Fig 41 ). All information is delivered in the form of frequency. Every thought, emotion and perceptual state is represented by its own unique frequency and as the brain processes information it arranges its neuron networks to fire (decode) in the sequence those frequencies represent. The brain processes particular frequencies of information, thought, emotion and perceptual states and here you have the reason why different perceptions and behaviour light-up different parts of the brain which are involved in processing those frequencies. Consciousness via perception activates those parts of the brain and the brain does not activate itself. The more the brain becomes dominated by flows of the same information, thought, emotion and perception (frequencies) the more its placidity will solidify the neural networks into a repeating sequence of processing (‘firing’ – decoding ). The only way this can be changed is through other information, thought, emotion and perception representing other frequencies which then, through placidity, change the sequence of processing. Perceptions are represented by frequency waves and create a self-fulfilling conscious and subconscious feedback loop in which we interact with The Field of possibility only within the frequency band that our perceptions represent. In this way our perceptions become our experienced reality. The potential for mass manipulation is limitless when the Cult knows this and works to stop humanity knowing. Perception frequencies impact on the brain through placidity to dictate the way it processes information. In the absence of any change the brain goes on processing information in the same way. Through this sequence solidified perceptions become self-fulfilling prophecies as the brain processes information to match the solidified perceptions and the subsequent neuron-firing sequence which comes from that. We see this in people unable and unwilling to explore another point of view or ways of looking at situations and subjects. They say ‘my mind is made up’ (solidified neuron pathways), ‘I am right’ and ‘the science is settled’ when it blatantly is not.

Figure 42: Perceptions create a self-fulfilling conscious and subconscious feedback loop in which we interact with The Field of possibility only within the frequency band that our perceptions represent. See Neil Hague colour section.

The term ‘a closed mind’ is most apt. People can break free anytime they make the choice to realise they are entrapped by their own unyielding perceptions that lead their brain to process information in ways that appear to confirm those perceptions (Fig 42 ). Round and round it goes again like a fairground ride apparently moving while going nowhere. This is not helped by the system employed by Internet giants such as YouTube which recommend information based on your past viewing. Hey look at this – something else to confirm what you already think. The very idea that we can form solidified perceptions while being aware of a fraction of 0.005 percent of what exists in the Universe is a fair definition of insanity. Religions go even further and insist that all people need to know can be found between the covers of a single book within a fraction of a fraction of 0.005 percent of what exists in the Universe. As a measurement of crazy, that is world class. It becomes clear why the Cult has always sought to control the information that people see and hear worldwide. Information dictates the way the brain processes information and becomes the person’s sense of reality which, in turn, becomes their experienced reality. There’s a lot more about this to come in relation to current events which look very different from this perspective.

Time? What time?

Figure 43: ‘Past’, ‘present’ and ‘future’ are only perceptions. All is happening in the same NOW. See Neil Hague colour section.

I understand why people find it so difficult to comprehend that there is no time when ‘time’ is the very foundation of human society. Everything is driven by the perception of ‘time’ – time is running out, look at the time, how time flies and where has the time gone? Yet the only moment within the entirety of Infinite Reality is the NOW. There is nothing else. What we perceive as past, present and future are all happening in the same NOW. I know that sounds incomprehensible to most people, but look at it from this perspective: Where is the ‘present’? In the NOW. Where are you when you think about the ‘past’? In the NOW. Where are you when you think about the ‘future’? In the NOW. Where does the perceived ‘future’ eventually happen? In the NOW. Where did the ‘past’ happen? In the NOW. There is only the NOW (Fig 43 ). As you read this book in what is perceived to be the ‘present’ all your thoughts and memories of the ‘past’ exist in your conscious and subconscious mind in that same ‘present’ as do all the wavefield perceptions that you will experience as the ‘future’. They are all vibrating in the same field of NOW. I see scientists speculating about how the future can affect the present or even the past. Some of their experiments make it seem that way when in fact ‘past’, ‘present’ and ‘future’ affect each other because they are all happenings and connections in the same NOW. ‘Time’ is a decoded construct of holographic reality. Wavefield happenings in the NOW are arranged in a holographic sequence by the brain so that one appears to follow another. The apparent speed that Body-Mind runs this sequence leads to the perception of ‘time’ and our personal mental and emotional state affects how fast or slow ‘time’ appears to pass. When we are doing things we don’t like ‘time’ seems to pass slowly while activities we enjoy make ‘time’ appear to pass quickly – ‘My goodness, where’s the time gone?’ and ‘Time flies when you are enjoying yourself’. Einstein called this ‘relativity’ as in ‘time’ being relative to the observer – the observer or decoder again. He was describing this in terms of the speed and location of the observer relative to what was being observed, but it goes much deeper into the speed at which the observer processes information. A sequence of events (‘time’) comes into existence only when we decode that sequence into experienced reality and the passage of ‘time’ is dictated by perception – one person says ‘time is flying by’ while someone even in the same room will say ‘time is dragging today’.

Figure 44: Different scenes on a DVD appear as past, present and future when they all exist on same disc in the same NOW. Our perceptions of them creates the illusion of ‘time’. (Image Neil Hague.)

Figure 45: ‘Time’ is real when you cross an invisible line and change the ‘day’? Time does not exist. We make it appear to exist. (Image Neil Hague.)

‘Time’ seems to pass quicker the more information the brain processes and as ever more information is processed today, especially with instant news, social media and the Internet, ‘time’ seems to be speeding up for many people. Studies with soldiers have shown how time is in the mind. Three groups were taken on a march of the same distance but at one point each was told they had been marching for different times even though they had not. One group was told the correct time or miles they had been marching; the second was told they had been marching for less time than they had; and the third was told they had been marching for more time than they had. The fatigue of the three groups matched the time they thought they had been marching when the time/distance involved was the same. A movie on DVD exists in the same NOW and I think everyone could agree with that. We experience the movie, existing in the same NOW, as a sequence of ‘time’ as one scene follows another. Where you are on the DVD will appear to be your ‘present’ while your ‘past’ is the scenes you have already watched and your ‘future’ is the scenes you have yet to watch (Fig 44 ). A DVD in totality in the NOW is still experienced as ‘time’ passing from past through present to future and that’s how we experience the passage of ‘time’ when there is only the NOW. Philosopher Alan Watts described ‘individual’ events as ‘different sections of one continuous happening’. This is a good analogy, as with the DVD, and there is also the symbolism of experiencing a journey along a river as a series of moments in ‘time’ when the whole river exists in the same moment from source to sea. Each perceived ‘moment’ following past ‘moments’ are really ‘different sections of ‘one continuous happening’. Time as we perceive it is quite obviously a human construct in that it involves clock-time which is so ridiculously manufactured that you can pass an invisible line called the International Dateline and instantly be in tomorrow or yesterday (Fig 45 ). People in Australia enter each New Year long before those in the United States and yet if an American in his today calls an Australian in his tomorrow they talk in the same NOW. The speed of ageing is connected to the perception of ‘time’ that doesn’t exist except as a decoded illusion. While the body’s wavefield stability remains the same the body hologram cannot change. Ageing is an interaction between mind and body. There is a sequence in the body blueprint that leads to a cycle from birth to death. After all we wouldn’t want to stay in this one band of frequency forever when there is infinity to explore. The speed of this ‘ageing’ sequence, however, is down to the mind and its perceptions. People think they must age in a certain cycle and period only because almost everyone else does. Once again we have a self-fulfilling prophecy in which ageing is driven by the perception of ageing gleaned from experiencing the ‘norm’ of ageing. This is a quote that captures the time-illusion theme:

Time doesn’t exist, clocks exist. Time is just an agreed upon construct. We have taken distance (one rotation of the Sun), divided it into segments, then given those segments labels. While it has its uses, we have been programmed to live our lives by this construct as if it were real. We have confused our shared construct with something that is tangible and thus have become its slave.

A slave to the Cult ‘gods’ and the manipulated construct of illusory ‘time’; but we don’t have to be. Once we understand how the mind and a perception of ‘time’ interact we can start to control time. Top sportsmen and women already do this without realising. Researchers at the University of London found that those taking part in sports involving fast movement of a ball (tennis, baseball, cricket etc.) are able to slow down time. Their focus during play processes information so fast that its holographic movie sequence runs slower than the general population. The crowd in a tennis match with their heads lurching left and right to follow the ball perceive one speed while the players are experiencing another. This allows them to accurately hit a ball which at ‘spectator’ speed would defeat them. You often hear it said about great footballers that they seem to have more ‘time’ than everyone else. They do through the way they process information. They assess a situation on the pitch (process information) so fast that they can respond quicker than others who process (and so react) slower. Remember the game is happening in the minds of players and therefore it must be mind that decides the outcome. When this is more deeply understood by the world of sport we will see performances of all kinds improve by amazing leaps. The limit of sporting performance – as with life itself – is decided only by the self-imposed perception limits of the mind. There is an altered state that top sports people know well called ‘the Zone’. I experienced it myself as a footballer and it is not confined to sport. I go into the Zone when I am writing and during speaking events. In sport the Zone slows down ‘time’, the sound of the crowd dissipates to silence, and any nerves or worry about the outcome disappear. You access a level of awareness beyond what is called the ‘conscious mind’ which can be full of self-doubt (‘You think too much’). What follows is a calmness and level of focus that is only interested in doing the job and not worrying about what the outcome will be. In these moments come the best performances which self-doubt and emotion can otherwise sabotage.

The speed of light? It’s pedestrian

Figure 46: The night sky seems so far away, but it only exists in that form in your brain. What happened to ‘space’? (Image Neil Hague.)

Figure 47: All existence shares the same ‘space’ on different bands of frequency just as analogue radio and television stations share the same ‘space’ without being aware of each other unless they are very close on the dial. (Image Neil Hague.)

The collective programmed perception limit of speed and ‘time’ is the speed of light which we are told is the fastest speed possible. What crap that will be seen to be. We live in an infinite reality of Infinite Possibility and there is no fastest or slowest anything. The speed of light at 186,000 miles per second (and the perceived physics associated with that) apply only to the frequency band of current human perception and even then they are malleable through the perceptions of consciousness. The speed of light is only the inability of Body-Mind to consciously decode reality faster than the speed of light and there is a reason for that which I will be exposing. The already-measured speed of communication by consciousness is infinitely quicker than the speed of light – as in instant . When cells from the same person were located 40 miles apart they responded instantaneously to changes in the other. This both revealed the myth about the speed of light and confirmed the truth about wave communication over what we perceive as enormous ‘distance’. Physicists led by Juan Yin at the University of Science and Technology of China in Shanghai estimated the speed that photons (tiny packets of light) interact at ten thousand times the official speed of light. ‘Time’ changes along with much else when you approach the speed of light and the limits of the Body-Mind decoding system within the human frequency band. Space and distance are further illusions of holographic decoded reality. Scan the night sky and everything you think you ‘see’ in the form that you think you ‘see’ exists only in your ‘head’ – the Body-Mind decoding systems (Fig 46 ). In fact, it’s not even your head but an area at the back of the brain where visual reality is decoded and your personal visual movie constructed. Computer games appear to have both time, as scenes change, and space in depth and perspective. Yet they are only codes written for the computer to decode. Space as we perceive it is defined by holographic form. Where there is no form we call this ‘space’ and people think of this ‘space’ as ‘empty’ when it is a consciousness field full of information – The Field. What we refer to as ‘space’ is only the absence of form or ‘things’ and it is absolutely not ‘empty’. Infinity exists in the same ‘space’ where you are sitting or standing now while only an infinitesimal fraction can be perceived by the human decoding system (Fig 47 ). We are told that light from stars travels billions of light years to get to us when there is no ‘space’ to ‘cross’ or ‘time’ to ‘travel’ except as an illusion of decoded perception. What you believe you perceive and what you perceive you experience. Change what you believe and you change what you experience.

Evidence galore

Figure 48: Enormous numbers of people have described leaving five-sense perceptual focus and entering a vastly different reality in a near-death experience.

We have evidence of other realities and levels of consciousness from literally millions of people living today who have had what are called ‘near-death experiences’, or NDEs. This is when the body dies and people apparently experience their awareness being released to another point of observation outside the body (Fig 48 overleaf). Reality that I have outlined so far explains why near-death experiencers describe what they do. The number of NDEs must be many hundreds of millions and more throughout history with near-death experiences described in ancient Greek and Roman texts and medieval works. Modern experiencers report how they see medical staff trying to revive ‘them’ (or rather their temporary vehicle) while being perceptually detached from the body. Many are able to accurately recall what staff were saying while ‘they’ were officially ‘dead’. Many describe looking down on their body and no longer identifying with that as part of them. NDEs have many common themes of passing through a tunnel (though far from always); meeting long-dead friends and relatives (often looking far younger than when they ‘died’); and experiencing stunningly beautiful places while enveloped in indescribable love. They report an extraordinary sense of calm and peace and how they felt free for the first time. Not everyone’s life changes for the better after they return to the body, but that is the case with most once they have come to terms with living in a world they know is not what it appears to be. One experiencer said: ‘I don’t fit in because I don’t “toe the line” and just agree with things.’ This happens when you see through the illusion. Others report feeling more tolerant, loving and compassionate and no longer obsessed with materialism and personal status. The most common trait of a near-death experience is that people no longer fear death. Humanity in general is haunted by the prospect of death when there is nothing to fear. The Cult doesn’t want us to know this when fear of death (fear of the unknown) has so many uses in pursuit of control (see the Covid-19 hoax). I have read a long list of near-death accounts over the years and the great majority are very positive. Rarely do you find people who prefer human life to what they experienced in ‘death’. They return because they are told their experience is not yet over or they don’t want to leave children and other loved ones behind. Most are transformed by their experience and what it showed them about reality beyond the myopia of the body which focuses our attention within the minuscule frequency band of visible light. ‘We’ don’t die – only the illusion does. My own findings were confirmed by a team of scientists from the University of Liège in Belgium and Canada’s Western University who found that in 158 written testimonies about near-death experiences positive responses far outnumbered negative ones. Canadian paramedic Adam Tapp, who was clinically dead for eleven minutes, said: ‘It was just like waking from a nap in a place I have always been and there was no fear or anything, just complete contentment and happiness.’

Figure 49: My mother’s picture with the life-force that had departed her body at the time of ‘death’ which was nothing more than a transformation of her point of attention.

Figure 50: Our experienced reality is like a torch light in a pitch-black ‘warehouse’ and all we perceive is within its beam.

Figure 51: When we leave the body it is like all the lights of the warehouse are switched on and we realise that reality is far greater than we thought. Oh, just a little bit.

I went to the funeral parlour when my mother ‘died’ and saw her body lying on a table. I touched her hand and it was cold and lifeless as you would expect; but alongside was a big picture of her which my brother Paul had arranged to have at the funeral and that picture was alive with energy and radiance (Fig 49 ). Cameras don’t only record an image we can see. They capture the energetic life-force – the True ‘I’ – that takes temporary residence ‘in’ the body. The life-force that I saw in my mother’s picture which was no longer in her body – that’s who we are. Switch off the electricity to a piece of technology and it ‘dies’ or ceases to work while the electricity itself, the life-force of the machine, continues to exist. A body devoid of its life-force decomposes because the energy sustaining it has gone. A near-death experiencer described our world as like walking through a pitch-black warehouse with a torch when all you can see and be aware of is limited to the narrow beam of light (Fig 50 ). She said leaving the body was like all the lights in the warehouse are turned on. You see the enormity of what you are and where you are when before you were aware only of that within the torch light (Fig 51 ). Another constant theme of experience outside the body is the feeling of being at ‘one’ with everything and connected to everything. A near-death experiencer said he was aware of his hospital environment in Los Angeles and could also hear conversations of family members in India. He said he felt everywhere in the same moment. This is what happens once our awareness is no longer focused through the visible light myopia of the body – the torch light – and we access the perceptual reality of waves that connect with other waves beyond the illusions of distance and time. There is still the ‘individual’ sense of self and at the same time the feeling of a seamless connection to all that exists. This can be simply explained. We are a unique point of attention within a seamless flow of Infinite Awareness and we are both the ‘individual’ attention and the whole at the same ‘time’. Human disconnection from awareness of the whole as manipulated by the Cult means that ‘incarnate’ consciousness experiences reality from a sense of isolation and apartness – the Bubble (Fig 52 ). A near-death experiencer described beyond-the-body reality:

Figure 52: Burst the Bubble and freedom awaits.

… everything from the beginning, my birth, my ancestors, my children, my wife, everything comes together simultaneously. I saw everything about me, and about everyone who was around me. I saw everything they were thinking now, what they thought then, what was happening before, what was happening now. There is no time, there is no sequence of events, no such thing as limitation, of distance, of period, of place. I could be anywhere I wanted to be simultaneously.

Figure 53: Religion is the greatest form of mind control ever invented never mind which name may be on the temple door. (Image Gareth Icke.)

Figure 54: Create religions and then play them off against each other – and within each other – to divide the target population into conflicting groups. (Image Gareth Icke.)

Exactly. That is life beyond the limited focus and decoded illusions of Body-Mind. Think how different our world would be if humanity realised that we are experiencing a temporary illusion or movie and that we are ALL expressions of the same Infinite whole in which, despite what our five senses may tell us, there is no time, sequence of events, limitation, distance, period or place and we can be anywhere we want to be simultaneously. How would you pitch race against race, religion against religion, sex against sex, politics against politics and income against income if everyone knew these are temporary and illusory labels and experiences and that we are all each other ? The Cult must perpetuate this illusion or its divide and conquer manipulation is over. Religion is one of the greatest forms of mind control ever invented (by the Cult) and up there as the greatest form of divide and rule (Figs 53 and 54 ). Do people really think that when they leave the body they are still Christians, Muslims, Jews, Hindus, black, white, man, woman, transgender, rich, poor and so on? Some may wish to believe so, but it’s delusion. Are those suffering ‘physical’ or psychological handicaps still handicapped when they withdraw from a body where the handicap manifests? We need to urgently see the fundamental difference between the experience and the self . That realisation alone will change the world.

You are what you believe

Some near-death experiencers report amazing health transformations with even late-stage cancer disappearing. They say pain goes with release from the body and that must be so. Pain is a phenomenon of the senses and not beyond-the-body consciousness in its infinite form. They describe how they can see, touch, hear, taste and smell without attachment to the five senses and in a far more advanced way. How can you see without the eyes of the body? It’s all illusion . Expanded awareness is aware across all ‘senses’ with no need for the perceptual confines of the body to allow it to see; but if incarnate awareness is so body-focused and programmed by the illusions of eye-only sight then it will experience that reality until it’s released from the body. People see visions in states of meditation and altered states of consciousness when their eyes are closed. Do we think that we see our vivid dreams through our eyes ? Blind people describe how they could see once they leave the body. Blindness is the inability to decode visual information through the eye/brain connection within the human reality of visible light. Once they withdraw from visible light they see with consciousness whose awareness is filtered out by body systems during a human experience. Other common themes of near-death experiences are ‘life-reviews’ when they feel the consequences for others of their actions – nice and not so nice. Many describe having an infusion of knowledge about life and reality when they are released from the body information filter and consciously connected to awareness, insight and knowing that the Cult works to perceptually firewall. An experiencer returned with a deep knowledge of quantum physics that she didn’t have before and had never studied. You can, however, access such information while in the body and I’ll be describing how to do this. Mainstream academics and scientists ignore this mountain of evidence from the experiences of multiple millions because it demolishes their version of reality. They work on the basis that if they can’t explain it then it can’t exist which launches self-deluding arrogance into the stratosphere. I call it the arrogance of ignorance. ‘What about the laws of physics?’ they will cry. What about them? They only apply in theory within the frequency walls of human reality. They don’t apply anywhere else and they don’t need to apply here once we grasp what reality really is and how it really works. Manifestations of this are dubbed ‘miracles’ (‘defying the laws of physics’) when there is no such thing as a miracle – only understanding that Infinite Possibility means anything is possible. All will become clear as the book proceeds.

Most people have blissful experiences when they leave the body, but some don’t. Others see religious figures, but most don’t. There are many reasons for these differences including the saying ‘death is no cure for ignorance’. Near-death does not have to be a cure for perceptual programming, either, although it certainly can be. If you believe that Jesus is your saviour then you may see Jesus in a near-death experience and let’s not forget that consciousness beyond the body is trying to communicate information and concepts to you. If you associate love with Jesus then that image may be used to symbolise love and give you comfort in a bewildering situation. It doesn’t mean there is literally a Jesus and of course no one knows what ‘he’ looked like even if he had been real. I don’t believe for a second that he was, but I can relate to the character that appears in many guises and under many names in different cultures to be a symbol for expanded states of consciousness. This would make sense of ‘No one comes to the Father except through me’ – only through expanded states of consciousness can you be aware of the Infinite Whole. The basic ‘Jesus’ story was told in versions all around the world long before the period when ‘Jesus’ was supposed to live and each could be symbolising states of expanded awareness. They represent a recurring narrative put into different historical and cultural settings using different names for the hero. There is not even a physical description of ‘Jesus’ in the Bible. The image that people have of ‘Jesus’ came from far later artistic imagination and interpretation and yet those who claim to meet ‘Jesus’ in near-death experiences see this classic version of ‘him’. It’s all in the mind, but then everything is. The New Age ‘Jesus’ is called ‘Sananda’ and claimed to be an ‘Ascended Master’. Guess what? He is portrayed in virtually the same way as the Christian ‘Jesus’. I don’t accept the literal existence of ‘Jesus’, but as a symbol of expanded awareness, well, I’m open to that. Your state of consciousness when you withdraw from the body will massively influence your experience until the truth dawns that what you believed about life and reality is to say the least not quite how it is. Those who have some understanding of reality will be aware of the process that follows ‘death’ while those with their awareness welded to Cult perception programs can be seriously bemused and bewildered as so many near-death experiences have confirmed.

Your state of awareness most certainly affects the experience of psychoactive drugs which activate areas and channels of the brain to access realities normally denied to human perception. These have been used for thousands of years as a major source of shamanic comprehension of reality. I took ayahuasca, a psychoactive rainforest potion, over two nights in Brazil in 2003 and had a fantastic experience over a total of seven hours. For five hours on the second night a clear, loud, powerful voice taking a female form gave me chapter and verse about the illusory nature of ‘physical’ reality. I refer to the communicator as ‘The Voice’. During an explanation about the illusion of ‘time’ and ‘space’ The Voice said: ‘Why do you fly from point A to point B when you are point A and point B and everything in “between”?’ When I returned home with total recall of what was said I began to research the subject at length and found that mainstream science (especially quantum physics) already had the evidence to prove that physical reality is illusory, but the controlling hierarchy still sought to push the case for this-world-is-all-there-is and you are only your brain. This is the Cult narrative for reasons I have explained. Some have had nightmare experiences with psychoactive drugs and in my view they only open brain channels that allow access to deeper levels of yourself which can still reflect your current mental and emotional state and what is happening in your subconscious. I have known people who have taken drugs like LSD hundreds of times and they were no more enlightened than someone who has had nothing stronger than a cup of tea. It is not only about opening your mind, but what level of awareness you open to. Gail Bradbrook, a co-founder of the extreme climate group Extinction Rebellion, is a psychoactive potion-taker who thinks she is enlightened as a result and wants others to partake. She told the BBC that the idea of creating Extinction Rebellion came to her when she prayed ‘in a deep way’ while taking ’psychedelic medicines’. Her subsequent ‘enlightenment’ led her to establish a Climate Cult operation which is a fundamental threat to human freedom as I will be exposing. She confuses demands for global centralisation of power to ‘save the world’ (exactly what the Cult has been seeking all along) with an ‘awakening’. Such ‘enlightenment’ is really a fast-track to even greater enslavement and I repeat: Psychoactive drugs only take you to where you already are subconsciously, if not consciously, and that will dictate the level of awareness beyond human reality that you connect with. These drugs, like death, are indeed no cure for ignorance, but they can be for some. Perception is the key and who is in control of that? We are – if we make that choice and stop allowing others to tell us what to think.

The scale of the reality illusion, which is mercilessly manipulated by the Cult, can be seen in the fact that mainstream science believes that (illusory) time and space are among the fundamental building blocks of the Universe. This systematically-imposed ignorance (‘lack of knowledge, understanding, or information‘) is the foundation of human control and it must end before, as Martin Luther King put it, freedom can ring.

CHAPTER TWO

Who are we?

All growth is essentially an expansion of awareness – Joseph Rain

There is a malevolent force behind humanity’s systematic perceptual entrapment and the indoctrination is incessant and life-long. What a testament to the power of consciousness over programming that anyone is awakening from the Cult-induced trance and they are in ever greater numbers.

Figure 55: I-am-a whatever my upbringing told me to be.

People are unconscious and perceptually entrapped in Body-Mind because they are manipulated to be that way and this needs to be understood to avoid awakening from the trance to include a sense of superiority. Almost everyone was asleep once. Five-sense unconsciousness can appear to be unbelievably stupid, but that is what happens when people are disconnected from an influence of the True and Infinite ‘I’ and imprisoned in a sensory world that hijacks perception for an entire human lifetime. The great news is that we can become conscious anytime we want. More and more people are awakening from their induced coma while others are being captured more deeply in the Cult’s perceptual fly-trap by a tsunami of programming deployed increasingly via technology. The latter, too, can escape the illusion – perceptual entrapment – whenever they make that choice. The motivation of this book is to speed and expand that process. As more become conscious of their True Self the world must change to reflect that. In the same way the crazy world of today, and a long time ‘past’, has reflected and continues to reflect collective human un consciousness. So much is explained about ‘past’ and ‘present’ events when this is understood. Ironically, and it’s another big penny-drop, the most un conscious are invariably those in positions of power directing the lives and society of everyone else. This is once again by design and not random chance. The Cult has to keep its targets asleep in unconsciousness if it is to secure ongoing collective control through perceptual programming and the most effective way to achieve that is to put unconscious Bubble people into positions of official power who are string-pulled from the shadows by the Cult. The plot demands disconnecting Body-Mind from expanded awareness and then to program isolated Body-Mind with the required perception of self and reality through control of information. We see this process everywhere. Muslims tend to come from Muslim families, Christians from Christian families, Hindus from Hindu families, and followers of Judaism from Jewish families. In every case that version of reality and life is all they have ever heard in their growing-up years (Fig 55 ). The greatest form of mind control is repetition as the Cult-created Nazis well understood. You repeat a statement or alleged ‘fact’ until it becomes an ‘everyone knows that’ when in truth ‘everybody’ only ‘knows’ what they have been told to think they know . They don’t ‘know it’; they have only downloaded that perception which is a very different thing. Add the carrot and stick, benefits and punishments, for believing or not believing in the orthodoxy and it’s no wonder the religion that people are born into becomes the one they follow for life with all the limitations and impositions of belief and behaviour that come with the package. The sequence I have described applies equally to those who follow no religion or may indeed be antagonistic to religion. The non-religious population is also programmed through family, ‘education’, academia and media by the repetition of information headed ‘normal’ and ‘rational’ when most of this betrays an extreme misrepresentation of reality. Young people are told they must believe this crap and they are tested on their level of absorption in ‘exams’ that have potentially life-long career implications within The System. If you regularly question what you are told to believe you are ‘a disruptive influence’ in the classroom. Has your doctor prescribed Ritalin?

Figure 56: The fake self-identity that most people believe they are.

Figure 57: I am what I’m told I am.

I am going to focus on this life-long programming process later because it is vital to understanding how collective human perception is hijacked and how we can stop falling for it. Our human lives are a choice – a perception. These choices decide your health, happiness and entire experience. By that I mean everything you ever experience and even that called ‘random chance’, good and bad ‘luck’ and circumstances that appear to be created by other people. To appreciate how this happens we must first put aside all mainstream perception, belief and preconceived idea about the nature of self, reality and the human body. What the control system has told us about all of these things is fakery and at the core of this unceasing propaganda delivered day after day to generation after generation is the Cult. It knows that if we can be kept in ignorance of who we really are its agenda for mass control becomes a relative breeze. This is the foundation of human enslavement – hypnotically peddling a fake self-identity or what I call the Bubble or ‘Phantom Self’ (Fig 56 ). How apt that the word ‘person’ comes from the Latin ‘persona’ which means ‘actor’s mask’. Our Phantom Self persona is indeed our actor’s mask or headset. We appear to experience a solid world through a solid body. We do not. We are told that we are victims of our genetics. We are not. We appear to live in a world where everything is apart from everything else with ‘empty’ space in between. We do not. All is illusion that we are manipulated from cradle to grave to believe is real (Fig 57 ). When people can see through the scam they can stop it controlling their lives.

The One

Figure 58: The body is only a temporary vehicle for the awareness that we eternally are.

Who are we? Put the temporary human form aside and we are formless awareness – a state of being aware (Fig 58 ). How aware depends on how aware we choose to be or allow ourselves to be and that ‘how aware’ decides our life experience. We are unique points of attention within an infinite stream of awareness or consciousness and that awareness in its ‘totality’ (infinity) is what some call ‘God’ or the ‘Godhead’, Native Americans call ‘The Great Spirit’, and I call the All That Is or ‘The One’ . Existence is not a single state of perception with The One constantly experiencing itself through its infinite expressions in different states of consciousness. There is a level of awareness that I describe as Infinite Awareness in Awareness of Itself which is aware that it is all awareness. This has been variously called ‘the Void’, ‘the Father’ and in my case The One . The ancient religious term ‘Father’ is an attempt to relate this concept to the world of human experience. The One is really the Father and Mother and everything in all existence. It is the realm of All Possibility, All Potential, and our perceptions dictate which possibility and potential that we manifest in ways I will be describing. All Possibility is the implication encoded in All That Is, Has Been and Ever Can Be . To the human mind enslaved in the illusion of past, present and future this would seem to be impossibility. How can anything be all that is , has been and ever can be ? Yet what is this depicting except All Possibility ? Reality is infinite because possibility is infinite within the awareness of The One . How can you have a state of all possibility unless everything is possible? Thus Infinite Awareness in Awareness of Itself is ‘past, ‘present’ and ‘future’ (as they appear to be); it is and it isn’t; it can and it can’t; it did and it didn’t; it is everywhere and nowhere; it is everything and nothing, it exists and it doesn’t. Some people say ‘God is everywhere’ while others say that’s crazy and cannot be; but it’s true in the sense of The One that weaves through the fabric of everything because The One is everything. Even impossible must exist within all possibility because the impossible is a possibility. Whether we choose (through our perception) to experience the possible or impossible is down to us. What one person will experience as impossibility another will find a way to overcome and make possible. If you don’t know how to do something that ‘thing’ is indeed impossible. When you do know it becomes possible. Both are potentials within All Possibility which includes every paradox. All Possibility must be awash with paradox which is defined as ‘a state in which one is logically compelled to contradict oneself’. When all is possible that must be. For every ‘truth’ there must be a contradictory ‘truth’ or perception of reality and possibility . Look at something from one angle (perception) and A is ‘true’. Look from another angle (perception) and B is ‘true’. They can both be true (possible) depending on your point of observation even though they appear to be contradictory. Is the body solid in the way we experience it? Yes. Is it really solid from a point of expanded awareness? No. Here we have a paradox – it is and it isn’t. Both are true from two different points of experience … perception, possibility . Maybe human belief in ‘I am right’ could benefit from some revaluation.

The no-thing is everything

Figure 59: The All That Is, Has Been, And Ever Can Be that interpenetrates all existence. It is all existence.

Figure 60: The One is the creator of all reality via its infinite points of attention – including us. See Neil Hague colour section.

The ‘Void’ is a term used to describe Infinite Awareness in Awareness of Itself because that is how it appears to be (Fig 59 ). Those who have entered altered states of consciousness throughout human history have perceived ‘God’, the ‘Father’ or ‘The One ’ in the form of a void or silence. I did so myself during my ayahuasca experience in 2003. I observed from the realm of vibration, frequency and form an indescribable brilliant blackness. I know it may sound crazy but the darkness shone like the brightest light. ‘This is the Infinite, David’, the ayahuasca Voice told me. ‘It is where you come from and where you shall return.’ The word ‘return’ is only used in relation to human perception. We are always the Infinite – we never ‘left’. We’ve just forgotten and been manipulated to forget. The shining blackness was still and silent and so different from the movement and vibration in the world of form. The Void has been described as ‘nothingness’, but within the stillness and silence is everything ness in the form of All Possibility waiting to manifest from the imagination of ‘God’ or ‘The One’ which includes our imagination as an expression of The One . Sit in silence for a moment and what do you hear? Nothing. Okay, but this ‘nothing’ is only the absence of sound waves for your brain to decode. Within the silence, the nothing, is everything. When you hear sound or see images they are possibilities manifested out of All Possibility – the silence and the stillness. Silence is the norm, the foundation state, while sound comes and goes from the silence of All That Is . Rumi, the 13th century Persian mystic, said: ‘Silence is the language of god, all else is poor translation.’ Scientific studies have highlighted the negative effect of excessive sound – as in too loud and too much even when not loud – and the benefits for heart and mind of silence. I sit working all day in silence or near silence thanks to the quiet nature of where I live and it’s wonderful. I read that the word ‘noise’ actually comes from a Latin word meaning nausea. It is certainly highly recommended to spend time regularly when possible where it is quiet and not noisier/nausea. The ‘Void’ is the source of all Creation (possibility) while the realms of frequency and vibration are the Creation (Fig 60 overleaf). The ayahuasca Voice said: ‘If it vibrates, it’s illusion.’ An immense indescribable love was emanating from the stillness and silence which confirmed what The Voice had said right at the start of the five hours of communication: ‘All you really need to know is Infinite Love is the only truth – everything else is illusion.’ This became the title of a book that I wrote soon afterwards. Put another way: Infinite Awareness in Awareness of Itself (the ‘Void’, The One , the source of love) is the only truth – everything else is the Creation or imagination of Infinite Awareness made manifest by information (consciousness/’thought’) in the form of frequency/vibration. How can there be an ‘only truth’ within All Possibility? The only truth is All Possibility. This is limited only by the imagination of The One , and that is limitless.

Five years after my experience in Brazil, Dr Eben Alexander, an academic neurosurgeon at Harvard, fell dangerously ill and went into a coma for a week from which he said doctors did not believe he would emerge alive or at least as a functional human being. He said he was a this-world-is-all-there-is believer as the product of academic perception programming. This was underpinned by his scientist father who also believed that consciousness only exists in the brain and when the brain dies so do ‘you’. Alexander did recover his faculties even though he said his brain had so shutdown that only the primary survival functions remained active during the coma. He later wrote a book, Proof of Heaven , published in 2012, about what he experienced in his near-death state which transformed his perception of self and reality. He recalled how he met a female figure ‘out there’ that he somehow recognised, but he didn’t know why or where from. When he recovered he said he was later shown a picture of his younger sister from his birth family (he had been adopted) who he had never seen before. It was the figure he had met in his near-death state. Alexander’s claims have been controversial, of course, and people will have to decide for themselves what they think of them. The part of his book that most struck me for obvious reasons was when he recalled experiencing ‘The Core’ which he described as a … Dazzling Darkness. This is what I had seen nine years earlier and he also described this ‘Core’ as a place from where ‘the purest love emanated and all is known’ … all is known = All Possibility. I experienced this as the all-knowing All That Is, Has Been and Ever Can Be – The One. Albert Einstein said: ‘Anyone who becomes seriously involved in the pursuit of science becomes convinced that there is a spirit manifest in the laws of the Universe, a spirit vastly superior to man.’ That spirit is The One which pervades all existence and not only one universe.

Figure 61: A droplet can appear to be individual, but connect it to the ocean and where does the droplet end and the ocean start? They are one and the same.

Figure 62: The foundation of human perceptual control is to disconnect the droplet from awareness of the ocean – our True Self.

What is called Creation emerges from The One through infinite expressions of The One (including ‘humans’) and Creation is once again limited only by the imagination of The One which is infinite. Creation is therefore infinite in its possibility and we are experiencing only a fragment of this in the micro-frequency band of light visible to humans. We are nevertheless co-creators of The One as an expression of The One . Consciousness fields emanating from The One themselves beget other consciousness fields like a single cell divides and divides until it is the trillions of cells in a human body. The point is that all those cells are manifestations of one cell as all that exists is the manifestation of One Consciousness. We are ‘individual’ points of attention and all points of attention. The part is the whole and the whole is the part. Where does the droplet end and the ocean begin once the droplet is reconnected with the ocean? They are the same and the Cult’s whole agenda is founded on keeping the droplets unaware of the ocean that we all are (Figs 61 and 62 ). We are all manifestations, or co-creators, of The One – yes, even you sleeping in the street believing yourself to be downcast, outcast and a failure. In my expanded awareness during the ayahuasca experience beyond the perceptual limitations of the body I felt connected to everything, but I was still a unique individual ‘me’. We are not one or the other. We are both . The more your mind opens and your consciousness expands the more your sense of self and the ‘I’ expands. Humanity has largely been manipulated to perceive only the individual. Even most major religions, while accepting there are other realities, still present ‘God’ and humanity as apart from each other instead of being the same . Saying ‘I am God’ is considered blasphemy. In the world of the Cult there has to be a servant and a master to match its own agenda for humanity. Infinite Awareness in its fully awakened state – ‘The One ’– pervades everything. It is that which weaves the web of life. The One interpenetrates all realities and is within you now. Perception creates experienced reality as I am going to make clear and a human perception of isolation and only individuality becomes our experience of both. They are illusions that without a conscious connection to The One can seem very real. Redefine who you are, open your heart and mind to expanded awareness, and your experience will – must – change.

What is ‘human’?

Figure 63: The body and the auric electromagnetic field is what I am calling Body-Mind which experiences reality through the five senses; but we are much more than that.

Figure 64: The energy vortexes known as ‘chakras’ which interpenetrate and communicate through our different energetic levels of being.

Now we can connect all this to today’s global society. Human experience operates on multiple levels of awareness. There is the level that can be electromagnetically and visually recorded as the human ‘auric field’. The combination of body and auric field is what I am referring to as Body-Mind. It is also known by many as the ‘Ego’ (Fig 63 ). We talk of people having open minds and closed minds and this is a perfect description. An open mind remains connected to expanded states of awareness while a closed one withdraws into the Bubble and perceives everything from the Body-Mind (five-sense) perspective. Bubble perception applies to much of the population (although this is changing) and crucially to those that dictate mass perception in the institutions of the Mainstream Everything – science, academia, media, medicine, commerce, politics and government. There is a level of our awareness that people call ‘Soul’ which operates outside the human frequency band and connects with Body-Mind through energetic vortexes known as ‘chakras’. This is an ancient Sanskrit word from the Indian subcontinent meaning ‘wheels of light’ and that’s an excellent description of the spinning energetic (consciousness) connections between levels of awareness within the same ‘self’ (Fig 64 ). When chakra connections are open the human ‘I’ can be influenced and guided by the Soul ‘I’ and through that to The One ‘I’. In other words how far we open our minds has no limit. When those chakra/consciousness connections close or diminish we become perceptually isolated in the five senses and fall prey to self-identity with illusory human labels. The label ‘I’, or Phantom Self Body-Mind, then appears to be the only ‘I’. Body-Mind is a projection of Soul and when the influence of Soul is weakened Body-Mind can take on a life and direction of its own. There are vortex points throughout the body and the seven main ones are:

The crown chakra on top of the head (many near-death experiencers describe re-entering their body through the top of the head); the ‘third eye’ chakra in the centre of the forehead through which we can make psychic connections to other realities; the throat chakra which relates to multi-level communication and connects with the vocal chords to affect their vibration; the heart chakra in the centre of the chest through which we express love (a lot more about this to come); the solar plexus chakra just below the sternum; the sacral chakra beneath the navel from where we experience emotion and the connection of this emotion-chakra to the bowel/intestine is why people ‘get the shits’ when they are nervous and fearful; lastly there is the base or ‘root’ chakra at the bottom of the spine which grounds us in apparently ‘physical’ reality and also relates to sexuality and reproduction.

Figure 65: Fluoride calcifies the pineal gland which connects us to frequencies of awareness beyond Body-Mind. Definitely not a coincidence.

Each chakra is connected to a gland in the endocrine system including the pea-sized pineal gland in the brain which is known as the ‘Third Eye’ for its association with psychic sight or ‘sixth sense’. The pineal gland is shaped like a pine cone and located in the middle of the brain. It has been revered in cultures across the world throughout history as a connection with ‘god’ and expanded reality. Endocrine glands regulate hormones, including sex hormones, metabolism, biological cycles including sleep, and the immune system. Through these connections the energetic balance or imbalance of the chakra vortices affects the ‘physical’ and psychological health of the whole body. In the case of the pineal gland/chakra connection it affects the ability to expand into other levels of awareness and malfunction locks people away in the five-sense Bubble – as the Cult well knows. Fluoride which the Cult has manipulated into drinking water and toothpaste on the false pretext that it protects teeth has been shown to calcify the pineal gland (Fig 65 ). The theme of locking people away in the five senses is everywhere . Add the fact that aluminium (in vaccines and many other sources), glyphosate (a herbicide that has long entered the food-chain and is sprayed in the public environment) and Wi-Fi all suppress the pineal gland and you see what the game is – entrapping human perception in the five-sense Bubble. Scientific research has revealed how aluminium and glyphosate combine to be especially destructive to pineal gland function through the compounds they produce. The blood-brain barrier used to protect the brain from these and other toxins, but that is now being breached through technological radiation with 5G increasing the effect many fold.

‘Serpent goddess’

Figure 66: The caduceus is symbolic of the kundalini energy rising through the chakra and central nervous system and bursting through the crown chakra on top of the head to connect us with other realities. The nature of those realities is dictated by our own state of being.

Figure 67: A kundalini activation can connect people with high frequencies of awareness or the low frequencies in which the Cult and its ‘gods’ operate.

The root chakra is the source of the transformative energy known as ‘kundalini’ (from a Sanskrit word meaning ‘coiled’) and this is symbolised as a coiled serpent or snake. Kundalini energy is revered as a goddess in some eastern traditions and symbolised by the caduceus symbol with the wings representing ‘enlightenment’ that comes from kundalini activation (Fig 66 ). The effect of this can be slow and measured or, as in my case in 1991, like a nuclear explosion. When kundalini energy is triggered it moves up through the chakras, spinal cord and central nervous system to burst through the crown chakra and activate all the other chakras on the way (Fig 67 ). Such activation is said to bring people into a state of ‘enlightenment’ and make them ‘illuminated’. The term ‘Illuminati’ which describes a key network within the global Cult relates to this principle of kundalini activation that can consciously connect people to other realities and instigate sometimes outstanding psychic abilities. The point to emphasise, however, is that such a connection is not good or bad. Kundalini awakening can connect you with expanded consciousness of high vibration or equally to consciousness of low and manipulative vibration. It will reflect where you are consciously and subconsciously as with psychoactive drugs. Illuminati Cult initiates are opened via kundalini activation in secret society and satanic rituals to the frequency realms from which the non-human force controls the Cult through perceptual possession. Whether kundalini awakening connects you with high or low realms of awareness depends on your own frequency and that is dictated by your own perceptions and state of being. Are you driven by love or hate, for example? These are very different frequencies. Gathering numbers of people are going through the experience of ‘kundalini rising’ with a fantastic human awakening underway although you wouldn’t know this by observing the Mainstream Everything. They will be the last ones to get what is happening.

The kundalini process or a slower form of awakening from the Bubble can present many challenges and be very confusing as your perceptions begin to transform. Suddenly the world doesn’t seem the same anymore and those around you may believe you have ‘gone crazy’. Many people who end up under psychiatric treatment are only having a kundalini experience and they may have strange new perceptions or ‘hear voices’ as the activation connects them with other sources of information and influence beyond the five senses. This settles down eventually in most people, but by then many are prescribed drugs by clueless psychiatrists who don’t know what is happening or even the very nature of the human being. Such drugging (suppression of awakening) can be encouraged by family members who also have no idea what is going on. Such are the consequences of ‘educated’ ignorance. I had a colossal kundalini awakening in 1991 after a life-changing ‘paranormal’ experience on a hill in Peru as I have recounted in other books. I have described how energy that felt like a drill entered the top of my head and passed down through my body while another flow came the other way. I didn’t know it at the time but that energy was flowing through the chakra network and central nervous system to activate – big time – the kundalini. My conscious mind became flooded with concepts, information and awareness from beyond the senses and this launched me into three months of utter confusion and bewilderment when I didn’t know who I was, where I was, or what on earth was happening. I call this my ‘turquoise period’ when I had the urge to wear the colour turquoise all the time. Everything is a unique frequency including colours and I was attracted to turquoise as my energetic field was attracted to the frequency of turquoise as a result of the transformation I was going through. People are subconsciously attracted to certain colours for the same reason and they radiate in particular colours (‘you always look great in that colour’) while looking and feeling drained in others. It’s not the colour as we perceive it that has that effect; it’s the frequency and how it impacts on our own frequency field.

Give us a wave

To realise what the body is we have to deprogram ourselves from what we’ve been told that it is. Everything in created reality outside the stillness and silence of the Void is information (thought, imagination) delivered through frequency and vibration in the form of waves. We talk about sound waves , thought waves and brain waves , and creation emerges from the thought or consciousness waves emanating from the awareness of ‘God’, or The One , via all its points of attention. The One experiences itself through the infinite realms of Creation. ‘In my Father’s house are many mansions’ as the Bible puts it. You, me, everything outside The Void are information/consciousness fields taking the form of waves, frequency and vibration with an always-there conscious connection to The One whenever we choose. People believe they are only their human labels when we are in fact an expression of Infinity and ultimately we are that Infinity. This is the last thing the Cult wants us to know when its control depends on us not knowing. Perception dictates the frequency and nature of the waves we generate. The more expanded your consciousness and sense of ‘I’ the higher/quicker and more expanded the frequency/vibration you will emanate and connect with until you perceptually become The One and return to the silent, still, all-knowingness of the Void from whence you came. Even then you are still ‘you’, just a very different state of consciousness and perception. The Biblical story of the Prodigal Son who leaves his ‘Father’, messes up, learns from the experience and returns home again to be welcomed by his Father can be a symbolic way to describe this. ‘The Father’ didn’t judge his son just as The One doesn’t judge. Whatever your choices and experience you are The One experiencing itself. The point is, though, that while we remain in perceptual states of isolation, a sense of only individuality, and in emotional prison cells of hate, anxiety, fear, worry, depression, guilt, resentment, revenge and so on we cannot expand into higher levels of consciousness. These are low-vibrational states which entrap us in low-vibrational experience. If you are in perceptual frequency band ‘A’ you can only experience that band when that’s all you can connect and interact with. Radio station ‘A’ can’t connect with radio station ‘B’ when they are broadcasting on different frequencies. The same applies after what is perceived as ‘death’. Our perceptual (frequency/vibrational) state decides what reality – which of the ‘mansions’ – we can gravitate to although release from the body and its illusions can obviously transform perception very quickly.

Figure 68: When Body-Mind disconnects from an influence of the greater self – ‘Soul’, ‘Higher Self’ – we are at the mercy of perceptions gleaned only through the five senses. See Neil Hague colour section.

The body/auric field (Body-Mind) and Soul (expanded awareness beyond Body-Mind) are both consciousness fields of frequency and waves. They are meant to connect and communicate as one ‘entity’, but if Body-Mind becomes seriously out of frequency-sync with Soul then communication and influence is diminished (Fig 68 ). Soul, or what some call the ‘Higher Self’, is banging the keyboard, tapping the mouse and getting no response from Body-Mind, or ‘Ego’. The Cult works ferociously to secure this disconnection and isolate Body-Mind from Soul. The game is then to program isolated Body-Mind with perceptions that ensure mass human control (Fig 69 ). Knowledge of true reality has been held at the inner core of the secret society and satanic networks and passed on through the generations via those networks to exclude mainstream humanity. Such knowledge was once widely understood in the ancient world, but was then sucked out of general circulation. This was achieved not least by the imposition of religion which made exploring reality a death sentence imposed by the Cult behind those religions. Cult empires (especially the British) targeted shamans and carriers of ancient knowledge as the world was colonised with a fake version of reality that hijacked perception and instilled the crooked beliefs of mainstream (Cult) ‘science’ and mainstream (Cult) religion to secure an official monopoly on the perception of reality. Religions in the East do speak of Maya (‘illusion’) and Brahman (Infinite Existence, Infinite Knowledge, and ultimate reality) and that’s great. Unfortunately these basic truths are mostly obscured by the ritualistic worship of stupendous numbers of perceived Hindu ‘gods’. Hoarding knowledge and imposing ignorance is the whole foundation of human control. Today the knowledge is returning through those tapping into expanded states of awareness and the relatively few open-minded scientists genuinely seeking the truth (mostly through the realms of quantum physics which explores reality beyond the perceived ‘physical’ world). They are seeing the unsupportable fallacy of the ‘physical’ illusion and understanding what the ancients knew and the Cult has worked so hard to suppress.

Figure 69: Humanity is bombarded second by second with information – most inaccurate – by Cult-serving sources to form mass human perception. (Image Neil Hague.)

The body is not solid and quantum physics alone shows that this cannot be. It is a field of energy waves encoded with an information blueprint which constantly responds, positively or otherwise, to other waves in the form of thought, emotion and those delivered as food, drink and the now endless and ever-gathering forms of radiation in our ‘smart’ society. Everything, including food, drink and all that we consume and interact with, are manifestations of wavefields of information and waves affect other waves in positive, negative and neutral ways. Ever wondered why human behaviour has been so transformed by the ‘smart’ revolution of technologically-generated radiation waves and why suicides among the young are soaring? Stick around because the ‘why’ will become obvious from this perspective. Open-minded scientists operating outside the song-sheet mainstream have reached the same basic conclusions about the importance of understanding the function of waves and their impact on human life. It may seem strange to some that they could reach their conclusions from scientific research while I came to the same perspective through other means. There is actually nothing strange about it. When you tap into expanded states of awareness beyond Body-Mind you tap into the same knowledge whether you are a scientist or someone who left school at 15 as I did to play professional football. The label doesn’t matter. It’s how much you open your mind to other levels of awareness and possibility that decides what you know and what you don’t. By these criteria it is better to have an open mind and not be a ‘scientist’ than to be a ‘scientist’ with a mind slammed shut.

Atomic mythology

Figure 70: Atoms that are not solid cannot create a solid world. Yep, makes sense.

Replacing the conditioned perception of solidity and materialism with wavefields and holograms immediately explains mysteries that have bewildered mainstream establishment science since its inception. When you realise that nothing is solid or physical it all begins to make sense. The foundation of the materialist view is the atom which we are told is what forms matter – ‘solid’ matter. How strange then that atoms have no solidity! They are packets of energy waves made up of what science perceives to be electrons ‘orbiting’ a nucleus. Atoms are not solid and cannot a solid world make (Fig 70 ). The particles and nucleus are a fraction of the atom in totality. The rest is ‘empty’ in terms of physicality. Yet scientists tell us the body is made of atoms . They claim at the same time that the body is physical and has solidity when that cannot be when atoms have no solidity. Atoms are a decoded manifestation of information carried in waves. This description puts the whole ‘physical’ atom theory into perspective:

If the nucleus were the size of a peanut, the atom would be about the size of a baseball stadium. If we lost all the dead space inside our atoms, we would each be able to fit into a particle of dust, and the entire human race would fit into the volume of a sugar cube.

Figure 71: Plato’s Allegory of the Cave symbolising the human plight.

Go deeper into the nucleus and electrons and you find that they are not ‘physical’ either while mainstream science battles on with ever-diminishing credibility to hold the line at ‘the world is solid and the body is solid’ when they demonstrably are not . Atoms were named from a word meaning ‘uncuttable’ by Ancient Greek philosopher Democritus who lived approximately between the years of 460 and 370BC. He formulated the theory which became the foundation of modern science that matter is made of ‘uncuttable’ atoms and that movement comes from atoms colliding and bouncing off each other. You might observe that this has led to scientific explanations for the Universe invariably involving things bashing into other things. The (illusory) Big Bang is said to have been the instigator and the Universe has been staggering around colliding ever since apparently like some Saturday night drunk. Call a cab – the Universe is pissed again. How do you explain how so and so happened, professor? ‘Collision.’ And this? ‘Something hit it.’ Even in Ancient Greece there were others who could see through this. Famous philosopher Socrates (around 470 to 399 BC) believed that another force separate from ‘physical reality’ provided what I would call the blueprint for the world of the seen and he was right. His pupil Plato (approximately 427-347 BC) described something similar with his Allegory of the Cave (Fig 71 ). He told the symbolic story of prisoners living in a cave and never seeing anything other than the single wall that their chains allowed them to see. Behind them was a fire which they couldn’t see and people and animals walked past the flames casting shadows on the wall. These shadows became the reality of the prisoners because it was all they knew and experienced. Some prisoners studied the shadows and were acknowledged as experts about perceived reality while all along they were only studying shadows believing them to be real. Mainstream scientists and academics today are doing exactly the same apart from the minority of honourable exceptions who go their own way. In my analogy they are ‘experts’ studying reality within the Bubble while believing that to be all there is. A prisoner in Plato’s story escapes and realises the shadows are illusions. He comes back to share the news with the others still enslaved, but they don’t believe him and call him crazy. This is an allegory, as Plato clearly intended, for the human plight which continues to this day.

Figure 72: Shut-up – I know how things are. The System told me.

The reality that we think we are experiencing is a ‘shadow’ of something else in the sense of illusory ‘physical’ reality being a ‘shadow’ (decoded projection) of wavefield reality. The Soul is a wavefield phenomenon and so is Body-Mind. The body is a wavefield information blueprint that can replicate itself through ‘procreation’. It, too, is a state of awareness because everything is and the body is designed for the mind – an incarnation of Soul – to experience this reality. The idea is that the mind, or ‘ego’, remains in sync and connection with Soul and is influenced by its expanded awareness. In this state of connection the mind/ego is in this world, but not completely of it. It has perceptual radar which is not subject to the illusions of ‘matter’. If, however, mind ceases to be influenced in its perceptions by Soul the whole focus of reality is captured by the five senses and this becomes the dominant reality gleaned from information received from five-sense reality in the form of the Cult-controlled media, science, medicine and what is taught in schools and universities (Fig 72 ). Now, with Soul out of the game, an entire sense of reality can be programmed into isolated Body-Mind to induce Bubble perceptions. This one sentence describes how a few have enslaved the many through almost the entirety of known human ‘history’ to present day when ‘smart’ technology is taking this to a whole new depth of control. There are two primary levels of mind, the conscious and subconscious. It has been estimated that some 95 percent of human behaviour comes from subconscious programming and not from conscious decision-making. The Cult and its non-human masters target the subconscious to keep their targets un conscious of what is happening in great swathes of their mind. Remember that Wonderpedia magazine quote describing how every second eleven million sensations crackle along brain pathways which the brain filters down to a manageable list of around 40 per second and from this we perceive visual reality. We are consciously aware of a fraction even of what we see, hear, touch, smell and taste while the subconscious absorbs it all . The Cult has a whole language of symbolism revealed at length in my other books which is designed to bypass the conscious mind and speak to the subconscious.

How we create ‘physical’ reality

Figure 73: Human reality – waveform becomes holographic via human decoding systems. (Image Neil Hague.)

Figure 74: We even decode our own body into holographic form. Where is your body? In your mind . (Image Neil Hague.)

Figure 75: These are digitally-generated ‘people’ that don’t exist as live human beings. The technology can also create fake landscapes and objects.

A wavefield information blueprint becomes the experience of a physical world when we decode the wave information into holograms. The five senses decode wavefield information into electrical information which they communicate to the brain and this is decoded into the digital/holographic information (illusory ‘physical’) which we perceive as the physical world (Fig 73 ). The different forms of information are the same information expressed in different ways. Wavefields are the foundation of all created reality and the body can be no different. This decoding sequence is the work of the mind which means that we decode our own body into apparently 3D physical reality by what scientists would call ‘observation’ or ‘looking at it’ (Fig 74 ). This is done through the interaction of the wavefield of the body and the wavefield of the mind in ways that I will come to shortly. Our bodies exist in our mind (like everything else) which is why your state of mind dictates the state of your body. Characters in the most sophisticated virtual reality games can appear to be so real and yet they are only information decoded by the computer and today fake digital people are being created that appear to be live human beings (Fig 75 ). I watched an experiment in which a group wore headsets that gave them the illusion that their bodies were that of a doll. This so tricked the brain that when something was done to the doll, including a needle in the eye, the group reacted as if it was happening to them . We don’t have to really have a ‘physical’ body to perceive the experience of having one. Virtual reality is technologically mimicking our experienced reality which is itself only a more advanced version of virtual reality. Indeed the two are becoming so close in their appearance that those at the cutting edge of virtual technology say it won’t be much longer before you will not be able to tell the difference. We accept that virtual reality technology is decoded information that increasingly mirrors ‘real’ reality, but people still find it hard to grasp that ‘real’ reality is made manifest in basically the same way. Virtual reality technology hijacks and overrides the very same five senses through which we decode ‘real’ reality. Observe how virtual reality works and you are looking at how ‘real’ reality works. Virtual reality worlds exist only in your brain and so does ‘real’ reality – including the brain itself which is a wavefield construct in its prime state. I have been saying this for years and American cognitive sciences professor, Donald Hoffman, shares that view: ‘The brain itself is an illusion … neurons do not exist except when we see them, just like different colours … only exist when we perceive them.’ Where is the ‘physical’ body and the ‘physical world? It’s in our minds . We hear about mind over matter when mind is matter and matter is mind (Fig 76 overleaf). This applies to mind at all levels of consciousness and to all expressions of ‘matter’. Max Planck (1858-1947), the ‘father of quantum physics’, said:

Figure 76: This famous scene from The Matrix perfectly describes the ‘physical’ illusion.

All matter originates and exists only by virtue of a force which brings the particle of an atom to vibration and holds this most minute solar system of the atom together. We must assume behind this force the existence of a conscious and intelligent mind. This mind is the matrix of all matter.

Planck also said:

I regard consciousness as fundamental. I regard matter as derivative from consciousness. We cannot get behind consciousness. Everything that we talk about, everything that we regard as existing, postulates consciousness.

Mind is the decoder and perceiver – the creator – of all matter.

Holographic illusion

Figure 77: All of these images are holograms that appear ‘solid’ when they’re not.

Figure 78: Holograms of people – some no longer alive – can be inserted into scenes with living people.

Figure 79: The woman in this picture is a hologram projected from another location.

Figure 80: The guitar players are holograms.

Figure 81: The bike is a digital hologram.

The reality we experience as physical is really holographic and malleable, not solid. Holograms emerge from a flat surface in a form that makes them look three-dimensional (Fig 77 ). The technology began with simple holograms you see in shops, but holographics has since been moving ever closer to human reality in the same way that virtual reality has. Holograms are now used to insert holographic fake people into films and stage shows alongside ‘real’ people with the join getting harder to see. The best of them look as ‘solid’ as you and me. Holographic depictions of long-passed artists like Elvis appear in duets with very much alive singers and I saw a whole comedy programme featuring a hologram of the late and great British comedian, Les Dawson (Fig 78 ). Holographic versions of people can be transmitted across the world (Figs 79 and 80 ). We also have digital holograms which is actually what ‘physical’ reality really is (Fig 81 ). Rich Terrile, director of the Centre for Evolutionary Computation and Automated Design at NASA’s Jet Propulsion Laboratory, said in 2017 that he believes the Universe is a digital hologram. This must be so because everything in what we perceive as the material world is a digital hologram. You would expect in this case to find pixilation in the fabric of our reality akin to pixels on a television screen that we decode into the images of TV programmes. It turns out that we do. A New Scientist magazine article about holographic reality in 2009 said that under magnification ‘the fabric of space-time becomes grainy and is ultimately made of tiny units rather like pixels’. A report by researchers at Britain’s University of Southampton in 2017 found ‘substantial evidence’ that human reality is like watching a 3D movie projected from a 2D screen. Yes, a wavefield screen. Kostas Skenderis, head of applied mathematics and theoretical physics at Southampton, said that while we perceive pictures to have height, width and depth they are in fact on a flat surface. The team detailed their findings in the peer-reviewed scientific journal, Physical Review Letters . They said the Universe could be a ‘vast and complex hologram’ and Professor Skenderis said that holographic reality was a huge leap in understanding the structure of the Universe. Skenderis likened reality to watching a 3D film in the cinema with the difference that we could touch objects and experience the ‘projection’ as real. I suggest that we don’t touch objects hologram to hologram (as in the experience of solid to solid) but electromagnetic field to electromagnetic field. The skin or touch-sense is a fundamental decoder of information into holographic reality and a wave antenna. Nor are we watching a holographic movie. We are creating it (decoding it). Researchers at Ibaraki University in Japan said they have found ‘compelling evidence’ that the Universe is a holographic projection and ever more scientists are being pushed in the same direction by both the evidence and the way the apparent contradictions of ‘matter’ become perfectly explainable once you bring holograms into the story. Leonard Susskind, professor of physics at Stanford University, has encompassed the holographic model to describe the Universe along with celebrated Argentine theoretical physicist Juan Martín Maldacena among many others. Susskind said: ‘It’s now gone from wild-eyed conjecture to be an everyday working tool of physics.’ How come I could have been so sure our reality was holographic in nature long before it touched the mainstream of science? If you tap into The Field beyond the five senses you just know how things are without having to work out every mathematical detail and confirmation. Those who were crap at school and feel a failure as a result should remember that. An open mind, and especially an open heart as we shall see, is far more enlightening than a university degree – first class or otherwise. You don’t need a scientific mind to understand reality. You need an open one. Great scientists know first and work out the details later while most of science does it the other way round.

Figure 82: How holograms are created with two parts of a laser colliding to form an interference pattern – a waveform version of the object being captured.

Figure 83: A waveform holographic interference pattern.

Figure 85: Holographic car looking very solid, but you could walk through it.

The information foundation of holograms that we have in human society is encoded in wavefields . They are created by dividing a laser beam into two parts. One part (‘working beam’) passes across the subject/object being photographed to record it as a wavefield and then strikes a holographic print. The other part (reference beam) strikes the same print directly (Fig 82 ). The two halves collide on the surface and create an ‘interference pattern’ which is the information of the featured subject encoded in a wavefield (Fig 83 ). The process is the same as two pebbles being dropped in a pond and the waves moving out until they collide and form a wave pattern in the water (Fig 84 ). This pattern is a wavefield representation of the weight of the stones, how high and at what speed they were dropped and how far apart. With holographics another laser is directed at the wavefield interference pattern and, apparently miraculously, but not really, a three-dimensional ‘solid’ image of the subject is projected as a hologram. The laser ‘reads’ (decodes) the information in the wavefield pattern and in the case of human reality that laser is the mind . Our entire reality is being decoded by the mind from the base form of waves into holographic ‘physical’ illusion. Holograms can appear to be so solid that people refuse to walk through them when they depict cars and such like at motor company launches. When they try to do so they realise that they can (Fig 85 ). Okay, then, why can’t we walk through walls and each other? Two main reasons: (1) what the mind believes is real it will experience as real and (2) the resistance you feel when you bump into a ‘solid’ object is not a physical resistance but an electromagnetic one. I am sitting in this chair now and not falling through the seat and then the floor and then the earth etc., because the electromagnetic waves of my bum are different to those of the chair. My bum and the chair aren’t making contact at the holographic (‘physical’) level. They are establishing resistance at the wavefield electromagnetic level. When wavefield frequencies are far enough apart they can pass through each other which is why people see ‘ghosts’ walk or float through walls. Ghostly figures (other expressions of consciousness) tend to appear as ethereal. They are not a manifestation of the visible light, five-sense, frequency band and they can pass through apparently solid objects just as radio frequencies pass through walls. Those who can expand their visual decoding potential beyond the usual limits of human perception tend to see ‘ghosts’ while others more confined to five-sense reality tend not to. One will say ‘I’ve seen a ghost’ and the other will say ‘You’re mad, I can’t see anything’. It’s all about frequency and what you can and cannot tune into. ‘Physical’ reality, then, is a holographic illusion and what a difference this makes to understanding human experience and what is termed the ‘paranormal’. All the ‘paranormal’ phenomena that could not be happening if the world was ‘solid’ suddenly becomes possible and explainable from the perspective of the illusory solidity of holograms and the power of the mind to impact on wave information fields and through that change the nature of those holograms. What appear to be impossible happenings and ‘miracles’ are only wavefields generated by consciousness influencing other wavefields and thus holographic ‘solid’ reality. We will see in the next chapter that all ‘paranormal’ activity can be simply explained from this understanding. While great swathes of mainstream science focuses only on ‘physical’ reality that doesn’t exist, they will never explain the apparent mysteries of life which demand an understanding of non-physical reality. In such circumstances mainstream scientists with that ‘physical’ mindset can only deliver the mantra of ‘it’s not possible’ because, from its knowledge base and perspective, it is impossible.

Electric reality

Body-Mind operates and communicates electrically and electromagnetically and the brain also communicates with the body and its cells and organs through electrical signals. We are electrical/electromagnetic beings at the human level and part of what I call the Cosmic Internet in which the Universe affects us and we affect it and each other. This is possible through an exchange of information as our thoughts, emotions and perceptions interact through wave connections with The Field. Biologist Bruce Lipton points out that each human cell contains 1.4 volts of electricity which doesn’t sound much until you multiple that by the trillions cells in the body. You can see Internet videos showing how the power of an antenna is increased when touched by a human hand and electricity transferred (this happens with ‘hands-on’ energetic healing). We are electrical and when this electricity ceases to be generated by the body we are said to ‘die’. Our cells are batteries that store electricity and if they become drained we become weak and ill while vice-versa is the case. The speed of ageing is connected to this with cells lacking their optimum electricity either dying or not being like-for-like replaced. In this way the original body blueprint begins to unravel and we experience this as ageing and diminishing function. Ponder on the effect therefore of living in the technologically-generated radiation fields that we do today which scramble the electrical/electromagnetic systems of the body including cell replacement. When this constant replacement gets seriously out of kilter it is known as cancer. Here you have the link between technological radiation fields and cancer and other diseases. Emotional stress imbalances and distorts electrical/wave harmony in the Body-Mind through the electrical/wavefields it generates and this is how stress becomes illness. A rush of fight-or-flight stress in response to danger or a short experience is fine. The body is designed to deal with those situations before returning to equilibrium. Ongoing stress known as ‘background anxiety’ or ‘survival stress’ is a very different matter and can be extremely destructive to health. Distorted wavefields generated by stress can jam immune system communication and stop people thinking straight through chaotic interaction with thought processing. The opposite is true with states of love and joy which transmit balanced waves and transfer that state to the body. Another aspect of stress is addiction to chemicals produced by those states. My mother used to say about a neighbour … ‘It’s being so miserable that keeps them going’. Addiction to emotional chemicals means that when people are not worried (miserable) they have to find something to worry about to get their chemical fix. Methods of healing outside the mainstream are increasingly founded on achieving electrical/electromagnetic balance and harmonising the rate and direction of cellular electrical spin. Observe the solar system and the galaxy and you’ll see that everything is spinning down to the smallest particle. When the spin reverses from what it should be electrical chaos in the body can follow and people head for a doctor who has no idea about the real cause and hands out a drug (also a wavefield) that can lead to even greater electrical mayhem, sorry ‘chemical side-effects’. Pharmaceutical drugs are imbalanced fields of information (hence ‘side-effects’) while natural, not synthetic, nutrition and vitamins can have harmonious fields that sync with the body instead of wreaking havoc. The trick is to know which fields (nutrition/supplement) will help to secure harmony in any particular situation and which will not. Overriding everything is the power of the mind to heal the body by generating the perception waves that balance the imbalances that are experienced as illness.

In the language

Figure 86: The body meridian system picked out by a tracer dye and looking like a computer motherboard.

Figure 87: The Earth is also criss-crossed and interpenetrated by meridian lines of energetic force.

Figure 88: Hair-like needles and other techniques balance the flow of energy or ‘chi’ (information) in the body meridian system.

Reality can be seen in the phrases people use without realising that what they say is literally true. We describe the ‘electricity’ we feel in a room, theatre or stadium generated by various human interactions. Hair stands up on the back of the neck and skin tingles in an excited crowd because of electromagnetic energy emitted in the form of emotion. Skin is an antenna and the whole body is the same – hence the tingling amidst powerful electrical/electromagnetic fields. This happens to people in ‘haunted’ places when they feel the electromagnetic fields of entities just beyond the human visual frequency range. We speak of the electricity between people while others are said for the same reason to have ‘magnetic personalities’. It is all about the power and compatibility of electrical/electromagnetic fields. Sex is the merging of two electromagnetic fields which together generate electrical power greater than the sum of the parts (well, sometimes!). The ancient art of acupuncture is based on balancing the flows of information in the form of electricity and electromagnetism that circulate the body through lines of force called meridians. These are the body equivalent of meridians or ‘ley lines’ that circulate and interpenetrate the Earth (Figs 86 and 87 ). Both systems are manifestations of the communication networks of The Field that connect everything to everything else. The ancients knew of these phenomena before religion suppressed the knowledge and they marked their paths and major vortex ‘chakra’ points where many lines cross with earthworks, standing stones and circles. The more powerful the vortex the more sacred the circle and location was considered to be. Hair-like needles and other methods employed by acupuncture balance the flow through the meridian system of information encoded in electricity known by the Chinese as ‘chi’ (Fig 88 ). The principle is yet again the same as with computers. When a virus scrambles the flow of information passing through the system the computer response to keyboard/mouse direction slows down or ceases to react. What appears or doesn’t on the screen is affected by the distorted information and this is what happens when chi information in the form of electricity is in a state of disharmony or dis-ease. In ancient China some would for this reason pay their acupuncturist when they were well and not when they became ill. The acupuncture practitioner was supposed to keep the chi in balance to ensure that illness couldn’t manifest. A perfect example of ignorance dictating perception is when acupuncture is dismissed and ridiculed for ‘putting a needle in the foot to treat a headache’. If such people had the self-respect to do some research before waving their arrogant hand they would know that chi information passes around the body in circuits and a circuit that passes through the foot and the head can be blocked in the foot in a way that transfers to a pain in the head.

Figure 89: Every part of a hologram is a smaller version of the whole and encoded with the same information.

Figure 90: Brain activity and the Universe. As above, so below – the holographic principle.

There is one other point to make about holograms before we move on. They have an amazing characteristic in which every part of the hologram is a smaller version of the whole. If you cut a holographic wavefield print or interference pattern into four pieces and direct the laser at each one you would expect to see four quarters of the original image. But you don’t. You see a quarter-size version of the whole image (Fig 89 ). This continues to be the case as you cut the image further because of the way information is distributed within a holographic wavefield or interference pattern. Although the clarity gets fuzzier as you reduce the size it’s still the image in its entirety. The human energy field is a smaller version of the Earth field while brain activity and levels of the Universe look remarkably similar in our holographic reality (Fig 90 ). Here you have the reason why healing methods such as acupuncture and reflexology have identified areas throughout the body that are smaller representations of the whole body. This has to be the case when the body is a hologram and every part must be a smaller version of the whole. Tiny cells have respiratory, digestive and immune systems just as the body does in line with the holographic principle and the Earth has a ley line electrical system as the body has the chi meridian network. A skilled palm reader can read the information of the whole body in the hand thanks to the way holographic information is distributed (Fig 91 ). Holographic principles are the foundation of the ancient theme of ‘as above, so below’.

Figure 91: Information can be gleaned from the hand because it represents the information blueprint of the whole body in a smaller form – precisely how holograms work.

Reality is certainly not what we are told to believe that it is. ‘Unexplainable mysteries’ don’t tend to survive open-minded research. Talking of which …

CHAPTER THREE

What mysteries?

The impossible could not have happened; therefore the impossible must be possible in spite of appearances – Agatha Christie

F rom the perspective of reality that I am describing so-called mysteries of life dissolve like snow in the sunlight. A long list of ‘inexplicable’ phenomena become ‘Ah , so that’s how it works’ and ‘Blimey, it all makes sense now’.

Figure 92: Wave entanglement – a key to understanding reality and human interaction.

We return to the theme of waves in water after two pebbles are dropped (Fig 92 ). Where waves from each collide and connect is known as wave entanglement and from this understanding of entanglement everything starts to fall into place. For example: Body-Mind is a wave entanglement between the wavefields of the body and those of the mind. While they remain in sync or entangled we are ‘alive’. Body-Mind’s wave entangled dance of synchronised oscillation is the human Dance of Life. When the body ceases to function (its wavefield ceases to oscillate and generate electricity) this releases the mind from entanglement and we ‘die’, or rather the body does. This is happening when near-death experiencers describe leaving the body as the mind is freed from the perceptual limitations of the body and opens to an entirely different reality. Wave entanglement with the body focuses attention of the mind on the micro-band of frequency called visible light through the decoding systems of the five senses. Once the mind is released from that body myopia we become aware of other realities. We are back to the torch light and warehouse analogy. If the body’s wavefield oscillation is restored so that entanglement is restored the mind can be drawn back into the body. If it doesn’t revive we’re out of here. The mind needs a body operating within the frequency band of the human world to experience and interact with the human world. Seeking out another body to entangle with is known as reincarnation. Those who have a lot of out of body experiences (a near-death experience without the body needing to die) have a much more fluid wave entanglement with the body which allows their mind to be released more easily. There are ways of training the mind to do this. Mind has the power to dictate the nature of wave entanglement or whether there is one at all. Mind wave-power can think us alive against all the medical odds (‘I’m determined to live’) and think us dead (‘I have lost the will to live’). Mind is the governor of the body while the Cult wants us to believe that the opposite is the case and so we don’t use that power in all manner of ways. The body cannot exist without the mind. When mind disentangles it takes with it the life-force energy that animates and empowers the body which then starts to decompose. The light literally goes out as death is often described. Human life is the rhythm or oscillation of life and the body’s rhythms including circadian and all biological rhythms are connected to this prime oscillation and its interaction with other waves. Another version of entanglement is called quantum entanglement in which ‘entangled particles remain connected so that actions performed on one affect the other, even when separated by great distances’. Scientist Albert Einstein described this as ‘spooky action at a distance’. There is actually nothing ‘spooky’ about it. When particles that are expressions of waves are connected by those waves they will act in unison as manifestations of the same wave or the same field .

Gene Genie

Figure 93: Big Pharma – the Cult cartel that controls mainstream medicine and seeks to crush any alternatives that work.

The wavefield relationship between Body-Mind is crucial to understanding everything in human reality. We are told that our genes basically decide all that happens to us physically and mentally. Some women tragically have breasts removed after being told their genes give them a high chance of breast cancer. Mainstream medicine is often brilliant in dealing with trauma injuries, orthopaedics, surgery, and reviving people at death’s door (do electric shocks revive only the heart or primarily the wavefield oscillation that generates electricity?). Antibiotics have also been highly effective although they are handed out far too liberally to the point where infections can mutate to overcome them. These are the so-called ‘superbugs’. When it comes to illness in general, however, modern medicine can be a disaster zone. One of the biggest causes of death in the United States – right up there with heart disease and cancer – is the treatment in all its forms. That’s crazy? Yes, it is, but if people mean crazy as in that can’t be true – check the figures and remember that they are only the numbers officially reported. Many other deaths which have medical causes are hidden behind fake diagnosis. The reason for this is that mainstream medicine doesn’t know what the body really is beyond the biological, let alone how it functions, and it is manipulated to be that way through control of medicine by the pharmaceutical cartel or ‘Big Pharma’ (Fig 93 ). This is a Cult creation given predominance over ‘health’ thanks to people like oil tycoon and Cult operative J.D. Rockefeller (see my other books). Big Pharma (the Death Cult, hence it kills so many people) owns the medical schools where doctors are trained and indoctor inated; owns the professional bodies like the Medical Associations; and owns governments through a global army of lobbyists and money-no-object political funding. The situation is so outrageous and dire that the best rule of thumb is this: If Big Pharma wants something it’s bad for humanity. Mainstream medicine is an outgrowth from mainstream ‘science’ which is also a Cult production at its establishment core. Both are controlled through funding and governing authorities that ensure only the Big Pharma version of the body and its treatment is allowed to be practiced in the mainstream (and increasingly anywhere). You want to be a doctor? Then do it our way or we’ll have you struck off. This has happened to many proper doctors seeking to employ methods that work rather than singing from the Big Pharma rulebook. You want to be a mainstream scientist? Well, don’t think you are going to get funding or any prestigious position if you challenge what we tell you is ‘scientific’ orthodoxy (which becomes medical orthodoxy). Witness the withdrawal or non-existence of funding for scientists who challenge human-caused ‘climate change’ orthodoxy which the Cult seeks to impose through its Climate Cult in which the dominant theme is ‘extinction’ (death). The same methodology can be found throughout academia which takes its orthodoxy from science orthodoxy and medical orthodoxy which all originate with Cult orthodoxy. The great majority in these institutions don’t know they are following the rules of the Cult while those in the inner circles of secret societies and satanic groups most certainly do.

Figure 94: An imbalance or flaw in the body wavefield becomes illness or disease – disharmony – in the hologram. Wavefield balance = holographic ‘health’ because one is a reflection of the other. See Neil Hague colour section.

Figure 95: The body ‘hard drive’ – the receiver-transmitter of information known as DNA.

Figure 96: ‘Blank-sheet’ stem cells can be encoded to perform any function.

The foundation of medical orthodoxy is that genes and not mind are the arbiter of everything when the opposite is true. This calculated inversion of reality is designed by the Cult to isolate body from mind in human society when body is mind. Big Pharma medicine is based on this misrepresentation and its drugs focus on affecting the body (hologram) chemically. This means they concentrate on the symptom they see in the hologram and not the cause which is a wavefield, energetic, information imbalance decoded through into the hologram (Fig 94 ). A problem in the hologram (symptom) is really a problem in the field (cause). Alternative methods of healing have long accused mainstream medicine of treating only symptoms and ignoring the cause and this must be so when the medical industry doesn’t acknowledge the existence of the body wavefield where the cause always lies. I say always because the body is a wave information field and its holographic level is only a decoded projection of that field. What happens in the field happens in the hologram and what doesn’t bother the mind doesn’t bother the body. Even when Big Pharma drugs are claimed to have psychological effects they target the way the brain processes information and not the source of information itself – wavefield mind. The body has some trillions of cells (cell ‘batteries’) and in almost every one is the body ‘hard drive’ known as DNA (Fig 95 ). We apparently have three billion base pairs of DNA and one section of this is called a gene. DNA of a normal human cell contains an estimated 30,000 to 120,000 genes although only a fraction of them are activated at any time. We are talking biological nanotechnology. Genes contain instructions for what the body looks like (everything from eye colour to height) and how it functions minute by minute. From this has come the myth that genes control what happens to the body, what diseases you’ll have and even how long you will live. This is profoundly misleading in that it ignores the X-factor of mind and consciousness beyond mind. The membrane of every cell is a liquid crystal and DNA is crystalline because they are receiver-transmitters of information. This is the wave communication system through which the mind (and heart) activate and deactivate cell function. American developmental biologist Bruce Lipton, who wrote Biology of Belief and has a YouTube presentation of the same name, points out that cell membranes are semi-conductor information processors like those, also crystalline, used in electrical circuits. Genes are a ‘hard disk’ and programmable. ‘Blank-sheet’ stem cells are produced by the body which then receive signals to encode instructions that dictate their function (Fig 96 ). Through this communication system humans, animals and the natural world ‘evolve’ in the sense of exchanging information between mind, body and environment to develop new gifts and abilities to cope when their environment changes. Animals are in sync with their surroundings thanks to this information exchange and so desert species have less need for water and birds hunting fish have microscopic sight to see fish from high in the air. When this transmutation through encoding new cell instructions stays in step with environmental changes it is called ‘evolution’; when it doesn’t we call it species extinction. We are rather more than a ‘lump of meat’ and our world far more than a cosmic accident. I will be describing how the entire Universe is an electrical/electromagnetic phenomenon which, like everything else in all existence, is conscious.

Turning yourself on (and off)

Figure 97: Our mental and emotional state is transmitted as waves which can turn genes on and off that relate to those states. In this way our state of mind becomes ‘genetic’ consequences good and bad. See Neil Hague colour section.

Which genes and their functions are active and which are not is dictated overwhelmingly by the mind and its perceptions through wave entanglement with the body. I have been banging on for decades now about the central role played by perception – everything originates from perception which is why the Cult in all its forms seeks as its prime objective to control perception. Every thought, emotion – perception – manifests as a unique frequency (wave) emanating from the mind and its emotions and you can feel these waves emitted by people. We talk of good vibes and bad vibes and that’s true. Someone may put on an act with their face and demeanour, but we feel something about them that doesn’t feel right. We are picking up the wave frequencies representing their real perceptions and attitudes behind the ‘physical’ mask. The nature of these frequencies, or perceptions, decide which genes in the cells are activated or switched on and which are not. We have genes with different instructions that affect the body’s ‘physical’ and psychological state. Among them are genes that will make you healthy, joyful, optimistic and mentally and emotionally balanced along with others that can make you sick, even fatally, depressed, pessimistic and mentally and emotionally im balanced by the way they process information . Now picture perception waves or signals emanating from the mind and having the effect of activating and deactivating different genes on the basis of their particular function. This is possible because genes of different functions respond to frequencies broadcast by the mind that relate to those same functions (Fig 97 ). The mind wave frequency and that representing a particular gene’s function operate on the same wavelength and they entangle to send a signal from mind to gene. In this way the perceptional state of the mind is transferred to the body’s genetic system. If your mind feels depressed its frequencies will activate the genes which carry instructions that represent depression and this emotional state will be transferred to a like-effect in the body. The same perceptual waves are affecting which functions are encoded in blank-sheet stem cells. Mainstream medicine sees only the chemical effect on the body and not the wave imbalance triggering that chemical effect which emerges from the conscious and subconscious mind. Doctors prescribe chemical drugs for a chemical symptom and miss the wavefield cause. Through this wave connection or entanglement stress becomes illness. The disruptive effect that stress waves can have on heart-related genes is how stress causes heart disease and the same process happens with cancer and everything else. When the mind and its emotions feel nervous or fearful the frequency activation will cause emotion genes in the belly to give you ‘the shits’ as I mentioned earlier. It is not the genes that decide what happens to the body in terms of the outcome origin; it is mind frequencies that dictate which genes are switched on and which are not. Mind is the message and genes are the messenger. Different parts of the brain ‘light-up’ and are activated by different thoughts and emotions for the same reason that genes are. The brain is responding to perceptual waves/signals from the mind and these activate those areas of the brain related to those frequencies as the brain processes the information. The brain is again the processor of information and not the origin, just as genes are processors – semi-conductor processors – of information and not the source.

Figure 98: It’s not only chemical shite. It’s wavefield shite.

What I have described is being studied today by an emerging scientific discipline called epigenetics. Science believed that to change the genetic nature of the body our DNA, or ‘hard drive’, had to change or mutate. This is now known to be untrue and reflects the long history of scientific dogma which lurches from ‘this is how it is’ to ‘er, well, actually, it’s not’; and from ‘you are talking nonsense you science blasphemer’ to ‘well, okay, you were right, but we’ll claim the credit and call it a new discovery’. Epigenetics studies how the body changes ‘physically’ and psychologically by which genes are switched on and off and which gene functions dominate. Highly significantly this on-off sequence dictated by the perceptual mind waves of one generation can be passed on to the next through procreation. Sperm and eggs combine to form the body (‘software’) program and carry the epigenetic (wavefield) blueprint of the parents (there are cases, however, where this doesn’t happen). Children can be born with the same on-off gene sequence with all the consequences, good and bad, which that entails. The child is born with what the perceptions of parents and other ‘ancestors’ genetically developed through life experience. We hear this described in lines like ‘She’s just like her mother’ and ‘He’s just like his dad’. There are other reasons for this, of course, but epigenetics is one of them. It is also the case that signals activating and deactivating gene function are not confined only to mind although that is the dominant source. Drugs and toxins are wavefield phenomena in their base form even though we perceive them holographically as chemical in nature. Big Pharma drugs cause so much damage to health because they are energetic wave distortions which transfer that distortion to the wavefields of body and genes. It’s the same with toxins in food and the environment. Do we really think that poisons in the herbicides and insecticides sprayed onto crops are not retained in the food they produce? Of course they are – both in waves and their chemical form in the hologram. What we eat and drink may look like a sandwich or a soda, but in its base form food and drink are fields of information waves. These fields can harmonise with the Body-Mind field when they are in vibrational sympathy (‘nutritious food’) or cause disharmony and dis-ease when their disruptive waves distort the Body-Mind field (Big Mac and a coke, please). Food and drink have long been shown to affect people psychologically, too, and this comes from the same wave-gene impact (Fig 98 ). Frequencies represented by fast food in recent decades have been triggering genes that relate to weight gain and through the epigenetic affect generations of children are being born with a greater genetic aptitude to gain weight that earlier generations did not have. The smart technology explosion is pounding everyone with radiation frequencies from phones, masts, satellites and Wi-Fi and this will be having an enormous impact on epigenetic gene function in ways that the general population and most of the medical and telecommunications industries will not be aware of. The Cult does know, however, and those consequences are long-planned. Untested 5G now being rolled out around the world is the next level of genetic and psychological manipulation. I’ll deal with this in detail in later chapters. Do people think that the transformation in the perceptions and emotions of especially the young in the ‘smart’ era is just some random coincidence?

Believing is seeing

When someone is poisoned it is not the chemical that kills them but the deeply distorted wavefields represented holographically as a chemical. The body’s wavefield oscillation is so undermined that it can no longer function when its dancing waves cease to dance. Some Christians in America take Biblical Scripture so literally that they handle poisonous snakes and even drink lethal strychnine to prove their faith. Some die, as you would expect, but some don’t and how can this be? The danger of snake poison and strychnine is in the effect of its wavefields on the body’s wavefield. If the wavefield mind is so strong in its belief that they won’t die then the frequency signals from the mind will not allow body reactions to be activated by the poison that will lead to death. Thus there you have the process of ‘mind over matter’. We are increasingly urged to fear genes with genetic tests warning people what their genetic blueprint has in store for them later in life. What a tragic irony on many levels. If you believe that you are destined to be the victim of your genetic blueprint you are sending out the mind/brain waves within the frequency band which can activate the very genes that produce the outcome. It becomes a self-fulfilling wavefield/genetic prophecy. If our minds do not believe in such an outcome – especially if we know and live the fact that mind is the governor – those cancer genes or whatever won’t be activated for your whole life. Why is it that so many people die within the period the doctor predicted they would die? ‘How long do I have, doctor?’ is so often a question that delivers literally a death sentence. Mind becomes convinced that the body will die within the declared period and sends out waves of frequency that make it happen. There have been cases where people have been told they have a fatal disease with a certain period to live and they have died in that period only for post-mortem tests to reveal they did not have the ‘fatal disease’ at all. They died from a belief that they had the disease and a belief in the doctor’s prognosis of how long they had to live. There are so many stories and accounts along the same lines. In this way we can believe ourselves to live and believe ourselves to die. Witness the list of cases in which one group has been given a drug to have some effect or other and a second group is unknowingly given only a sugar pill or ‘placebo’. Many times those taking the non-drug placebo experience the effect of the drug they have not even taken. Some trials involving psychoactive drugs have had those taking only a placebo heading out on a psychedelic ‘trip’. People have recovered from health problems, even serious ones, by taking a placebo they believed was a drug that would cure them. This can happen through the process I have been describing. Belief in the cure sends out the mind/brain waves that activate the genetic blueprint and its immune system to deliver the believed-in outcome. There is also the ‘nocebo’ effect when belief in a bad health outcome focuses the mind to produce just that. Warning people about the ‘side-effects’ of drugs is understandable, but how many then experience those effects because that possibility has been transferred to the mind and its perceptions? Tell someone that the cup of tea they just drank contained poison and watch what happens even though there was no poison. How many drugs appear to work only because people believe they will? The same applies to alternative methods, too, although they are much more in sync with how the body works and what it is. Mind is all when it comes to the body and the Cult knows that.

I’ll give you an example of how perception manifests illusions. I researched mind control for many years both sides of the Atlantic and met a large numbers of people who had been shockingly abused in the infamous US government-military-CIA mind control operation known as MKUltra. Part of this horrific programme was ‘trauma-based mind control’ in which the target is subject to situations of extreme terror. Their mind builds an amnesic memory-barrier around the experience like a bubble or honeycomb so the person does not have to keep reliving what happened. This creates self-contained compartments called by insiders ‘alters’ as in altered states. These self-contained alters are then programmed to carry out tasks including assassination in the style of a Manchurian Candidate and mind manipulators are able to switch the alters to different ‘personalities’ which perform different preprogrammed tasks. A so-called ‘front alter’ is installed that operates as the target’s conscious mind while the other alters remain in the subconscious. Trigger words, phrases, even sounds, are encoded to switch alters and make them temporarily the front alter to carry out their designated task or be sexually and violently abused by rich and famous people. Once completed the prime front alter is restored which has no idea what the other alter has done or experienced. I have exposed this in detail in other books and the reason I raise the subject here is that many who suffered in MKUltra told me that if they took drugs or were drunk in one alter or fragment of mind the effect of the drugs and drink would disappear immediately they were switched into an alter that had not been ‘conscious’ or ‘front’ when the drugs and drink were consumed. One told me that her biggest nightmare was to be given anaesthetic in hospital while in one alter and for another to kick in during the operation. She knew that the anaesthesia would cease to work and she would wake up. Such is the illusion of experienced reality. The latest mind control techniques involve harmonics which technologically manipulate the brain’s wavefield and electrical patterns to program perceptions and behaviour and even insert death programs that trigger the body to shut down. 5G, anyone? Relate this to the Cult’s control of information through ‘education’ and media when both are forms of perceptual hypnotism. I will be showing later that the Cult’s knowledge of how perception becomes experienced reality is mercilessly exploited to instigate mass human control.

I know myself how consciousness can override medical prognosis. I began to develop joint problems at aged 15 just six months into my football career and they continued to develop until I had to stop playing at 21. I was diagnosed with rheumatoid arthritis and given a horrible prognosis that included the possibility of being in a wheelchair in my 30s. I refused to accept that and rejected the offer of painkilling drugs for the rest of my life. It’s a good job I did or I would be dead now. I didn’t need a wheelchair in my 30s, but the arthritis did continue to develop and at its peak affected very painfully my toes, ankles, knees, hips, wrists and fingers. The experience gave me many gifts that didn’t seem so at the time. These included the end of my soccer career which led me into journalism and what I am doing now, plus the activation of a fierce determination not to let the pain and arthritis stop me. There came a time, however, as I began to understand the relationship between mind and body, that I decided to put this into practice by using perception to impact the arthritis. I decided the arthritis was not going to continue progressing and would start rolling back and releasing me from the pain. By ‘decided’ I mean something much deeper than that which I call ‘knowing’ and I’ll be coming to this in due course. At the time of this book’s publication I am 68 and should really be in a wheelchair by now with a ravaged body after the arthritis developed at aged 15; but I’m not. I have no pain and apart from some remaining deformation in my right hand my life is not affected in any way by arthritis. What you believe you perceive and what you perceive you experience. Don’t be a victim of your genes. Be the master of them through your perceptions which decide which are activated and which are not. Hereditary inevitability and doctor prognosis is a myth – if you know this.

‘Born’ winner? ‘Born’ loser? Or mind dictates all?

The process of perception creating experience applies across the entirety of human life. We talk about ‘born winners’. What is that except mind dictating experience? ‘Born winners’ always seem to manifest situations and ‘strokes of luck’ to grasp victory from the jaws of defeat while others, individuals and teams, grasp defeat from the jaws of victory. You see this with sports people who dominate in less important games and yet whenever they come to the decisive match or championship final others with less talent and stronger perception win the day. An example was England’s Leeds United football team in the 1960s and 70s. They were a brilliant side with highly talented players managed by a guy called Don Revie. They would dominate a season until the closing deciding stages and then fall away at the decisive moment. It was not their talent that defeated them; it was their own perception. Revie was famous for producing detailed ‘dossiers’ on each of the opposition players which his team were supposed to read. This betrayed far too much attention on what the other team might do instead of what his team could do. Leeds were so good that if they performed to their potential what the other team did didn’t matter, but it mattered big-time to Revie, a superstitious man, to the point of obsession. This exposed the undertone of insecurity that was often transferred to his team when the pressure was on in season-defining situations. Perceptual transfer happens with all groups, large and small, and even to whole populations as we saw in Nazi Germany. Everybody is emitting wave frequencies that reflect their perceptions and emotional state. Football teams are therefore groups of wavefields that become entangled . The more perceptually powerful fields will impose themselves on the others and soccer pundits talk about someone having a personality that ‘dominates the dressing room and what happens on the pitch’. They often describe these players as … ‘born winners’. The manager as the boss of the team is obviously best placed to impose his perceptions on the group and in this way Don Revie’s insecurities would have been transferred by wavefield to the team at crucial moments of high pressure. Confident of winning becomes fear of losing which is something very different. Perception is transferred from mind to body in the ways I have described and the body’s actions reflect the mind’s perceptions. We hear this reported in these terms: ‘They have been brilliant all season, but in this deciding match they just didn’t perform.’ With the great Revie Leeds United team that happened far too often to be coincidence. Perception/wavefield dominance or subordination can be observed in every aspect of human society and most certainly in sport where it is always on public display.

There is another phenomenon known as ‘a disruptive influence in the dressing room’ – a player with negative attitudes and perceptions who emits those waves within the team’s collective field of wave entanglement and creates a schism or distortion that affects the perceptions and performance of the collective. I played in teams that had disruptive characters and in others where everyone was mutually supportive and it absolutely can seriously affect the performance of the whole group. This is the real background to terms like ‘infectious’ behaviour, infectious enthusiasm and infectious negativity. The ‘infection’ spreads through wave entanglement. A further sporting example of how entanglement affects outcome is the impact of supporters on a team or individual. The crowd watching a sporting event is affecting the outcome – or can – and teams playing at home in front of their own supporters tend to win more often than they do away. The wavefields of the crowd become entangled with the fields of the team they are focused upon. If this support is positive these ‘good vibes’ are transferred to the team along with potentially enormous surges of energy to aid stamina and performance. Many successful UK athletes in the 2012 Olympic Games in London described how they felt empowered by the British crowd and especially when it was a race for the line and their bodies were at their apparent limit. Somehow they found another surge of energy just when they needed it and this would have been a combination of their own minds (determination) and very much the wavefield energy input from entanglement with spectators willing them to win. The reverse of this is also true. Football teams having an unsuccessful run often do better away from home because the frustration and criticism of their fans is transmitted through wave entanglement and this can disrupt and drain the performance, confidence and energy of the players. ‘Born winners’ are so perceptually strong, however, that they perform to their maximum ability in a hostile atmosphere and are empowered by their determination not to be affected. If you believe in ‘Little Me, I have no power’ you will live a life that expresses that self-identity as your perceptual state is transmitted in waves that entangle with other waves in sync with them. You will attract into your life people, situations and experiences that reflect your state of mind and emotion to produce a self-fulfilling prophecy. Everything in our reality is a frequency wavefield, a pattern of entangled, vibrating, oscillating, consciousness/information, and that includes circumstances, potential situations and experiences all of which are forms of consciousness. If we are in sync with their ‘vibe’ we attract them. If we’re not, we don’t. This will be immensely-relevant when I come to how the Cult manipulates human society and how we can stop that happening. You don’t like your life? Then stop creating it – attracting it.

The relationship (wave) field

Figure 99: Relationships of all kinds are founded on wave-entanglement and the attraction or resistance of ‘vibes’. See Neil Hague colour section.

Relationships of every kind from boy meets girl to the experiences we attract and the effect of planets in astrology can all be described and understood in terms of mind/consciousness-wave entanglement (Fig 99 ). Perceptions obviously decide what personal relationships we seek to pursue and if this is mutual then wave entanglement follows. We describe this as making a ‘bond’. Entanglement can be imposed, too, if we allow it. A relationship based only on ‘physical’ attraction will form a wave entanglement to reflect that. When the attraction fades the entanglement unravels and the couple (coupling) separates. Or, at least, they do if that’s the only connection. If by the time the ‘physical’ attraction fades a mutual hostility has developed then the attraction wave entanglement is replaced by a hostility wave entanglement and things can get very ugly. Hostility and hate from one partner is infused into the mutually entangled field and can trigger more hostility and hate in the other who reflects that back in a mutual feedback loop that diminishes, even destroys, the lives of both parties. Apply this interaction across human society and you see it everywhere in everything from personal relationships to world wars. Parents, communities and religions that instil in their children a hatred for other communities and religions ensure negative, destructive and ongoing wave entanglement passed on generation after generation as we have seen throughout the world. Entanglement between couples can be based on multiple waves generated by multiple perceptions of each other including attraction and repulsion, love (or the human version of it) and hate. These are described as love-hate relationships and which wave connection dominates at any time depends on particular circumstances. Candlelit dinner – ‘I love you’. Come home pissed – ‘You horrible bastard’. When relationships of whatever kind are founded on love in its unconditional sense generated from the heart chakra vortex, and not just the groin, entanglement can be mutually beneficial, supportive and last indefinitely even though its nature may change. We can see this in couples late in life well past the lust stage that love each other even more than ever and live in wavefield harmony and mutual support. Individual minds decide individual experience and entangled mind connections decide collective experience. A dictator mind is someone who wave-entangles, sometimes with whole nations, and imposes his or her perceptions on everyone else. See Hitler, Stalin, Mussolini, the Chinese leadership and endless other examples. The Nazi mentality entangled with millions of Germans and became the mesmerised masses oscillating to the same rhythm in those grotesque rallies of unquestioned wave-entangled homage to Hitler. The theme here is that whatever your waves (perceptions) sync with will become entangled in some form of relationship. Those that don’t sync will pass you by. ‘Hands-on’ energy healers make a wave entanglement with those they work with as energy is transferred through these channels (so make sure you pick the right one). Energy healing can be done directly or at a distance when waves of energy are directed from the healer’s field to entangle with the recipient. I have experienced this and it works when the healer knows what they’re doing.

Wave entanglement equally applies to desires, ambitions, fears and all situations that we face. Every thought and emotion is a wave frequency and desires, ambition, fears and situations are wavefields of thought and emotion on particular frequencies. Our perceptions in relation to what we want, fear or experience decide the type of relationship, or no relationship, that we have with these potentialities. Say you want to achieve something, but you don’t believe you can or will with your self-identity perception of ‘things like that never happen to me’. Waves generating from your mind will not sync in that perceptual state with the wavefields represented by what you would like to achieve. If you are determined to do everything you can to reach your goal in the belief that you could achieve it you will make some level of wave entanglement with the objective; but know you will get there and you make an entanglement with the field of being there. This allows you to manifest being there and achieve what you want. Mind/heart power operates on many levels. There is not believing you will achieve what you want; hoping you’ll achieve; being confident you’ll achieve; believing you’ll achieve; and top of the shop in terms of ensuring the goal – knowing you’ll achieve. I saw many young players when I was footballer with terrific talent who fell by the wayside because they didn’t believe – know – they would be a footballer. We talk of people ‘lacking confidence’ when in truth it goes deeper than that. I said as a kid that I was going to be a professional footballer. Few believed me. Lots of young people want to be footballers and only a few ever make it with the competition so fierce. I just knew . I didn’t hope – I knew . I could not explain why I never doubted the outcome even when the statistical chances were so slim. What followed was a series of ‘lucky breaks’ that put me in the right place at the right time with the right performance in the right game. Was this really by lucky chance or my mind creating that through knowing the outcome making a wave entanglement with the wavefields that represented the outcome? There was, and is, more to this than just ‘positive thinking’ which is low-level when it comes to experience-manifestation. Knowing is way beyond that as I will discuss later and is connected to intuition – intuitive knowing .

What possessed you?

Figure 100: Possession by demonic entities is real – the classic image from The Exorcist movie.

Figure 101: The information field of the possessing entity is infused into the field of the possessed target who then, in the most extreme cases, starts to reflect holographically the visual image of the entity. (Image by Neil Hague.)

An extreme example of wave entanglement is known as ‘possession’. This is an age-old concept of entities, usually described as ‘demonic’, taking over a human body and dictating its behaviour and even the way it looks. We have seen this depicted in many horror movies including The Exorcist and the process has been described in every culture throughout known human history (Fig 100 overleaf). There is a reason for that – it’s true. Mainstream science dismisses even the possibility. It doesn’t understand reality and has no knowledge base from which to explain how such things can happen. Given the ‘science’ motto is ‘if I can’t explain how it’s happening then it can’t be happening’ all that’s left is to deny that it’s happening. Never mind the mountain range of people’s personal experience of common phenomena over hundreds or thousands of years as we perceive ‘time’. Well, in fact, it can be explained, as the entire spectrum of the ‘paranormal’ can be, and simply, too. Science uses the term ‘paranormal’ for everything it cannot explain despite the said Himalaya-like compilation of personal experience and accounts, ancient and modern, to show that it’s real. Only scientifically-endorsed absurdity qualifies for the official verification stamp of ‘normal’. Possessing entities are wavefields of consciousness operating outside the band of visible light that are able to entangle with the wavefields of Body-Mind if – emphasise if – Body-Mind falls into compatible mental and emotional frequencies. This can happen in states of fear or depression and through the effect of drugs and extremes of alcohol consumption or by having sex with a possessed person which allows the entity to use the wave-connection of sexual energy to ‘jump’ across and make an energetic entanglement. The Cult employs sexual predators to target people it wants to open to entity possession and control. The entity instigates wavefield entanglement and can then start to transfer its own information field and personality to the target (think of a computer virus ‘possessing’ a computer system). Friends and observers will notice the target starting to change in personality and behaviour and in the most extreme examples of possession even their facial features transform and distort. The consciousness/information field of the possessing entity transfers so much of its own wave information that the possessed person starts to take the holographic form of the entity (Fig 101 ). It doesn’t have to go this far for someone to be possessed and perceptually influenced and directed, but it absolutely happens. Satanists set out to be possessed in this way during rituals and the hierarchy of Satanism is dictated by the power of the possessing entities which means that the demonic hierarchy in the unseen becomes the satanic hierarchy in the seen. This is how the pecking order of the Cult is decided. Cult operatives who direct human society via The Web are actually non-human demonic entities hiding behind apparently human form. I say apparently because the major Cult families and operatives are really biological software programs and a form of what we would call today artificial intelligence, or AI. Their thought processes are AI and this is why those that direct the Cult are so intellectually advanced while having no empathy. Does a software program have empathy? No – it just acts according to data input. Anyone still wonder why the Cult has visited such evil on humanity with no emotional consequence? These biological AI software vehicles allow their hidden masters to manipulate human society without actually needing to enter the human frequency range. The ‘masters’ are also a form of AI as I will come to in detail later and the plan to assimilate human consciousness into AI through brain connections and other means is this AI ‘awareness’ seeking to empower itself by absorbing non-AI human minds. Their AI nature explains why they are so obsessed with technology which they are using to impose their control. They are not human and their consciousness fields are devoid of empathy and compassion so anything goes. Lower level servants of The Web (mostly ignorant of what is really going on) are possessed in less powerful ways, but still enough to turn them into advocates and manipulators of the Cult agenda even though they may not know the true background and origin of that agenda. For obvious reasons most possessed people don’t know they are possessed. The inner elite by contrast definitely do and glory in the fact. I have heard accounts of many wives and families of men who joined the Freemasons and began to change personality as they lost their former warmth, empathy and sense of justice, fairness and decency. The great majority of Freemasons don’t know that their weird initiation rituals are not just historic throwbacks to a bygone age. They are designed to create an energetic wavefield environment in which entities can attach to the initiate and the more elite the secret society and satanic group the more extreme this becomes. Satanic arts and voodoo are founded on these same wave connections which are exploited to adversely affect the target. Putting a pin in a doll used to symbolise a person and them feeling pain a long way distant is possible and explainable. The doll becomes the wave-surrogate of the person (a focus of attention representing the person which allows the instigation of wave entanglement) and through that connection their wavefield is disrupted and they feel the transmitted discomfort. The US military and many other countries have psychic assassination squads that connect with the wavefields of people they want to kill. They can stop their heart waves oscillating or affect them in other ways unless the target’s wavefield (mind/consciousness) is more powerful than theirs.

Taking shape and wavefield families

I have been widely and intensely ridiculed – and still am – for saying that the inner hierarchy and many lower operatives of the Cult are shapeshifters able to take both human and their prime non-human form through their duel hybrid wavefield information fields . I have said they can appear as either human or reptilian although reptilian is not the only entity-type involved. You can read about all this in detail in Everything You Need To Know . Ridicule from the media and much of the public comes once again from an ignorance of reality and given the way people are programmed to believe in a fake version of reality all their lives I can understand why. Funnily enough I don’t resent such people. I feel sad for them and I get why they dismiss what I say although it would be nice if they read one of my books before waving a hand in arrogant dismissal of something they have chosen to know nothing about. The thought process goes like this: ‘The world is solid and so it’s impossible to shift between one shape and another – that Icke is clearly crazy.’ If the world was solid all that would be correct, but it isn’t. Shapeshifting does not happen ‘physically’. It can’t – there is no physical. Recall what I said earlier about what science calls the ‘observer effect’ and I call the ‘decoder effect’. Apparent solidity is really a hologram which is decoded into manifestation by the mind of the observer from a wave information field. What we think we see as physical reality is really holographic reality which only exists in that form in the decoding processes of Body-Mind. Shapeshifting as a perceived ‘physical’ happening is really the observer decoding the human part of the hybrid field and then the field shifting to project the non-human part which the observer also decodes. What happens is a wavefield shift of information, but to the observer’s mind the person appears to have physically shifted from one form to another as one field is decoded and then the other. Here is a perfect example of how if you suppress the true nature of reality you can manipulate great swathes of the target population to dismiss as impossible what is actually happening.

Figure 102: The reptilian brain or R-complex has an enormous impact on human perception and behaviour.

I have written at great length over the decades about Cult bloodlines that have interbred since ‘ancient times’. These are best-known as ‘royalty’ and ‘aristocracy’ although they now overwhelmingly operate through the dark suit professions of politics, government, banking, business and media. Designer procreation passes on the hybrid wavefield blueprint (biological AI software program) which involves a duel information field. One part is infused with human wavefield information and the other is non-human, often, although far from always, reptilian in nature. Observe reptile behaviour and you’ll see how software-like it is. I have witnessed a number of crocodile/alligator presentations at wildlife parks where the computer-like ‘press-enter’ nature of their behaviour has been highlighted. Royal and aristocratic bloodlines (wavefields) are called ‘bluebloods’ and the term illustrates the difference between these families and the rest of the human population. The whole theme of royal bloodlines with a ‘divine right to rule’ comes from their origin as the bloodlines of the ‘gods’ and you find this theme across the world. Ancient Chinese emperors claiming the right to rule through their genetic (wavefield) descent from the ‘serpent gods’ is only one example. ‘Divine’ right to rule has been associated with the Christian god while it should far more appropriately refer to the Sanskrit ‘Deva’ (female Devi) which is defined as ‘a shining one or supernatural being’. The ancients often described their non-human ‘gods’ as the ‘Shining Ones’. Deva comes from the Latin ’deus’ , or ‘god’, and ’divus’ from which derive the English words ‘divine’ and ‘deity’. Cult bloodlines were given their (divine) right to rule by ‘supernatural gods’ – the non-human force behind human control. The Biblical story of the ‘sons of God’ who interbred with the daughters of men to create a hybrid race called the ‘Nephilim’ is describing the instigation of the hybrid bloodlines and the Cult also infiltrated human genetics in general. It is no accident of evolution that one of the most influential parts of the human brain in dictating behaviour is called the reptilian brain, or R-complex, which absolutely has a ‘press-enter’ reaction system as we’ll see (Fig 102 ). All the background can be found in detail in my other books. The original text from which ‘sons of God’ was translated in fact referred to sons of the gods , plural. These ‘sons’ and ‘gods’ are symbolic of the non-human entities which hijacked human society long ago and still impose their will and agenda through the Cult … run by the Nephilim bloodline families which are the AI biological software programs.

When populations began to reject overt rule by bloodline ‘royal’ dictatorships the Nephilim continued and expanded their control by moving into the realms of politics, banking, business, media and so on where they remain predominant to this day. They continue to interbreed through covertly arranged marriages to ensure the Nephilim bloodline software information program is not diluted or deleted by interbreeding with the ‘common people’. They may not overwhelmingly be official royalty any longer but they act as if they are, They believe they are special and above humans and have the ‘divine’ right to control everything. Nephilim bloodlines now operating through dark suit and uniform professions are orchestrators of The Web serving the interests of the Spider operating in frequencies outside human sight. Non-human entities which I refer to as the Spider are the same entities that the Old Testament calls collectively ‘God’ and other cultures around the world call ‘the gods’. Hence the Old Testament ‘God’ is described in nature and behaviour in very different ways to the New Testament ‘God’. A few overt Nephilim ‘royalty’ survive, most notably the British royal family which provides the ongoing UK and Commonwealth head of state on the basis purely of bloodline succession. I have written widely about the Nephilim human-reptilian hybrid nature of the British royals and naturally attracted a blaze of ridicule for my trouble. I don’t care. I am interested in the truth not a pat on the back and a Facebook thumbs-up. I do not wish to be considered ‘normal’ when that word with regard to human society is another term for clinical insanity. The fake royals live in ongoing mega-privilege off the backs of the British population as the entire Nephilim network lives off the backs of the global population under terms like the One-percent. They are Cult bloodline human-reptilian shapeshifters and if people don’t like that or accept that then they must do the other thing which is fine by me. They should know, however, that no amount of ridicule and condemnation is going to stop me saying it.

The bloodlines around the world were behind the emergence of major religions that serve their interests of perception control. There is no coincidence in many major Cult bloodlines emerging from the Middle East and ancient Egypt, Sumer and Babylon – the latter two now called Iraq – when from this region came three of the world’s major religions, Christianity, Judaism and Islam. These have so much in common and recognise many of the same deities and heroes. The differences are emphasised, however, to allow centuries of divide and rule between them and that continues to this day to the ongoing benefit of the Cult which created them. Philosopher Alan Watts pointed out how religion is a copy of the monarchical societies from which they emerged with followers kneeling, bowing and prostrating themselves to ‘God’ as they did to the monarch. The Christian ‘God’ sits on a throne and terms such as Basilica mean ‘House of the King’. We have Biblical descriptions of ‘Jesus’ and ‘God’ as ‘King of Kings’ and ‘Lord of Lords’ and Christianity and other religions have the same follower-God relationship that ‘subjects’ had with monarchs. This version of ‘God’ worship is just an extension of monarchical (Cult bloodline) control.

It can’t be true? Oh yes, it can

Suppressing the nature of reality requires the constant dismissal and alleged debunking of any phenomena that cannot be explained by Cult-controlled mainstream science. It obviously follows in the public mind that if things are happening or possible that science claims can’t happen the version of reality pedalled by science can’t be all there is to know. This realisation has the potential to open minds to other possibilities and that’s something the Cult wants to avoid at all costs. Take astrology which originates in the ancient world and claims that the movements of planets and stars influence human life and behaviour. Astrologers claim these forces have very a significant impact on the personalities of people through the astrological sequences at work at the time of birth (some believe conception). I will have more to say about this when I address the power of expanded consciousness to override not only astrological wave influences but all the others that come at us today with the speed of machine gun fire. I emphasise that astrological frequencies are influences and don’t have to impose upon us unless we allow them to through choice or five-sense unconsciousness. The foundation of astrology and how it works can be simply explained and that’s one reason why mainstream science is so instantly dismissive. The ‘scientific’ mind is obsessed with complexity. Any answer must be complex or it can’t be true – ‘I mean look at how much my degree in physiological, physicochemical and physiopathological complexity cost me.’ Genius is not to understand complexity; it is to see the simple hidden by complexity. It is to see the whole and not only the parts. Mainstream science is so obsessed with the twigs that it can’t see the forest. Serbian-American scientist Nikola Tesla (1856-1943), who was way ahead of the science mainstream, said:

The scientists of today think deeply instead of clearly. One must be sane to think clearly, but one can think deeply and be quite insane.

Scientist Robert Lanza put it this way:

When it comes down to it, today’s science is amazingly good at figuring out how the parts work. The clock has been taken apart, and we can accurately count the number of teeth in each wheel and gear, and ascertain the rate at which the flywheel spins. We know that Mars rotates in 24 hours, 37 minutes, and 23 seconds, and this information is as solid as it comes. What eludes us is the big picture.

We provide interim answers, we create exquisite new technologies from our ever-expanding knowledge of physical processes, we dazzle ourselves with our applications of newfound discoveries. We do badly in just one area, which unfortunately encompasses all the bottom-line issues: What is the nature of this thing we call reality, the Universe as a whole?

Figure 103: Astrology is founded on the impact of wave entanglement between frequency waves of planets and stars and frequency waves of people, animals and all life. See Neil Hague Colour Section.

Astrology could hardly be more straightforward when you see this big picture. All form is a hologram decoded by the observer from wavefields and that ‘all’ includes planets and stars which are conscious wavefields emitting different frequencies of information – the ‘music of the spheres’. They entangle with wavefields of other planets, stars and people and this is most powerful between heavenly bodies when they are in various alignments. Astrologers refer to these as conjunctions, squares, trines, oppositions, and the like. These alignments create wave entanglements which are collectively more powerful than the individual parts and amplify their impact on other wavefields they entangle with including humanity. Waves emitting from planets and stars, especially combinations of them in alignment, impact on the human wavefield and the trillions of cells and their genes encoded with a myriad of instructions that affect health and behaviour depending on whether they are active or inactive (Fig 103 ). At birth/conception (a combination of both probably) the wavefield of the child’s Body-Mind is imprinted with the astrological wave blueprint generated from the positions of the planets and stars. The blueprint will be different in one period than another as the heavenly bodies change their wave relationships and these periods are designated as astrological ‘signs’. The astrological frequency field imprint on someone born in ‘Taurus’ will be different from a ‘Leo’ and even the ‘time’ in the day makes some difference with the astrological field constantly changing. Different astrological imprints will interact differently with ongoing astrological sequences throughout their life to give us the esoteric art of astrology. People born in the same astrological periods can have aptitudes for certain jobs or abilities and this is a reason why (Fig 104 ).

Figure 104: Our unique wave patterns, influenced by planetary wavefields at the moment of birth/conception, interact with wavefields of planets and stars through a human lifetime to provide the basis of astrology. The ‘heavens’ are once again within us. (Image Neil Hague.)

This background applies with the Chinese Zodiac and its years of the monkey, rat, ox, tiger, rabbit, dragon etc. and other cultural methods of reading the effect of astrological information waves. Consciousness in certain wave states can also be attracted to ‘incarnate’ through entanglement in life situations and locations that sync with that state. This would provide the wavefield basis of a reincarnation cycle in which one ‘life’ dictates the nature of the ‘next’ one. Reincarnation is not what it seems, however, in that with time an illusion and everything happening in the same NOW there is obviously more to know about the perception of a reincarnated ‘sequence’ in time. The Sun has an absolutely central impact on humanity (‘astrologically’) by bombarding us with photons (information) which are emitted by the Sun as … waves . Photons (sunlight) are transformed (decoded) by cholesterol in the skin into the vital vitamin D. Cholesterol has many other crucial functions and the brain contains 20 percent of the body’s cholesterol which is an essential component of cell membranes involved in cell signalling. Alzheimer’s and dementia which have become an epidemic in recent times are names to describe brain cell signals misfiring and miss-communicating. You will have noticed the Cult-instigated systematic demonisation of cholesterol and the pressure to reduce it through changing food habits and taking ongoing statin drugs to do the job. Is this another coincidence? Not a chance. There is one other point to make here about the Sun which is relevant to everything else. We define the Sun by the circle of light in the sky when that is only the part that we can see. The Sun’s influence is transmitted across the solar system in the form of waves and photons which are as much part of the Sun as the perceived ball of fire. Everything from a planet to a human has a frequency field that we can see and a far greater wavefield ‘aura’ that we don’t see. The more powerful the mind and expanded awareness the bigger its auric range and influence.

I was just thinking the same

‘Paranormal’ telepathy and psychic phenomena are explained through wave connections. Forget about ‘distance’ which is an illusion of holographic decoded reality. Everything you think you ‘see’ in the night sky in the form that you think you ‘see’ exists only in your ‘head’ – Body-Mind decoding systems. What happened to stars billions of light years and trillions of miles away when they are located in that form between our ears?? As the near-death experiencer said of reality beyond the body: ‘There is no time, there is no sequence of events, no such thing as limitation, of distance , of period, of place. I could be anywhere I wanted to be simultaneously.’ We are waves and we can be anywhere we like and in as many ‘places’ as we choose once we are released from the focused attention of Body-Mind. Other levels of us are already operating simultaneously all over Creation while this wave of that same consciousness is having a human experience. Still frightened of death? Still think you are ‘insignificant’ Ethel on the checkout or Bill at the call centre?? Our waves can connect with other waves and through that entanglement exchange information with those on the other side of the world or in another dimension of reality. This is called telepathy, intuition, premonition and mind reading. Experiments galore have proved this to be real and it is widely used in covert operations by intelligence agencies and the military. The same wave connections allow plants, trees and the natural world to communicate with each other and us with them. Yes we can ‘talk’ to trees and plants. While they don’t understand human language they feel the vibrations of the sound waves from the vocal chords and the waves we emit in general. They know love, danger, friend or foe, by feeling it. People with close relationships attune with each other’s wavefields more powerfully and telepathy between them is more likely. One will say something and the other will respond with ‘I was just thinking that’. There are endless stories of people thinking of someone followed by the phone ringing with the person on the other end. Others have premonitions that a fate has befallen a loved one which turns out to be true. ‘Primitive’ ancients knew about this, hence the origin of the term ‘bush telegraph’ when tribal peoples became aware of happenings ‘far away’ and could communicate telepathically with their family and friends back in the village while out on a hunt. We are all capable of this – it is how we are supposed to b e – but perceptual programming has blocked these natural processes in most people. We need to bring them back.

Figure 105: Psychics and mediums are connecting their awareness with realities beyond the human five-sense frequency band. (Image Neil Hague.)

Psychic communication is another form of telepathy in which the psychic or medium attunes (entangles) with the wavefields of ‘people’ who have passed from human reality or with the wavefields of people still here. You might have seen TV programmes about ‘psychic detectives’ in which they solve crimes that have defeated the police. They do this by wave-attuning with the criminal and/or the deceased or missing victim and access what happened from that information source. This is sometimes done by going to the location of a crime. The wave-encoded representation of what happened will still be there in the energetic field. All events and actions are recorded in wavefields and have to be when all events and actions are wavefields. In this way houses can be ‘haunted’ by fields of information containing happenings there. You could think of it as a wavefield recording like a CD or DVD and the more emotion involved in the events the more powerful will be the recording. Many ‘haunted’ places are not the result of discarnate entities, but happenings encoded in the wavefield like people hearing the ‘sounds of battle’ at the scene of some historic mass carnage. Psychics are not reading the ‘past’ or the ‘future’ when neither exists. They are reading wave patterns in the NOW. The most open psychics and mediums can connect with expanded states of consciousness that can communicate phenomenal insight about reality and the human plight (Fig 105 ). This happened to me in my ayahuasca experience and on endless other occasions far less dramatically. I say endless. It’s pretty much every day and mostly this is in the form of intuitively ‘knowing’ rather than hearing words. Wavefield information from these sources is decoded by the brain in the same way as human speech and when this happens it can sometimes sound like ‘voices in the head’. People are often condemned as crazy when they describe this experience, but when a friend or workmate talks to you what do you hear? Voices in your head! It’s the same brain information processing from a different source. Mediums can allow their bodies to be used as temporary vehicles for disembodied entities to speak through them. The entity instigates a wave entanglement strong enough to speak directly to the brain of the medium and the communication is decoded into words. I have witnessed situations where the connection is so powerful that the medium’s voice changes and even their face is transformed. Those that believe shapeshifting is not possible should have seen what I have on these occasions. The process is a form of temporary possession. The difference is that the medium makes the choice to allow that to happen rather than having it imposed upon them. Two things I would advise are to check out any psychic or medium you are thinking of contacting and research their history, accuracy or otherwise, with previous clients. Not everyone who calls themselves psychic is any good and remember that just because an entity is speaking through a psychic/medium does not mean they have your best interests at heart. Death is no cure for ignorance or manipulation. I am seriously discerning in these situations. You have to be or you can get scammed.

Blimey, what a coincidence!

Synchronicity is another wave phenomenon when people experience ‘amazing coincidences’ that make no sense when compared with statistical possibility. ‘Wow – fancy seeing you here – what are the chances of that?’ Well, actually, very good if you make a wavefield entanglement with the location and each other. This is how synchronicity works and people describe such experiences as ‘meant to be’. Sometime they are in the sense of wavefields being pre-encoded to meet as part of a planned life experience. Wavefields can be two people or a person, a situation, information or location. Other times ‘meant to be’ is simply ‘made to happen’ by the synchronisation and entanglement of wave patterns generated by the mind waves (perceptions) of the parties. Synchronicity has been a central feature of my life. I could not have compiled the enormous library of information that I have in the last 30 years unless constant synchronicity had led me to it. Many have described how they were perusing in a bookshop when one of my books dropped off a shelf next to them. This would appear to be ‘spooky’ and to others just a coincidence when it has happened too many times to be explained that way. The person perusing is a wavefield and so is the book. If something in the person’s subconscious field wants the conscious mind to look at information an electromagnetic wave connection is made that pulls the book from the shelf to say: ‘Hey, look at this.’ It can also be that someone searching for understanding who has a wavefield reflecting that intent entangles with information that will aid that understanding through a symbiotic frequency connection – ‘seek and you shall find’. People who begin to ‘seek’ often experience people and information ‘coincidentally’ coming into their lives that relate to what they ‘seek’. This has been happening to me for 30 years. Another example is when you view a row of books and your attention goes to one of them even though you don’t know at first what it’s about. The subconscious constantly communicates to the conscious mind in synchronicities, coincidences and ‘paranormal’ experiences and you can learn to read the signs and symbols just as clearly as you do words. I call it the language of life. Everything that happens is telling us something. The trick is to see that and grasp what the language of life is saying. When people go through the process of awakening from Body-Mind into expanded states of consciousness they notice far greater synchronicity in their lives. Expanded consciousness generates both more powerful wave communication and at a higher and wider frequency which means we can make entanglement connections with a vastly greater range of other wavefields – people, places, situations, information, insight. We experience this as ‘My God, what a coincidence’ when it is really wave-magnetism at work. As your frequency quickens from expanding your awareness there comes a corresponding increase in the speed and scale of information processing. What would have given you a headache trying to understand before suddenly becomes clear and simple. A faster speed of processing can influence your perception of ‘time’ which is really the speed that you process information.

Speaking personally

My own conscious awakening got seriously underway when I was in a news shop in the spring of 1990 and what happened brings all these themes together. I was standing at the door when the atmosphere suddenly changed which I now know was a field of electromagnetic wave energy. My feet began to feel as if magnets (electromagnetic wave energy) were pulling them to the ground and I heard a strong thought (wave entanglement communication) pass through my mind which said: ‘Go and look at the books on the far side.’ I walked across the shop in a bewildered state to the single shelf of books and my attention immediately locked on (made a wave connection with) a title called Mind to Mind . I read the blurb on the back to find it was the biography of a professional psychic, Betty Shine. ‘Synchronistically’ I had been having the experience for the previous year of feeling a presence around me (wavefield of consciousness) even when I was in an apparently empty room. This became ever more powerful and tangible. It reached a peak just before my experience in the news shop and encouraged me to meet with Betty Shine to see if she would ‘pick up’ what was happening around me. I told her nothing except that I had arthritis and perhaps her ‘hands-on’ healing (an exchange of wave energy) might help. The first two visits were uneventful and then on the third while she was working ‘hands-on’ near my left knee I felt something akin to a spider’s web on my face (electromagnetic wave energy) and I remembered reading in her book that when ‘spirits’ are seeking to communicate you can feel this web-like sensation. Other dimensions of reality connect with us through electromagnetic entanglement. I said nothing but within a few seconds Betty threw her head back and said: ‘My God, this is powerful. I’ll have to close my eyes for this one.’ She said that a figure in her mind (wave projection from another reality) was communicating information to her to pass on to me. I was a BBC television presenter in 1990 and a spokesman for the Green Party. Now I was being told that I would go out on a world stage and ‘reveal great secrets’. A communication said: ‘One man cannot change the world, but one man can communicate the message that can change the world.’ Everything communicated to me that day and the following week, which I have detailed in other books, has happened or is happening. From the moment I left Betty’s home that morning my life became a constant series of synchronicities and ‘coincidences’. It had been before when I looked back, but now it became conscious. Synchronistic ‘coincidence’ has since taken me on an incredible journey of discovery which continues today. This book is the latest instalment.

Life-plans

Life is not what we are told that it is and neither is humanity ‘alone’. Creation is teeming with life – Creation is life made manifest. Consciousness beyond the myopic visual limits of visible light guides (or manipulates) other consciousness having a brief human experience. If you become entrapped in purely five-sense reality the connection to high-frequency benevolence can be lost to low-frequency malevolence. This is the goal of the Cult and its other-dimensional masters. Life is not random chance. Choices become consequences which become new choices and there are specific experiences that we set out to have although manipulated perceptions can get in the way. This is why we are born to specific parents in specific situations and locations. It is why we can choose to enter the cycle at a certain astrological point to underscore the direction we plan to take. Information can be encoded into our wavefields to trigger certain events and happenings. I recognise those situations clearly when I look at my own life. My arthritis came out of nowhere at age 15 and finished my football career at age 21 to lead me into journalism and all that followed. Without the arthritis I would not have had the same life and I would certainly not have activated so much determination so early to overcome adversity that would come in rather handy later on. Mass ridicule that I went through in the 1990s set me free of the fear of what other people thought of me and so I had no problem talking and writing openly a few years later about seriously far-out subjects that would attract mass ridicule and abuse. I didn’t know the far-out information was coming when the initial ridicule was in full-swing while other levels of me did and that which has been guiding me all these years from other realities. Freedom through extreme experience from the fear of what others say was preparation for what would follow. Life is not about any single experience. It is a long series of experiences which are all connected either through the choices that we make from the five-sense perspective or through pre-birth planning. The latter can be felt as a sense of ‘destiny’ and I guess it is in some ways if you take destiny to be something you set out to experience or achieve. Whatever happens, it is just an experience and there’ll be another one along after that. Pre-birth planning can even pre-decide when you ‘die’ by encoding the moment when mind will free itself from entanglement with the body. Someone may die ‘young’ from a rare heart condition when the clock was ticking on that from birth because it was encoded in the wavefield. This may seem hard to believe from a human perspective and that’s understandable. When you are free from prison cell perceptions of Body-Mind and its five senses life does not look the same. You know that life is all there is, death is an illusion and a human life only a very temporary experience.

Para normal is perfectly normal (it’s the ‘normal’ that’s not)

Figure 106: Tarot cards and rune stones are electromagnetic fields which reflect the electromagnetic field of the person involved and what is happening in your field is most likely – though not certain – to manifest as a holographic experience. (Image Neil Hague.)

The wave nature of reality dissolves all the classic paranormal ‘mysteries’. How do people stop watches with their mind? Thought/intention waves focused on the watch entangle with the wavefield of the watch and affect its function. Why do you pick card ‘A’ and not ‘B’ in a Tarot card reading to allow your ‘future’ to be discerned? Well, first it’s not your future, only a sequence of possibilities and probabilities that can be identified by a skilled reader from the cards you choose and in what order. Even so, that’s still crazy, right? No, it’s not. The whole thing is happening on the wavefield level. Tarot cards are wavefields that represent certain states of mind, emotion and possibility/probability (frequencies). Your wavefield syncs with cards that represent the frequencies of thoughts, emotions and possibility/probability that exist in your field. They make an electromagnetic frequency connection between hand and card to portray what is happening in your field as a series of symbolic cards laid out on the table (Fig 106 ). Rune stones symbolising different perceptual states and possibilities work the same way as do other forms of divination. I have had the runes read for me by shamans and the African version of bones carved into different symbols. You are asked to first put your hand over a basket of stones to sync and entangle your wavefield with theirs. Hands are a powerful centre for energetic exchange. The runes, or bones, are then thrown on the floor and the way they land in relation to each other is read by the shaman. To the closed mind it seems like gobbledygook until you realise that where the stones fell and their relationship was decided before they were thrown by the connections that were made with the person’s electromagnetic field. The stones then reflect that field on the floor and can be read by someone who knows what they are doing (the quality of the reader is vital). Numerology is the reading of people through numbers. I have described how wavefields are decoded into digital holograms. The hologram is a digital version of the information in the wavefield. Numerologists and psychics are reading different forms of the same information. I have had psychic and numerology readings close together by different people as part of my research and the information I was given was in theme exactly the same. The synchronicity generated by wavefields can be seen with recurring numbers in people’s lives. The number 8 seems to follow me around and it’s been my favourite number since I was a child. I have lived at number 8 for two decades and it ‘found’ me not the other way round. Numbers are digital versions of frequencies and a recurring number is a recurring frequency. Language is a manifestation of both wave frequencies and numbers. Hebrew is very much a numbers language with words formed with particular number values that are, in turn, representations of particular frequencies. In this way language itself and its use is a frontline source of perceptual programming.

A great deal of paranormal phenomena happens via electrical systems. Lights dim or turn on and off, a music player starts or stops, and so on. Wavefields are electrical/electromagnetic in our reality and you can feel this when hairs on the back of your neck stand up in a spooky situation when an unseen wavefield entity or ‘ghost’ is around you. The same happens with an excited crowd generating a mass of collective wavefield energy. ‘Atmosphere’ in a sports stadium (‘the atmosphere was electric’) is the result of electromagnetic waves emitted by the crowd and through entanglement becoming collectively more powerful than the parts. Electrical circuitry can therefore be affected by waves generated by people or by entities projecting electrical waves across realities in what is referred to as a ‘haunting’. Some of this manipulation can be malevolent while most of it is only perceived to be so by those who fear the unknown. The Cult seeks to keep the population in a state of unknowing so there is more unknown to fear. Witness how religion has been used to manipulate its followers to fear the unknown as the ‘occult’ when the word merely means ‘hidden’. Such hidden knowledge can be used for good or ill. What people fear they tend to try to avoid – in this case knowledge that will set them free. My brother, Paul, experienced some otherwise unexplainable electrical and number happenings and ‘coincidences’ in the days after my mother died. This is a way that loved ones try to tell us – ‘Hey, it’s okay, there is no death’. On the first night of my ayahuasca experience in Brazil I was lying on a mattress in the pitch black in a big round hut in the rainforest. I was alone except for a facilitator overseeing the process who had taken ayahuasca many times. In fact, I think he had pretty much smoked and drunk the rainforest. He was playing music on a CD as the ayahuasca effect kicked in and I felt an incredibly powerful energy pouring in an arc from the centre of my chest (heart chakra) and into my forehead area (third-eye chakra). It was like a sensation of hands gripping my chest and forehead. The music stopped and then started again as if the electricity had been turned off and on. Then one of the strip lights illuminated followed by a second and third. I wondered why the facilitator was messing with the music and lights. When I looked he was sitting near to me and nowhere near either the music player or the light switch. Even if he had been the lights would have switched on all together around the hut, not as one, two or three. Electromagnetic energy that I was so powerfully feeling was affecting electrical circuits and that is what happens during paranormal events. One of the scariest examples for people is so-called poltergeist activity when ‘physical’ objects can move and even fly around the room. If we approach this from the perspective I am describing this, too, can be explained. ‘Physical objects’ are not physical. They are decoded holographic projections of wavefields which other fields can entangle with and make ‘move’. This can be done by ‘other-world’ non-human entities, although moving objects of energetic density can take a lot of energy. Crazy as it may sound, this can also be caused unknowingly by humans. I have read many times how a common theme of poltergeist activity is the involvement of adolescent girls going through emotional trauma. On a wavefield level they would be emitting chaotic, imbalanced and potentially powerful emotional frequencies that could certainly entangle with other fields in the room and create mayhem that is blamed on a ‘poltergeist’. During ‘hauntings’ people describe how the location becomes suddenly very cold and this is the ‘ghost’ (consciousness in another reality) sucking energy in the form of heat out of the field to gather the energetic power that it takes to communicate between realities. When people report feeling chills down the spine this is the electromagnetic field of an entity impacting on the central nervous system.

On and on we could go with perfectly simple explanations for apparently impossible happenings and events – if we clear our minds of the fake version of reality spoon-fed to us throughout our lives by the Mainstream Everything controlled by the Cult. Now consider the fact that politics, governments, corporations, science, medicine, academia, media, and all the other global institutions are making decisions every day affecting the direction of human society based on a world that doesn’t actually exist except as a decoded illusion. WTF? No wonder they make such a mess of it. How can that not be the case when a world in which everything connects to everything else is perceived as nothing connecting to anything else? The dream is the dreamer and the dreamer is the dream. When we forget that we can create a nightmare.

CHAPTER FOUR

What is love?

Have enough courage to trust love one more time and always one more time – Maya Angelou

T his is not a book that simply says: ‘Love is the answer.’ It is, by the way, because everything comes from that, but I want to lay out why it is the answer from the context of how reality and consciousness interact.

From The Answer come all the other answers , plural, to the range of challenges facing humanity and which humanity has brought upon itself. In the end when you break it down they have all been brought on ourselves through the way we have allowed others to dictate perception and self-identity. I am not referring, in terms of The Answer , to the human version of ‘love’ which is mostly founded on mutual attraction. I talked to a mind-control expert in the United States many years ago who said he could make two people who would otherwise pass in the street without a second glance fall deeply in (attraction) ‘love’ purely by stimulating certain chemicals in their brain (chemicals = wavefield frequencies). Love in its deepest sense goes way beyond: ‘Cor, fancy her, fancy him.’ This is why attraction ‘love’ can be so fleeting and temporary. It doesn’t have to be if other expressions of love are involved, but it definitely can as we see every day. Commitment to a lifetime together in the flush of attraction at the altar can be gone within weeks and certainly years. With no deeper love to maintain the connection the relationship unravels often in hostility. What happened to the words of love spoken so apparently genuinely at the vicar’s prompting? They were illusory and not founded on real love at all. Attraction love is captured in phrases like I love you when and I love you because . Love in its true and infinite sense does not love only when or because . It just loves infinitely and this love takes appropriately infinite forms. Sharing the same bed is only one of them and not even close to the most important. Love must also be freely given and not demanded because love is only love when it is given freely. ‘I want you to love me’ and ‘I’m trying to love you’ just doesn’t work.

Chemical ‘love’ in which the mind generates chemicals connected to ‘physical’ attraction can indeed be a manifestation of Infinite Love expressing itself through intimate relationships. The point is that ‘physical’ relationships are only one expression of love. We experience love most potently in human discourse as friendship. Couples attracted ‘physically’ that develop a deep friendship can stay together for a lifetime. ‘Physical’ attraction ‘love’ may fade, but friendship love – Infinite Love – never does. Its depth can be seen in this saying: ‘A friend is someone who walks into a room when everyone else is walking out.’ The friend may not agree with what you have done and may even be appalled by it, but they stand at your side anyway and say ‘how can I help?’ Friendship connects through the heart while purely attraction chemical ‘love’ prefers the groin. Okay, it can be both and that’s perfect. If it’s only the latter the clock is already ticking. To articulate this misrepresentation of love we have to employ terms like Infinite Love and unconditional love (without the ‘when’ and ‘because’) to describe what we mean. If we only love ‘when’ and ‘because’ we don’t really love at all. That is not love. It’s a contractual arrangement of cause and effect – you do this and you get that in return. Sign here. Infinite Love is both cause and effect. It has no ‘when’ or ‘because’. The nicest and most loving of people can be arseholes sometimes and real love goes on loving despite not liking the behaviour. I am not saying that people should stay in a close relationship with someone being constantly unpleasant. I mean to realise that they do what they do because love is absent both for others and themselves. Evil is the absence of love by the evil-doer for themselves and those they affect. I have spent 30 years exposing the psychopaths directing human society, but I don’t feel hatred towards them. What would be the point for a start? Hatred would affect me, not them, and distort my own perception of reality and wavefield state. What you hate you become and what you fight you become and we see this everywhere there is hatred and perceived ‘resistance’. Your hate makes a wavefield entanglement with what you hate and the same with what you fight. If I hated the Cult I would make a wave connection with the mega-hate that is the Cult. You become what you lovelessly oppose through this wavefield (information) interaction and entanglement. Look at all the ‘anti-fascists’ who behave like fascists as a perfect example of what I mean. Withdrawing love from those we don’t agree with changes nothing and condemns us to more of the same.

Anti-hate Anti-love

The demise of love (though there is still seriously plenty hidden from the daily headlines) can be seen in the ubiquitous ‘anti-hate’ movement in all its apparently endless and constantly replicating forms. Note they are not ‘pro-love’ groups, but ‘anti-hate’, and ‘anti-hate’ is not love. ‘Anti-haters’ attack perceived ‘haters’ while having hate on their faces and violence on their minds. Other ‘anti-haters’, including many ultra-Zionist groups, set out to crush their targets financially, legally and by deleting their freedom of speech. Their closed hearts allow their hatred free-reign while couched in the virtue-signalled hypocrisy of opposing hate. Where is the love in such groups? ‘Anti-hate’ is not love – it’s just another term for hate. The fact that the Cult in the shadows with a malevolent agenda for humanity is covertly funding and orchestrating these anti-hate hate groups is no coincidence. For the few to impose their will on billions requires the billions to be divided, and so ruled, and to be manipulated to enslave each other. The Cult achieves this by creating groups, factions and belief systems that can be played off against each other in violent conflict and battles for supremacy. ‘Identity politics’ is the latest version of the technique that religion has served so well throughout human history. What are identity politics and the associated Climate Change Cult if not modern-day religions that the manipulators seek to be one religion through what they call ‘intersectionality’? This is defined as: ‘The complex, cumulative way in which the effects of multiple forms of discrimination (such as racism, sexism, and classism) combine, overlap, or intersect especially in the experiences of marginalised individuals or groups.’ This means from the manipulators point of view: Play different identity groups against each other on detail, but also unite them behind a common goal (your goal) of overturning society and imposing your long-planned blueprint for global centralised control and tyranny. Take the blinkers off and you see that very world emerging before our eyes day after day, especially through the Climate Cult founded on the human-caused global warming hoax, and more than anything the ‘virus pandemic’ scam I will be exposing in detail later. To secure the desired outcome you must create division and conflict and to do that you need an absence of love. In other words you need to transfer the psychopathic mentality of Cult manipulators to the target population which means sucking love out of human discourse in the way that love has been sucked out of Cult discourse. You transfer your mentality to your targets and make them an extension of you. Conflicts and injustices that plague human society are founded on the absence of love and its key components like empathy, the fail-safe mechanism in human interaction. Empathy is: ‘The ability to share someone else’s feelings or experiences by imagining what it would be like to be in that person’s situation.’ If you do this and feel something of what they must be feeling in the light of your actions those actions will change. If you can’t feel empathy then anything goes. You have no emotional consequence no matter what the extremes of your behaviour. We don’t have to feel what others feel indefinitely. That would just drain us and mirror their energetic state. It takes only a brief empathic connection to either change our own behaviour or support someone affected by others. Without these key aspects of love such as empathy and compassion the Cult is emotionally free to drive its agenda for humanity. The Cult can be described in these terms: The absence of love . I have long referred to Cult personnel as psychopaths and that is spot-on accurate when the foundation trait of a psychopath is … the absence of empath y which is the absence of love .

Loveless ‘money’

Figure 107: Control money in the world as currently structured and you largely control freedom by controlling choice. (Image by Gareth Icke.)

The global banking system created by the Cult is, as you would expect, psychopathic as an extension of its creators’ mentality. It is a manifestation of the absence of love and could not exist in its current form with an infusion of love. Banking is an organised crime network based on lending people ‘money’ that doesn’t exist (except in theory) called ‘credit’ and charging interest on it. ‘Credit’ is illusory ‘money’ or figures on a screen that banks are allowed to create out of fresh air through something called fractional reserve lending. In simple language this means they can lend ‘money’ they don’t actually have through a conjuring trick called ‘credit’ and control those they can lure into their lair of debt and criminal activity. The overwhelming majority of money in circulation begins life with private banks issuing fake ‘money’ called ‘credit’. The Cult created-and-controlled banking system has the power to decide how much ‘money’ is in circulation by how many loans of ‘credit’ that it makes. This, in turn, dictates if we have an economic boom or collapse. Take ‘money’ out of circulation by reducing the availability of credit and you make it impossible for many to repay loans. There is not enough ‘money’, theoretical or otherwise, in circulation to do that no matter how hard debtors may work. Remember they called the economic collapse after 2008 the ‘credit crunch’. When people default because of the actions of the banking and financial system the same system can seize the possessions offered as collateral on the loan of ‘credit’. In this way tangible wealth is constantly accumulated in exchange for non-existent ‘money’. It’s an incredible scam which political parties never challenge when it is a very foundation of human control and enslavement. Why do they never commit to a country creating its own money interest free and lending that to the population interest free? Simple – the Cult with its tentacles throughout finance and politics does not want that to happen and in my experience most politicians don’t understand how banking works anyway. I expose all this in great detail in other books and its coldly-calculated effect is to entrap the population in debt which many can’t repay. When that happens the bankers get their debtors’ wealth in the form of their home, business, land and possessions in exchange for a ‘loan’ that does not exist except as a computer file – ‘credit’. The virus ‘pandemic’ hoax has offered the banks and financial system the opportunity to send in the hounds and vultures like never before to tear at the entrails of human misery taking their homes, businesses and resources for not paying back ‘credit’ loans amid the global financial catastrophe which Cult actions through idiot governments instigated. This is by calculated design, not random chance. This credit deception has been happening for many centuries and has led to the wealth of the world being stolen from the population by a microscopic few. Hence we have the ‘One-percent’. Control ‘money’ (especially its theoretical creation in the form of ‘credit’) and you control choice which means you control freedom or rather delete it. Freedom is the ability to make choices and in today’s Cult-created structure of human interaction ‘money’ (who has it and who doesn’t) dictates who has choice and who doesn’t … who has freedom and who doesn’t (Fig 107 ). Ponder that in the light of the events of 2020. Choice-dictatorship is enforced by banks and other financial money-controllers such as hedge funds and private equity operations. We return to love and the absence of it. Could anyone coming from a place of love ever conceive, let alone impose, such a system of financial control purely for personal gain, power and omnipotence? Empathy would prevent them. Could they throw families onto the street for the inability to repay loans of ‘credit’ that do not, have never, and will never exist except as a concept? Could bankers even do this to families in properties the bank did not lend ‘money’ to buy? This happened to so many after the crash of 2008 when banks and corrupt court systems forged documentation to secure eviction from homes with which they had absolutely no contractual connection. Love would never and could never do that. Psychopaths (the absence of love) most certainly could and get a sexual high for doing so. Here we have a very pillar of human control – the financial system dictating choice and thus freedom – which is built from its foundations on the absence of love.

Designer ‘love’

Figure 108: Entertainment – yes. Everything else – illusion.

Then there is what I call personalised or designer ‘love’ when you have genuine empathy with those around you like family and friends while not extending that to anyone beyond that circle. You see this when those with family or other connections attract empathy for their plight while those being bombed on the other side of the world do not. I have seen the ‘love your family’ mindset cheering or even demanding the mass bombing of other families far away just as I constantly see anti-haters seeking to crush and destroy those they don’t agree with. These are all examples of designer ‘love’ which basically means ‘loving’ only those close to you or those that think like you do. This is not Infinite Love. It is finite illusory love. Religion is a most potent example in which there is (illusory) ‘love’ between fellow believers and hostility for those that worship another version of ‘God’ through some other ritualistic label. India and Pakistan are centres for mutually-hostile religions that dictate who you must love (in theory) and hate. I say in theory because if you ‘love’ people identifying with one label and hate those of another then you don’t love anyone in its real sense. How can we truly love if we don’t grasp what love is? We can track designer love and empathy into sport where some people following one soccer team hate followers of another for the blasphemy of supporting the ‘wrong’ group of players kicking a bag of wind about trying to direct it into a net. I am not knocking football as a form of entertainment – I used to be a footballer. I am saying we have become so caught in the illusion of human life that we decide who we like, love and hate, on the basis of what colour shirts we cheer? I live not far from two football clubs on the English south coast, Portsmouth and Southampton, which require a big police presence when they play to deal with the fact that many supporters of both sides hate each other. Why? One group supports Portsmouth and the other supports Southampton. Er, that’s it. I don’t support either club and yet if I went to one of their matches I could decide which group loves me and hates me simply by wearing a scarf in the colours of one of the teams. What madness (Fig 108 ). The absence of love tends to trigger madness (extreme imbalance) because love is balance – the balance of everything.

Wherever there is imbalance, and human society is often at the extreme end, the way to rebalance is always love. Take any situation of conflict, violence and discord (imbalance) and an infusion of love will turn it around – rebalance. We can observe the imbalanced madness that only love can heal in the endless wars between factions of the human family. We are points of attention in the same stream of Infinite Awareness and in the illusion of separateness we fight and compete to reach some illusory outcome. We are eternally exploring forever forever and the ‘baddy’ today may be the ‘goody’ tomorrow. There is no ‘outcome’, only current experience. Ponder on any ‘outcome’ and you’ll see that it is only a temporary step to the next step (‘outcome’) which is a temporary step to the next step (‘outcome’). There are no ‘outcomes’, only experiences following each other like waves of the ocean. Oh, but I must ‘get somewhere’? I must ‘be someone’? You are already everywhere. You are already everyone and everything. You may like to experience something, but that’s not the same as feeling the need to ‘get somewhere’ and ‘be someone’ when you are already everywhere and everything. People are so busy and focused trying to ‘get somewhere’ and ‘be someone’ that they miss the experience of the only moment that exists – the NOW. We miss what is happening NOW when our perception is enslaved in the illusory ‘past’ (regret, resentment) and pulled into the illusory ‘future’ (I gotta be someone, I gotta get somewhere). The loss of this understanding – the systematic loss thanks to the Cult – is indivisible from the absence of love through which expanded awareness speaks to us. It is true that we can’t be all things to all people and it is understandable that we feel the closest connection to those literally closest to us. That doesn’t mean we can’t have empathy with those outside our circle and care about the freedom, justice and plight of others though we may not know their names. I have heard the term ‘compassion fatigue’. Compassion is love and love knows no limits and certainly has no fatigue. We can love and care for our families and still stand up for people far away of different races, religions and colour of face. Martin Luther King said:

Injustice anywhere is a threat to justice everywhere. We are caught in an inescapable network of mutuality, tied in a single garment of destiny. Whatever affects one directly, affects all indirectly.

This is indeed literally true on multiple levels of reality. When you strip away the illusions and the labels that underpin those illusions what is left is the understanding that we are all each other – points of attention in the same infinite flow of consciousness having a brief experience called ‘human’.

Source of love

The love that I am describing is more than empathy and compassion. It is everything and I mean everything that we need to transform a prison to a paradise. Love is the very fabric of existence. Much of humanity has been disconnected from its influence by a malevolent network which is a Death Cult because it has itself been disconnected from the influence of love for longer and more profoundly than anyone. To understand this disconnection we come back to The Void, The One, The Source, The All That Is in Awareness of Itself – whatever term you wish to use. Some will prefer ‘God’, but that has become so discredited by religion that it has no meaning to me. I say it’s a grotesque misrepresentation of reality to identify The One with the angry, bloodthirsty ‘God’ of the Old Testament; the ‘God’ that would sacrifice his ‘son’ on a cross in the New Testament; or demand the beheading of ‘infidels’ in the extremes of Islam. Religious fantasies have served the Cult agenda magnificently in replacing the source of love in the human heart with a mythical ‘God’ of violence, imposition and self-obsession which religious factions can claim for their own. Factions following this hideous version of ‘God’ can then be manipulated into conflict and battles for supremacy that have plagued, divided and ruled humanity for so long. I have been writing for decades that the Cult was the force behind the creation of religion and we can also understand why the Cult installed a God-free version of mainstream ‘science’ to dominate the perception of reality in most of those who reject overt religion. Either way, The One has been written out of the script and this has been vital for the Cult’s absence-of-love agenda to block the influence of The One on human perception and behaviour. I have described my own experience of the ‘Dazzling Darkness’ of silence and stillness from which ‘Creation’ emerges from the All Possibility of The One . Creation is the realm of frequency and vibration while the Creator is stillness and silence. The foundation of all existence is the All-Knowing, All Possibility, of stillness and silence while sound and form are only possibilities within All Possibility. People experience stillness and silence in states of deep meditation through which they can access ‘knowingness’ – the All -knowingness of The One . ‘Quiet contemplation’ is a similar experience and we speak of the stillness of the heart and a quiet mind. Some say that yoga and martial arts like Tai chi take them into quiet mind states. I call my own experience of this ‘daydreaming’ when I allow my mind to open and flow without the mind-chatter and focus of five-sense attention to keep the door shut. These states take me into the stillness and silence from which knowing emerges. Funny, when I saw the dictionary definition of daydreaming it offered an example of the term in a sentence: ‘He never paid attention in class and seemed to be in a permanent daydream.’ That was me at school to a tee and most of my life to this day. The One is the source of Creation, the observer of Creation and the experiencer of Creation via expressions of itself like you and me and everything . As ‘Shakespeare’ (or whoever it was) wrote:

All the world’s a stage, and all the men and women merely players: they have their exits and their entrances; and one man in his time plays many parts …

The nature of those ‘parts’ is decided by the strength of connection we have with The One while we are ‘on the stage’. These ‘parts’ are our ‘persona’ or actor’s mask. When people think of ‘God’ they tend to look to the sky (the symbolism of sitting on a cloud). This is a trait that follows from a belief in all-that-you-see-is-all-that-there-is. If you think you can see all there is to see in the ‘space’ before you then ‘God’ must be ‘up there’ if you can’t see ‘him’. When by contrast you know that your range of sight is only a band of frequency that your Body-Mind can decode then the concept of ‘God’ moves from ‘up there’ to ‘in here’ – a force that shares the same ‘space’ that we do beyond our range of vision. The One is not ‘up-there’. The One interpenetrates everything. From this perspective we can rightly say that ‘God is everywhere’ and ‘love is everywhere’. Yes, they are. Love is everywhere because The One is the source of love and interpenetrates everything. Love as in Infinite Love and unconditional love that is.

The heart – gateway to The One

Figure 109: The heart vortex in the centre of the chest – the gateway to ‘home’.

There is a level of Infinite Realty – including those in the Cult – which is the love of The One . Cult initiates have closed themselves off from its influence and so they behave as they do. Our prime connection (or disconnection) with The One while in Body-Mind experience is through an open or closed heart vortex, or heart ‘chakra’ (Fig 109 ). Not coincidentally this is the balance-point chakra in the main sequence of seven. We feel love in all its forms, even purely attraction love, in the centre of the chest and we hear this described in terms of ‘I love you with all of my heart’ and ‘You make my heart flutter’. The heart chakra through which we can connect with the love that is The One is the origin for the symbolism of the heart representing love. This symbol appears to relate to the ‘physical’ heart when the real connection to love is through the spiritual or energetic heart (‘heart of hearts’). Even so there is a pivotal link between the two with the wavefield heart (chakra) impacting on its holographic projection or ‘physical’ heart. When the heart chakra is closed or energetically stressed through extremes of grief this can so affect the holographic heart that people do indeed ‘die of a broken heart’. From this we can appreciate why, in a world awash with systematic, Cult-induced stress, frustration, anxiety and fear that heart disease is one of our biggest killers. Stress, frustration, anxiety and fear are all dense wavefields that impact on the heart chakra vortex – ‘my heart aches’, and ‘I have fear in my heart’. The language is peppered with sayings and phrases that tell the truth about the spiritual heart while appearing to pertain only to the ‘physical’ heart:

Follow your heart; listen to your heart; heart of gold; heart of stone; change of heart; heart-to-heart; lose heart; heavy heart; joy in the heart; tug on your heart strings; big heart; all heart; no heart; from the heart; heart goes out; heart in the right place; from the bottom of the heart; heart sinks; take heart; young at heart; sick at heart; goodness of the heart; have a heart.

We also speak of ‘hearts and minds’ and ‘heart and soul’. All these terms and many more reflect different states of the heart chakra and its connection, or disconnection, with the source of love – The One . We also speak of ‘hearts and minds’ and ‘heart and soul’. These describe profound truths in the sense that they say heart and minds, heart and soul. The heart chakra is our prime connection from Body-Mind to Soul and The One . When that is closed or diminished enough the influence on perception and self-identity of The One (love) consequently also diminishes and we become isolated in the Bubble of purely Body-Mind. As the Cult would say: Gotcha! Many people have a feeling of being ‘lost’. They have an emptiness they cannot explain and a yearning for something ‘missing’ that they can’t put into words. These feelings are widespread and come from the loss of a conscious connection through the heart to The One (Fig 110 ).

Love is more than human ‘love’

Figure 110: Open heart – opens to The One.

Figure 111: The head thinks.

Figure 112: The heart knows.

Think about love and most people will think about relationships in terms of true love, unrequited love, and so on. Love in the sense that I am describing – The One love – is far more than this and that’s another central reason why the Cult seeks to close our hearts. The heart chakra is our connection to The One and The One is not only the source of love as we perceive that word; it is All-Possibility and … All-Knowing . Many ancient cultures considered the heart to be the connection to real intelligence, the Soul and the Source of All That Is. If this is true then the heart must also be our connection to this innate or knowing intelligence and research is showing this to be exactly the case as I will shortly explain. We must first identify the massive difference between Body-Mind ‘intellect’ and the intelligence of the heart with its connection to The One . This can be defined by the gargantuan difference between thinking and knowing. Body-Mind thinks because it doesn’t know and has to try to work it out through information processing in the brain. Knowing does not originate in the brain. It comes from the heart and the connection to The One . Verbal language and phrases tell the truth about the heart and so does body-language. When we say ‘I’m thinking’ we point to the head which is where the thinking is taking place (Fig 111 ); when we say ‘I know’ our hands go to the heart (chakra) where the knowing is coming from (Fig 112 ). Body is an extension of mind and what the mind is percieving the body is doing . Body-language can therefore discern a person’s mental and emotion state. Knowing is also called intuition which doesn’t think – it knows . When we intuitively know something we haven’t spent hours working it all out with the brain. It comes to us in an instant in one whole without a sequence of thoughts or dots leading to a conclusion. We say: ‘I don’t know why I know, I just know .’ Isolated Body-Mind wants all the details and the research papers to ‘prove’ what you ‘know’. People talk about something being ‘counter-intuitive’ when what they really mean is counter-programmed-perception.

Prison of the intellect

Human society celebrates the intellect while scorning expanded awareness of which the intellect is only a fractional part. It follows from this that professional ‘sceptics’ who demand five-sense ‘proof’ for everything are utterly dominated by the intellect. An example is the intellectual humanist movement which is founded on a belief in this-world-is-all-there-is with no continuation of consciousness. Humanism is defined this way by the Concise Routledge Encyclopedia of Philosophy :

… a commitment to the perspective, interests and centrality of human persons; a belief in reason and autonomy as foundational aspects of human existence; a belief that reason, scepticism and the scientific method are the only appropriate instruments for discovering truth and structuring the human community; a belief that the foundations for ethics and society are to be found in autonomy and moral equality …

Figure 113: The human perceptual illusion

Mainstream science and academia as you would expect are overwhelmingly directed by this mentality that cannot perceive beyond the five senses. How can you discover something when there are colossal areas in which you refuse to look? The foundation of five-sense intellectualism is the concept of ‘reason’ which is believed to be the arbiter of truth by mainstream science, academia and The System in general. Yet most of what is called ‘reason’ is only perception derived from limitation of awareness – ignorance – that comes with a closed mind. Mainstream Everything’s version of ‘reason’ includes ‘rational’ and logical’. Their dictionary definitions reveal the perceptual feedback loop that maintains the state of ignorance: Reason is defined as ‘to determine or conclude by logical thinking’; logic is ‘a system of reasoning ’; and rational is ‘based on or agreeable to reason ’. What is reason really? It is a process of assessing information on the basis of perceived (programmed) credibility and fact to reach a conclusion about how things are. The credibility and limitation of your ‘reason’ depends purely on how wide you are prepared to spread your explorational net. If it is only cast within the imposed Postage Stamp ‘normal’ you will get Postage Stamp ‘reason’ that can be, and invariably is, a load of old tosh (Fig 113 ). ‘Reason’ of this kind brings perceptual enslavement and never enlightenment. Blaise Pascal, the 17th century French philosopher and mathematician, said: ‘The end point to rationality is to demonstrate the limits of rationality.’ It takes those with open minds and expanded awareness to see what those limits are and to go beyond them. Here’s an example from a Central American shaman:

We are perceivers, we are awareness; we are not objects; we have no solidity. We are boundless … We, or rather our reason, forget this and thus we entrap the totality of ourselves in a vicious circle from which we rarely emerge in our lifetime.

These are perceptions that come when you step off the Postage Stamp of ‘rational’ and ‘reason’. This is why Cult-created ‘education’ teaches children and young people throughout their entire formative years the myopic illusion of mainstream ‘reason’ that entraps the totality of themselves in a vicious circle from which they rarely emerge in their human lifetime. Limitations of mainstream science in grasping the nature of reality mean that once again if it can’t explain intuition from a five-sense perspective then it can’t exist or be happening. Open your mind a few notches and it can be explained. Intuitive knowing comes from a heart connection to expanded awareness and The One and through wave connections to other fields of information. The latter can be a wave frequency connection to a loved one which allows you to know what is happening to them and a similar connection to wavefields that we experience as events and happenings, current and ‘historic’. People and situations are all wavefields that connect with The Field and through this conduit we can attune with that information in The Field, the energetic sea or Cosmic Wi-Fi, and access awareness in the form of ‘knowing’. We are told it is a mystery why animals can sense when an earthquake or bad weather is coming despite the lack of five-sense evidence. It’s not a mystery. Animals that don’t go to school, watch the media or have a Smartphone retain their natural sensitivity to changes in The Field which all humans are supposed to have. They sense wave disturbances in the Field that indicate trouble coming and take evasive action where possible. What is this except a form of ‘intuition’ or knowing? My books since the early 1990s are packed with information that has subsequently happened or is happening. Until the mid-90s I would research five-sense information and come to conclusions about what was going on. Since then I have intuitively known what was going on and the five-sense confirmation in the form of facts and research have followed. Had it been the other way round I could never have connected the dots over such an array of subjects. It’s the knowing that connects the dots and five-sense research that adds the detail. Studies by the HeartMath Institute in the United States that researches the nature of the heart and heart chakra have shown that when someone is in heart-mind balance enormous creativity can be unleashed and that must be so. Open hearts in energetic harmony connect with the flow of The One which is … All Possibility and so all creativity. Closed hearts do not (Fig 114 ).

No worries, mate

Figure 114: Closed hearts got us here. Open hearts will take us home. See Neil Hague colour section.

Another aspect of Infinite Love accessed through the heart is that it isn’t burdened, blocked and limited by fear. Humanity is so often frozen by fear – fear of losing, of winning, of failing, of consequences, of death, of the unknown, of what others think. The list could go on for pages. Fear is the bottom-line of how the Cult controls and direct billions worldwide (pandemic hoax, I rest my case). We are given endless reasons to fear and to fear each other. Every day there seems to be something else we are told to fear. Once it was fear of not finding food or an enemy coming over the hill. Today the list seems to be without limit – fear this, fear that, fear everything. We have the term ‘culture of fear’ to describe the manipulation of fear to secure control. Fear in totality leads to people looking to authority for protection from what they fear while fear of each other is the constant creator of division and conflict. The Cult wants the global population to look to its police state for protection and in doing so to accept the ever-increasing imposition of the Cult. What happened on 9/11 and in other Cult-orchestrated terror attacks is designed to manipulate people to demand, or at least not challenge, the erosion of their own freedom in the name of protection from ‘terrorists’. These ‘terrorists’ invariably turn out to be controlled by the same force that is imposing the new laws to ‘protect us’ from them. I coined the term ‘Problem-Reaction-Solution’ (PRS) to describe this technique of covertly creating a problem, getting the public response of ‘do something’, and then overtly offering the (Cult) ‘solution’ which changes society in the way that you want. The virus hoax is a glaring example which I will explore in detail later. There is another version that I call No -Problem-Reaction-Solution in which you don’t need a real problem only the perception of one – ‘weapons of mass destruction’ in Iraq and once again the virus fraud. See my book The Trigger for a detailed exposure of this with regards to 9/11 and what it has been used to justify ever since. The key element in PRS (or ‘false flag’) events is to instil fear in the population which then makes them open to the ‘solution’. It is well-known in mind-control circles that fear and trauma makes people more open to hypnotic suggestion. Every day the media is brimming with reasons to fear including fear of each other. This is essential to securing mass control by setting the population at war with itself. The sense of division is crucially underpinned by the perception that our five-sense labels are who we really are. When we open our heart to the flow of Infinite Love and expanded awareness from The One our perceptions transform and these Cult techniques no longer work. We are not diminished by fear when Infinite Love knows there is nothing to fear. Whatever is currently happening is only a brief experience for Body-Mind while the True ‘I’ is observing the experience with the potential to change it. Infinite Love – The One – will always do what it knows to be right and no amount of manipulation, fear of consequences or anything else will make any difference. To consider consequences for doing what you know to be right is to consider the possibility of not doing what you know to be right. Infinite Love will never do that. I have never feared and will never fear what might happen to me for doing what I know to be right. More than that I know that if I flow with my heart such consequences will not manifest anyway. Only if I feared them could I attract them through wave entanglement. People are described as having a ‘faint heart’ when there is no such thing. A ‘faint mind’, yes, but the heart in its power is never ‘faint’.

Figure 115: Why judging people by their temporary and illusory labels is so crazy.

Love in its true and infinite sense is how we connect with expanded states of awareness, innate intelligence, wisdom, knowing, intuitive insight, courage and that which is beyond courage – the absence of fear. In fact fear is merely the absence of love when love in its purest and most powerful state is the absence of fear. What is the world of today and a long time ‘past’ except the absence of expanded states of awareness, innate intelligence, wisdom, knowing, intuitive insight, courage and that which is beyond courage – the absence of fear? All these are aspects of Infinite Love flowing from The One . There is an absence of love in human society, but that doesn’t mean ‘non-existent’ and far from it. We witness amazing acts of empathy and compassion in examples of personal and collective love. We see them in courage and self-sacrifice and they offer an insight into the Infinite Love that I am describing. Such acts are not the norm, however, and ‘it’s not my problem’ is a far more frequent response. It is also true, and with profound consequences for human wellbeing, that such acts of love are most rare in the seats and positions of economic, political and administrative power. The Cult has made certain of that and this must change if its goal of total human control is to be thwarted. That endgame is not even decades away as things stand and it most urgently needs to be rolled back. (I wrote that and 85 percent of this book before the Cult seized astonishing levels of global power through its manufactured virus scare). To impose its control the Cult must maintain the delusion of apartness to allow divide and rule to run riot. It is in our power any time we choose to bring down those walls of illusion and see the truth on the other side – the truth that we are all love and always have been despite often wearing heavy disguise. We have forgotten and been encouraged and manipulated to forget. What has followed is a world that reflects this amnesia, but now there is a stirring in the hearts and minds of forgotten love. Many are remembering and the more that do so the quicker the illusions will fade and fall and a new reality must form from this new collective perception based on the understanding that we are each other (Fig 115 ). Love is who we are. The absence of love is where we are. So what is The Answer ? The question answers itself

Science of love

Figure 116: Different mental and emotional states create frequency coherence and incoherence – connection and disconnection from expanded awareness.

The HeartMath Institute was launched in California in 1991 to study the impact of the heart on human behaviour and psychological wellbeing along with much else. The Institute has since published a considerable body of information to confirm that the heart is far more than it appears to be. More than that the chakra heart and ‘physical heart’ are the central core of human psychology, perception and health (harmony) in all its forms. If heart energy (love) is flowing in harmony all is well and when it’s not the trouble starts in many and various ways. Love is in one aspect the balance of all things and you would expect HeartMath research to confirm that when the heart is open to the flow of love this brings balance to the systems and information processing of Body-Mind. We are told that the brain is the governor when in fact it is the heart which communicates its balance or imbalance to the brain to process as perception. When I talk of the heart in this context I am referring for simplicity to both the chakra heart and its holographic ‘physical’ projection with the chakra heart the key to it all. HeartMath research has established that when the heart, brain and central nervous system are in harmony, or ‘coherence’, the person enters an expanded state of consciousness and the opposite happens when there is disharmony or incoherence. I say this happens because the connection via the heart to the Soul and The One ceases to communicate the true magnitude of its awareness, innate intelligence and balance (love) to the systems, psychological and ‘physical’, of Body-Mind. Other studies reveal that with heart-mind harmony we enter states of consciousness known as ‘non-local’ or ‘outside the bounds of time and space’. Isolated Body-Mind lives in its Bubble of ‘time’ while the heart lives in the NOW. People also think with more clarity with heart-mind balance. Energetic distortion and chaos that results from heart-mind imbalance (like trauma and stress) stops them from ‘thinking straight’. For obvious reasons the Cult does not want its targets to be influenced by The One through the heart connection and seeks to isolate human brain perception (in the world and of the world) from heart perception (in the world, but not of the world). These two perceptual states are so immensely different. The Cult’s modus operandi is to structure human society to ensure maximum fear, stress, anxiety, depression, hatred, regret, resentment, inner and outer conflict etc., or what I call low-vibrational emotion. This can also be accurately described as disharmonious and incoherent ongoing emotion that I have seen referred to as ‘white noise emotion’ which is always there in the background. HeartMath studies have confirmed that this creates incoherence in heart-brain-nervous system communication and suppresses expanded states of consciousness (Fig 116 ). Those in a state of energetic (information) incoherence withdraw perceptually into the Bubble. The more fear, stress, anxiety, depression, hatred, regret, resentment, inner and outer conflict, the Cult can generate the deeper perceptual enslavement will be as people are entrapped in the illusions of the five-senses. Heart-mind coherence or incoherence has a central impact on psychological and ‘physical’ health.

Figure 117: Heart consciousness connects and sees everything as One.

Figure 118: Head consciousness disconnects and sees everything as apart from everything else.

HeartMath researchers speak of ‘bio-communication’ or energetic transfer between open hearts. I am calling this wave entanglement. Heart waves (love, harmony, Soul, The One ) connect with like waves in others to establish a Oneness connection of perceptual unity. This happens between people; people and animals; and people, animals, and the ‘natural world’ (Fig 117 ). When heart waves are weak or incoherent the perceptual unity of Oneness is lost to the domination of brain wave connections which, without the influence of the heart, present everything as apart from anything else (Fig 118 ). You can see from this even more profoundly why the Cult targets the heart.

Figure 119: ‘Human’ is a point of attention focused within a tiny band of frequency, but we can also open our minds to connect with expanded awareness and see our reality from a very different perspective. (Image Neil Hague.)

It can’t directly affect love in its true sense flowing from The One through the heart. The frequency is so high that Cultists and their non-human masters can make no connection. They behave as they do because they have closed themselves off from its influence and are thus described as being ‘heartless’ and from the ‘dark side’. Even so they are still expressions of The One that can return to perceptual unity whenever they make that choice. While they are currently the ‘baddies’ in the stage show there’s another costume waiting for them to play another part. As things stand, given their inability to affect love directly, they must work to block its influence on their human targets. They do this by manipulating human life to generate maximum low-vibrational emotion which closes the heart chakra channel and creates energetic distortion and incoherence between the heart, brain and central nervous system to isolate Body-Mind in the Cult’s perceptual lair. Crucial to this is securing mass ignorance of true identity. Once that veil lifts we have the power to reconnect through the heart with our Soul and The One and for the Cult the game is over. We then speak and act from the heart and not only Body-Mind. With that everything changes. Once the heart opens to The One you see the unity of everything and not apartness. You see the experience of individuality and also the infinite stream of consciousness which connects us all. You see that judging people by their race and labels is so ridiculous and no one does this more obsessively than ‘antiracists’, ironically. I can speak from personal experience. My conscious ‘awakening’ in 1990 and 91 began the process of opening my heart triggered by the kundalini experience. From that moment, and ever more as it has progressed, I have seen the connections and unity (The One ) that join all the apparent dots (people, experiences, everything). Heart-opening does not mean you suddenly start acting ‘perfectly’ (what is ‘perfect’ anyway?). It means you start to be influenced by something greater than only Body-Mind and your state of awareness expands. As this progresses you see that the dots are only different points of attention and awareness within a unified whole (Fig 119 ). Opening your heart doesn’t mean we never regress into isolated Body-Mind mode. Instead this becomes rarer the more your heart enters the formulation of perception.

Follow your heart

Figure 120: The Bubble seems to make sense until it bursts. Then the ‘real world’ within the Bubble appears as it really is – lunacy.

What changed my life more than anything came in the early 1990s. I decided that when my heart and head (intuition and thought) were at odds I was always going with my heart/intuition. The decision got me into some interesting situations, experiences and scrapes, including mass ridicule, and the brain screams: ‘See what happens when you don’t listen to me!!!’ Brain-heart conflict blights the life of almost everyone to some extent with their different ways of seeing the world and making decisions. Most people go with their head (‘use your head’) when their heart intuition is urging another direction. Heart doesn’t see reality and situations like the head. It has another perspective on life from a state of expanded awareness not confined to the perceptual ‘norms’ of human Body-Mind society. Follow your heart and you start acting differently to Postage Stamp normal which still the great majority believe (thanks to head perception) to be ‘the real world’. I took the consequences of that in historic levels of ridicule. Fortunately, I’m a stubborn bugger when I choose to be and I wasn’t budging and being absorbed back into the flock. I decided to stick with it and something amazing eventually happens. Your head perspective sees that while following heart intuition can lead to challenges it all works out in the end – and not despite the challenges but because of them. Our greatest gifts are often brilliantly disguised as our worst nightmare. Mass ridicule was the making of me however unpleasant it was to experience. My head (limited awareness) didn’t know what was happening; my heart (expanded awareness) most certainly did. Body-Mind can see to the next turn in the river. Heart can see the whole river from source to sea. Consciousness with which my heart was connecting, and urging apparently strange courses of action, knew that my life would later involve communicating information like shapeshifting people that would attract bucket-loads of ridicule and abuse. For me to put myself through that any concern about what others thought about me or said about me had to be deleted. Mass ridicule appeared to be a nightmare in the experience when it was really a gift to set me free. Such is the difference in perspective of the head and the heart. The head reacts to every happening. The heart plays the long game. For decades now my heart and head have worked in unison and when my heart says do this, go there, my head says ‘Okay, let’s go’. The war is over. Heart and mind become one. Almost everyone starts out in unconsciousness once The System kicks in and the pressure to stay there until the hearse rolls up is 24/7 incessant. No wonder we spend so much of our lives, even all of it, in the Bubble; but we don’t have to . We can all open to expanded awareness any time we want – it’s our natural state – and that’s especially so when the ‘how’ is known (Fig 120 ). I’ll come to that in the final chapter and it’s far simpler than many believe it to be.

Heart-Brain-Belly

Figure 121: The heart field is the most powerful electromagnetic field in the body.

From this background I was not at all surprised to discover that major perception-dictating heart-brain connections have been identified through scientific research and study. Mainstream science has long believed that the brain is the brain and the heart is the heart in another example of the illusion that follows from seeing everything as apart from everything else. The brain has been thought to be the dominant processor of perceptual information when in fact the heart is far more influential than previously believed in the modern era. The heart projects the body’s most powerful electromagnetic field, 5,000 times more powerful than the brain field, and the heart field can be measured several feet from the body (Fig 121 ). You would expect electromagnetic waves to be most powerful from the source of most expanded consciousness. The heart is the body’s biggest source of bio-electricity – up to 60 times more than the brain. Far more communication is passed from heart to brain than in the other direction and the heart is the only organ that can independently send information to the brain. The heart can also act independently from the brain and has its own long and short term memory and nervous system. Sixty-seven percent of heart cells are nerve cells (neuron communicators). It has some 40,000 neurons and a network of neurotransmitters which led to the term ‘heart-brain’. Research has revealed how the heart receives information before the brain and transmits this with its own perception to different parts of the brain which, in turn, communicates its coherence or incoherence back to the heart in a feedback loop. The heart can open the mind and the mind can close the heart. Communications from the heart have particular influence on the frontal areas of the brain that process thinking, reasoning, speech and language, coordination, distinguishing objects, long-term memories, empathy (of course), personality, attention and motivation. The frontal lobe also relates to seeking reward and the brain-chemical dopamine which is mercilessly manipulated by social media platforms such as Facebook (more later). Heart communications have immense influence on the perceptual systems of the brain when they are working in harmony or coherence. These interactions are distorted when the connection is weak or in a state of disharmony.

An open heart and open mind produce a communication feedback loop in which both work and perceive as one. Divisions between brain and heart lead to the contrasting perceptions of ‘What does your head say?’ and ‘What does your heart say?’ There are other perceptual connections to the emotional centre in the abdomen which leads to ‘What does your gut say?’ and ‘What is your gut instinct?’ When heart, brain, gut and nervous system are communicating in harmonic coherence it becomes ‘What do YOU say?’ Unity and Oneness we have lift off. The gut, heart and brain are connected by the vagus nerve which is the longest and most complex of the cranial nerves that emanate from the brain. ‘Vagus’ comes from a Latin word meaning ‘wandering’ which describes its nature and function. Both the vagus and the gut are far more important to human psychological and ‘physical’ health than most imagine and the source of energetic power – ‘fire in the belly’. This is also sabotaged by low-vibrational emotion which we feel in the gut through the belly chakra. You see people with ‘beer gut’ bellies, but at the same time you see the same extended bellies with spiritually-developed people in the East who don’t drink beer. To them the belly is the location of the energetic power and point of perception they call hara or tanden. A six-pack may be the state pursued for ascetic reasons, but is it best for hara? Many people who study these subjects say no. We are ideally looking for a harmonious connection between heart, gut, brain and nervous system to be truly in our power. No, I’m not saying we should drink lots of beer. There is the beer gut and the hara gut. They are not the same. The HeartMath website says of the heart-brain connection:

Research has shown that the heart communicates to the brain in four major ways: neurologically (through the transmission of nerve impulses), biochemically (via hormones and neurotransmitters), biophysically (through pressure waves) and energetically (through electromagnetic field interactions). Communication along all these conduits significantly affects the brain’s activity.

Figure 122: The Earth magnetic field and the body field again reflect the holographic principle.

Heart is love which is balance and waves from an open heart can balance all other systems, mental, emotional, ‘physical’, whatever, and ensure a harmonious connection to the consciousness field of the Earth which leads to a harmonious interaction between humans and nature (Fig 122 ). This balance is reflecting the unity, harmony and Oneness that is love and The One . I have said there is no imbalance or conflict that an infusion of love cannot harmonise and that includes the mental, emotional and biological systems of Body-Mind. The heart balances emotions through its connection to the emotion-regulating amygdala in the brain and the release of hormones. It becomes clear through this central connection between emotion and the heart why stress is such a cause of heart disease (imbalanced wave entanglement and a closing heart chakra impacting on the ‘physical heart’). The oscillation of heart chakra energy, the body wavefield and electrical rhythms of the holographic heart are all connected. Wave imbalance from the heart chakra is transferred to the ‘physical’ heart, but when the chakra opens to love the more powerful and balancing are the energies we exchange with Body-Mind and its emotional processes. Studies have shown that the heart’s feedback loop with emotional states profoundly affects the nature and power of the heart’s electromagnetic field which is diminished by low-vibrational emotion and empowered by others such as love, appreciation, compassion, empathy and joy (‘I have joy in my heart’). We feel fear and anxiety in the gut while love, appreciation, compassion, empathy and joy are all ‘heart-felt’ emotions. This is one more reason for the Cult seeking to generate low-vibrational emotion to close human hearts. Heart waves can be so drawn into energetic density that we have the phrases ‘closed heart’ and ‘heart of stone’ which Cultists seek to manipulate to make humanity the same as them.

Heart is our access point to wisdom – the wisdom of expanded states of consciousness – and wise is the last thing the Cult wants humanity to be. Wisdom sees through the illusion. What is called heart-based living leads to wisdom, intelligence and clarity of perception through connection to expanded awareness and balance between heart, body and mind. I would add a warning here, too, though. I have observed many who believe they are heart-based and advocate the findings of HeartMath research that are certainly not street-wise about the world. Many are in denial of the Cult agenda and avoid exploring information they believe to be ‘negative’. I witnessed this in the movement dubbed ‘New Age’ where I saw the same denial masquerading as being ‘positive’. The Cult is quite happy for people to live in their own ‘be positive’ bubble so long as it allows the Cult free-reign to go about its business unexposed of manipulating the population into anything but heart-based living and ‘positive emotion’. The ‘spiritual’ is a sitting duck without having the streetwise to watch its back. There is nothing more manipulatable than naive genuineness. There will be many ‘heart-based’ people who express compassion for the Earth by supporting action on human-caused climate change and the centralisation of power to ‘save the planet’. This is, however, a Cult-created hoax to justify that very centralisation of global power. There is far more to the heart than just ‘positive emotion’. We must be aware of reality and of that which works so hard to stop us being aware of reality. Ignoring the latter is not wisdom, heart-based or otherwise. It is denial. You don’t have to be ‘negative’ to face reality so we can deal with it and know how the game is being played. Those truly in their hearts can disseminate unpleasant information without being affected in the sense of allowing this to disrupt their own fields and flows. How does The One observe such ‘negativity’ and not be pulled into it? The principle is the same. Since when was knowledge about anything at all ‘negative’? Knowledge is not ‘good’ or ‘bad’, ‘positive’ or ‘negative’. The way it is used, processed and dealt with is what matters. Love is intelligence – all intelligence – and not only the bits that suit us.

From the start

Love and emotions of the heart – or lack of them – can have a profound impact on babies in the womb and after birth. I read the book, Why Love Matters , by the British psychotherapist Dr Sue Gerhardt who documents the connections between the emotional environment and the development of the unborn child with especial emphasis between conception and two years. It is sobering to see images of a child in the womb jumping with shock at parents shouting at each other and there are some cultures which have understood this since ancient times. They demand that no one raises their voice and people remain calm around a pregnant mother. Gerhardt quotes a description of pregnancy in Patagonia in South America:

While a female Patagonian is with child, all disagreeable objects are kept from her; she is awakened by music; they study to divert her with amusements most suitable to her taste; her mind is brightened with joy, without allowing her to grow slothful for want of action …

Sue Gerhardt explains why this is considered important. She describes how the child’s brain systems are developing in the womb and are affected by the mother’s diet and emotions in the form of biochemicals circulating in the mother’s body. The nature of those emotions can seriously impact on the way the child’s systems develop and they can open pathways that later lead to susceptibility to conditions such as ‘anorexia, psychosomatic illness, addiction, antisocial behaviour, personality disorder or depression’. Gerhardt points out that stress in the mother can release certain chemicals in the womb that can produce a propensity for a pot belly later in life (a lot of which is unprocessed stored emotion around the emotion chakra). The child’s environment before birth is showing the child what to expect and its psychological and bodily systems develop in line with that. Gerhardt calls this ‘weather forecasting’. I say the child’s pre-birth and post-birth parental environment and relationship is also one of wave entanglement and the kind of waves being transmitted are triggering in the child through epigenetics which gene functions are activated and which are not. Gerhardt points to the period from conception to two years as ‘uniquely significant’ because this is when ‘the nervous system itself is being established and shaped by experience’. She continues:

During this period how parents behave has as much influence on their child’s emotional make-up as his or her genetic inheritance. Their responses to the baby teach him what his own emotions are and how to manage them. This means that our earliest experiences as babies (and even as foetuses) have much more relevance to our adult selves than many of us realise. It is as babies that we first feel and learn what to do with our feeling, when we start to organise our experience in a way that will affect later behaviour and thinking capacities.

Figure 123:Why children and young people are so targeted by the Cult – they will be the adults of tomorrow that they want to enslave like never before.

You can see this learned behaviour in the response of parents to a child falling over. If you make it a big deal the child will follow that cue and cry. Children scan the faces of their parents for guidance on how to respond. If you act as if it’s no big deal the child will get up and carry on as if nothing had happened. I have witnessed this with my own children and Gerhardt describes how ‘faces with expressions of fear and anger will be registered … and provoke an automatic response’. The Cult knows how a child’s emotional environment locks in brain and emotional pathways that can affect their responses and interactions for the rest of their life (Fig 123 ). It doesn’t want emotionally balanced and heart-centred people. They are far more difficult to divide and rule. The Cult financial system and Cult agents and gofers in government make life for parents as hard as possible to make the child’s formative years as stressful as possible. Parents stressed, frustrated, anxious and fearful about paying the rent and affording food are dumping that emotion on their children with all the potential effects that Gerhardt lays out. The saying goes: ‘Give me a child until he is seven and I will show you the man.’ Many career mothers continue their stress-ridden lifestyle right up to birth and then continue as soon as possible afterwards. What does that do to the child? The Cult, as I have detailed in other books, was behind the rise of feminism to pressure women into careers when they would otherwise be at home with their children in the vital early years. The idea was to disconnect parents from their children for all the reasons detailed here and to be able to tax two people in a household instead of just one. I am not saying that women should not have careers. That’s none of my business and of course it is right that women have sought to free themselves from a male-dominated society. The Cult is expert in piggy-backing on legitimate grievances and twisting them to its benefit. I am only pointing out the downside when children are young and emphasising that the Cult is seeking at every opportunity to divide parents from their children so the state can control their formative years. This has now become ever more extreme with parental rights being eroded in every direction through dictatorial schools and satanic-like social services literally stealing children from caring parents for the most spurious reasons. This is happening all over the world because it’s a global Cult agenda. What does being wrenched from loving parents do to a child? We will see later in the book where this is meant to lead.

Back to love

Sue Gerhardt notes that babies are born with a brain only a quarter the size of an adult’s and much more incomplete than other mammals: ‘… Human care in early childhood (and beyond) plays a much bigger role in shaping the brain.’ The Cult is aware of this and sets out literally to mould the minds of children to become the adults it wants them to be. Many parents have no choice except to keep working to pay the bills and this is not to cast blame on parents trying to financially survive and do their best for their children. The system is against them – on purpose – but we should not forget that studies have concluded that parental hostility affects the emotional development of a child more than poverty. I often wonder why some parents even have children at all when I see the lack of love and care they have for them. Rich families send their children away to residential private school from an early age and what message does that give them with regard to love and rejection? These are the kids that mostly grow up to run The System after a childhood that closed their hearts to survive emotionally. Can I come home this weekend, daddy? Not this time, son, I’m playing golf. Such parents see their kids as appendages and not as unique expressions of life – ‘My children spent childhood prepping for exams and got a place at Oxford; I’m so proud they did what I told them.’ Their childhood is stolen and their future decreed – you’ll be a lawyer, banker, politician – by parents who exploit their children to be a symbol of their own perceived ‘success’. Whenever you hear ‘I only want the best for you’ it usually means ‘I only want the best for me ’ or ‘What I say is best’. Don’t stand for it, kids. Be what you choose to be. I have met many people over the years brought up this way and they are emotionally broken despite the outward facade. Most of them then treat their own children the same by sending them to residential schools when love is all they need. Well-off parents often say they give their children everything they want – money no object. What is missed is the key gift that money can’t buy and doesn’t have to because it’s always available for free: Love.

Other children are told they are stupid, useless and idiots by parents who couldn’t give a shit. The imprint can last a lifetime. Children are far more suggestable in their formative years and the Cult targets the young to ‘suggest’ what it wants them to believe for their entire lives. A teacher told me how he went to the home of a ‘problem child’ at school and found both parents in a pissed-up coma while a toddler played with their empty bottles. No wonder the kid was a ‘problem child’. The emotion-processing amygdala in the brain which regulates pain, pleasure, fear, anger, grief and joy is formed within 15 weeks of conception and is affected by the mother’s emotional state in that period and beyond. Once an emotional pattern is encoded it can produce ‘press enter’ reactions in which a stimulus (experience) triggers the same recurring response. As a result many who have never experienced the full joy and bliss of the heart define their state of happiness by their level of unhappiness. I am less unhappy today so this must be what happy feels like. Children tend to have fluid emotions in which they can switch from tears to laughter in seconds while the older people get the more the patterns are entrenched and emotional states can last for hours, days, weeks or even the rest of their life. Sue Gerhardt writes that ‘a mother who has high levels of anxiety or depression … is more likely to have the kind of baby who finds it hard to cope with stress or new stimuli and who takes longer to get over stress’. She adds:

Even, as a newborn, her baby may be more fearful, and is more likely to have higher than average cortisol stress hormone levels at the age of four months. At worst, babies … are more likely to grow up with behavioural and emotional problems …

The opposite has been found to be the case when children enjoy a heart connection with their parents and environment and this is possible even with two working parents. Negative emotional effects are also reversible when love comes into play. Gerhardt points out that ‘… if love can be found, it still has the power to shape a new reality.’ Children (like adults) crave a heart connection. A baby’s heart beats before the brain is formed and a mother’s brainwaves have been shown to sync with a baby’s heartbeat in the womb. The nature of that connection is so vital to the life experience of a still-unborn child. Wherever you look love is The Answer.

Water tells the story

Figure 124: Each set of four droplets taken by each person was different, but the groups of four were virtually the same.

Figure 125: The amazing difference between water crystals reflecting words of love, gratitude and hate, and those from polluted water

Figure 126: The difference in water crystals from water canisters labelled with words of love and hate. This is what states of love and hate do to ourselves, each other and The Field.

Figure 127: The power of love and focus (‘prayer’) to transform dark and negative states into beauty and harmony.

The impact of heart and brain waves has been clearly demonstrated by their effect on water. A team at the Aerospace Institute in Stuttgart, Germany, developed a means to photograph information in droplets of water. In one experiment they asked people from the locality to take four droplets from a communal tank and put them in a dish with their name on. The team then used their technique to photograph the droplets and discover that each set was unique from all the others and each drop in the sets of four was virtually the same (Fig 124 ). The simple act of a person taking a droplet from a tank and placing it in a dish had imprinted their own unique energetic signature on the water. Such is the interaction we have with The Field and each other. HeartMath research discovered that a person’s heartbeat can be detected in water and given that the body is 80 percent water (a wavefield in its base state) we are exchanging heart rhythms all the time even on that level. The PH (measure of acidity) in water has been changed in experiments purely by someone focusing that intent (making a wave connection). A Japanese friend of mine, the late Dr Masaru Emoto, became well-known for his work in photographing the heart-mind impact on water. We wrote a book together published in Japanese and I visited his centre in Tokyo. Dr Emoto worked with small canisters of water that he would imprint with different frequencies and vibrations by for example writing ‘love’ and ‘hate’ on the canister. He would freeze the water very quickly, photograph the ice crystals, and the difference between them was amazing (Fig 125 ). Words such as love and appreciation produced beautiful crystals of balance and harmony to reflect the balance and harmony of the words. By contrast hate produced basically an ugly mess as it transferred its waves to the water (Fig 126 ). It may be asked how the written word can have such an effect and the answer is that everything is a wavefield of information in its base state with its frequency dictated by intent . We may see ‘love’, ‘appreciation’ and ‘hate’ as written words, but they are really wavefields reflecting their intent and meaning. These fields impact on the wavefield of the water and this is revealed in the crystals reflecting that effect when the water is frozen. In this way the hate of ‘anti-haters’ impacts on The Field in exactly the same destructive way as the ‘haters’ they claim to oppose. The Cult is behind both because they equally contribute to creating disharmony in The Field. Dr Emoto studied the impact on the crystals of polluted water, different types of music, and technology including a mobile phone. The theme was always the same: Harmony = beauty and disharmony = ugh!! Mobile phones created highly distorted crystals to reflect the way they distort the human wavefield. The crystal representation of polluted water is confirmation of what I said earlier about toxicity in all its forms being a chemical (holographic) expression of deeply imbalanced wavefields. Toxic chemical disharmony, like toxic emotional and thought disharmony, can be rebalanced as Dr Emoto’s work clearly showed. He exposed water with distorted crystals (waves) to focused ‘prayer’ or harmonious intent and the negative impact of the waves was reversed (Fig 127 overleaf). This is what we can do to The Field and human society by changing the waves we transmit. Many think they are interacting with ‘God’ and asking for help when they ‘pray’. I guess this could be considered to be true in that The One is the awareness behind all experienced Creation. Prayer on a more human level is the focused interaction with The Field of thought and desire. If this connects – entangles – you with a wavefield that reflects your prayer then you can manifest that in your life. People say when this happens: ‘My prayers were answered.’ In truth you answered your own. What is called prayer in the Emoto images is really focused intent from the heart to harmonise the wavefield disharmony in the water which becomes harmony in the crystals.

Wave impact on water explains how homeopathy works despite the arrogant dismissal by mainstream medicine of what it terms ‘quackery’. Mainstream medicine is the quackery which is founded, thanks to the Cult’s Big Pharma cartel, on complete ignorance of what the body really is – a wavefield. Professor Dame Sally Davies, UK Government Chief Medical Officer, said that ‘homeopaths are peddlers and homeopathy is rubbish’ while a UK newspaper reported that 2,500 ‘vets and animal lovers’ had called for a ban on the use of homeopathy on animals. They claimed homeopathy was dangerous compared with ‘proven medicines’ (which with other mainstream treatments constitute one of humanity’s leading causes of death). Simon Stevens, chief executive and medical director of the Big Pharma-controlled National Health Service in England, demanded that the Professional Standards Authority strip accreditation from the Society of Homeopaths. The clueless bloke claimed that endorsing the society gave it a ‘veneer of credibility’ that lured vulnerable patients towards ‘bogus treatments’. Was he talking about homeopathy or mainstream medicine? He also claimed that homeopathy was reducing the number of parents having their children vaccinated which involves entangling a seriously imbalanced wavefield of toxicity with the wavefields of children. What could possibly go wrong? Simon Stevens, Sally Davies, and their like are infected by the mainstream disease that says: If we can’t explain something it can’t be happening. How can homeopathy be understood when your view of the body comes from Big Pharma-controlled (Cult-controlled) medical schools and professional bodies that police what doctors must believe and what treatments they can and cannot prescribe? A big problem that the Mainstream Everything has with homeopathy is that treatments (based on flowers and other natural substances) are diluted so many times that no ‘physical’ substance remains. The UK newspaper article said ‘… scientists argue that the cures are so diluted they are unlikely to contain any of the original substance’. In the isolated Body-Minds of the Mainstream Everything ‘no physical’ must by definition mean ‘no possible effect’. Excuse me while I have a quick yawn. Another experiment by the team at the Aerospace Institute in Stuttgart involved a flower dipped into a tank of water and immediately removed. They then photographed droplets from the tank and found that every single one contained the information of the flower. How come? Wave information from the flower entangled with the wavefield of the water. It is not the substance that affects health in homeopathy. It is the wavefield frequency information of the substance which interacts with the wavefield of the body and as the Stuttgart experiment showed the wave information remains in the water when the substance has gone. Russian researcher Dr Vladimir Poponin found the same phenomenon in an experiment beaming a laser through DNA. When the ‘physical’ DNA was removed it remained in the laser in energetic waves in the same way as the flower in the water. This is known as the ‘Phantom DNA Effect’ when there is nothing ‘phantom’ about it at all. It is the wavefield effect. I would just say before I move on that while the basis of homeopathy can be explained (even though homeopaths I have met didn’t know) the quality of the practitioner is as always crucial and not every problem will necessarily respond. Every situation can be different because of the wavefield differences involved with patients in different mental and emotional states.

All together now …

Figure 128: We are constantly interacting with The Field as computers interact with Wi-Fi.

We are constantly emitting waves of thought, emotion and awareness into the collective field and in this way our own states of being are transmitted into the energy ‘sea’ – The Field – with which we are all connected and constantly interacting. The dominant waves (collective state of being) impact upon on everything connected with The Field and that means ‘us’ and the entirety of the natural world. What effect through The Field must Cult-instigated, technologically-generated radiation and 5G be having on all of us along with animals, birds, insects, trees, and all the rest? Technology waves are scrambling the radar systems of birds, whales and dolphins that use The Field to navigate. Among the consequences are birds losing their way and whales and dolphins beaching themselves. One level of The Field is the Earth’s magnetic field and we are affecting that with every thought and emotion. In turn, it affects us as an expression of The Field. The Cult’s central goal is to control the wave nature of The Field by making this as low-vibrational and disharmonious as possible through maintaining humanity in a low-vibration emotional state and by infusing The Field with technological frequency waves designed specifically to distort heart and Body-Mind communication systems. How do you affect all the fish at the same time? You affect the sea. The relationship with humanity and The Field is exactly the same (Fig 128 ). The Climate Cult and its Green Party political wing have been manipulated into such an obsession with the hoax of human-caused ‘global warming’ they are not interested in the effect on humanity and the natural world of the radiation tidal wave. The UK Green Party even denied its own members the right to debate 5G at a party conference and threatened a member protesting about this outside the hall with the police. To say it is not the party that I joined in the 1980s is to seriously understate. The Green Party, like the Climate Cult in general, has been seconded to the agenda of the Cult. Sadly this movement overall is in such a state of unconsciousness that it has no idea there even is a Cult, never mind that it is driving their agenda. The good news is that we neither have to add low-vibration to The Field or be affected by its low-vibrational chaotic state. We can change the nature of the waves we are emitting by opening our hearts and generating high-frequency waves which also block wave entanglement with low-frequency waves in The Field. We can interact with The Field on another level of frequency and be empowered rather than drained and disrupted. All roads out of here lead to and from the heart.

Global heart

Figure 129: If we connected and interacted through the heart the world would be transformed.

Figure 130: What happen to the Earth field when the world became aware of the 9/11 attacks.

We can see from all this the incredible impact that we can have on The Field and The Field has on us. I have discussed how this plays out in sports teams and it applies to all groups including families and work colleagues. HeartMath Institute research revealed that those in heart-mind (frequency) coherence reflect this personal harmony in collective harmony when they work together or interact (Fig 129 ). The opposite is the case with those in heart-mind incoherence through emotional imbalance. People in coherence or incoherence can transfer their state of being to others through wave entanglement as the dominant state prevails. The same process happens nationally and globally through The Field and our mental, emotional and heart resonance can bring about global societal coherence and cooperation or tear the world asunder. Hitler and the Nazis were dark occultists who understood how this works and they infused The Field in mid-20th century Germany with their frequencies to such an extent that they hijacked the Body-Mind of much of the German nation. To see a microcosm of the technique watch footage of Hitler’s rallies in which music, marching and colour were used together with Hitler’s carefully-crafted (wavefield) speeches to so dominate the frequency nature of The Field that vast audiences were transformed into a rabid frenzy with their own fields adding to the collective power of the event. Hitler was described as ‘magnetic’ as in ‘magnetic personality’ which is another description of electromagnetic wavefield energy. The focus of the crowd (entanglement) on his field, however, was the source of so much of this ‘magnetism’. Talk about ‘give me your power’. The Cult targets human and emotional perception to continually infuse low-frequency waves into The Field which then circulate back in a perpetual/perceptual feedback loop to humanity. We can break this cycle with the heart. We are being manipulated to create the feedback loop and we have the power to delete it. The HeartMath Institute has positioned sensors around the world to measure changes in the Earth’s magnetic field which have related to events that cause major impacts on collective human emotion. They identified an enormous spike in the Earth field in precisely the period that the global population was learning about the attacks of 9/11 (Fig 130 ). The point is that this interactive effect does not have to be negative. Infinite Love in all its expressions is far more powerful than negativity and we can change the wave frequencies of The Field. Whether we will do that is our choice, but we can . We saw a simple example with the focused intent of love transforming the wave state of polluted water and its crystals. How do we change the ‘world’? We change ourselves because the world is a collective manifestation of us. There is much more on that to come and the HeartMath Institute has many techniques to develop heart-mind coherence. See back of the book for the website.

Love – the ultimate strength

I have heard it said that love is weakness and marginal to changing anything. Change only comes when you ‘put your mind to it’ and hate your oppressors (who are only a vehicle for suppressing yourself through wave entanglement). What an utter misunderstanding of the love I am talking about. I am not referring to human or attraction love, but to something infinitely greater. The very word has become so misrepresented I only use it in the absence of a term more appropriate. Infinite Love, unconditional love, is the nearest we can get with human language which has not developed, certainly in the West, to describe what it doesn’t understand. I have said that love is without fear and will always do what it knows to be right. This deletes weakness from the equation immediately before we take another step. ‘Weakness’, both in thought and action, is always a manifestation of fear. On that basis alone love in its most powerful form is the absence of fear and the ultimate strength. Love doesn’t consider consequences for doing what it knows to be right – it just does it. Nor does love always do what others would like it to do. Often love means doing the opposite. Is it love to give your children everything they ever ask for and protect them from every emotional upset and then they go out into the world and can’t cope with its challenges? Or is it love to help them build inner strength and self-confidence in their growing-up years to face and overcome challenges and ensure that when they enter the adult world they have all they need to deal with it? We are now seeing the consequences for many young people of this misguided ‘love’ with ‘helicopter’ parents fussing over their offspring at every turn and producing what are called ‘cotton wool kids’ who then go on to the programming centres of college and university. They are the self-styled ‘Woke’ generation with an extraordinary sense of narcissistic entitlement (anything you want upbringing) and hurl their toys from the pram when adult society does not continue where their parents left off. More than that the Woke mentality has been infused with psychological weakness that makes people babes-in-arms to a system that claims to be protecting them by taking their freedom away (and everyone else’s which is the point of the exercise). ‘Wokers’ are the foot soldiers and (Twitter) storm troopers of the Cult’s agenda to delete all freedom with freedom of speech at the top of the list. Love in its true sense would have intervened long ago to head off this personal and collective disaster and in doing so parents would have faced much hostility: ‘How can you say I can’t have that?’; ‘How can you say I can’t do that?’; and, with due irony – ‘You clearly don’t love me.’ Love, in fact, has many facets and faces and what pulls them together in unity is doing what you know to be right.

There is the myth that to ‘love your enemies’ means to lie down and let them walk all over you. How can it be ‘right’ to accept domination by others imposing their will upon you? Love won’t stand for that and, in the absence of fear, absolutely won’t stand for that. Love is also the self-love of self-respect that will not be cowered into submission. If you want to see stubborn in action try telling Infinite Love that it must not do what it knows to be right. You don’t have to hate your perceived oppressors. Just don’t stand for their impositions on your life and the lives of others. No hatred necessary. What we hate we entangle with and become. If I make a wave connection with the Cult it will be on my frequency not theirs. For this to happen I have to love them by my definition of love which involves compassion and understanding for why they are what they are. Their actions come from their perceptions and self-identity which are formed with their heart centres closed to the influence of The One . Would you like to be them? What a nightmare to be so isolated from love, for self and others, that you desire to hurt and dominate everyone else. They need our compassion – but NOT our acquiescence. Fake ‘love’ is everywhere and by that I mean ‘love’ only by word and facial expression and not by deed or heart-based integrity. I have met many ‘New Agers’ and observed endless Wokers who present the persona (mask) of being loving because that is what they want others (and themselves) to believe they are. Instead I have experienced a long list of New Agers (though far from all) who have been among the most unloving, manipulative self-deceivers I have come across in any walk of life. Wokers claim to be loving, compassionate, warriors for social justice while seeking to destroy the freedom, careers and livelihoods of those who don’t agree with them. There is no empathy with anyone they target and no place for forgiveness amid their clenched-teeth fury for those who transgress the Woke tyranny which calls itself with more breathtaking irony ‘anti-hate’. We urgently need a mass re-evaluation of what love is before we can get anywhere and when the truth about love sinks in we’ll be able to get everywhere . I will develop all these themes as we go along.

So who are you? You are your heart. Who are we? We are all One heart. Why don’t we live like that? The Cult doesn’t want it. Is the Cult all powerful? No – we are when we follow our heart.

CHAPTER FIVE

Where are we?

You are deluded if you think that the world around you is a physical construct separate from your own mind – Kevin Michel

Y eah, good question in the chapter title. Where the hell are we? What is this ‘place’? Isn’t it amazing that so little consideration is devoted in the mainstream media to asking these profound and fundamental questions? But, then, if the Cult doesn’t want them to be asked the Cult-controlled media is not going to ask them in any way that is both deep and consistent.

Figure 131: Silas Beane and the proposed cube structure of the simulation/matrix.

You see the odd snippet here and there about ‘scientists discover’ this; ‘scientific studies reveal’ that; or ‘scientists think’ something or other. Dots are rarely if ever connected and nor the truth about reality pursued with vigour in search of answers. Surely who are we and where we are should be at the forefront of human inquiry? Well, once again, not if those manipulating society don’t want their targets to know who they are and where they are because if they did it would change everything. I have written at length in Everything You Need To Know about my long-held view that we are experiencing some kind of simulation akin to an interactive virtual reality game. I came to this conclusion and began writing about it just after the turn of the millennium although I had considered the possibility before. In recent years an increasing number of even mainstream scientists have said the emerging evidence points to precisely that. Among them is Rich Terrile, director of the Center for Evolutionary Computation and Automated Design at NASA’s Jet Propulsion Laboratory, who went public a few years ago with his belief that the Universe is a digital hologram (true). He also made the obvious point that if reality is a holographic construct some form of intelligence must have created it. This fits with my own contention since the 1990s that an unseen force is manipulating our reality. American nuclear physicist Silas Beane led a team at the University of Bonn in Germany which explored the question of whether our reality is a simulation similar to the one portrayed in the Matrix movie series. They decided that it most likely was and Beane proposed that it could be cube-like in nature (Fig 131 ). I have been saying for decades that the speed of light is not the fastest speed possible and my view is that this speed in fact represents the outer firewall of the simulation or Matrix. ‘Light’ and the electromagnetic spectrum is therefore the Matrix that we believe to be the ‘world’. Morpheus said in The Matrix movie: ‘You live in a dreamworld, Neo.’ And we do. Scientific orthodoxy claims that the speed of light – 186,000 miles per second – is the fastest speed possible; but then it also believes in the ‘Big Bang’ some 13.7 billion years ago when it claims the Universe was compressed into the nucleus of an atom which they call the ‘singularity’. They say this then exploded to create subatomic particles, energy, matter, space, time, planets, stars, and Ethel on the checkout. American writer and researcher Terence McKenna described Big Bang theory in these terms:

… give us one free miracle, and we will roll from that point forward – from the birth of time to the crack of doom! – just one free miracle, and then it will all unravel according to natural law, and these bizarre equations which nobody can understand but which are so holy in this enterprise.

Another observer brilliantly compared the chances of the Universe evolving by random accident as like a hurricane sweeping through a scrapyard and assembling a Jumbo Jet. Physicist Silas Beane points out that simply being a simulation would create its own ‘laws of physics’ that would limit possibility. I say this limit is the speed of light within which ‘time’ and ‘space’ are encoded within our holographic reality. Near-death survivors have described how the ‘light’ they experienced outside the body is not the same as sunlight (the speed of light). ‘It’s not like the light that burns your eyes’, one said, ‘not like sunlight’. I have been writing for a long time that sunlight is the Matrix or simulation. Virtual reality games and simulations have their own laws of physics and limitations which are encoded by the designer and our reality is in principle the same. The ‘laws of physics’ perceived by mainstream science are merely encoded limitations of the simulation and so near-death experiencers describe a very different reality and limitless possibility when they withdraw from the body which entangled them with the simulation and focused their attention within its illusions. Mainstream scientists are the ‘academics’ in Plato’s cave studying the shadows on the wall (simulation) while believing them to be ‘real’. Being ‘human’ is like donning a headset in a computer simulation with the five senses decoding the simulation into apparent ‘natural’ reality (Fig 132 ). The Silas Beane team in Bonn discovered that cosmic rays align with a specific lattice pattern of cubes which they suggested could be the foundation of the simulation construct. Cosmic rays are ‘atom fragments’ that rain down on the Earth at the speed of light from outside of the solar system. The Space.com website says:

Figure 132: The ‘real world’.

Discovered in 1912, many things about cosmic rays remain a mystery more than a century later. One prime example is exactly where they are coming from. Most scientists suspect their origins are related to supernovas (star explosions), but the challenge is that for many years cosmic ray origins appeared uniform to observatories examining the entire sky.

Figure 133: A standing wave created by the ossilation of two forces of equal strength pushing against each other.

Figure 134: Cymatics image created by a sound vibration. Particles form together to reflect the frequency/vibration and in short the frequency/vibration is made ‘physically’ manifest. Change the vibration and the particles will re-form to reflect that. Image from Cymascope.com 

Figure 135: A stone alongside a cymatics image created by vibration. Images from Cymascope.com .

Figure 136: Real starfish and cymatics vibration starfish. Images from Cymascope.com .

Cosmic rays are actually an information source of the Matrix or simulation. The Bonn team highlighted what is known as the GZK cutoff (the Greisen-Zatsepin-Kuzmin limit). This is a boundary for cosmic ray particles that results from the interaction with cosmic background radiation. The process involves particles called ‘pions’ which I initially took to be the human race. The team’s paper ‘Constraints on the Universe as a Numerical Simulation’, says the GZK cut-off ‘pattern of constraint’ is exactly what you would find with a computer simulation. The consequence of this for human perception is described in these terms: ‘Like a prisoner in a pitch-black cell we would not be able to see the “walls” of our prison.’ This is correct although we have given the walls a name – the speed of light – which appears to be the fastest speed when in truth it represents the limits of Body-Mind decoded perception. Consciousness can communicate instantly beyond the bounds of ‘light’ because it operates at frequencies outside the simulation. We are constantly communicating at faster-than-light speeds while our conscious perception is dictated by the brain decoding information within the frequency band of the simulation. The foundation construct of the ‘Matrix’ is formed by standing waves of energy and information. Standing waves ‘stand’ when held within an area of limitation (in this case the speed of light). Waves flow one way, strike a limiting obstacle and flow in the reverse direction to create an interaction in which the two opposing flows cancel each other out and oscillate ‘on the spot’ (Fig 133 ). It’s like two people running in opposite directions and when they meet they both jog on the spot as they block each other’s forward movement. Standing waves can be created by frequencies which act as the limitation and cause them to oscillate without forward momentum and they can also be formed by vibration. The principle can be seen in what is known as ‘cymatics’ which creates form through … vibration generating standing waves . Particles or another medium are spread on a metal plate and when sound frequencies are introduced they form into patterns that reflect the frequency involved (Figs 134 , 135 and 136 ). Cymatic patterns formed by sound vibration are standing waves that will remain in place until the frequency changes and then they will transform into another pattern to sync with the new frequency. This is how frequency waves create ‘matter’ and form. You can see videos of standing waves and cymatics on YouTube with these key words: ‘Standing Waves.mov’ and ‘Cymatics full documentary bringing matter to life with sound’. A very good cymatics website is Cymascope.com . A closed mind is also a standing wave as it oscillates within the perception Bubble to the frequency of lies and illusions (Fig 137 ).

Figure 137: A closed mind or Bubble is a standing wave oscillating on the spot and going nowhere.

Standing wave reality

Figure 138: Compare a standing wave ….

Figure 139: … with DNA. Another coincidence? No chance.

Figure 140: The hexagram or ‘Star of David’ is a sound frequency vibration as confirmed by this one made by sound passing through a liquid medium. This is the symbol on the flag of Israel and from which the name Rothschild (Red-Shield) derives. It is also the symbol of Saturn which its frequency reflects.

Figure 141: A hexagon manifested in the same way from sound. All symbols – all form – are standing waves created by vibration/oscillation.

Figure 142: The hexagram/Star of David and cube (remember Silas Beane’s cube Matrix) are ancient symbols of Saturn because they are reflections of its frequency. The black cube in particular is a Saturn symbol and you have the black cube in Mecca, the holy place of Islam, and the Israeli ‘security’ company connected to Israel intelligence agency Mossad called Black Cube. The Jewish holy day of the week is Saturday or Saturn-day.

The Universe (simulation) is a standing wave and everything within the Universe including the human body. Now what are classic examples of standing waves? Holograms. You see how all the strands come together if you pursue reality with an open mind. The two wave sources that collide on a holographic print interact with each other to create a standing wave which when decoded appears as apparently three-dimensional form. Standing waves, holograms and cymatics are all versions of the same phenomenon. The heart oscillates – beats – with the body standing wave. When we talk of emotion affecting heart rhythms we are describing how emotion waves are affecting the rhythm of the body standing wave and the rhythm of the heart wave. While the standing wave is oscillating the form is ‘alive’ and when it stops this is ‘death’. Our minds are entangled with the standing wave oscillation and when that ceases we are released from the body. People can ‘lose the will to live’ and generate such energetic density (slow oscillation) through their mind and emotional wave states that the standing wave rhythm can cease. Dying from a broken heart is one example. In the same way mind and emotion waves of a different kind can empower the standing wave and bring it back from the brink of ‘death’. People cry ‘it’s a miracle’ when it is really wave interaction. Many near-death experiencers have returned to find their body healed of what nearly killed them, Their out-of-body experience changed their perceptions which changed their wavefield state which changed their body. DNA is a receiver-transmitter standing wave as a holographic representation of the universal wave. Check what DNA looks like compared with a standing wave (Figs 138 and 139 ). German biophysicist Fritz-Albert Popp discovered that DNA vibrates or oscillates to a particular frequency and this has been confirmed many times since by cutting-edge scientists and researchers. ‘Matter’ is the manifestation of standing waves resonating to different frequencies and that applies even to symbols which is why the Cult employs them throughout global society. Symbols are holographic manifestations of particular frequencies and they are placed all around us to influence human perception through sound vibration and wave entanglement. You will recognise the ones in Figures 140 and 141 which were created by passing sound at specific frequencies through a liquid medium. Frequency and form are different expressions of the same information and interestingly the hexagram (‘Star of David’ on the flag of Israel) and the cube are both symbols of Saturn (Fig 142 ). I expose the reasons for that in depth in Everything You Need To Know and it relates to the simulation. The very name ‘Rothschild’ from the German ‘Red Shield’ comes from the red hexagram on the family home in Frankfurt in the 18th and 19th centuries. Dynasty founder and Sabbatian-Frankist cultist Mayer Amschel Rothschild is known as the ‘founding father of international finance’. He also founded the Cult’s Illuminati. Everything connects in the end. Famous American esoteric and occult writer Manly P. Hall rightly described the power and significance of symbols in these terms: ‘When the human race learns to read the language of symbols, a great veil will fall from the eyes of men.’ While they remain undecoded those same Cult symbols are part of that veil.

Figure 143: The shape of the Universe says ‘ground-breaking’ scientific study published in 2019. The torus nature of the Universe was in my books long before.

Figure 144: The front cover of my book Tales From The Time Loop published in 2003 which portrayed our reality as a torus ring passing through an illusory looped sequence of ‘time’.

Figure 145: The torus in the human eye.

Figure 146: The Large Hadron Collider at CERN in Switzerland.

Figure 147: The Cern ring, or rings, remind me of a mini-version of the simulation.

Scientists announced the results of a ‘paradigm-shifting’ study in 2019 that found the Universe to be a closed loop in the shape of a torus or doughnut. Eleonora Di Valentino at Manchester University led an international team of astronomers studying data from the European Space Agency’s Planck satellite. They concluded that the Universe is a curved, closed and inflating sphere. Di Valentino called the findings a ’cosmological crisis’ that warrants a ’drastic rethinking of the current cosmological concordance model’. What kept them? I have written in previous books about the Universe being a closed loop shaped like a doughnut or ‘torus’ (Fig 143 ). I even named one book, published in 2003, Tales from the Time Loop , with the torus simulation symbolised on the cover (Fig 144 ). A torus can also be found in the human eye – as above, so below (Fig 145 ). The Universe is a closed loop because it’s a simulation within the frequency band of ‘the speed of light’. It is a wavefield construct decoded into a holographic closed loop which can be breached only by consciousness expanded beyond Body-Mind. You can liken this ‘loop’ to the Large Hadron Collider, the world’s most powerful particle accelerator, at the European Organization for Nuclear Research (CERN) in Switzerland (Fig 146 ). I address what this multi-billion operation is really about in Everything You Need To Know and it’s not the reason they’re telling us. The Collider is a ring tunnel or tube of superconducting magnets that extends for 17 miles hundreds of feet below ground across the Swiss-French border. Proton particles (waves) travel within the ring at the speed of light in both directions to crash into each other. Protons complete 11,245 circuits of the ring every second (Fig 147 ). It’s a long story why they do this which I tell in Everything . I mention the Hadron Collider here as a visual representation of the torus universe. Imagine being within that enclosed tube circuit while not knowing it was enclosed and decoding the circulating energy/information into a holographic world completely different to the tube as it would otherwise appear in an undecoded state. You would think that time was moving ‘forward’ when you were really in a loop. Where you were in the loop you would call the present and from that you would perceive ‘past’ and ‘future’. Human reality is actually a cycle in the NOW. The image symbolising this in Figure 148 overleaf is from my Human Race Get Off Your Knees published in 2010. It is my contention that universal cycles such as the Great Year (nearly 26,000 years), Hindu Yugas or epochs, and the Mayan calendar of distinct periods or ’counts’ are measuring cycles of the simulation program. Some researchers have identified points in these cycles when global catastrophes have happened many times which deleted most of what existed before along with knowledge of what life was like. ‘Known’ human history is a fraction of what has happened and fantastic ancient structures that we would struggle to build today are evidence that the apparent upwards progression from primitive people to the modern world is a fantasy. A simulation with ‘rebooting’ points would be a major way to isolate humanity in perceptual illusion.

Figure 148: The Time Loop ‘universe’ which we decode into illusory ‘physical’ reality and experience as the ‘human world’.

‘I am of the Light.’ Okay, but which Light?

Figure 149: I have seen the wrong kind of light.

Figure 150: The pyramid and all-seeing eye symbol of the Cult on the dollar bill as well as the reverse of the Great Seal of the United States and endless other guises.

Figure 151: The Statue of Liberty was given to New York by French Freemasons in Paris who knew what it really represented.

Figure 152: A mirror of the Statue of Liberty on an island in the River Seine in Paris.

This background explains many mysteries and indicates the knowledge hidden within the Cult. When people worship ‘the light’ they are worshipping their own perceptual prison (Fig 149 ). We can further understand why one of the hero ‘gods’ of the Cult is Lucifer, the Light Bringer. Yes, the bringer of the simulation . ‘Lucifer’ is portrayed as a ‘Fallen Angel’ – the Biblical term to describe the non-human force that manipulates through its hybrid human/non-human lackeys (the Cult Nephilim bloodlines) operating within the simulation along the lines of Agent Smith and company in The Matrix movies. If you have not seen the Matrix trilogy it is recommended – especially the first one – to get a feel for what our reality is and how we are manipulated. ‘Fallen Angel’ by my definition means those who have closed their heart centres to a connection with The One and now seek to do the same with humanity to assimilate human Body-Mind awareness into their own. This is what smart technology and artificial intelligence is really all about as we shall see. The so-called Lucifer ‘revolt against God’ is said to have followed his refusal to ‘return God’s love’ (closed heart centre) and set out to be ‘as powerful as his creator’. ‘Lucifer’ is also referred to as Satan and the Devil which are described in the Bible in reptilian terms as with the ‘Great Dragon’ and ‘that ancient serpent’. In turn Cult bloodlines are human-reptilian hybrids that worship their hidden masters through Satanism . I expose in The Trigger the Sabbatian-Frankism network within the Cult that was really responsible for 9/11. This aspect of the Cult is named after its inspirations, Sabbatai Zevi (1626-1676) and Jacob Frank (1726-1791), as I mentioned earlier. Sabbatian-Frankism hates Judaism and Jewishness and yet has manipulated itself into control of Israel and its global nexus while the great majority of Jewish people have no idea Sabbatian-Frankism even exists. We have the familiar theme of Lucifer worship with Jacob Frank who said Lucifer is the true god. The Kabbalah, or Kabala/Cabala, the Jewish bible of mysticism and esoteric belief, is the holy book of Sabbatian-Frankists and in particular the series of works called the Zohar which means ‘splendour’ and ‘radiance’ (light). From this came the concept of being ‘illuminated’ (kundalini activation) and the name of a highly significant grouping within the Cult known as the ‘Illuminati’ with its symbol of the ‘all-seeing eye’ which you see on the dollar bill and the reverse of the Great Seal of the United States (Fig 150 ). This elite satanic secret society was established in 1776 by three Sabbatian-Frankist cultists, Jacob Frank, Meyer Amstel Rothschild, founder of the Rothschild (Redshield/hexagram/Saturn) financial dynasty, and its frontman, Jesuit-trained fake ‘Jew’ Adam Weishaupt. The theme of Lucifer the Light Bringer (simulation) is widely on public display if you know what to look for and one example is the Statue of Liberty holding the lighted torch of ‘illumination’. The statue was given to New York by French Freemasons in Paris who knew the true meaning and a mirror image ‘Liberty’ stands on an island in the River Seine in the French capital (Figs 151 and 152 ). Freemasonry worships Lucifer as the ‘Great/Grand Architect of the Universe’ – the architect of the simulation. The same symbolism of the ‘Architect’ can be found in the Matrix movies which portrays him as the one who built the Matrix. You’ll find all the fine detail on these subjects and so much more in Everything You Need To Know.

Simulation science and numbers

Figure 153: Binary codes of 0 and 1 representing on-off electrical charges in computer systems.

Figure 154: The A, C, G and T codes of DNA which also have binary values.

Figure 155: The digital codes of the Matrix portrayed on computer screens in the movie series.

Figure 156: The physics and mathmatics of video games and virtual reality is the same as our experienced reality.

Another mainstream scientist who has pursued evidence for a simulation is James Gates, an American theoretical physicist who has been Professor of Physics at the University of Maryland, Director of The Center for String and Particle Theory, and served on the Council of Advisors on Science and Technology to President Obama. A Gates-led team discovered computer codes of digital data embedded in the energetic fabric of our reality which take the form of 1 and 0 – the binary system used in computers of on-off electrical charges which looks so similar to codes of the Matrix in the movies and the A, C, G, and T codes that make up DNA and also have binary values (Figs 153 and 154 ). These codes and their relationships with each other decide what the ‘physical’ form looks like. Differences in coding between a human and rat are marginal yet their form is fundamentally different. DNA codes have digital binary values of A and C = 0 and G and T = 1. DNA code sequences look like binary number coding and the numbers on the computer screens in the Matrix movie series depicting the digital basis of the reality simulation (Fig 155 ). James Gates said they had no idea what digital computer codes were doing in the fabric of our reality, but this can be explained if we are dealing with a simulation. The Gates team also found error-correcting codes or block codes within the energetic fabric of reality. These are mathematical sequences employed in computers that return data to its original state or ‘default settings’ when something knocks it out of kilter. They would be necessary to hold the simulation together in the face of forces impacting upon it. Gates said they found a set of equations embedded in reality that were indistinguishable from those that drive search engines and browsers. The Internet and digital technology in general are actually mimicking the simulation to create a simulation within a simulation and enslave human Body-Mind in more extreme states of illusion and isolation than even the main simulation itself. I have said already that one level of our reality – the simulation – is digital and that the ‘physical’ world from the Universe downwards consists of digital holograms. Numerology reads reality at this level of numbers and Max Tegmark, a physicist at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT), said: ‘The Universe can be entirely described by numbers and maths.’ Tegmark, author of Our Mathematical Universe , says reality is encoded with numbers and mathematics in the same way as computer games and the physics of our reality and computer games are basically the same (Fig 156 ). He compares human experience with characters in advanced games. The characters would think because of the software codes that they were bumping into real objects, falling in love and feeling emotions. Eventually they might study the workings of the game more deeply and realise that everything (as with our reality on one level) was made of pixels. They would see that what they thought was ‘physical’ was in fact just numbers. Tegmark then relates this to human reality:

And we’re exactly in this situation in our world. We look around and it doesn’t seem that mathematical at all, but everything we see is made out of elementary particles like quarks and electrons. And what properties does an electron have? Does it have a smell or a colour or a texture? No! … We physicists have come up with geeky names for electron properties, like electric charge, or spin, or lepton number, but the electron doesn’t care what we call it, the properties are just numbers.

Figure 157: The Fibonacci number sequence can be found throughout our reality.

Everything these scientists are uncovering is what you would expect to see if we live in some sort of simulation. There is also the ancient concept of ‘divine proportion’ which is the term given to mathematical and geometrical sequences found throughout our reality, the ‘natural’ world and the human body (holographic as above, so below, once again). Initiates of the hidden knowledge understood these sequences and gave them names such as Phi, Pi, Golden Mean, Golden Ratio and Golden Section. They encoded them into their temples, cathedrals and important buildings to attract – entangle – with particular energies/information and frequencies to connect them with ‘God’, or ‘the gods’. Artists like the initiate Leonardo Da Vinci encoded these proportions or ratios into their paintings. Da Vinci was so ‘ahead of his time’ because he understood reality by tapping into awareness outside the simulation and he would have had close associations with secret societies. The number of Golden Ratio is 1.61803398874989484820 … which then goes on repeating indefinitely. Golden Ratio proportion comes from ‘dividing a line into two parts so that the longer part divided by the smaller part is also equal to the whole length divided by the longer part’. Put simply it is a sequence that can be found everywhere and is obviously there by design and not chance. Another ubiquitous sequence is the Fibonacci number code which was identified at least in ancient India by a mathematician called Virahanka, but gets its name from the 12th/13th century Italian mathematician Fibonacci also known as Leonardo of Pisa. The Fibonacci sequence adds the two previous numbers to get the next one, as with … 1, 1, 2, 3, 5, 8, 13, 21, 34, 55, and so on. The higher it goes the closer it gets to the Golden Ratio. The Fibonacci sequence is encoded in everything from the human face and body to animals, DNA, seed heads, pine cones, trees, shells, spiral galaxies, hurricanes and the number of petals in a flower (Figs 157 and 158 ). Then we have fractal patterns encoded in the fabric of reality and once again they are everywhere. Fractals are a ‘never-ending pattern that is infinitely complex and self-similar across different scales’ – the as above, so below, characteristics of holograms (Figs 159 and 160 ). Fractal patterns can be found in:

Figure 158: Fibonacci numbers are encoded in the ways that shells form.

River networks, mountain ranges, craters, lightning bolts, coastlines, mountain goat horns, trees and branch growth, animal colour patterns, pineapples, heart rates, heartbeats, neurons and brains, eyes, respiratory systems, circulatory systems, blood vessels and pulmonary vessels, DNA, geological fault lines, earthquakes, snowflakes, crystals, ocean waves, vegetables, soil pores and even the rings of Saturn (again).

Figure 159: Repeating holographic fractal patterns are found everywhere.

Figure 160: Fractal patterns are found in the torus of the human eye.

Figure 161: Binary DNA.

Figure 162: The way a tree grows follows fractal patterns.

Figure 163: Fractal patterns in the human lung.

Fractal/holographic patterns are found in binary 1 and 0 on-off electrical charges encoded in our energetic reality that are also found in the DNA receiver-transmitter ‘hard drive’ of the body (Fig 161 ). A science paper captured the essence of DNA with its heading: ‘DNA is a Fractal Antenna in Electromagnetic Fields.’ DNA is a receiver-transmitter of information and is digital, binary, holographic and fractal because our experienced reality is digital, binary, holographic and fractal. American psychology professor David Pincus has said that as above, so below, repeating fractal patterns have been identified in psychology, behaviour, speech patterns and interpersonal relationships which begs the question of how much human behaviour comes from ‘free will’ and how much from simply following the simulation program? I’ll have more about this later. Fractal principles relate to ‘symmetrical mathematics’ which are ‘one shape being exactly like another’ when you move it, turn it, flip it or slide it. Symmetrical mathematics are found in everything from the way trees grow to the structure of the human lung (Figs 162 and 163 ). Dmitri Krioukov, a physicist at the University of California, San Diego, was coauthor of a study reported in Nature’s Scientific Reports which suggested that ‘undiscovered and fundamental laws’ may govern the growth of systems on all levels from electrical firing between brain cells to the growth of social networks and expansion of galaxies’ (the holographic principle yet again ). Krioukov said: ‘Natural growth dynamics are the same for different real networks, like the Internet or the brain or social networks.’ He added that ‘for a physicist it’s an immediate signal that there is some missing understanding of how nature works.’ What’s missing is the understanding that we are dealing with a holographic simulation. The work of Krioukov and his team was reported by the Huffington Post :

When the team compared the Universe’s history with growth of social networks and brain circuits, they found all the networks expanded in similar ways: They balanced links between similar nodes with ones that already had many connections.

For instance, a cat lover surfing the Internet may visit mega-sites such as Google or Yahoo, but will also browse cat fancier websites or YouTube kitten videos. In the same way, neighboring brain cells like to connect, but neurons also link to such ‘Google brain cells’ that are hooked up to loads of other brain cells. The eerie similarity between networks large and small is unlikely to be a coincidence, Krioukov said.

Figure 164:Bingo! Computer codes of the simulation.

Figure 165: Bingo! Computer codes of the simulation.

What are all these recurring mathematical sequences that pervade our reality? I say they are the computer codes of the simulation (Figs 164 and 165 ). I watched a presentation by Donald Hoffman, a professor in the Department of Cognitive Sciences at the University of California, Irvine, in which he described his concept of our experienced reality acting like a computer interface which I agree that it does:

Evolution shaped us with a user interface that hides the truth. Nothing that we see is the truth – the very language of space and time and objects is the wrong language to describe reality.

I contend that it was not evolution which shaped this, but manipulation. The computer interface – the equivalent of a computer screen – is the simulation which gives a false sense of reality to hide the fact that it is a simulation.

Electric Universe (simulation)

Figure 166: Lightning is the most obvious example of an electric atmosphere.

Figure 167: The electrical phenomena of the Northern Lights or Aurora Borealis.

Figure 168: We see the heavens as stars and planets and space, but that’s only one level.

Figure 169: On another level the Universe – or simulation – is a vast electrical system.

Figure 170: The simulation is an electrical/electromagnetic system which interacts with the human body and brain and overlays a fake reality to obscure prime reality. I call it the Cosmic Internet. (Image Neil Hague.)

Figure 171: Galaxies are ‘embedded in the same ‘large scale structure’ – the simulation.

A major pointer to a simulation comes with a highly-compelling area of independent scientific research that reveals the Universe to be an electrical/electromagnetic communication system which is how computers and virtual reality work. The research is known collectively and appropriately as the Electric Universe and also the Thunderbolts Project. I have been reading and watching their information for many years and you can find them at www.thunderbolts.info/wp . Everything from the Universe to the human body/brain is on one level an electrical/electromagnetic communication system. The electrical nature of the atmosphere can clearly be seen in lightning, the Aurora Borealis or northern lights, and the rapidly-rotating electromagnetic fields of tornadoes that appear during electrical storms (Figs 166 and 167 overleaf). The electrical fabric of our reality, however, goes much deeper than that. Electricity and electromagnetism pervade everything and Electric Universe researchers say that planets and stars are points or ‘devices’ in a colossal electrical circuitry that we experience as reality and see as the night sky (Figs 168 and 169 overleaf). The electrical impact on this circuitry of planets, stars and their combinations is another level of how astrology works and all together I call this the Cosmic Internet (Fig 170 ). I have said that the Sun is much bigger than it appears to the eye and that its wavefield oscillates throughout the solar system. This is also true of the Sun’s electrical circuits and communication systems. Electric Universe researchers have been pointing this out for a long time and official science confirmation of this electrical connection grid is beginning to mount. The Astrophysical Journal published a study in 2019 describing how hundreds of galaxies are acting and rotating in synchronised motions even with those tens of millions of light years away (the illusion of time and space). The study involved 445 galaxies within 400 million light years of Earth. Joon Hyeop Lee, an astronomer at the Korea Astronomy and Space Science Institute, said that something appeared to be connecting them which caused them to behave exactly in sync. In some way they ‘directly interact with each other’, he said. The study suggested that the galaxies appeared to be embedded in the same ‘large scale structure’. Yes – the electrical/electromagnetic grid of the Cosmic Internet or what I say is the simulation (Fig 171 ). Computer virtual reality is connected by the same codes and electrical communication which makes what appears on the screen happen in sync. Joon said: ‘The dynamical coherence even out to millions of light-years was unexpected and surprising to us, because such distances are obviously too far for neighbour galaxies to directly interact with each other. The unifying force remained invisible or in other words outside the frequency band of human and technological sight. Then there is David Sibeck, a project scientist at NASA’s Goddard Space Flight Center, who revealed satellite confirmation of these electrical/electromagnetic connections:

The satellites have found evidence of magnetic ropes connecting Earth’s upper atmosphere directly to the Sun. We believe that solar winds flow in along these ropes providing energy for geomagnetic storms and auroras.

Figure 172:Solar power rises and falls in cycles and can be measured by the number of sunspots or massive explosions on the sun which project energy into the solar system.

Figure 173: Sunspot explosions have been believed to originate inside the Sun, but Electric Universe researchers say the torus around the Sun absorbs electricity from The Field which goes through cycles of higher and lower power. When the torus becomes overloaded at high times it discharges energy like colossal lightning bolts that strike the Sun and punch the sunspots thus making sunspots a measure of solar activity.

Sun-Earth connections, wavefield and electrical, are what changes our climate and temperature in cycles of power increasing and decreasing. These cycles are revealed in the number of fantastic explosions of energy on the Sun’s surface known as sunspots. This phenomenon is not factored into the manipulated ‘climate models’ devised purely to sell the hoax of human-caused climate change. The outrageous deceit is confirmed by climate projections that don’t centrally include the foundation effect on temperature of the Sun while blaming carbon dioxide, the gas of life, without which we would all be dead (much more later). The Sun is electrical in nature and highly significantly the observable Universe is 99.999 percent plasma – so is the Sun. Plasma is often called the fourth state of matter and represents a near-perfect medium for … electricity and electromagnetism. The plasma Sun is a processor of electrical power and not the origin of it. Solar power does not come from within the Sun as mainstream science claims from assumption, not evidence. It comes from the universal electrical wavefield or circuitry. If you could see the heavens on another level of frequency you would see a vast electrical system with the stars and planets as points in the circuit that pervades the Universe. The Sun absorbs and processes power from this system which operates in cycles of higher power and lower power just as waves (of all kinds) have peaks and troughs (Fig 172 ). Electrical power is processed by the Sun (not created by it) and projected into the solar system affecting temperature, climate and much else within the planetary fields. These projections are decoded by the Earth’s atmosphere and magnetic field into the heat that we feel. Space is cold and the higher you go in the Earth’s atmosphere the colder it gets when, through mainstream scientific ‘logic’, it should be getting warmer as you move closer to the Sun. Why are planets nearer the Sun hotter, then? The closer you are the more powerful the energy to be decoded into heat and that is also affected by the nature of their fields. The Sun is much cooler on the surface than way out in its atmosphere when it should be the other way round if the heat is being generated from within. Mainstream science estimates the Sun’s surface temperature to around 5,000 degrees kelvin while much further out the temperature is said to be 200 million degrees kelvin. Encircling the Sun a considerable distance from the surface is a doughnut-shaped torus which has been recorded in ultraviolet images (Fig 173 ). The Sun’s torus at its equator absorbs electricity from the universal circuit for the Sun to process. When it overloads massive versions of lightning are projected to punch holes in the Sun’s surface that we know as sunspots. They are a pointer to the changing electrical power of the Sun because the torus only overloads and punches them at times of high power in the circuit. The Sun is known to dim in its low period of activity (electrical processing) although this is imperceptible to the human eye. Think dimmer switch. NASA reported in 2019 that predictions suggest the cycle of solar activity between 2020 and 2025 could be the lowest in 200 years and 30 to 50 percent lower than the previous one. Mainstream science is being forced to face the facts about the universal electrical system as evidence continually comes to light. Haimin Wang, a professor of physics at the New Jersey Institute of Technology, said of sunspot activity:

We used to think that the surface’s magnetic evolution drives solar eruptions sunspots. Our new observations suggest that disturbances created in the solar outer atmosphere can also cause direct and significant perturbations on the surface through magnetic fields, a phenomenon not envisioned by any contemporary solar eruption models.

Figure 174:Planetary magnetospheres are formed by the resistance between different electrical charges in the plasma field between the planets and the wider solar system.

The Earth’s magnetic field, or magnetosphere, is defined by the interaction of electricity with plasma (ultimately wavefield state with wavefield state). When plasma conducting electricity of one frequency/charge meets plasma with a different charge a barrier is automatically formed between the two which defines planetary magnetic fields. Planets and stars emit different electrical charges into the plasma medium and where these different fields meet the barrier is formed known as a ‘Langmuir sheath’ after American scientist Irving Langmuir (1881-1957) who discovered the phenomenon (Fig 174 ). Here is still more proof that planets and stars transmit different frequencies that form the basis of astrology. Increasing numbers of scientists are now seeing that the evidence points to our ‘physical’ reality being a holographic simulation as I concluded nearly 20 years ago. Where I differ from these scientists is that they seem to see the simulation as external to us. My view is that in the form we experience as ‘physical’ reality the ‘Matrix’ only exists when we decode it into manifestation in the brain. The holographic level of reality is within us and not external to us. If we revisit what I said earlier about the human decoding system we can bring that together with electrical reality. The foundation information construct of the simulation is information encoded in waves and when this is decoded it becomes an electrical and digital/holographic reality. See how this fits perfectly with the five senses decoding waves into electrical information communicated to the brain to become digital/holographic information and perceived ‘physical’ reality. The Universe has wavefield, electrical, digital and holographic levels and so do human decoding processes. Both are expressions of the same simulated system.

Who created the simulation?

This all has revelatory implications for how the simulation was created by the non-human force behind the Cult and for the nature of our experienced reality. There are other levels of the Earth that operate on a far higher frequency band which means we can’t see them. Many near-death experiencers have described this high-frequency Earth with its incredibly vivid colours they had never seen before. They are manifestations of the much higher frequencies that exist outside the perceptual confines of the Body-Mind simulation. Shamans and seers have talked since ancient times of this other ‘Earth’ as have those who have experienced psychoactive potions. ‘Other Earth’ reality existed before the simulation and continues to do so. Its high frequency means it is far less energetically dense which makes far more possible and negates the need for ‘physical’ food. Energetic sustenance is taken directly from the energetic field. Communication is by telepathy rather than voice and people can transport themselves by thought rather than having to ‘physically’ walk, drive or fly in aircraft. Why do they need planes when they themselves can fly with their lack of human-like density? High-frequency Earth is the planet’s prime reality although it’s still just a micro-fraction of Infinite reality. The biblical story of the ‘Fallen Angels’ and their ‘revolt from God’ (a theme repeated in non-biblical cultures throughout the ancient world) is really the story of the simulation. ‘Fallen Angels’ lost their heart-centre connection to The One to such an extent that they fell down the frequencies (hence ‘fallen’) and believed they were the ‘gods’ ruled by their master ‘God’ that Cultists know as Lucifer the Light Bringer – the bringer of the simulation formed from ‘light’ within the speed of light. The ‘Fall of Man’ refers to those in Prime Earth who the Fallen Ones enticed and manipulated down the frequencies with them. Prime Earth is what the Bible calls ‘Eden’ and humans left the ‘garden’ to be trapped in density and the false perceptions of self and reality that come from that. These are the same ‘fallen’ entities that the Cult and Satanists are connecting with in their rituals and the inner circle members of the Cult are incarnate ‘Fallen Angels’ hiding behind biological AI software ‘human form’.

The Fallen Ones set about creating their own world to entrap indefinitely Prime Earth awareness that would become their slaves in a form called ‘mind’. They created the simulation – a wave/digital copy of Prime Earth. I say this is described at the start of Genesis with ‘God’ making the world in ‘seven days’ after the declaration ‘Let there be Light ’. The Cult’s central modus operandi is the technique of inversion to sell a perception of everything that’s the opposite of what it really is. What a perfect example it would be for ‘the God’ of the Old Testament to be the very ‘Lucifer’, ‘Satan’, ‘Devil’, that ‘the God’ is supposed to ‘fight’. Heads you worship Lucifer, tails you worship Lucifer. Ever wondered why the ‘god’ of the Old Testament is portrayed so differently to the ‘god’ of the New? Christianity’s attempt to present them both as the same entity makes no sense whatsoever. I have concluded after 30 years of research into all these related subjects that the simulation is a wavefield information construct (think Wi-Fi) with a human body that can decode the construct, interact with it (think computer), and perceive it as reality. I have been referring to the body for decades as a biological computer. Carl Sagan’s statement about humans being made of ‘star stuff’ – the carbon, nitrogen and oxygen atoms, etc. of stars – is another as above, so below, confirmation. Chris Impey, professor of astronomy at the University of Arizona, said that because humans, animals and most ‘matter’ on Earth contain these elements ‘we are literally made of star stuff’. Look at this from the simulation perspective and you get the same story from a different route. Are characters in a computer game encoded with different maths and rules to the rest of the game? Are they made of different ‘stuff’? No, and it’s the same with the simulation and the human body specifically created by the Cult ‘gods’ to interact with the simulation. They are encoded with the same basic codes in their wavefields and express that through the ‘star stuff’ comparison in their holographic ‘physical’ state. The creation of the body-computer is told symbolically in the story of ‘God’ creating ‘Adam’ and ‘Eve’ along with the reference to the sons of ‘God’ (the gods, plural in the original) interbreeding with the daughters of men. We don’t have to be talking here of literal interbreeding through procreation. The body can be changed by broadcasting frequencies of information which the hard-drive, receiver-transmitter DNA decodes into holographic mutations through changes in the wavefield (5G, 6G, 7G?). A Russian research team transformed frog embryos into salamander embryos by transmitting salamander DNA information patterns. Dr Michael Levin at Tufts University in Massachusetts produced tadpoles with eyes on their backs and frogs with six legs by manipulating their electrical communication systems. Levin believes the same technique could be used on humans to regrow lost limbs. So much becomes possible once the Cult illusions are breached and the true nature of reality is grasped. The human body is a wave/digital copy of the forms in Prime Earth reality and far, far denser and more limited in nature. It does mean, however, that the Cult and its masters have had to leave in place many functions of the original form that allow awakening awareness to connect with expanded consciousness outside the simulation. The whole ‘smart’ technology and AI agenda is about deleting those connections by creating a new human form connected even more powerfully to the simulation and I’ll have much more later about this.

Come again? Mmm … no thanks

Figure 175: To ‘evolve’ and find ‘enlightenment’ we have to keep incarnating onto a pin-head-sized planet over and over while ignoring the rest of Infinity. Yep, makes absolute sense, right? Or we only do it once and then ‘God’ judges us. What utter crap we are told to believe and so many do.

The simulation or Matrix is an artificially-generated field of information that has been overlaid on The Field or Infinite Field. Humanity has been manipulated to connect and interact with this artificial field or Matrix and perceive it as reality. Today’s ‘smart’ technology and Wi-Fi are overlaying another even more limited field over the main simulation field to further disconnect humanity from The Field. This could only be done once humans had developed intellectually to the point where they could build and operate such technology, but what is happening has been in the planning for thousands of years in our perception of ‘time’ (again much more later). The sequence goes like this: Create the wavefield/digital information construct as a copy of Prime Earth; create forms, human, animal, etc., which are wave-entangled with the construct; entice consciousness to make a wave entanglement with those forms (‘incarnate’). A key aspect to the enticement is the unique sensations of the five senses which are very different from Prime Reality and appear to act like a drug addiction. People become addicted to virtual reality games and the frequencies emitting from smartphones while consciousness can become addicted to the sensations of the five senses. These addictions create a wave entanglement with the simulation that pulls consciousness in the form of mind back into five sense reality over and over and this is known as reincarnation. Eastern religions believe in the cycle of reincarnation and ‘karma’ in which we continually incarnate on Earth to work through the ‘karmic cycle’ of actions-consequences-actions-consequences until, through trial and error, we reach a frequency state (‘enlightenment’) high enough to escape that cycle and gravitate to Prime Reality. Mainstream science estimates that the Earth when compared with the perceived extent of the Universe is the equivalent of a billionth the size of a pinhead (Fig 175 ). Do we really believe that to ‘evolve’ we have to keep incarnating over and over onto a planet a billionth the size of a pinhead compared with the Universe which itself is a fractional smear of Infinite Reality? That’s crazy. From my perspective there is another way to explain this. You are enticed into the simulation; you become addicted to the sensations of the simulation like people become addicted to computer games; you leave the body when its cycle ends, but you are still addicted (therefore deeply wave-entangled) with the simulation that it draws you back again and again (flies to a light, bees to a honeypot). This continues until you work out the illusion and in doing so raise your frequency to the level of vibration (through the heart) that allows you to escape the electromagnetic pull of the simulation. ‘Reincarnation’ does not have to happen – we make it so with encouragement and manipulation from the hidden ‘gods’. We can escape the Matrix anytime we want by realising it’s a flytrap and by remembering who and what we really are. Academic neurosurgeon Eben Alexander describes how in his near-death experience he first entered a dark realm of heavy vibration which he perceived as deep mud. He felt trapped and unable to free himself until an entity came to take him out. Once in Prime Reality when he realised his true self, and his frequency increased in sync with that, he said he was able to enter and leave the ‘dark place’ whenever he chose if you believe his account. Whether people do or not the theme is correct.

Reincarnation advocates say we select the body, situation and ‘time’ (astrology) of ‘incarnation’ to best suit the experience we wish to have. I say this can also be explained by the mind’s state of wavefield frequency entangling with other wavefields – bodies, situations, locations and astrological fields – that best suit (a) what it wants to experience and/or (b) what its wave entanglements draw the mind into purely by its wavefield attaching to like fields. What we come into and what we go out to is decided by our wavefield state which is decided by our perceptual state. Another relevant question with regard to this: Do addicts make choices about what they are addicted to? They are not in control – their addiction is. For those minds addicted to the five-senses of the simulation the ‘Matrix’ is in control. The point of this book is to offer the tools to free ourselves from that addiction which holds much of humanity in perceptual and five-sense servitude to the alleged ‘karmic cycle’. We should not forget there is quite a common theme with near-death experiences of a point, sometimes symbolised as a fence or wall, that they say if they pass they cannot return to their body in that particular ‘life’. By the very fact that they come back to tell the tale they don’t cross that line. They don’t know what lies beyond it. For sure Infinite Reality lies beyond, but is there also a realm from which minds still wave-attached and addicted to the simulation return here? I think there is and that is why our frequency state at ‘death’ is so important. I suggest that the great majority of even genuine psychics are accessing that realm with their ‘I’m getting a Mary, anyone know a Mary?’ communications. Only the most open and expanded attune to frequencies high enough for the really profound information to be passed through that is free of simulation manipulation and perspective. Addiction to the simulation has become so ingrained through this cycle with each new addiction increasing previous addiction that an intervention is being directed from Prime Reality to break the cycle. I’ll have more about this in the final chapter.

During my ayahuasca experience in 2003 I was shown a picture of a path across a field and then people began falling from the sky onto the path. As they walked in ever greater numbers they wore down the path which morphed into the dark groove of one of the old vinyl records. The people in the darkness just followed the grove and where it took them (round and round). The Voice said over the pictures that humanity fell so easily for the programming in each ‘incarnation’ because they had been through it many times before. ‘She’ asked from the groove perspective if it was really so strange that people looked upwards for ‘God’ when it was the only direction they could see ‘light’. I have one other point about ‘reincarnation’. You hear people say when they have particular traits or something happens to them that ‘I must have been bad in a previous life’ or ‘it must be my karma’. In reality, it may have nothing to do with either although the basic like-frequency entanglement principle still stands. We inherit body wavefields encoded with the emotional states and traits of others. I have described the passing on of epigenetic on-off gene sequences caused by the wavefield interactions of ‘previous generations’. These can be ‘physical’, mental and emotional. A person feeling bad about themselves today because they are overweight no matter how they diet may have inherited the epigenetic gene sequence from someone who was a fast-food freak consuming toxic shite that switched on genes that pile on weight. This is happening to incredible numbers of people in the fast food era. An apparently irrational fear that makes no sense to a person’s experience in this lifetime does not always have to be ‘past life’ related. It can be a bad experience relating to that fear involving someone in the genetic line which is still encoded in the body field and triggers an apparently inexplicable emotional reaction to particular situations. Consciousness can delete these programs as I’ll be explaining.

Cult vampires and Agent Smith

Figure 176: Agent Smith in The Matrix symbolised Cult operatives within the simulation manipulating events for their unseen ‘gods’. Smith was a computer program or what we would call today artificial intelligence – so are the major Cult operatives running our world.

Figure 177: In the same way humanity is the power source of the Cult’s hidden ‘gods’. The more low-vibrational mental and emotional waves we produce the better for them.

Figure 178: The Cult’s unseen ‘gods’ feed off human low-frequency energy especially fear, anxiety, hatred, resentment, regret, and other such emotional states. (Image Neil Hague.)

Figure 179: The main all-seeing eye character in Disney’s Monsters, Inc in which the monsters powered their world with the fear of human children.

Cult bloodlines (hybrid Fallen Angel/human wavefields) that I have been exposing for decades are the simulation’s ‘Agent Smiths’. He is the character in the Matrix movies who manipulates events in the simulation on behalf of those in the unseen that created the Matrix (Fig 176 ). This is the role of the bloodlines that run The Web of secret, semi-secret and public organisations and institutions (including politics and government) to advance the agenda for total human control dictated by the Luciferian Fallen invisible to human sight. Agent Smith is an artificial intelligence program that can replicate itself into multiple Smiths. I say that the major Cult operatives in our world are also biological software programs or AI that are seeking via AI to take over everything by connecting humanity to AI. To the Cult and its ‘gods’ the biological is a form of technology. One of the goals is to vampire low-vibrational mental and emotional energy emitted by humans who the Cult has manipulated into low-vibrational mental and emotional states. The Matrix movies symbolised this with the Morpheus character holding up a battery and saying the ‘machines’ (the Fallen Ones symbolically) had turned humans into batteries to empower themselves (Fig 177 ). I have heard the same theme from shamans and carriers of ancient knowledge all over the world. The Fallen Ones have closed their heart centres to the energy flow of The One to such an extent that they have had to develop their own sources of energy that match their own low-vibrational state. Humanity is one such source. The game is to entrap human perceptions and manipulate conflict, fear, anxiety, depression, hatred, despair, guilt, resentment and regret so mercilessly and incessantly that immense waves of low-frequency energy are transmitted for the Fallen Ones to absorb and feed off (Fig 178 ). When we stop generating these frequencies on the scale that we do the energy source is disconnected and the manipulators are correspondingly weakened (another benefit of opening the heart). Cult-controlled Disney released the movie Monsters, Inc in 2001 which portrayed a ‘monster world’ that had no energy source. They overcame this by entering the human realm to terrify children. Screams of the kids were caught in a tube device and the energy transferred to the ‘monster’ power system. The hero was depicted with one giant (all-seeing) eye (Fig 179 ). Satanic rituals making sacrifices ‘to the gods’ through the ages and still today are sacrifices specifically aimed at generating a rush of terror for ‘the gods’ to absorb. The rituals are designed to create maximum terror in the target in the run up to the sacrifice as a ‘gift’ or ‘offering’ to ‘the gods’. All the ‘sacrifice to the gods’ shite comes from this. While the ‘gods’ are absorbing the wavefield level of the terror outside visible light the Satanists drink the blood which contains that same terror in the form of adrenalin. The Fallen are energy vampires and their Cult gofers are blood vampires. The ‘gods’ prefer children as sacrifices because of the particular frequencies of pre-pubescent children. Paedophilia rings connect at their core with satanic rings for the same reason. While possessed paedophiles are having sex with children the wave entanglements from the child to the paedophile and through to the possessing entity allow the entity to draw off and absorb the child’s energy. So many rich and famous Cult operatives and bloodlines I have researched in royalty, politics, banking, business, intelligence agencies, military, law enforcement and ‘entertainment’ are connected to both paedophilia and Satanism. Are we really so naive that we think it’s just a coincidence that Jimmy Savile, the UK mega-paedophile and procurer of children for the rich and famous, had deep and decades-long inner-circle connections with the Cult bloodline British Royal family and Prince Charles in particular? Or that Savile was brought into the royal fold in the 1960s by Lord Mountbatten, a known paedophile and Prince Charles mentor? Or that Prince Andrew’s close friendship with Sabbatian-Frankist Cult and Israeli Mossad agent, mega-paedophile and child procurer, Jeffrey Epstein, was more random chance? Or that UK Prime Minister Margaret Thatcher was a close friend of Savile in an administration that protected known paedophiles? Oh, please .

Figure 180: Yep, I’m getting some more. Plenty to come.

Maintaining Body-Mind humanity in low-frequency states of programmed ignorance is not only about feeding off our energy. The simulation is a band of frequency and to hold Body-Mind in perceptual servitude and illusion we must be entangled with the simulation through body, mind and emotions, and that means staying within its frequency band. From this we have had the age-old targeting of anyone who expands their awareness beyond that perceptual prison and sees the truth. The Cult created religions which insisted that everyone believed what they said on pain of death. ‘Witches’ (psychics) were drowned and ‘blasphemers’ of every kind were burned or in other ways mass-murdered. The Inquisition was a Cult operation to protect its control of human perception and when people began to turn away from religion the Cult instigated mainstream science to keep the truth about reality from the masses while continuing to pass on the hidden knowledge to each generation of the Cult ‘elite’. This new religion called science has been policed by another inquisition for would-be scientists, academics and doctors in which they follow the prescribed ‘truth’ or find another job. Mainstream science is the same religion blueprint under another name. Scientism has its own holy books (‘scientific orthodoxy’), imposes its beliefs through the ‘education’ system (just like religious schools), and through the mainstream and much of the ‘alternative’ media. All use holy Scientism orthodoxy as their point of reference for ‘how things are’ even though most of this is way off the mark (Fig 180 overleaf). Where once people were killed for seeing the truth outside the simulation (though many still are) the weapons of choice in the West today are ridicule, condemnation and censorship by Cult-owned Google, YouTube, Facebook, Twitter, and all the rest. They are the modern face of the Inquisition and Nazi book-burners along with government agencies targeting alternative methods of healing based on knowledge denied by Scientism’s religious dogma (the Cult).

Where are the ‘aliens’?

Given the extent of the night sky alone in terms of stars and planets why isn’t the Galaxy/Universe that we ‘see’ (decode) teeming with life? By the law of averages alone it should be. The ancients in cultures all over the world described non-human visitations. Rock and cave paintings dated to thousands of years ago feature images remarkably similar to those reported in the modern world by people claiming to have seen, or been abducted by, non-human entities. They clearly exist so why not make themselves openly visible to everyone? Italian physicist Enrico Fermi (1901-1954), who created the first nuclear reactor, asked this question and it became known as the Fermi Paradox. American astrophysicist Michael Hart studied the mystery and wrote an article for the Royal Astronomical Society Quarterly Journal in 1975 entitled ‘An Explanation for the Absence of Extraterrestrials on Earth’. He concluded that the mystery had these possible explanations: (1) Aliens never came because of something ‘that makes space travel unfeasible’; (2) aliens chose not to come to Earth; (3) advanced civilizations arose too recently for aliens to reach us; (4) aliens have visited Earth but we didn’t see them. I would add another: The Fallen Ones behind the simulation don’t want humanity to interact with extraterrestrials that would open their minds to the scale and nature of reality. They want us to believe we are alone (alone – isolated, disconnected). What would happen if people became consciously aware of non-human civilisations who came to impart knowledge that has been kept from us? Human minds would fly open and Cult control of perception would be over. Open visitations from benevolent and advanced extraterrestrials is the last thing the Fallen want and given they have so much control over the gateways to the simulation they can overwhelmingly stop that although not entirely. What they want is a closed system with them controlling the gateways and portals and most of the ‘extraterrestrials’ that people report (though not all) are reptilian in nature or the classic Greys – both of which are expressions of the Fallen Angels. Malevolent ‘Greys’ and ‘Reptilians’ are inserts into the Matrix to serve the Fallen and I believe the classic ‘Greys’ to be another form of biological/technological artificial intelligence which the Cult wants to connect to the human brain. Still other ‘UFO’ craft are really flown by humans with the technology developed through technology transfer between the Fallen and Cult operatives in underground bases, or DUMBS (deep underground military bases), run by Cult levels of the military. What is happening in these bases is denied even to elected governments. Make that especially to elected governments. The existence of ‘flying saucer’, or anti-gravity, technology has been widely documented for decades and the scam is to keep from the population and politicians an awareness of technology way beyond the public cutting edge. When people see glimpses of that they will immediately assume it’s the work of ‘aliens’. American military pilots have described seeing craft moving at speeds and changing direction in ways that are impossible to known human technology. The Pentagon has admitted to having these sightings, some caught on radar, but they refuse to release details of their internal ‘investigations’.

Astrological inversion?

What are the chances of such an apparently limitless realm of stars and planets being seemingly devoid of life when life has evolved to the extent that it has on a planet the comparative size of a pinhead? You know, the same pinhead that we have to keep incarnating onto to follow ‘God’s Plan’. It’s all ridiculous … unless … the simulation has been specifically encoded to be that way to give target minds the feeling of isolation which confirms we are all alone, a ‘Little Me’ in every sense. Remember the simulation is a simulation , an artificial construct, and its creators can encode information any way they choose just as video game creators do. The scale of the two may be very different, but the theme is exactly the same. Today’s virtual reality technology is mimicking the simulation. The Universe and galaxy seems devoid of life, except for us, because the simulation is made to be that way. I remember being hit between the eyes in a revelatory sense on my first visit as a child to the then new London Planetarium which opened in 1958. I could have been no more than six or seven. There were many strange things about that trip including the fact that it happened at all. We didn’t have much money and travelling anywhere outside my home city of Leicester was very rare in those days even to the seaside. My father came down the stairs that morning and said ‘Get ready – we’re going to London’. I couldn’t believe it. Where did that come from? London? Wow , I’d never been there and it would be a long time before I did again. Even stranger is that my father announced we were going to visit the planetarium having shown no interest whatsoever in astronomy before or indeed after. I had no idea what a planetarium was and didn’t know what to expect. I clearly remember the moment and the effect it had on me when the lights went down and I saw the night sky projected on the domed ceiling. ‘It looks so real ’, I thought’. If someone had said it was nighttime and the roof had been removed I would have believed them. The experience struck me so profoundly and I never forgot the moment. I had no idea why until I began to realise that the night-sky itself is a holographic projection. Oh, but when spacecraft send back pictures the planets look so real and solid. Of course they do – the decoded simulation is holographic. If the planets and stars are a projected holographic construct where does that leave the wave effects on humans measured by astrology? Well, I am going to be controversial here, but then I have been known to be. Where that leaves astrological influences is as … part of the control program. These influences are constantly affecting us mentally and emotionally and laying out our life ‘path’ which is why it is important to expand into beyond-the-simulation consciousness to override astrological influences. Without expanded awareness a human life is the playing out of a software program with many different influences dictating the direction including the astrological. This is not to say that we don’t need astrologers or their readings. No, the opposite is true. Skilled astrologers are actually reading the influences of the simulation which is very useful information. I am saying that we need to know what these influences are and by opening our hearts and minds we can tap into the power of consciousness to overcome them when necessary.

Gnostics knew (and they were not alone)

Figure 181: The Royal Library of Alexandria.

The themes of what I am saying can be found all over the ancient world before Cult religions moved in to make revealing the knowledge a death sentence. This is certainly true of a group of people – a belief system rather than a race – known as Gnostics with their philosophy of Gnosticism. Wherever they located and their information began to spread the Roman Church, the Church of Babylon relocated to Rome by Cult operatives, would send its armies and mobs to destroy them. Most importantly this happened with regard to the Gnostics with the destruction of the Royal or Great Library of Alexandria in Egypt in the 5th century. Gnostic thinkers at the library collected an estimated nearly half a million scrolls, manuscripts and documents detailing ancient history and knowledge from many centres including Egypt, Assyria, Greece, Persia, India, and elsewhere (Fig 181 ). This was knowledge about history (the arrival of the Fallen Ones) and reality that the Cult-controlled Roman Church did not want to be circulated. Greek philosophers Plato, a pupil of Socrates, and Aristotle were among the inspirations of Hypatia, an Athens-educated mathematician, astronomer and philosopher who was head of the Platonist school in Alexandria. One of her quotes captured the spirit of open-minded inquiry at the Great Library: ‘Reserve your right to think, for even to think wrongly is better than not to think at all.’ Such commitment to free thought produced revelations about reality thousands of years before modern science ‘discovered’ them and claimed the credit. Gnostics in Alexandria knew that the Earth orbits the Sun 2,000 years before Polish mathematician and astronomer, Nicolaus Copernicus, confirmed this. The Cult was not happy with free-minded discovery and the Great Library was destroyed in a series of attacks by the Church. These included the murder of Hypatia in 415AD by a mob under the control of Cyril, Patriarch of Alexandria, who like so many mass killers before and since was made a saint by the Vatican. Gnostics also famously gathered in southern France centuries later under the name ‘Cathars’ before their mass-slaughter by the army of Rome in the siege in 1244 at the Castle of Monségur in the Languedoc near the Pyrenees.

Figure 182: Part of the fantastic Nag Hammadi find of Gnostic writings.

Figure 183: So many names, but the same force being described.

Figure 184: Gnostic texts describe how Archons appear in our reality in forms that are reptilian and sound very much like the ‘Greys’ of UFO research lore and legend.

When you read Gnostic philosophy it is easy to understand why the Cult’s Roman Church wanted rid of them wherever they located. Gnosis means ‘knowledge’ and more specifically hidden or spiritual knowledge. What I am calling Body-Mind the Gnostics called ‘Nous’ and what I am referring to as Infinite Self they gave the name ‘Pneuma’. From this comes the phrase about ‘using your nous’ which would translate as using your mind. It’s much better to use your Pneuma – your expanded awareness. It was believed that any detailed record of Gnostic belief had been lost with their demise at Monségur until an amazing find in 1945 at Nag Hammadi about 80 miles north of Luxor on the banks of the River Nile in Egypt. A local found a sealed jar filled with Gnostic texts or scriptures that became known as the Nag Hammadi Library (Fig 182 overleaf). They included 13 leather-bound papyrus codices (manuscripts) and more than 50 texts written in Coptic Egyptian. The texts are estimated to date from about 350 to 400AD which would fit with the period before the attack on the library in which Hypatia was killed. It’s thought likely they are representations of Greek works going back to maybe 120-150AD or earlier. From this incredible find far more is known about the Gnostic view of reality and this is especially significant with the texts hidden away and remaining unchanged when many religious texts have been manipulated, rewritten and translated to suit the authorities of the day. I was taken aback to read the Nag Hammadi works after what I had already concluded about the Fallen Ones and the simulation. More than 1,600 years ago (as we perceive ‘time’) the Gnostics wrote about a non-human force they called ‘Archons’ and a ‘fake reality’ which in modern parlance was, in effect, describing a simulation. No wonder the Cult-created-and-controlled Roman Church wanted them gone. Archon is a Greek word meaning ‘ruler’, ‘prince’, ‘authorities’ and ‘from the beginning’. A fifth of the Nag Hammadi manuscripts are about the Archontic manipulation of human society under the chief Archon which Gnostics refer to as ‘Yaldabaoth’, or the ‘Demiurge’, and the Cult calls Lucifer the Light Bringer. Other names for Yaldabaoth/Demiurge are Satan and the Devil which are biblically referred to in reptilian terms (Fig 183 ). Gnostics believed that Yaldabaoth and the Archons were the source of evil in human society and that they indeed created the material world that I am calling the simulation. They said human bodies were a trap to enslave us in the fake reality. Gnostic texts referred to Archons in their base form as energy beings (what I would describe as wavefields of consciousness), but they said Archons could take ‘material’ form. They described their most common manifestations as … reptilian or serpentine and beings that look like ‘an unborn baby or foetus with grey skin and dark, unmoving eyes’. Reptilian entities have featured in my books since the 1990s as manipulators of human life from the hidden realms with their bloodline human/reptilian hybrids operating within the simulation and appearing outwardly to be human. The description of grey foetus-like entities with dark eyes captures the appearance of the classic ‘Greys’ of UFO research fame (Figs 184 ). They are by far the most common ‘alien’ entities reported by witnesses and those dubbed ‘abductees’ across the world who describe in remarkably consistent detail how they were abducted by a non-human species, usually ‘Greys’. Gnostic texts have their version of ‘The One’ which they symbolically call ‘The Father’ and ‘The All’.

The Nag Hammadi Bruce Codex says:

He is an incomprehensible one, but it is he who comprehends All. He receives them to himself. And nothing exists outside of him. But All exist within him. And he is boundary to them all, as he encloses them all, and they are all within him. It is he who is Father of the aeons, existing before them all. There is no place outside of him.

Figure 185:Gnostics described Prime Reality and fake reality – what I am calling the simulation. Prime Reality was a place of harmony, love and the NOW. Fake reality was a place of disharmony, evil and ‘time’ created by Yaldabaoth (Lucifer the Light Bringer).

What a perfect description of The One , the still and silent ‘isness’ of All Possibility and Infinite Intelligence pervading all existence and to whose influence we can open any time we choose. Nag Hammadi texts divide reality into what they call the ‘Upper Aeons’ (Prime Reality) and the ‘Lower Aeons’ or material world. Aeons in the Gnostic context are bands of perception, reality and potential. Upper Aeons, the realm of All That Is in Awareness of Itself , is ‘The Silence’, ‘the silent Silence’, ‘the living Silence’, with its ‘Watery Light’ (Fig 185 ). This light is very different from the simulation light within the speed of light and has been described by near-death experiencers. Water symbolism is often used by Gnostics for Infinite light as with ‘… the waters which are above’; ‘… the waters which are above matter’; and ‘… the Aeons in the Living Water’. The Bible describes in the opening to Genesis how the Old Testament ‘God’ (I say ‘Yaldabaoth’) created the earth from the ‘void’ by moving upon the ‘face of the waters’:

In the beginning God created the heaven and the earth. And the earth was without form, and void; and darkness was upon the face of the deep. And the Spirit of God moved upon the face of the waters. And God said, Let there be light: and there was light.

Gnostics said there is no ‘time’ or ‘space’ in the Upper Aeons as I described earlier. One text says that ‘since the emanations from ‘The Father’ are limitless and immeasurable’ there can be no time or space and they are pure consciousness or awareness named Pleroma or ‘the totality’, ‘the fullness’ and the ‘perfection’ of ‘emanations of the Father’. The Tripartite Tractate text says:

The emanation of the Totalities, which exist from the one who exists, did not occur according to a separation from one another, as something cast off from the one who begets them. Rather, their begetting is like a process of extension, as the Father extends himself to those whom he loves, so that those who have come forth from him might become him as well.

Gnostics speak of the interaction between ‘The Father’ and ‘The Mother’ which they refer to as ‘The Thought’. Their interaction produced a third force or extension of The One which they symbolised as the Son. There are many themes in the Nag Hammadi texts which Christianity twisted through the centuries and took for its own.

Archontic fake reality

Figure 186: Gnostic texts said that Yaldabaoth created a ‘bad copy’ of Prime Reality and I say they were describing the creation of the simulation. (Image Neil Hague.)

Figure 187: What the Gnostic ‘bad copy’ really is.

Nag Hammadi manuscripts say the material world was created ‘in error’ when an emanation of the ‘The Father’ disconnected from his influence and this is the Gnostic version of ‘The Fall’ and Fallen Ones. The emanation called by Gnostics Yaldabaoth or the Demiurge (Lucifer/Satan/Devil) is said to be a ‘formless entity’ that proceeded to create a ‘bad copy’ of the Upper Aeons (Prime Reality) which became the Lower Aeons or ‘material’ world and what I say is a simulation (Figs 186 and 187 ). I suggest that using modern language what Gnostics described as a ‘bad copy’ is a wavefield/digital copy of cosmic Prime Reality – a virtual reality representation. A simulation could be very accurately dubbed a bad copy and once it was created the copy could be continually changed and downgraded just as once you have downloaded a copy of a website you can change its nature while the original continues to exist as it always was. This has been happening since the simulation was installed and never more so than with the current technological transformation. The Gnostic Apocryphon of John says that Yaldabaoth is a ‘counterfeit spirit’ and Nag Hammadi texts describe this entity as ‘The Blind One’, ‘The Blind God’ and ‘The Foolish One’. Samael, a name for Yaldabaoth in Jewish Talmudic writings, translates as ‘Poison of God’, or ‘Blindness of God’. Gnostics said this ‘insane’ fake ‘god’ oversaw chaos without limit. The Nag Hammadi Origin of the World manuscript says: ‘…There appeared a force, presiding over the darkness Lower Aeons. And the forces that came into being subsequent to them called the shadow “the limitless chaos”.’ You only have to observe Planet Earth for confirmation. Nag Hammadi texts depict our reality of chaos as ‘Hell’, ‘the Abyss’ and ‘Outer Darkness’, where trapped Souls are tormented and manipulated by demons (as I have been writing for decades). The Hypostasis of the Archons quotes Yaldabaoth as saying: ‘It is I who am God, and there is no other power apart from me.’ You have heard similar in the Old Testament from the Genesis ‘God’ that ‘created the world’ – created the simulation: ‘I am the LORD, and there is none else, there is no God beside me’ (Isaiah 45:5). The ‘Lord God’ of the Bible is the ‘Lord Archon’ or Yaldabaoth of the Gnostic manuscripts. Yaldabaoth is depicted in popular culture as the ‘Dark Lord’, ‘Lord of Time’, Lord (Darth) Vader and Dormammu, the evil ruler of the ‘Dark Dimension’ trying to take over the ‘Earth Dimension’ in the Marvel comic movie, Dr Strange . The angry, hate-filled, vindictive ‘God’ of the Old Testament, known as Yahweh/Jehovah, is quite clearly Yaldabaoth of the Gnostic manuscripts. Here he is quoted in Leviticus:

You will eat the flesh of your sons and the flesh of your daughters. I will destroy your high places, cut down your incense altars and pile your dead bodies on the lifeless forms of your idols, and I will abhor you … I will scatter you among the nations and will draw out my sword and pursue you. Your land will be laid waste, and your cities will lie in ruins.

Figure 188:The Speed of Light is the simulation.

Figure 189: Once again different names, same story, same phenomenon.

Nice bloke. I emphasise that I came to all the conclusions outlined earlier from a list of other sources before I read the Nag Hammadi documents which made them even more compelling to me. The texts say that Yaldabaoth left the Upper Aeons (left the ‘garden’). He created subordinate like-entities, AI software copies called Archons, and a likeness ‘in him’ of the Cosmos (simulation). Note the term ‘in him’. I recall a quote by Caleb Scharf, Director of Astrobiology at Columbia University, who said that ‘alien life’ could be so advanced that it transcribed itself into the quantum realm to become ‘physics’ and numbers. He talked of intelligence which is indistinguishable from the fabric of the Universe. This has been my view for a long time and I say that ‘AI’ beyond what we have been told about is ‘Yaldabaoth’ and the Archontic force which has transcribed itself into the quantum realm to become physics and numbers. This would explain why the physics of our reality are so different to those outside the speed of light (Fig 188 ). The AI connection will become incredibly important in the chapter ‘Where are we going – if we allow it?’ Gnostic texts say of Yaldabaoth: ‘He became strong and created for himself other aeons with a flame of luminous fire which exists now.’ Flame of fire = the ‘light’ of the simulation within the speed of light. The same themes can be found in ancient societies across the world as I have detailed in other works. Archons are the Gnostic name for the Islamic (and pre-Islamic) Jinn or Djinn (also genies), Christian demons, and Zulu Chitauri ‘Children of the Serpent’, or ‘Devastators’. Satan is known by Christians as ‘the Demon of Demons’ while Gnostics called Yaldabaoth the ‘Archon of Archons’. Both are known as ‘The Deceiver’. Nag Hammadi documents call Archons mind parasites, inverters, guards, gatekeepers, detainers, judges, pitiless ones and the Deceivers. Gnostics describe Archons in terms of ‘luminous fire’ while the Jinn are said in Islamic belief to be made from ‘smokeless fire’ (Fig 189 ). Archons and Jinn are both said to be entities in the unseen manipulating humanity. I was talking to a Muslim taxi driver in New York about my work and I mentioned the Archons and how they were described. He said immediately – ‘That sounds just like the Jinn’. Gnostics portray the ‘material’ world with words like ‘deficiency’, ‘imperfection’, darkness and the Abyss while the Upper Aeons are ‘fullness’. Prime Reality is called ‘the existent’ while ‘material reality (the simulation) is ‘non-existent’. The Bruce Codex says:

And then the existent separated itself from the non-existent. And the nonexistent is the evil which has manifested in matter. And the enveloping power separated those that exist from those that do not exist. And it called the existent ‘eternal’, and it called the non-existent ‘matter’. And in the middle it separated those that exist from those that do not exist, and it placed veils between them.

Figure 190:The ‘Ouroboros’, or ‘Leviathan’ is the reptilian symbol marking the walls of the simulation. We pass through those perceptual limits to escape the Matrix.

Figure 191: The ancient concept of the Ring-Pass-Not through which we must pass to return ‘home’ and as with the Gnostic version our perceptions hold the key. (Image Neil Hague.)

Gnostics make the distinction between our ‘Spirit’ in the Upper Aeons and our ‘Soul’ trapped in the material world. Most psychics are connecting with the realm of Soul and only a relative few with Spirit where the really top-notch information can be accessed. If our point of attention remains in Soul (Mind/Psyche) and not Spirit when we withdraw from ‘physicality’ we are trapped in the Lower Aeons at other less energetically-dense levels before returning in another bodily form through ‘reincarnation’. Gnostics have a concept of what they call ‘the middle place’, a ‘space’ between the Upper and Lower Aeons which they describe as a state of temporary ‘non-existence’ as the Soul waits to reincarnate or is trapped there by ignorance (low-frequency wavefield). Archons are said to guard the exits and gateways, but they are low-frequency idiots and cannot block or affect high-frequency states. Texts entitled Pistis Sophia symbolise the limits of Yaldabaoth reality (simulation) as a dragon swallowing its own tail: ‘The outer darkness is a great dragon, whose tail is in his mouth, outside the whole world and surrounding the whole world.’ See the reptilian symbolism yet again. An esoteric/occult symbol portrays precisely this concept in the form of the ‘Ouroboros’, or ‘Leviathan’, which is a serpent swallowing its own tail (Fig 190 ). Gnostics said the outermost planetary sphere or Archon (of the Lower Aeons/simulation) is Saturn. Beyond that was the serpent Leviathan through which Souls had to pass to reach paradise (reconnect with pure Spirit). Readers of Everything You Need To Know will be aware of what I have written about Saturn and its role in the simulation which again fits with the Nag Hammadi manuscripts. Cult symbolism is awash with portrayals of Saturn which is dubbed ‘Lord of Karma’ and ruler of ‘time’ – both concepts of the simulation. I also say that the Moon (linked to the perception of ‘time’) and the constellation of Orion are very significant to the simulation and human control. The theme of the Gnostic great dragon or Ouroboros can be found in the ancient esoteric concept of the ‘Ring-Pass-Not’ (Fig 191 ). This is a definition:

A profoundly mystical and suggestive term signifying the circle or bounds of frontiers within which is contained the consciousness of those who are still under the sway of the delusion of separateness – and this applies whether the Ring be large or small.

It is a general term applicable to any state in which an entity, having reached a certain stage of evolutionary growth of the unfolding of consciousness, finds itself unable to pass into a still higher state because of some delusion under which the consciousness is labouring, be that delusion mental or spiritual.

Figure 192:Humanity is entrapped by ignorance through suppression of perception and true self-identity. This maintains a low-frequency state that keeps people in the Bubbles of the simulation. We can break out any time we choose as I will later explain. (Image Neil Hague.)

Figure 193: An 1888 depiction of the firmament or ‘vast dome’.

Figure 194: A different portrayal of the firmament and two divided ‘world’ from 1475.

Common themes keep on repeating and among them are the following: Consciousness is trapped in the illusion of ‘material’ reality by perceptions of reality which dictate frequency. The simulation is a band of frequency which humanity and Body-Mind is manipulated not to breach by becoming aware of its true nature – formless Spirit (Fig 192 ). When this realisation is integrated as a knowing and not just an intellectual concept our Mind/Soul frequency quickens and we can pass after human ‘death’ through the Ring Pass Not/Ouroboros (outer frequency walls of the simulation). The Nag Hammadi Tripartite Tractate says of Souls trapped in the Lower Aeons: ‘Therefore they fell down to the pit of ignorance which is called “the Outer Darkness” and “Chaos” and “Hades” and “the Abyss”.’ Pit of ignorance = caught in the illusion = low frequency state. Gnostics describe humanity as a whole as manipulated ‘forgetfulness’. The way out of here is to remember our true nature and see through the illusion by opening the heart to a high-frequency state. The Jim Carrey film The Truman Show was very symbolic of this whether by accident or design. The Carrey character is born onto the mega-set of a TV soap and everyone around him is an actor although he doesn’t know that. The Sun comes up and down every day and seems real to him while in fact it’s a technological illusion orchestrated like the whole show from a control centre that looks remarkably like the Moon. Later in adult life Carrey’s character begins to realise something is not right (he ‘awakened’) and he sails a boat out into what appears to be an endless ocean to find the outer wall of the dome that marks the limit of the movie set which he was never allowed to see. He finds a door in the wall of the dome and walks through to the ‘real world’ (symbolic of Prime Reality). Interestingly, the term ‘firmament’ means ‘vast dome’ and the Biblical reference to ‘beyond the firmament’ takes on a whole new meaning from this perspective. The concept has been portrayed for centuries as you can see in Figures 193 and 194 overleaf which are depictions from 1888 and even 1475. The inscription on the second one reads: ‘A medieval missionary tells that he has found the point where heaven and Earth meet …’ Biblical texts describe how the Old Testament ‘God’ (Yaldabaoth) manifested the ‘vast dome’ firmament on the second day of the Creation sequence to divide the primal sea (Infinite Awareness) into upper and lower parts (Infinite reality and simulated reality):

Then God said, ‘Let there be a firmament in the midst of the waters, and let it divide the waters from the waters.’ Thus God made the firmament, and divided the waters which were under the firmament from the waters which were above the firmament; and it was so.

This biblical text is describing the division of what Gnostics call the Upper and Lower Aeons. Gnostic writings symbolise levels of conscious in terms of ‘the waters’ as we have seen with ‘… the waters which are above’; ‘… the waters which are above matter’; and ‘… the Aeons in the Living Water’. The simulation is an inversion (the Gnostic ‘bad copy’ ‘shadow world’) of Prime Reality. Gnostics compared the two with terms such as fullness/deficiency, immortal/mortal, spiritual/psychic, Spirit/Soul, existence/non-existence, no-time/time, no space/space. The deficiency of possibility compared with Prime Reality is why the Archontic force had to develop technology in an effort to bridge some of the ginormous gap in creative potential. Prime Reality manifests directly through consciousness with no technology necessary.

Software Archons

Figure 195: The bearded ‘Architect’ who built the Matrix in the movie series.

Figure 196: The bearded Kronos, ruler of ‘time’, and the Ancient Greek god of Saturn.

Figure 197: Kronos is known today as ‘Old Father Time’.

Figure 198: The Grim Reaper is another Cult symbol of Saturn which is said to represent death as well as time. We are talking about a Death Cult after all and no wonder Cultists worship Saturn (see Everything You Need To Know for why).

Agent Smith and other agents in the Matrix movies are portrayed as software programs downloaded into the simulation to manipulate events and target dissidents on behalf of the creator of the Matrix who is called ‘The Architect’ (Fig 195 ). He is given a white beard which connects to Kronos, the Greek god of Saturn, who is depicted holding a scythe and an hour glass to symbolise control of ‘time’ (Fig 196 ). The chief god of Rome was also Saturn after which was named the festival of Saturnalia that became the Western Christmas (Santa is an anagram of Satan). Other versions of Kronos/Saturn are called ‘Old Father Time’ with the long beard and the scythe-holding Grim Reaper which symbolises the Cult obsession with death (Figs 197 and 198 ). The Grim Reaper is associated with Saturn which is astrologically associated with death. Archons are encoded in arch -angels, arch -bishops and many such terms. We see the same with the Jewish god of Saturn called El. We have Is-Ra-EL (with its Saturn symbol Star of David flag) and the El -lite, El -ections, and so on. Agent Smith in The Matrix can replicate himself countless times because ‘he’ is a software program and I contend that the same is true with the Cult bloodlines. They are biological software known through the ages as the ‘Soulless Ones’ and ‘Heartless Ones’. They are cold, emotionless psychopaths who have no Soul and no heart connection to The One . We are talking AI biological robots or, in their base form, AI wavefields of encoded information. The Cult bloodline obsession with interbreeding is to hold fast the software codes. It’s not really about protecting the ‘blue blood’ gene pool, but the wave-code ‘pool’ which becomes holographically the biological gene pool. Archons in general are wavefield ‘software’ and Gnostic texts refer to them in terms of what we would call cyborgs. The ‘cold’, ‘emotionless’, Greys are software programs while reptilian species are robot-like in their behaviour. Zulu high shaman and official historian Credo Mutwa, who left us in 2020 at the age of 98, told me decades ago that to understand the ‘Illuminati’ we must study the behaviour of the reptile. I did and I found them to be extraordinarily computer-like as I already mentioned. I read an article about Swiss clairvoyant, Anton Styger, which was about his life and not at all about these subjects. Nevertheless one of his comments was very relevant to what I am saying. Skilled clairvoyants are able to see deeper into the energetic field and outside purely visible light. Styger said:

When I see people in business or politics who are particularly trapped by the material world, for example, I notice that they no longer have any light bodies at all wavefields associated with ‘human’. In many of these people, the point of light at the heart chakra, which is otherwise always present, is no longer visible to me.

Instead, I see something like a layer of ‘shiny tar’ around them in which a monstrous being in the shape of a lizard can be distinguished. When such people speak on television, for example, I see a crocodile shape manifesting itself around the person like in a concave mirror; I don’t see the light of their throat and forehead chakra.

They don’t have ‘light bodies’ in the human sense because they are possessed software constructs and no light at the heart chakra explains their heartless behaviour and lack of connection to The One . These are software entities running our world through control of politics, intelligence agencies, military, banking, business, media, academia, science, medicine, ‘education’, Silicon Valley, and all the rest. Many have quick minds and intellects because they are AI, and this further explains why Gnostic documents say that Archons have no ‘ennoia’ (‘intentionality’ or ‘creative imagination’). They have to trawl and exploit the creativity of their targets, in this case humanity, which is being manipulated to build its own technological prison. They have to manipulate the creative imagination of humans (which they don’t have) to manifest the reality they want and this will become seriously relevant later in terms of current events. Archons can copy and imitate, but not innovate. Gnostics called this ‘countermimicry’. One example is mimicking Prime Reality with the ‘bad copy’ simulated virtual reality and you can relate this concept to Hong Kong/China where so much is copied and not created – it is counterfeit as Gnostics called Yaldabaoth a ‘counterfeit spirit’. Gnostic texts say Archons are expert in deception and ‘phantasia’ – creating illusions through ‘Hal’ or virtual reality with the goal ‘to overpower humanity in its perceptual functions’ and impose ‘fear and slavery’. John Lamb Lash, author of the book Not In His Image about the Nag Hammadi texts, wrote:

Although they cannot originate anything, because they lack without connection to The One the divine factor of ennoia (intentionality), Archons can imitate with a vengeance. Their expertise is simulation (HAL, virtual reality). The Demiurge fashions a heaven world copied from the fractal patterns of the original … His construction is celestial kitsch, like the fake Italianate villa of a Mafia don complete with militant angels to guard every portal.

It reminds me of a quote in the TV series, The Hitchhiker’s Guide to the Galaxy : ‘In the beginning the Universe was created … This has made a lot of people very angry and been widely regarded as a bad move.’

Computer reality mimicking simulation reality

Figure 199: The interactive No Man’s Sky universe with more than 18 quintillion planets.

The Gnostic view of reality is close to my own in the areas I have described, but that doesn’t mean I am ‘a Gnostic’. There is just a convergence of view on the fake reality and its source. The last thing we need is any more black and white labels. There will be many other things on which Gnostics and I will disagree. Themes describing a fake ‘god’ rebelling against ‘the God’ and manipulating humanity by deception are widespread in so many forms within the religions and cultures of the world. It’s a universal story and if people think that imposing a simulated reality on the apparent scale of the Universe is too far-fetched they should look at interactive video games like No Man’s Sky released in 2016 (Fig 199 ). This features more than 18 quintillion planets each with their own unique, flora, faunas and animal species. There are sentient alien races and those who are ‘mechanical lifeforms’. The controlling ‘God’, called The Atlas (Yaldabaoth), is a ‘ubiquitous entity represented by a red orb inside a black diamond’. The will of Atlas is imposed by the Sentinels (Archons) who are ‘mechanical lifeforms; self-replicating, non-organic machines … who … act as workhorse machines of The Atlas and as universal police, controlling the actions of those who reside within the universe’. This pretty much sums up the human plight. We are experiencing a false reality that takes the form of an interactive virtual-reality simulation in which information is encoded in the simulation’s version of The Field for us to decode into an apparently physical world. The human personality without a connection to beyond-the-Bubble consciousness is created by electronic/electromagnetic stimulus through a system of activation and reaction (input-output) between the simulation and the five senses. Body-Minds have major or subtle differences in their ‘wiring’ or wavefields and so can respond differently to the same input. One person may react to a situation with compassion and another with empathy-deleted contempt. These reactions will appear in the playing out as a person who cares and a psychopath. Human responses to electronic/electromagnetic stimulus (a situation) are what we call different ‘personalities’. At the same time there are enormous similarities in the way that humans react to stimulus that induces fear – the ‘press enter’ response as I call it.

So we have Body-Minds reacting to fear-based stimulus on a mass scale – especially that relating to fear of death and the unknown (same thing) – but in their five sense-stimulus feedback loops responding to other electrical input in different ways that appear to give us different ‘personalities’. I say those ‘personalities’ are largely the creation of electrical input-output interaction while a connection to expanded awareness takes you beyond the programmed limits of human personality. Heart consciousness does what it knows to be right and overrides the input-output feedback loops. It does not react to fear stimulus with an output of fear and fear-generated response. It calmly sees things as they are from a panoramic perspective and the awareness that it is an eternal state of Infinite Consciousness having a brief and transitory experience. It has no fear of death because it knows that ‘death’ is merely a transfer of attention from a myopic reality to an infinite one. Heart awareness may seem to have a ‘personality’ through the perception of its behaviour (not least because that is so different to the ‘norm’), but such people are responding from the ‘I’ beyond the Bubble and not five-sense dominated input-output. Heart consciousness overrides that simulation/Body-Mind interaction and those senses then respond to the heart and not the simulation. In this way we begin to impact upon the simulation and not the other way round.

The simulation gives the illusion of past-present-future just as a video game does when both are only encoded information following a pre-set program in the NOW. Also encoded are the reincarnation/karma/astrology cycles which are feedback loops maintaining Souls and minds in the illusion even after human ‘death’ unless we transform our self-identity, remember our true nature, open our heart connection, and expand into frequencies the simulation cannot control. Our enslavement depends in totality on us being held within the frequency band of the simulation within the speed of light through our perceptual state and we can change that any time we want. Nor should we think that the manipulating entities are all-powerful as the force behind an apparently gigantic simulated Universe. Who says it’s gigantic? The No Man’s Sky universe appears to be so and yet it is only computer codes giving the illusion of enormity. When I looked at the ‘night sky’ in the London Planetarium it appeared to be fantastic in scale while it only existed as a projection on the ceiling. The ‘real’ night sky seems gigantic when it only exists in that form in your brain. The simulation is 2D or ‘flat’ encoded information fields that we decode into illusory 3D through Body-Mind systems specifically designed to do that. Holograms work the same way. The extent of the simulation can be minute compared with what we perceive it to be. At the time of release No Man’s Sky was running from 600,000 lines of code which sounds a lot until you know that modern vehicles with their entertainment and Wi-Fi systems use 100 million lines of code with plans for this to increase by two to three times. Do we only decode wavefields into holograms when we are observing them to save computational power that would be necessary for the entirety to be in holographic form all the time in the same way that computer screens go blank to save energy when they are not being used?

Decoding our own prison

The key to control by the simulation is not only its wave information construct. The crucial part is getting incarnate minds to decode the illusion while believing it to be real. The brain/body is constantly decoding the Matrix into holographic form and while perception is dictated only by the five-senses (the point of Matrix-Body interaction) the simulation is in control. Minds are then in the world and of the world and have no other point of reference. Would computer game characters know they are only responding to software? They would think it was all real. The point about ‘responding’ is significant. Humanity is not ultimately manipulated and directed by agents of the Cult sitting around a table deciding their next move. The transformation of global society now unfolding could never be achieved on that scale by table-sitters alone. The Archontic plan is being encoded in the energetic fabric of the simulation field for humanity to decode into reality and this is how it can happen so fast and on such global scale. For this to happen humanity must be attuned with the wave frequencies carrying that information – 5G is the next stage. Incessant propaganda through the ‘education’ system and mass media is specifically designed to instil perceptions that will create the desired Cult reality by entangling with the wavefields infused with that agenda. What you believe you perceive and what you perceive you experience. Humanity, in short, is decoding and manifesting its own prison. Only a transformation of perception through a transfer of self-identity to the True Self will stop this. How much of human perception is already being delivered by the simulation? What is the real origin of the constant chatter passing through people’s minds? I call this the ‘Scenario Mind’ because it spews out an endless list of scenarios and how we would respond even though the scenario is not happening. If he did this, I’d do that, if she said that, I’d say this. Where is all that coming from? Go into a quiet space and observe this chatter. Stand back from it. Listen as it rambles on. You can observe your own Body-Mind chatter and what does that tell you? It’s not you . The observer of the chatter is you .

Benjamin Libet (1916-2007), a scientist in the physiology department of the University of California, San Francisco, generated many highly-significant experiments in his quest to understand human consciousness. One group was asked to move their hand whenever ‘they’ chose while their brain activity was being monitored. Libet found that brain activity to move the hand began a full half a second before any conscious decision to do so. John-Dylan Haynes, a neuroscientist at the Max Planck Institute for Human Cognitive and Brain Sciences in Leipzig, Germany, found in his studies that he could predict an action ten seconds before a conscious intention purely by monitoring brain activity. Frank Tong, a neuroscientist at Vanderbilt University in Nashville, Tennessee, said: ‘Ten seconds is a lifetime in terms of brain activity.’ Where was the decision-making really coming from if not the conscious mind? I say that some – not all, some – is coming from the simulation. Morpheus said in The Matrix : ‘Are they your thoughts you’re thinking now?’ The body is encoded to be a limiting device for consciousness. In our no-form energetic state we can see, hear, feel, smell and taste without the body. We don’t actually need it except to interact with the simulation. It focuses our attention within the frequency band of the simulation or in fact an even smaller band than that called visible light. It makes us believe that we can only see, hear, feel, smell and taste through the body which means people fall for the illusion that the body is who we are and without it we’re nothing. Without it we’re everything . Mainstream science and medicine constantly underpin this belief that the body is the totality of the ‘I’. The body is counter-mimicking consciousness and limiting our sense of self, reality and the possible. No wonder Gnostics said the body was a prison trapping the ’divine spark‘ within matter. One other mystery explained by all this is why Earth’s atmosphere and ecosystems are perfect to sustain life as we perceive it when only a tiny change would spell disaster. Scientist Robert Lanza writes in his book, Biocentrism :

Why are the laws of physics exactly balanced for animal life to exist? … If the strong nuclear force were decreased 2 percent, atomic nuclei wouldn’t hold together, and plain-vanilla hydrogen would be the only kind of atom in the Universe. If the gravitational force were decreased by a hair, stars (including the Sun) would not ignite. These are just some of more than 200 parameters within the solar system and Universe so exact that it strains credulity to propose that they are random – even if that is exactly what standard contemporarily physics baldly suggests.

They are of course not random. They are made to be that way. How? Our world is a virtual-reality simulation with its own encoded rules and information. Why? To allow the Cult and its non-human ‘gods’ to enslave human perception in ongoing illusion and control. The simulation has been breached by many over the years who have sought to make humanity aware of its plight and they have often taken the consequences for that instigated by the Cult. This continues to be the case today as a concerted effort is underway by consciousness ‘incarnating’ from Prime Reality to wrest back control from the Fallen by informing the human family what is really happening in the manner of the prisoner in Plato’s cave. We are making progress, but to say the very least the job is far from done.

CHAPTER SIX

Why don’t we know?

Is there any point in public debate in a society where hardly anyone has been taught how to think, while millions have been taught what to think? – Peter Hitchens

T he game of life – in this case human life – plays out in a stadium (the simulation) called perception . From this everything else comes. What we perceive becomes what we believe becomes how we behave becomes what we experience. This is the deal and to understand these connections is to understand the world and the human plight.

Figure 200: A closed mind emits a closed frequency which interacts with The Field only within that limited band of possibility and thus creates the feedback loop in which ‘Little Me’ and ‘Label Me’ perception produces through cause and effect limited experience and awareness. (Image Gareth Icke.)

Figure 201: Open your mind and expand your self-identity and you expand your interaction with The Field and possibility. ‘Big Me’ perception creates a ‘Big Me’ experience. (Image Gareth Icke.)

Figure 202: What I call the Postage Stamp Consensus is the narrow band of possibility taught in the ‘education’ system and promoted by the media which is the foundation belief system of academia, science, corporations, medicine, government, and the great majority of the public.

Our perceptions dictate our frequency and our frequency dictates our wave-entanglements with people, places, situations, and experiences. Through this process we create our own reality and experience by attracting into our lives a holographic representation of our perceptions. A ‘Little Me’ perception will transmit waves so limited and weak in terms of perceived potential (‘I have no power’, ‘I’m a victim’ and ‘I’ll never be up to much’) that the feedback loop between perception and The Field will deliver back to you just that sort of life (Fig 200 ). By contrast if you come at life from the perspective of being Infinite Awareness (All Possibility) having a brief human experience you make a very different feedback connection with The Field – one that is both greater in scale and much higher in frequency. An expanded sense of self automatically expands your accessed consciousness to match that perception and you are interacting with that range of possibility within The Field. Your life is transformed as more possibilities attach to your feedback loop and become your experience (Fig 201 ). Our self-identity is central to our relationship with The Field. The Cult well knows that if it controls perception it will control experience. This is why people are being herded into smaller and smaller perceived identities to the point where one American university has this code for its students’ perceptions of self-identity: LGBTTQQFAGPBDSM (don’t ask). I’m sure that string of letters will be longer by the time you read this with new and ever more myopic identities invented by the day. What is happening in the world in terms of manipulation and events falls into place once you know how reality works.

Figure 203: Virtual reality headsets perfectly symbolise the human perception program.

Figure 204: The Cult knows that if it hijacks perception it will dictate the frequencies that attract experience. Myopic perceptions create a myopic life and collectively mass control becomes possible. The Cult is creating the nature of our reality through the manipulation of human perception.

The Cult’s prime objective then is to dictate perception and it has structured human society as a cradle-to-grave programming laboratory founded on what I have long called the ‘Postage Stamp Consensus’ (Fig 202 ). This is the tiny band of possibility indoctrinated in schools, colleges and universities and repeated 24/7 worldwide by the mainstream and much of the ‘alternative’ media. Postage Stamp belief dictates the perceptual limits of academia, establishment science, medicine, media, government, business and the Mainstream Everything , and provides the foundation of what I refer to as The Program (Fig 203 overleaf). The Cult first exploited religion as its perception deception in which deviating from the imposed belief proclaimed in a ‘holy book’ was a death sentence. This was the Postage Stamp Consensus of its day. Religion still retained the concept of life continuing after death, but included subordination to a schizophrenic ‘God’, both loving and vindictive, that invited those who believed in him to eternal paradise while condemning non-believers to stoking the fires of hell forever. We are asked to believe that this eternal division was decided by ‘God’ on the basis of a brief life on Earth of anything from seconds to decades on a planet equivalent to a billionth of a pinhead. I don’t know about you, but that makes perfect sense to me after a dozen gin and tonics with whisky chasers. Shockingly this belief still controls the perceptions (and the decoded experience) of billions. Ever greater numbers began to reject this form of control, however, and they were targeted with the new Cult entrapment wheeze of ‘science’ and state-controlled ‘education’. Mainstream establishment science had the added benefit of deleting any concept of a Creator and believers in this religion masquerading as ‘rational thought’ drew its targets and advocates deeper into the perception of random existence within ‘matter’. For religion in its most extreme form there is death to blasphemers and the milder version is ejection from ‘the faith’. With the ‘rational’ religion of Scientism there is death to your career and ejection from the faculty (‘the faith’). Mass indoctrination is further entrenched by Cult-controlled media bias and censorship now being taken to ever more extreme levels by Cult-owned Silicon Valley. If you control what people see and hear they will believe what you tell them so long as you also control what they don’t see and hear (Fig 204 ).

The download begins

Figure 205: Perceptual programming begins the moment we leave the womb and in fact even before that through the wave and chemical connections to the mother.

Figure 206: ‘Education’ in a single image.

Figure 207: Children go to school to be perceptually programmed with a sense of reality designed to last their entire lives.

Human society is a laboratory for Body-Mind and other terms that capture the theme include conveyor belt, sausage machine and computer download. Human life is indeed a perceptual download that starts even in the womb and ends at the cemetery. When a child arrives blinking into the light the programming really starts (Fig 205 ). First there are parents who have already been processed by the programming system the child is about to go through and accepted what it told them to believe (if they are entrapped in Body-Mind which the great majority still are). Parents upload this indoctrination to their child in its earliest years and I am not saying this is done through malevolent intent. Often it is quite the opposite. They have themselves downloaded the system’s version of reality and they think they are doing the best for their children by giving them the benefit of that ‘wisdom’. Downloaded illusory ‘wisdom’ includes everything from what children are told and how they are treated to accepting the tidal wave of vaccinations they now receive to fill the coffers of the Cult-owned Big Pharma and undermine their immune systems and perceptual processes for life. When children are damaged by vaccines it often happens in the brain. How many kids who are not brain-damaged enough to be diagnosed still have their thinking and creative processes suppressed and limited for the rest of their lives? When this impacts on behaviour they are prescribed drugs made by the same Cult Big Pharma cartel that produced the vaccines to ‘treat’ the effects of vaccines. The same goes for food/drug (chemical/wave) distortions which skew the way that kids process information into perception and behaviour. Three or four years after arriving in the world the perception download goes through a colossal upgrade known hilariously as ‘education’ when an already toxin-infested child heads for school (Fig 206 ). Now parents start to lose influence over their offspring while children increasingly lose their distinct individuality to a programmed perception about everything (Fig 207 ). Life as it will be for their entire formative years has begun during which they will sit at a desk or in a lecture theatre day after day being told what to believe and not believe about themselves and the world in all its facets and forms by authority figures representing the perception program of the state. These may be anything from a primary school teacher to an ‘eminent professor’. Either way their role is the same – to get children and young people to believe what the state (the Cult) wants them to believe. What more effective way can there be to dictate collective perception and behaviour than to have control of what young generations are told to believe throughout their formative years? The ‘educator’ at every level may themselves believe what they say thanks to their own programming, or they may not. It doesn’t matter. The state insists that they teach what they are told to teach in the way they are told to teach it or they’re out the door. Teachers and academics are in the same perceptual penitentiary as their students in the ‘education’ environment. I am going to detail in upcoming chapters how this is transforming society more blatantly and profoundly than ever before and to what end. Pressure to pass exams means that ‘education’ for both student and teacher becomes a daily rush to stuff state-approved (Cult-approved) alleged ‘facts’ into the memories of young people to be held for just long enough to repeat them on the exam paper. How much of what you ‘learned’ at school do you remember or have you used in your life apart from the basics of maths, writing and such like? Very little will be the answer from most people, or, in my case, next to sod all. In fact I have spent my life since deleting the crap I was told at school on the few occasions when I was paying any attention. The Cult doesn’t mind that you don’t consciously remember the programming. Its target is your subconscious which studies have revealed is responsible for 95 percent of human behaviour. Your so-called conscious mind is the slave of the subconscious and the subconscious is what the Cult is after. When it has that it has you .

Figure 208: The subconscious is the target of perceptual programming and this seeps through to the conscious mind as what appears to be a ‘personal’ view or opinion. 95 percent of human behaviour derives from subconscious perceptions. (Image Neil Hague)

It is extraordinary how little conscious decision-making is involved in prompting actions. Most of them are computer-like responses and reactions often emotional in nature. Remember the research that showed how brain activity required to do something starts before a conscious decision is made to do it. The conscious mind retains very little, indeed perceives very little, as we saw with the quote about visual realty being constructed by the brain from 40 ‘sensations’ a second from the 11 million received. Our subconscious absorbs it all and why wouldn’t that be the governor of perception? People don’t have to remember all they were programmed to believe by the ‘education’ system. The Cult knows the subconscious will do that and influence the conscious mind for life unless de-programming takes place called ‘awakening’ – awakening from the program (Fig 208 ). Observe people’s reactions and responses to events and happenings and you will see reflex-action perception akin to pressing ‘enter’. I have been ridiculed for decades for what I have said by those who have not spent a single second checking the facts or background. Their instant reaction is triggered by subconscious responses on the basis only of what they have been told is possible. Never have they had to consider shapeshifting while absorbing only information that says the world is solid. To them, therefore, shapeshifting must be crazy by reflex action. Subconscious programming seeps through to conscious perception. You have seen already my take on life that we are all one consciousness having different experiences and that human labels of race, sexuality and so on are illusions that we allow to divide us. I have been saying the same for 30 years. Compare that with what a British ‘writer’ called Gary Spedding posted on Twitter to my son, Gareth: ‘You are the son of a known anti-Semitic white supremacist conspiracy theorist.’ Has Spedding read any of my books? No. Has he been to my public presentations? No. Does he know anything about me that has not come from biased sources? No. Much of humanity is forming its perceptions in the same way which is why the great majority of what people believe is not true and only what the Cult wants them to believe is true. They are making ‘conscious’ decisions second by second considering validity in a whole range of subjects and situations from life-long programmed assumptions supported by no personal research whatsoever. To become conscious beyond The Program means to take control of our perceptions which involves reaching our own conclusions and not taking them off the shelf from someone else.

‘Education’: Systematic programming

Figure 209: The System told me what to think – if you say anything different you must be mad or stupid.

Figure 210: Big mistake

From all this comes what I call ‘everyone knows that’ syndrome. We’ve all heard it – me more than most – when you challenge an assumption of reality and you are dismissed with an ‘everyone knows that’ repetition of the programmed possible (Fig 209 ). How come that ‘everyone knows’? Well, everyone has been through the same perceptual download. Er, that’s it (Fig 210 ). Children in religious families invariably follow that religion because it’s all they’ve ever heard and the same principle applies to the ‘education’ download. The general rule of the Cult is this: If that’s all they ever hear that is what they will believe subconsciously and so consciously. Any information challenging those assumptions has to break through the walls and layers of programming before an ‘Ah-ha’ moment can occur. There is another reason for the deluge of mostly irrelevant information heaped upon children and young people. While you were filling your mind with the daily deluge mostly utterly useless to you – and then revising it again for exams – your mind was focused on that and not going its own unique way. Five-sense focus is the goal. Once you focus at the exclusion of all else you lose peripheral vision where the truth lies and dots can be connected. The System adds still more focus time in the form of ‘homework’ to perpetuate five-sense focus and wire the brain to process information in a particular way which I’ll come to in a moment. It’s all coldly calculated by those in the shadows. Compartmentalisation means that the high 90 percents of those directly imposing the programming will have no idea why this is being done or even what is being done to the perceptions of the young. The Cult does and created the structure of ‘education’ through bloodline families like the Rockefellers. John D. Rockefeller, the American oil/banking/pharmaceutical tycoon and Cult agent, founded the US General Education Board at the start of the 20th century. He said: ‘I don’t want a nation of thinkers – I want a nation of workers.’ I want a nation of slaves would be more accurate. Frederick T. Gates, Rockefeller’s co-founder and business advisor, said it all:

In our dream we have limitless resources, and the people yield themselves with perfect docility to our moulding hand. The present educational conventions fade from our minds; and, unhampered by tradition, we work our own good will upon a grateful and responsive rural folk.

We shall not try to make these people or any of their children into philosophers or men of learning or of science. We are not to raise up among them authors, orators, poets, or men of letters. We shall not search for embryo great artists, painters, musicians. Nor will we cherish even the humbler ambition to raise up from among them lawyers, doctors, preachers, statesmen, of whom we now have ample supply.

Cult ‘education’ has been imposed to condition children to believe and accept for life the following:

• Truth comes from authority

• Intelligence is the ability to remember and repeat

• Accurate memory and repetition are rewarded

• Non-compliance is punished

• I must conform intellectually and socially

Figure 211:The left and right brain process information in very different ways to produce very different perceptions of reality.

Figure 212: The System, driven by the Cult, defends the left-brain from right-brain influence. (Image Neil Hague)

Figure 213: The reptilian brain works closely with the left-brain to dictate perception and behaviour. Reptilian brain? What a coincidence.

Figure 214: Once again the ‘education’ programming system in a single image.

The Cult ‘education’ system worldwide is so carefully moulded from its controlling core that it targets a particular part of the brain – the left hemisphere. This has a largely different function overall than the right hemisphere. The brain is holographic in its decoded form and will have all functions spread throughout, but on the whole-brain level the two hemisphere’s have different emphasis. The left-brain decodes information in ways that dominate human perception. From here come words, language, numbers and the sense of everything being apart from everything else. It sees dots and pixels, identifies with labels and likes to conform within hierarchical structures (Fig 211 overleaf). It is the orthodox politician, scientist, doctor, journalist, academic, business leader or worker, lawyer and judge. In other words all the people who run or serve The System. Current human society is overwhelmingly a holographic expression of the left side of the brain which is the foundation perception of the Mainstream Everything. The right-brain by contrast is free-spirit creativity, imagination, art, poetry, spontaneity, the maverick. It is authors (of certain types), orators, poets, great artists, painters and musicians which Frederick T. Gates said they didn’t want the ‘education’ system for the masses to produce. Crucially the right-brain has a greater sense of oneness unity and connects dots/pixels into pictures and patterns that reveal the truth about life and reality. The right-brain has close connections to the heart and for that reason alone it is in the gunsights of Cult ‘education’ which is designed to close the heart chakra, suppress the right-brain, and enslave the young for life in the Body-Mind Bubble. Note how little school time is given to right-brain activities like art, drama and music, and how left-brain subjects dominate the curriculum (Fig 212 ). Exams are passed by compiling information through the left-brain and then repeating that on the exam paper. The left-brain to a fundamental extent is the home of The Program and its perception processing centre in conjunction with the reptilian brain, or R-complex’, from where reflex-action, survival-instinct responses are activated (Fig 213 ). I say that the reptilian brain, at least in its present dominant form, comes from Archontic manipulation of the human body. The reptilian brain is constantly scanning the environment for threats to survival and not just ‘physical’ survival. I mean also financial survival, relationship survival, job survival, etc. Road rage and reflex-action, fight-or-flight, over-the-top emotional responses are reptilian brain ‘press-enter’ reactions and the underlying fear and anxiety felt by so many is reptilian brain connected. It is one of the major behaviour-control mechanisms and its impact on emotion keeps people in a low-vibrational state. Is this really a coincidence given what I have been writing for decades about a reptilian connection to human control? British psychiatrist Dr Iain McGilchrist has featured what he calls the divided human brain in his presentations. He describes how the left-brain has a narrow focus (point of attention) in terms of detail and the right perceives the panorama or big picture. You can see the recurring theme. Those focused in their left-brain have a narrowed ‘window of attention’ – window of perception – which leads to lower and less expanded frequency states. Brain hemisphere/heart separation also instils a sense of Body-Mind/Soul/Spirit separation. The ‘education’ system is specifically designed to be a conveyor belt to turn out life-long Bubble people. How symbolically appropriate that a school in India forced students to wear cardboard boxes on their heads to stop cheating during exams (Fig 214 ). Unseen boxes are donned by children the world over every time they start a school day.

Play time? What play time?

Figure 215: The very different perceptions of brain hemispheres portrayed in a car advertisement. We are meant to be whole-brained and balance the two.

The two hemispheres of the brain are connected by a bridge called the corpus callosum and we are supposed to be whole-brain people getting the best of both ‘sides’ (Fig 215 overleaf). Once they are divided we become divided in the way we process information into perception. Extremes of left-brain dominance create five-sense ‘system’ people and right-side domination produces highly-creative people who struggle to function and cope in a left-brain world. Another aspect of the dot-connecting, pattern-perceiving, right brain is to see context . Awareness only of dots denies context which comes from seeing how dots connect. An individual dot can look a certain way, but connect that to other dots – provide context – and the dots together look very different to dots by themselves. I spend my life connecting dots between apparently unconnected people, places, organisations and situations. Their meaning and relevance in and of themselves is transformed once connections give them context. Dots can tell you what is happening while dot-connected context tells you why it’s happening. Clearly the Cult doesn’t want people doing this or its game will be revealed. The race to manipulate brain processing to see only left-brain dots begins in earnest the moment a child arrives for the first day at school. From here children are ‘taught (programmed) by teachers and academics who have been imprisoned in their own left-brain by the same programming system. The best way for children to activate their right-brain is to use their imagination by simply playing . They need to be allowed to ad-lib and imagine by enjoying this definition of play – ‘Engaging in activity for enjoyment and recreation rather than a serious or practical purpose’. This presents such a danger to the Cult’s programming strategy that play is being deleted from childhood through homework, the push for longer school days, and the youngest of children being introduced to left-brain activities at an ever earlier age. Democrat presidential candidate Bernie Sanders promised free education and ‘Pre-K’ (a pre-kindergarten classroom-based preschool program for children under five). This fits perfectly with the agenda to take children from their parents as soon as possible The Sanders website said:

For parents all over the country, taking time off or working fewer hours to care for their children is simply not an option. That leads many families to spend a disproportionate amount of their income to cover the cost of child care and early education.

Figure 216:Take children and young people in the prime of life with all possibility to explore and stick them at a desk all day while telling them what to believe for life. Utterly shocking village idiocy – but exactly what the Cult requires.

Figure 217: The walls and bars they increasingly build around schools capture the reason for fake ‘education’ – building walls and bars around the mind. (Image Gareth Icke.)

There was no mention of the consequences of parents spending a disproportionate amount of their time away from their kids while the state has control of their minds. No, no – just how to make even easier to spend a disproportionate amount of their time away from their kids. We had the same theme with one-time Democrat presidential candidate Kamala Harris who called for the American school day to be extended to 6pm to align with the adult work day and this was right in line with the agenda for kids which seeks to secure still more time for perceptual programming away from parents. Children sit at desks for hours every day being talked at while outside the Sun is shining and there are trees to be climbed and imagination to be explored (Fig 216 ). What little ‘time’ is left for children to play has been hijacked by smartphones and videogames that mostly stimulate … the left-brain . John Taylor Gatto, a former teacher in the United States, realised what ‘education’ was really designed to do and wrote a series of excellent books exposing the game. Gatto was New York City Teacher of the Year in 1989, 1990, and 1991, and New York State Teacher of the Year in 1991. He became rather less popular with the authorities when he began speaking out. Gatto said the aim was to subdue creative, inventive, and bright students and make them obedient, subdued and dependent individuals by controlling their school-time and then hijacking what should be free time through homework (Fig 217 ). He said children on average watched television for 55 hours a week (perception programming) and slept for 56. This left them 57 hours ‘to grow up strong and competent and whole’, but 30 hours of that was spent at school (perception programming), 8 hours preparing for school and getting to and from school, and 7 hours doing homework (perception programming) totalling 45 hours related to school. Gatto went on:

After the 45 school hours are removed a total of 12 hours remain each week from which to fashion a private person – one that can like, trust, and live with itself. Twelve hours. But my kids must eat, too, and that takes some time. Not much, because they’ve lost the tradition of family dining – how they learn to eat in school is best called ‘feeding’ – but if we allot just 3 hours a week to evening feedings, we arrive at a net total of private time for each child of 9 hours …

…This demented schedule is an efficient way to create dependent human beings, needy people unable to fill their own hours, unable to initiate lines of meaning to give substance and pleasure to their existence. It is a national disease, this dependency and aimlessness, and schooling and television and busy work … has a lot to do with it.

Figure 218: In a nutshell.

Figure 219: Get where? And why? Gotta, gotta, gotta, get to the end as fast as I can. Enjoy the moment? What moment?

This is exactly the situation the Cult set out to create given that ‘education’ is all about producing children and young people that become adult mind-slaves for life (Fig 218 ). We hear spewing from the mouths of mind-slave politicians that ‘Education must prepare children for the workplace’. You must spend your childhood working hard, studying and swotting to ‘be someone’ and ‘get somewhere’. Oh, really? Be who? Get where exactly? You must have a career, a job, you must strive, strive, strive, gotta, gotta, gotta, there’s not a minute to be lost (Fig 219 ). The Red Queen says in Lewis Carroll‘s Through the Looking-Glass : ‘Now, here, you see, it takes all the running you can do, to keep in the same place. If you want to get somewhere else, you must run at least twice as fast as that!’ In fact, when we understand reality, the best way to ‘get somewhere’ is to stop running and manifest. The current ‘education’ system must be dismantled to emphasise play and imagination to activate the right brain and develop whole people. I left school at 15 to play professional soccer and daydreamed through my school years. Somehow – it must be a miracle – I have managed to write and research a stream of highly detailed books and speak for ten hours a go to audiences around the world without a single note. How is that possible when I am officially so ‘uneducated’? A deeply-programmed alleged member of the ‘alternative media’ once said that I can’t be taken seriously because I ‘didn’t have a degree’. She had one. No further comment necessary. All that I have learned since I left school with no exam passes has been on my own terms. My son Gareth got an ‘E’ in some exams because he cared even less about school than I did. Today he’s a highly intelligent man aware of the world with a highly creative mind that makes him an exceptional singer-songwriter and all-round talent in many fields. There is absolutely no need to deluge young minds with information they will never use hour-by-hour, day after day, when they can easily find that information for themselves later should they want to or need to. The deluge is not for the benefit of children and young people. It’s for the benefit of the Cult and its incessant perceptual programming regime.

Diane Ravitch, an American education historian, policy analyst and writer, summed it up when she said: ‘Sometimes the most brilliant and intelligent minds do not shine in standardised tests because they do not have standardised minds.’ The Cult, however, wants standardised minds and set up the system to get them. Psychiatrist Iain McGilchrist rightly points out that the left-brain is focused upon knowing ever more about what is already known. It’s the right-brain and the heart that want to explore and uncover the unknown and have the awareness to understand it. Canadian-born psychiatrist Eric Berne described the perceptual difference between the hemispheres: ‘The moment a little boy is concerned with which is a jay and which is a sparrow left-brain he can no longer see the birds or hear them sing right-brain/heart.’ This is yet another example of label limitation and division at the expense of the unity of Oneness. The ‘education’ system is about indoctrination of the ‘known’ (allegedly). The Cult doesn’t want us to know the publicly unknown. I am not saying that all mainstream academics and scientists are knowingly suppressing knowledge. They’re in the Bubble, too. I am saying the Cult-asset academics and scientists are doing that which is a relative few. For the scam to work Mainstream Everything in general must also be kept from the truth and diverted into misunderstanding and dead ends. There is also the immense difference between knowledge and knowing which ‘education’ cannot teach. It comes from within. The mystic Osho said:

Knowledge has no capacity to dispel ignorance. Knowledge is a false phenomenon. It is not wisdom at all; it is just the opposite of wisdom. Knowledge is borrowed; wisdom is the flowering of your innermost being … No university can offer it, no scripture can offer it and no scholarship is capable of doing it. They are all impotent efforts, but they have been deceiving millions of people for thousands of years. Yes they make you knowledgeable. To be knowledgeable is one thing, to know is totally different.

Perception lobotomy

Figure 220: The medicalisation of childhood.

Children and young people are indoctrinated with the Mainstream Everything’s version of history, science, medicine, politics, current events, life, self, all of it. ‘Education’ is a Cult-created programming machine constantly underscored by the Cult-controlled media which I’ll be coming to shortly. Kids that want to question, challenge the orthodoxy, or are plain bored stiff like I was, are called ‘disruptive influences’ and increasingly prescribed mind-altering drugs like Ritalin for ‘attention’ disorders. We have the medicalisation of childhood, medicalisation of growing up, and it extends into colleges and universities as the medicalisation of teenage experience essential to developing emotionally strong, fully-rounded, adults capable of looking life in the eye (Fig 220 ). Here we have children in the prime of life sitting in a prison waiting for the bell to ring to enjoy a modicum of freedom (homework apart) which today is defined as time on my smartphone. They are being prepared for an entire life in an adult prison after school becomes work, the teacher becomes the boss, and obeying authority is seen as essential to financially survive in adulthood while, as with childhood, often counting the minutes to home-time. Obey the teacher is replaced by obey the boss in a seamless life of external control in which only the characters and names change. ‘Quick, get up, you’ll be late for school’ becomes ‘Quick, get up, you’ll be late for work’; ‘What will the teacher say?’ becomes ‘What will the boss say?’ Children from the earliest age are programmed by representatives of authority with carrot and stick punishment and reward for those who conform or do not. This, too, is ingrained in the subconscious as a fear of not obeying authority. None of this is by chance.

Charlotte Iserbyt realised this fact when she was a policy advisor to the Reagan administration at the US Department of Education. She describes in her book, The Deliberate Dumbing Down of America , how she saw documents laying out the ‘restructuring’ of American and global education through computerisation designed to make perception programming even more effective. Iserbyt said that what she saw was like ‘communist brainwashing’ and this will become extremely relevant later. One manual by a Professor Ronald Havelock was aptly titled The Change Agent’s Guide to Innovation in Education . Iserbyt said she was trained to identify ‘resistors’ who were ‘… those good, smart Americans who realise that anything that has education hanging off the end of it is probably not what they’re looking for’. She was told to ‘go up against them, and actually to go and try to get them to join us through the group process system’. This is the group-think, group-absorption, technique to either suck-in or marginalise opposing views and ideas – a modus operandi employed at every level of human society. What Iserbyt saw was planned in those documents in the 1980s has been rolled out – and worse – all over the world and it is transforming human life as the young subjected to this become adults. Central to mass indoctrination through fake ‘education’ in the United States is the programming operation called Common Core much promoted by big-time Cult asset Bill Gates who turns up in financial support of a long list of Cult agendas. These include mass vaccination of children worldwide. Gates is a very sinister piece of work and there is a lot more to come about him when I get to the ‘Covid-19’ hoax. The pillars of standardised state education (indoctrination) were erected by the One-percent through vehicles such as the Rockefeller and Ford Foundations and today state child programming is dominated by the One-percent Gates Foundation. The fronts may change but the Cult is always in control. Organisations associated with Cult agent George Soros were behind the transformation of the Russian education system based on the Western model after the fall of the Soviet Union. School life was extended by a year, textbooks replaced and schools amalgamated in a period that saw plummeting levels of education and literacy. Soviet education was of course dictated by government, but the Western model of Rockefeller, Gates and Soros is aimed at global standardisation of indoctrination and centralised control. I read a book published in 2018 by American teacher Rebecca Friedrichs and the title said it all: Standing Up To Goliath . Her 28 years in teaching showed her how children are being politically and perceptually indoctrinated on an industrial scale with tyrannical teaching unions forcing upon young minds what I am calling the Cult agenda. She describes how teachers who can see what is happening and vehemently oppose it are intimidated into silence and acquiescence. This is being done to parents and society as a whole through Cult-instigated political correctness.

I have exposed the plan for decades to delete parental rights and hand control of children and their upbringing to the state (Cult) by giving ever more power to schools and social services to destroy parental rights and control the lives of children. A primary school in England announced it would fine parents for every five minutes they were late picking up their children and threatened to call social services if they took too long. As usual the poorest parents struggling to juggle work to survive with getting to the school on time would be the ones to suffer. Parents fined by schools is a critical line to cross in the power of schools over families and this is already widespread in Britain with parents fined if they take their children on holiday in term time when the cost of holidays is so much cheaper (once again hitting the poorest). The deeply corrupt authorities on the Isle of Wight where I live, with a population of 142,000, revealed through a Freedom of Information Act request that they accrued more than £100,000 in the previous year fining parents and carers whose children had ‘unauthorised absences’. What must the figure be nationally? It’s an Orwellian racket. Schools are becoming dictatorships and tyrannies with surveillance cameras and, in America, police officers on duty preparing kids for their planned adult life in an Orwellian nightmare. It’s getting so extreme that the utterly ridiculous staff at Valley Forge Elementary School in Pennsylvania reported a six-year-old Downs syndrome girl to the police for pretending to shoot her teacher with her fingers . Little children pointing their fingers and saying bang, bang, is now worthy of police attention according to teaching staff who are more programmed than the kids they are programming. A six-year-old girl was handed over to the police by the Love Grove Elementary School in Jacksonville, Florida, without her mother being told after a ‘tantrum’ and held in a facility for two days under a ‘mental health’ law. Police body-camera footage shows the girl walking calmly and quietly with a police officer saying ‘she’s fine, there’s nothing wrong with her’. Those of us old enough know what life was like before the extreme Big Brother state appeared have the radar and experience (those that are in any way awake that is) to see the scale of what is both happening and planned. Children and young people have been born into the world as it is and it’s all they have ever known. What are to people like me extraordinary extremes of control gathering by the day are, to young people enslaved in Body-Mind, just ‘how things are’ in human society. Such is the grip that the Cult-controlled state has on perception that many even demand more control and deletion of freedom which they and their own children will have to live with for the rest of their lives. Kyung Hee Kim, professor of education at the College of William and Mary in Virginia, ran a study involving a very large number of school-age children between kindergarten and 12th grade which tracked the effect of (the Cult’s) ‘education’ programming of the young. The study found the following as children were processed by the system:

A massive decline of creativity right brain as ‘children have become less emotionally expressive right brain, less energetic, less talkative and verbally expressive, less humorous right brain, less imaginative right brain, less unconventional right brain, less lively and passionate right brain, less perceptive right brain, less apt to connect seemingly irrelevant things right brain, less synthesizing right brain, and less likely to see things from a different angle right brain.

I rest my case, M’Lud (Fig 221 ).

Figure 221: What the ‘education’ system does to young people. Tell them to fuck off, kids. (Image David Dees.)

Sending them crazy

When do you ever hear political parties and ideologies, whether ‘Left’, ‘Right’ or ‘Centre’, challenge what and how children and young people are ‘taught’? They argue incessantly over the money spent on ‘education’ and class sizes. They say next to nothing about ‘education’ as a programming operation from first to last. Some are Cult agents (very few) and the rest are as perceptually programmed as anyone after being subjected to the same download. There is a war on children, mentally and emotionally, and this is some of the background to the suicide rate among the young dramatically increasing through a combination, among other things, of exam stress (what the hell are the parents doing?) and the multiple pressures of the smartphone, social media, era which is orchestrated through Cult-controlled Silicon Valley. Adding still further to these pressures is the often near life-long levels of debt imposed on the young to pay for their college and university ‘education’. The merciless Cult-driven state has manipulated young people to pay for at least decades for their own programming through empathy-deleted universities that operate like multinational corporations selling a stream of made-up, for-profit-only, shit and useless ‘courses’ to dip their snouts in an ever-deeper trough at the expense of the young. To them young people are just commodities or punters to be exploited like the worse kind of spiv and to be indoctrinated with The System’s perceptual blueprint. The outstanding student loan ‘bubble’ in the United States accrued to pay outrageous college fees has passed $1.6 trillion. This staggering figure represents devastated young and adult lives crushed by debt and thus … control . Analysis by the Institute of Fiscal Studies for the UK Department of Education suggested that one in five students would be financially better off if they had not gone to university and instead left school to get a job. It must be a similar case elsewhere. Wayne Johnson, former CEO of First Performance Corporation and Reunion Student Loan Finance Corporation, resigned his post at the US Department of Education to campaign for justice on this issue including cancellation of most outstanding student debt owed to the Federal government (though not to private Cult corporations). Johnson said that if the loan crisis is not fixed we would see the ‘ever-increasing destruction of the fabric of America, it’s that profound – people are not getting married, not having children’. This was always the plan as part of the transformation of human society. Tony Blair introduced student fees in the UK when he was prime minister and they have since soared as they were always intended to. Everything that Blair does and says is the Cult doing and saying. The man should be in jail for crimes against humanity for so many reasons including life-crippling student debt.

More parents are seeing through the calculated fraud and homeschooling their children either individually or in small groups with great success in both critical and creative thinking and career advancement. Eliezer Yudkowsky, the well-known American AI researcher and author of several academic books on the subject, never attended high school or college and had no formal ‘education’. ‘Liberal’ Germany bans homeschooling – a policy instigated by the Nazis – and so do ‘liberal’ Sweden and the Netherlands. If you want to sell tyranny do it under the banner and smokescreen of liberal democracy. As homeschooling rapidly expands the pressure to limit or ban education outside the school system is growing. Parents are raided by armed police in Germany and children removed from parents for the crime of not wishing to have them indoctrinated by the state. My own preference is for ‘self-directed learning’ in which children pursue their own interests and experiences and in doing so learn all the other basic skills. If you research your interest you need to learn to read; if you compile information about your interest you have to learn to write. Children can learn what they choose to learn and as a by-product learn what they need to learn. Their minds don’t have to be filled with what is irrelevant to most of them just because the state insists on that for its own ends. Children have their whole life to learn what they need to know from the far more relevant perspective of where their life takes them. How many ever use algebra once they leave school? What is the benefit to them of spending hours of their childhood working out what X equals??

A study by Dr Peter Gray, an American psychology professor at Boston College, found that children’s mental health improved significantly when they engaged in self-directed education with more freedom and control of their own learning. He found after studying the data that the mental health of children is directly related to school attendance with psychiatrist visits falling dramatically during school holidays away from the pressure of lessons, rules and exams. They spiked once again when a new term began. Gray said that available evidence suggests ‘quite strongly’ that school is bad for children’s mental health: ‘… behaviour, moods, and learning generally improved when they stopped conventional schooling.’ He added that school is bad for ‘physical’ health, too: ‘Nature did not design children to be cooped up all day at a micromanaged, sedentary job.’ One of the most profound forms of mind control is familiarity. Once something becomes familiar it is no longer questioned and becomes another integrated subconscious program and assumption. Kids are born and then pretty soon they go to school and college for the rest of their childhood, right? Everyone knows that – it’s how things are. Draw the ‘education’ system out of the subconscious and make it conscious. Now look again at how it works and the consequences for children. Oh my God , it’s a programming operation. Exactly . The urgency with which this needs to be acknowledged can be seen in the figures for young people suicide and extreme levels of stress happening across the world. Suicide attempts by children under the age of 14 in Israel alone have risen by 62 percent in a decade, according to the Israeli National Council for Children. In Britain children under 11 contacting the help service Childline over suicidal thoughts and feelings increased by 87 percent between 2015 and 2020. The Cult is killing childhood and parents need to get their arses in gear fast because it’s meant to get much worse. A 2013 study by the American Psychological Association found that school is the main source of stress for teenagers with 83 percent of teenagers questioned saying school was ‘a somewhat or significant source of stress’ while 27 percent said they suffered from ‘extreme stress’ during the school year. This dropped to 13 percent during school holidays and out-of-school stress would fall even further if you delete smartphones and social media. Much of the academic pressure on kids comes from parents who have slavishly accepted the utter baloney that exam passes = intelligence and exam results decide success or failure for the rest of their lives. How many young people feel a failure because they didn’t get high enough exam grades? Who gives a shit? You are All That Is, Has Been, And Ever Can Be.

Are you happy?

No.

Are you fulfilled?

No.

Are you super-stressed?

Yes.

So what’s good about school?

I know what X equals. No, hold on, I forgot.

Most outrageous are those parents who treat their children and their academic success as a personal statement about themselves in some bizarre exercise in reflected glory which includes the follow-through of what the parents ‘want’ their children to be. ‘Your father wants you to be a banker’; ‘Your mother wants you to be a lawyer’. Well, tough – I’m going walking in India. Bye. This is nothing less than child abuse. We bring children into the world and we can give them advice, but it’s their life, not ours. The late and very great American comedian, George Carlin, said: ‘Here’s a bumper sticker I’d like to see … we are proud parents of a child who has resisted his teachers’ attempts to break his spirit and bend him to the will of his corporate masters.’ The Cult’s war on children in pursuit of perceptual control is getting so extreme and intense that the consequences are destroying whole generations. Parents worldwide have a responsibility to say ‘enough! ’

Postage stamp society

Young minds are at the mercy of the programming system throughout their key perception-forming years from at least aged four to nearly 20. Most – thankfully not all – absorb the program subconsciously if not always consciously and without the de-programming process called ‘awakening’ those beliefs and assumptions will drive their perception of everything for the rest of their lives. Ironically, and not by chance, those that teach (program) the next generations are academics who have rarely, mostly never, left the ‘education’ program. They absorb what they are told in their own ‘education’ and pass exams to prove that. Then they head for teacher training colleges and courses which further underpin the program and show them how to indoctrinate the next generation with The System’s (the Cult’s) version of everything. Freemasons climb their hierarchy in compartmentalised sections called ‘degrees’ and ambitious young people (and/or their parents) seek the ultimate goal in ‘education’ of securing a ‘degree’ from the false assumption (it’s all assumption) that a degree is confirmation of intelligence. It is not. Some of the most intelligent people I have met have never been near a university let alone a ‘degree’ while some of the least intelligent have had ‘educational qualifications’ coming out of their ears. This is not to say you can’t have a degree and be intelligent – only that one doesn’t have to mean the other and often does not. With both Freemasons and ‘education’ the degree measures the degree of programming thanks to another assumption that the information imparted in the lodge or the college is factually correct. Much of it isn’t and indeed Freemasons are told one thing in one degree and something different in another to keep them in ignorance of what the inner core knows. Armed with a degree, or at least some degree of perceptual programming, young people leave the halls of academia and go out into the ‘world’. Here they meet others who earlier went through the same programming machine and overwhelmingly accept the same assumptions about life, society and reality. They have all been given, and largely absorbed consciously and subconsciously, the system’s (Cult’s) version of history, science and reality, medicine, human biology, world events, what’s possible and impossible, the whole shebang. Together this forms what I have dubbed the Postage Stamp Consensus which is a staggeringly narrow band of perceived possibility designed specifically to keep humanity in the Bubble (Fig 222 ).

Figure 222: Jump off and RUN! (Image Gareth Icke.)

Figure 223: Those serving the institutions overwhelmingly have the same perceptions of reality because they have all been through the same ‘education’ programming system. Therefore: ‘Everyone knows that!’ (Image Neil Hague.)

Figure 224: A perfect description of those who believe what The System tells them.

Young people entering the adult workplace now have the assumptions they downloaded at school and college confirmed by almost everyone around them who earlier downloaded the same assumptions at their school and college. From this comes ‘everyone knows that’ syndrome. Even more accurately it should be ‘everyone remembers that’ syndrome. This is all it is – memory. The memory (conscious and mostly subconscious) of what you were told some time and what everyone remembers because everyone was told the same thing. Indian ‘mystic’ Jaggi Vasudev (known as Sadhguru) talks about ‘mistaking memory for intelligence’ and he’s spot on. How can we intelligently see things as they are when memory (perception programming) is constantly telling us what we should believe they are? Sadhguru describes how people live out of their memory and not their intelligence and this is what The Program sets out to achieve. Postage Stamp Consensus and ‘everyone knows/remembers that’ are different descriptions of the same program which means that the institutions of politics, government administration, law, science, academia, medicine, media, business, banking, etc. are all founded (except the inner cores connected to the Cult) on the same assumptions about the world and reality when they are nothing more than illusions (Fig 223 ). They are founded (quantum physics excepted) on the world being solid, people being only their bodies and labels, everything being apart from everything else, and only through ‘physical’ change can anything be changed. Don’t change your perceptions and assumptions to instigate societal change. If you want change you have to physically protest on the basis of your current perceptions and assumptions which have contributed to the very situations you are protesting about. It is sobering to think that governments and politicians are making laws all over the world based on assumptions about reality that are utterly bogus. Politicians are arguing over what should happen to everyone and everything from perceptions of a world that doesn’t exist except in the way it appears to be experienced. No wonder the world is in the state it is. Which deluded programmed mind are you going to vote for, the one with the blue rosette, or the red, yellow, or the green? Mmmm , hard isn’t it? The Cult has created a system in which programmed ‘leaders’ clueless about reality impose the Cult agenda upon a population enslaved in the same ignorance if they only get their perceptions from the Mainstream Everything. Talk about the blind leading the blind. Watch that cliff now (Fig 224 ). More than that the institutions and personnel of the Postage Stamp continually confirm to each other that the nonsense is valid and each make their decisions about what to do from those flawed assumptions. Governments make laws, including those relating to health care, on the basis of what Postage Stamp science says. They instigate policy decisions on the basis of what Postage Stamp academics say. It’s a mad house in which crazy is credible and sanity is crazy. What a mess and I have likened the world to putting 20 kittens in a room with 100 balls wool and coming back two hours later to say: ‘Okay, sort that out’. Fortunately bringing harmony and sanity to human society does not have to be done ‘physically’ and cannot be because there is no ‘physical’.

Figure 225: Don’t think for yourself – prison is lovely. (Image Gareth Icke.)

Figure 226: Baa, baa, baa.

Every aspect of the Cult agenda comes with a protection system to stop those with a mind of their own demolishing the ludicrous assumptions which humanity has to believe for the agenda to prevail. This is where censorship comes in and one major example of that is peer pressure – the paramilitary arm of ‘everyone knows that’ syndrome which seeks to impose the worst of all censorship and that is self-censorship. I have seen this described as the tyranny of silence. There is no debate or conversation as people with different views keep their mouths shut to avoid peer pressure consequences (Fig 225 ). Peer pressure is a term for those who have allowed themselves to be programmed into believing mega-untruths and insisting that everyone else does the same. If people don’t acquiesce then ridicule, dismissal, abuse and even a lost job or career will follow. Intimidation and fear of consequences makes so many stay silent about what they think and leaves the field for ‘everyone knows syndrome’ to dominate perception unchallenged. Well, fuck that, I say. Let people follow others if they want – I’ll follow myself, thanks (Fig 226 overleaf). Those with open minds are the black sheep of the flock or herd and it’s such a wonderful place to be. If you are there – celebrate . Would you want to be part of the herd?? Shit, what a nightmare. To be called mad by a system that’s insane is a confirmation of your sanity. You say I’m mad Mr System Believer? Yippee , thank-you, so kind. I refer to this peer pressure to conform as ‘psychological fascism’ and that’s what it is. We now have ever more extreme psychological fascism in the form of political correctness and the Climate Change Cult which together stand beneath the umbrella term of ‘Woke’. The emergence of social media as a vehicle for black sheep abuse by the herd mentality has added to the pressure to keep your head down. Well, fuck that, too, I say. That’ll be the day.

Media software

Figure 227: ‘Journalism’ the world over with honorable exceptions.

Cult ‘education’ instils the foundation perception program while the mainstream media is the constant top-up and confirmation that also plays the role of perception enforcer. Speak publicly in ways that challenge the Cult agenda and see what happens. I say mainstream media. Even much of the ‘alternative’ involves those who have been through the same perceptual programming and accepted its validity. Swathes of the ‘alternative media’ have ridiculed me over the years as much as the mainstream has for my ‘far-out’ concepts. Many of these same people with a Christian background believe that a man was born to a virgin mother, walked on water, turned water into wine, fed 5,000 from a few loaves and fishes, died on a cross, came back to life in a cave, and floated up to heaven promising to return on a cloud. Followers of Judaism, among them mainstream journalists and media owners that have ridiculed me, claim to believe that God parted the Red Sea and the wife of some bloke called Lot was turned into a pillar of salt. One thing you see very clearly when you operate outside the programmed ‘normal’ is that people don’t demand evidence for their own beliefs on anything like the scale they demand for others. Postage Stamp programming is again driving the perceptions and behaviour of the media. At ownership and key editorial levels you will find in-the-loop Cult operatives. The teeming majority of journalists, however, have no idea there is a Cult never mind that it controls their industry. They report the world from the perspective of their Postage Stamp programming and anything or anyone they come across that has disembarked its narrow band of perception is, by definition, mad, bad, or both. That mentality dominates the nature of their reporting and treatment of individuals and organisations even without the added limitations set by their employers on what can and cannot be said (Fig 227 ). We have the ubiquitous subconscious programming at work in controlling the actions of the entire media as the propaganda arm of the Mainstream Everything: The only scientific truth comes from mainstream scientists; the only medical truth comes from doctors; valid explanations of world events come only from governments and mainstream commentators, and so it goes on. I watched an interview with a former mainstream journalist who had partly seen through the manipulation and good for her. She said that I say some ‘fantastic’ things about education, but dismissed the bit about a shapeshifting royal family. I understand why from the perspective of ‘normal’ and her life-long ingrained conscious and subconscious perceptions about reality. What I say about education is within her sense of the possible, so that’s fine. Once you breach the limits of programmed ‘normal’ and ‘possible’, that’s not fine. ‘I can’t get my head around that’, people say. Exactly. So try the heart and expanded consciousness. Give that a go. There are many from what is called the ‘Left’ and ‘Right’ who agree with what I say about the world from their perspective of Postage Stamp normal. They won’t say so publicly because they don’t want to be associated with things I say that are off the Postage Stamp. The foundations for these responses are (a) the world is solid so what he says can’t be true and (b) what would people think about me if I said he talked sense?

Figure 228: The BBC version.

Reporting parameters set by media owners and executives are another generator of self-censorship with journalists knowing the lines they can’t cross without resistance or the door. As a result they don’t cross them. No report or information is offered to their media bosses that breaches the dyke. At that point they are no longer journalists and little more than propagandists for the Cult’s version of everything. The money’s good, though, eh? The BBC in Britain is particularly adept at such ingrained censorship which it tries so hard to hide behind pompous self-congratulation about unbiased reporting when it is institutionally Postage Stamp biased. By the terms of its charter the BBC is supposed to be politically neutral yet exercises its political and system bias by what it leaves out, through the views of the guests it invites to pontificate on its output and by not inviting those who have a different perspective to the Postage Stamp (Fig 228 overleaf). They’ll let you debate how much money should be in circulation but absolutely not the fact that private banks are lending people and governments credit ‘money’ that has never and will never exist. The BBC has outrageously skewed the climate change debate so it’s not a debate at all by virtually banning views and information that expose the hoax behind the orthodoxy. You don’t have to come out and say ‘vote for so and so’ or ‘believe this or that’ to manipulate information in favour of your political line and I am talking about a political agenda line and not necessarily party political in nature. The BBC is a department of the permanent government and takes its line on everything no matter who is officially ‘in power’. BBC ‘journalists’ are in fact little more than civil servants who know their place and where not to go. If you get your ‘truth’ from the BBC, well, by definition, you don’t because you can’t . It’s the same with all of them, but the BBC’s pompous self-congratulation about its ‘quality journalism’ is particularly sickening and stomach-turning, not to say laughable. Journalist Tareq Haddad resigned from Newsweek in late 2019 claiming that editors stopped him reporting the story about a whistleblower at the OPCW, the world chemical weapons ‘watchdog’, who exposed how the organisation manipulated the facts to allow a chemical attack in Syria to be blamed on Cult-target President Assad. This was done by suppressing evidence that proved Assad had nothing to do with it. The attack was really staged by US-backed terrorists as an excuse to demonise Assad and justify unleashing missiles against Syria – a No-Problem-Reaction-Solution. Haddad confirmed that the media is the propaganda arm of the government-military-intelligence-industrial complex or what I call the Cult:

The US government, in an ugly alliance with those that profit the most from war, has its tentacles in every part of the media – imposters, with ties to the US State Department, sit in newsrooms all over the world … Inconvenient stories are completely blocked. As a result, journalism is quickly dying. America is regressing because it lacks the truth.

The Cult owns governments as it owns the media as it owns the armament companies. The late Dr Udo Ulfkotte, a leading journalist in Germany, went public to reveal how he was made to publish articles in his own name written by intelligence agencies or lose his job. The sources included the CIA even though he was working in Germany. The Cult has no borders.

Fake ‘grassroots’ programming

Former CBS News investigative reporter Sharyl Attkisson revealed in a Ted Talk how fraudulent grassroots movements, funded by political, corporate, or other special interests (the Cult), manipulate public perception. The technique is known as ‘astroturfing’, as in fake grassroots. Special interests hide behind coordinated groups and individuals who start Facebook and Twitter accounts, write letters to newspapers and post comments in support or opposition to something. The idea is to give the false impression that a grassroots movement is speaking and that opinion is going a certain way when neither is true. The media, naturally, very rarely question the origins or funders. An excellent example of astroturfing was when American Zionist communications firm Edelman launched a Walmart-supporting ‘grassroots‘ group called Working Families for Walmart which turned out to be funded by Walmart. Attkisson said astroturf groups try to change public opinion and marginalise opposition to what they want by attacking them and appearing to be part of a grassroots campaign that doesn’t actually exist. You see this throughout the Woke agenda of climate change, transgender activism, political correctness, anti-racism and other connected issues with the media reporting them as if they are spontaneous and genuine. Surveys and studies are funded by astroturfers to produce the answers and conclusions they want to advance their propaganda. This happens constantly with regard to climate change, transgender, drugs and vaccines. Attkisson highlighted the manipulations of Wikipedia which she called an astroturf dream come true:

Built as the free encyclopaedia that anyone can edit, the reality can’t be more different. Anonymous Wikipedia editors control and co-opt pages on behalf of special interests. They forbid and reverse edits that go against their agenda. They skew and delete information in blatant violation of Wikipedia’s own established policies with impunity, always superior to the poor schlubs who actually believe anyone can edit Wikipedia, only to discover they’re barred from correcting even the simplest factual inaccuracies.

Wikipedia is a shocking operation. The Off-guardian.org website pointed out that Wikipedia’s nine billion page views per month are overseen by just 500 active administrators and their real identity in many cases remains unknown. ‘Moreover studies have shown that 80% of all Wikipedia content is written by just 1% of all Wikipedia editors, which again amounts to just a few hundred mostly unknown people.’ Sharyl Attkisson recalled a huge scandal when Wikipedia officials were caught offering a PR service that skewed and edited information for paid publicity-seeking clients in utter violation of Wikipedia’s alleged policies:

All of this may be why, when a medical study looked at medical conditions described on Wikipedia pages and compared it to actual peer-reviewed published research, Wikipedia contradicted medical research 90 percent of the time. You may never fully trust what you read on Wikipedia again, nor should you.

Figure 229: Hijacking global perception.

You won’t be surprised to know that Wikipedia is an agency of the agenda as a platform where billions get their information about people, events and every other subject (Fig 229 ). Israel (its Sabbatian-Frankist control system) has a colossal astroturfing and opinion-manipulating army driving its global ‘Hasbara’ campaign to promote the narrative of what I call the ‘Anti-Semitism Protection Racket’ (more shortly) and the far-right Sabbatian-Frankist apartheid Israeli government. Hasbara means ‘explaining’ which really means explaining what the Sabbatian-Frankists want you to believe. Ultra-Zionist ownership of the media in the United States is infamous although the Protection Racket intimidates most people from stating the obvious. Where there is not direct ownership there is a whole network operating out of Israel and exposed in The Trigger that manipulates media coverage of Israel. Jewish News reported in 2019 about an email sent to the wrong address by Lorna Fitzsimons, director of BICOM (the British Israel Communication & Research Centre). The email, which was never meant to be widely distributed, said: ‘Throughout the weekend, BICOM staff were in contact with a whole host of BBC and Sky News desks and journalists, ensuring that the most objectively favourable line was taken, and offering talking heads, relevant to the stories unfolding.’ Fitzsimons went on to describe a BICOM trip to Israel by a BBC news presenter:

Bicom has one of BBC News’ key anchors on a bespoke delegation. When planning her very first trip to the region, Sophie Long got in touch with Bicom to see if we could help her out with meeting sic in the region. Sophie is now spending three days of her trip with Bicom Israel, taking a tour around the Old City, meeting Israeli government spokesman Mark Regev… as well as visiting Ramallah and Sderot.

This is how your ‘news’ is manipulated by ultra-Zionism alone every day. If you read The Trigger the scale on which this is happening out of Israel worldwide will blow your mind. Add into the mix the expanded definition of ‘anti-Semitism’ which includes criticism of Israel and Zionism and you see how any balanced coverage of Israel (Sabbatian-Frankists that control Israel) has long past. Ultra-Zionist Fitzsimons, a former Labour Party MP and president of the National Union of Students, said in the email that BICOM had ‘briefed Jonathan Ford, the Financial Times leader writer for his upcoming leading article’. I wonder if the Palestinians had, too? That’s obviously a rhetorical question. The now shocking scale of Sabbatian-Frankist control worldwide hiding behind ‘Israel’ was further confirmed, as with my own speaking ban from Australia in 2019, by the experience of former Pink Floyd singer Roger Waters and American journalist Abby Martin who are both critics of Israeli government treatment of Palestinians. American Major League Baseball banned advertising for Waters events on its platforms on the say-so of Rothschild-created B’nai B’rith International who have been on my case many times. B’nai B’rith president Charles Kaufman and chief executive Daniel Mariaschin said Waters was ‘an avowed anti-Semite whose views on Jews and Israel far exceed the boundaries of civil discourse’. This is Orwellian code for ‘Waters tells the truth so we have to shut him up’. Abby Martin is suing the state of Georgia after she was prevented from speaking at Georgia Southern University for refusing to sign a pledge of allegiance to Israel . Some 28 states have so far mandated loyalty pledges to Israel to block exposure of the actions of its government, military and fantastic web of lobby groups. That is worth pondering for a moment to take in the full implications of Sabbatian-Frankist power in the United States. American citizens cannot speak in a country that claims free speech rights guaranteed by the First Amendment unless they sign a pledge of alliance to a country of a few million people 5,000 miles away. But no – saying that Israel has fantastically disproportionate global power compared with size and numbers is an ‘anti-Semitic’ trope even though it’s blatantly true. This is what happens where the Cult is in control.

Forest protection agency

We now have global ‘news’ spewing out the Cult system’s version of everything 24/7 on channels so many in number I’m sure they must breed overnight like luminous jackets appear to do in Britain. Media ‘diversity’ is a joke. Newspapers and TV channels may be biased to one political party or other, but they are all biased in support of the same system – the same Postage Stamp. They differ on the twigs while all promote the same forest. Arguments over twigs present the illusion of diversity. Challenge the forest, the structure of control and manipulation, and the truth about ‘diversity’ becomes self-evident. They all promote and protect the forest as I’ve found again and again in the last 30 years. The media first ridiculed me on a historic scale before turning to abuse and demonisation which morphed more recently into outright ignoring or censoring me. These phases directly relate to the scale of public interest in my work which has been growing exponentially year on year. That Icke is exposing the forest – laugh at him. Er, that didn’t work – demonise him. Oh no, that didn’t work – censor him! The censorship was never more obvious than with the publication of my absolutely explosive book, The Trigger , which exposes who was really behind the attacks of 9/11 and it wasn’t 19 Arab hijackers working for Osama bin Laden. In revealing the central players in that horror I also reveal the Cult and its control system. It is so explosive and perceptually transforming that the usual suspects didn’t even seek to attack me and the book as they normally would. Abuse would give the content publicity and they want the fewest number possible to know it exists. One of the main ways the Cult has sought to demonise me is through its anti-Semitism industry, or Protection Racket. Its method of operation is to condemn anyone (especially Jewish people) who criticise the government of Israel as ‘anti-Semitic (which really means anti-Arab as I have explained many times). Cult gofers, many of which won’t even know there is a Cult, have used this label to block my public events and media appearances including a ban by the Australian government from speaking in that country on the say-so of one ultra-Zionist asset and pressure from media outlets owned by Israel-fanatic Rupert Murdoch. This censorship network is a protection racket to protect the Cult from exposure and not Jewish people from discrimination. Jewish people who don’t conform to the narrative are attacked even more vociferously than anyone else.

I did two interviews with the now Rupert Murdoch-owned TalkRadio in Britain which at the time of writing have accrued in excess of three million views on YouTube. The ultra-Zionist censor group, the Campaign Against Antisemitism (CAA), complained to the station for having me on because of ‘anti-Semitism’ even though neither Israel nor Zionism was discussed in either interview. Several TalkRadio programmes were later sent copies of The Trigger , but not one would have me on to discuss the content despite the previous two getting such big YouTube audiences. Protecting the forest is far more important to media owners than money. The Cult ensures their major assets are swimming in that. No British national newspaper or radio station would even mention The Trigger and 5,000 media releases sent out to newspapers, radio and television across Britain, Europe and North America met with no mainstream response. A TV booker told me that a well-known British television talk show host refused to have me on his show because I ‘deny the Holocaust’. I don’t , if you read my books, but he wouldn’t know that because he takes his cue from other media promotors of The System. The mainstream media operates likes The System in general with the perceptually-programmed confirming to each other that their perceptual-programming is the truth. Cult assets lie and misrepresent people; the media report the lies unchallenged; other media assets believe the lies and accept them as their reality; and they then repeat and further circulate the lies as ‘everyone knows that’ truth. Copies of The Trigger were sent to the Russian ‘alternative’ TV station RT in both London and Moscow. They didn’t want to know either. RT is funded by the Russian government and as such conducts journalism with regard to the West more in the way the Western media should be doing. I’m glad RT exists from that perspective. It questions what the Western media refuses to do except when it comes to the Russian government. RT journalistic values are then immediately ditched and cap-touching ‘yes sir, no sir’, kicks in. I have been writing and talking for 30 years about all the subjects that RT covers and although it claims to be ‘alternative’ they have never had me on their news programmes while preferring many who from my perspective are nowhere close to ‘alternative’. Why would a Russian government-funded station not want to discuss a mountain of evidence that the American government lied at every turn about 9/11?? I was approached out of the blue for a substantial feature interview by an RT reporter called Polly Boiko in September, 2019, which she said they wanted to go quickly to air. She and a crew came to my house soon after with a view to almost immediate transmission. They left after filming with me for hours and said they hoped it would be broadcast within days. As I write the best part of a year later I am still waiting. The mainstream media basically says question nothing; RT’s motto is ‘question more’; but I say question everything. That makes me an outsider to all of them. I dismantle the forest which their owners in multiple forms are pledged to protect. The Cult knows that seeing only the twigs keeps you in Body-Mind with a sense of apartness and twigs are not a problem. Seeing the forest and how it all fits together sets you free and that’s a BIG problem. Censor him!

By the few, for the few

Incessant concentration of media ownership is the Cult gathering ever more control over what people see and hear to dictate perception and behaviour across the world. Major corporations (in the end one Cult corporation) have secured global ownership of newspapers, radio, television and the Internet through Silicon Valley and Pentagon agency DARPA which I’ll come to shortly. The media once had some diversity of ownership and that could not be allowed to continue. Diversity is the enemy of central control and the campaign began to concentrate power for the benefit of the Cult. As recently as 1984 there were still 50 ‘independent’ media companies in the United States. By 2019 some 90 percent of the US media was controlled by just four – Comcast (NBCUniversal), Disney, AT&T (WarnerMedia) and Viacom. The last two are owned by the National Amusements corporation. Control over what you see and hear is now ridiculously narrow and planned to get even more so. Political leaders sanction this as you would expect when the Cult owns politics as it owns major media. Such concentration allows what is written and broadcast to be centrally dictated and focused only on the twigs while exposure of the forest is censored. You can see video compilations on the Internet of TV presenters in cities and communities across America reading the same stories word for word and repeating with guests the same scripted phrases and talking points to push the same political agenda. There was once such a thing as ‘independent radio’ in Britain and I worked at a station in Birmingham called BRMB. It was owned by a single company and had an independent operation for local news. Today those stations are owned by corporations with centrally-dictated news broadcasts and even music playlists. I was libelled by the usual suspects in the UK in 2017 with outrageous claims about what I am saying. I saw the same lies repeated – again almost word for word with the same headline – on a series of newspaper Internet sites. When I checked I realised they were all owned by the same corporation then called Trinity Mirror and now Reach PLC. This is what that company owns (not an exhaustive list) and it will give you an idea for what I mean about the centralisation of media power over what you see and hear:

National newspapers: Daily Mirror; Sunday Mirror; Daily Express; Sunday Express; Daily Record; Sunday Mail; Western Mail; The Sunday People; Irish Daily Mirror; Irish Daily Star (50% ownership). Local and regional newspapers; Accrington Observer; Anfield & Walton Star; Barking & Dagenham Yellow Advertiser; Bexley Mercury; Birmingham Post; Birmingham Mail; Sunday Mercury; Bootle Times; Bracknell Standard; Brent & Wembley Leader; Bristol Post; Buckinghamshire Examiner; Buckinghamshire Advertiser; Chester Chronicle; Chronicle Extra (Newcastle upon Tyne); Colne Valley Chronicle; Coventry Telegraph; The Crawley News; Crewe Chronicle; Crosby Herald; Derby Evening Telegraph; Dover Express; Ealing Gazette; Ealing Informer; Ealing Leader; Ellesmere Port Pioneer; Enfield Advertiser; Enfield Gazette; Evening Chronicle (Newcastle upon Tyne); Evening Gazette (Teesside); Express & Echo; Formby Times; Fulham & Hammersmith Chronicle; The Glaswegian; Gloucester Citizen; Gloucestershire Echo; Haringey Advertiser; Harrow & Wembley Observer; Harrow Informer; Harrow Leader; Havering Yellow Advertiser; Heywood Advertiser; Highdown Books; Hinckley Times; Hounslow Borough Chronicle; Hounslow, Chiswick & Whitton Informer; Huddersfield District Chronicle; Huddersfield Examiner; Hull Daily Mail; Ilford & Redbridge Yellow Advertiser; The Journal (Newcastle upon Tyne); Kensington & Chelsea Informer; Leicester Mercury; Lewisham & Greenwich Mercury; Liverpool Echo; Loughborough Echo; Manchester Evening News; Manchester Metro News; Maghull Star; Middleton Guardian; Mid Devon Gazette; Mitcham, Morden & Wimbledon Post; Neath Guardian; North East Manchester Advertiser; North Devon Journal; North Wales Daily Post; Nottingham Post; Oldham Advertiser; Ormskirk Advertiser; Paisley Daily Express; The Press (Barnet and Hendon); Prestwich Advertiser; Reading Post; Rochdale Observer; Rossendale Free Press; Runcorn & Widnes Weekly News; Salford Advertiser; Slough Express; Stockport Express; Macclesfield Express; Wilmslow Express; The Sentinel (Staffordshire); Surrey Advertiser; Southport Visiter; South Manchester Reporter; South Liverpool Merseymart; South Wales Echo; South Wales Evening Post; Staines Informer; Streatham, Clapham & West Norwood Post; Sunday Sun (Newcastle Upon Tyne); Surrey Herald; Surrey Mirror Advertiser; Sutton & Epsom Post; Tameside Advertiser; Glossop Advertiser; Uxbridge & Hillingdon Leader; Uxbridge Gazette; Walton & Weybridge Informer; The Wharf (Canary Wharf). Scottish and Universal Newspapers: Trinity Mirror Scotland; Airdrie and Coatbridge Advertiser; Ayrshire Post; Blairgowrie Advertiser; Business 7; Dumfries and Galloway Standard; East Kilbride News; Galloway News; Hamilton Advertiser; Irvine Herald; Kilmarnock Standard; Metro Scotland; Paisley Daily Express; Perthshire Advertiser; Scottish Business Insider; Stirling Observer; Strathearn Herald; The Lennox Herald; West Lothian Courier; Wishaw Press. Digital online brands: Belfast Live; Dublin Live; Examiner Live (Huddersfield); Glasgow Live; Gloucestershire Live; Leeds Live.

When you look around news shops and stands and see all those newspapers and magazines on every conceivable subject it appears that media diversity is alive and well. Check who owns them and you realise that media diversity is history. I list in my book Human Race Get Off Your Knee s the media outlets from television to magazines then owned by Time Warner. It is extraordinary in both length and range of subjects and goes on for more than one and a half pages. Two of America’s most prominent newspapers, the New York Times and Washington Post are both owned by the same elite. The Times has been owned by the Zionist Sulzberger family since 1896 while the Post was controlled from 1930s by the Zionist Graham-Meyer family before being sold to Amazon’s ‘world’s richest man’ Jeff Bezos in 2013 whose company has close ties to the CIA. No potential bias there, then.

The Devil’s Playground – media endgame

Figure 230: Cult to its DNA.

People get most of their information today in the form of ‘news’ through Cult-controlled Silicon Valley corporations such as Google, YouTube, Facebook and Twitter. Add to that the domination of the global book market by Amazon. The Cult created the Internet to serve its agenda for human control. In terms of the subject at hand they want all information to eventually be transferred to the Internet because then it can be censored through algorithms of artificial intelligence without even human involvement once the codes are in place. The Internet for all its short-term benefits has been a Trojan horse from the start and the real reason – or reasons – for its creation will become clear in later chapters. What a surprise that the Internet was made possible by the Cult-controlled US Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA), the technological development arm of the Pentagon, which has seed-funded Silicon Valley corporations along with In-Q-Tel, or IQT, the technology-funding vehicle of the CIA (Fig 230 ). The Pentagon, DARPA and the CIA are all Cult assets and agencies of the ‘Deep State’. When the Internet was launched it had to be censorship-free to attract the global audience necessary for the DARPA (Cult) goal of making the World Wide Web the central pillar of human society. In this essential honeymoon period we enjoyed the free flow of information which allowed people like me to circulate research to expose the Cult. This was an unfortunate though necessary consequence from the Cult’s point of view in pursuit of its ultimate ambitions. Once the Internet was established as the said central pillar of human society in a way that is basically irreversible the mask could come off with a gathering frenzy of censorship to target information that in any way exposes the Cult agenda even without mention of the Cult itself. They, of course, don’t present this as censorship. They invent a series of made-up excuses such as ‘fake news’ and ‘hate speech’. The definition of both continues to be expanded to lasso ever more information, views and opinions into their calculated and systematic censorship in the guise of protecting the public from ‘hate’ and ‘discrimination’. They claim to be advancing ‘diversity’ while destroying it and this particularly applies to the ‘Woke’ mentality that claims to demand diversity in another example of Cult inversion. Cult-created ‘Wokeness’ is exploited to justify and impose ever more Internet and media censorship under the guise of political correctness. The Woke British trade union organisation, the TUC, banned a premier of Renegade , a film about my life and work, from one of its buildings on the grounds that the TUC ‘believes in diversity’. Well, clearly with the exception of anyone exposing the forest. For the TUC read the global mainstream media.

Technology is increasingly being introduced that will prevent the posting of information unacceptable to the Cult without the need to take it down. Even now YouTube, Facebook, Twitter and others employ ‘ghost or shadow banning’ in which material can be posted but algorithms ensure that they are seen by a fraction of what would otherwise be the case. My YouTube interviews about The Trigger and 9/11 were blatantly suppressed through the recommendation system and while they still got large numbers they were not on the scale they would have been if left unmolested. Highly significantly my video interviews have got by far their biggest audiences when posted on YouTube channels not subject to shadow banning than they did on my own algorithmically-manipulated channel before YouTube deleted me altogether in May, 2020 (more later). Facebook admitted in 2018 that it ‘demotes’ posts reported by users (easy to arrange) and rated as false by ‘fact checkers’ (working for the Cult agenda). Facebook claimed that this censorship reduced views of posts and pages by ‘around 80 percent’. As all information is moved to the Net the point will be reached when the Cult can literally control everything you see with the tyranny of (Cult-instigated) political correctness intimidating people into censoring even private conversations out of fear of being exposed for ‘hate speech’. Cult-serving Google, Google-owned YouTube, Facebook and Twitter are major actors in this stage show to hide the real reason that censorship is happening which to protect the Cult and its agenda for humanity from exposure. These Internet-dominating corporations and others like Amazon have been taken through the same process as the World Wide Web. First they allowed the free circulation of information and opinion because they, too, had to attract users on a world-changing scale on their way to near-monopoly. Once that line had been crossed by hugely predominant market share their masks could also be removed and censorship of Cult-unapproved information and opinion began as a drip before becoming the biblical flood that it is today. Amazon has long passed the point of domination in book sales to drive independent shops and publishers out of business and has now begun to target books for censorship in its version of the book-burning so beloved of tyrannies. We have reached the point where people cannot post anything questioning official narratives of 9/11, human-caused climate change or the ‘pandemic’ on platforms like YouTube without them adding links to read the official fairy tale version on Cult-serving Wikipedia . You want the official story of anything ? Go to Wikipedia. How plain it is to see how information is being royally stitched up and we are still nowhere near where it is meant to go although the massive leap in censorship since the ‘Covid-19’ hoax gives you some idea. Another point here is that the Cult owns the financial system and has limitless funds by creating ‘money’ out of nothing. Money is therefore no object for corporations like Google, Facebook, Twitter and Amazon which had no need to post a profit as they were buying their way to monopoly. ‘Investors’ were always there to write the cheques. You see the same with anything related to Elon Musk (more later). How can other companies that do have to make a profit to survive compete with those that don’t have to be profitable and have the financial capability to buy out or crush any independent opposition? Genuine opposition that won’t sell-out is demonised by the media under the usual tag of ‘hate speech’ when they establish other social media and video platforms. Cult-owned website hosts and payment companies also ban them to destroy their ability to function.

Silicon censors

Self-deluding so-called ‘journalists’ who support this war on information are promoting their own demise as traditional media falls to Silicon Valley domination and its censorship algorithms. Google virtually monopolise Internet searches which are algorithmically manipulated to emphasise official narratives and suppress alternatives. Where Google doesn’t control searches other Cult operations pick up the slack. Google-owned YouTube monopolise video content and social media domination falls to Facebook and Twitter. What about Instagram? Owned by Facebook. I don’t use social media – I message with WhatsApp? Owned by Facebook. Big Tech was made exempt by government from lawsuits for postings on their platforms in return for acting as neutral vehicles rather than publishers who do face legal action for what they publish. Silicon Valley psychopaths have benefited from one while ignoring the other by censoring information challenging the official narrative and particularly those known in America as conservatives. Government could rescind the ‘liability exception’ deal, but hasn’t. It is indicative of how the Cult works that ‘conservative’ organisations funded by the billionaire Koch family (‘conservative’) and Big Tech have been exposed for campaigning against laws to stop Big Tech censorship of conservatives. Control both sides and you control the game. Even more sinister is that these mega-corporations connect into the Cult-controlled Pentagon and intelligence agency network. Big Tech is continually exposed for gathering user data of every kind including surveillance through microphones and this ends up with the military-industrial-intelligence complex on a scale never made public. Many people have noted that conversations they thought were private lead immediately to products relating to the conversation being offered to them in Facebook and other advertisements. Official owners of these Cult-fronts like Facebook’s Mark Zuckerberg are super-frauds who are not ultimately in control. They are front people for forces much deeper in The Web than the Zuckerbergs will ever be. Silicon Valley giants are there to control what you see and keep detailed surveillance on what you do, say, and think. Facebook admitted in a letter to two US senators that it can locate where you are even if you have opted out of location tracking. Artificial intelligence can piece together other information to determine location including tagged photographs, addresses for purchases on the Facebook shopping section, and IP address information. Amnesty International said that Google and Facebook were ‘posing a systemic threat to human rights’ – exactly as they are meant to.

Tim Berners-Lee who is credited with inventing the World Wide Web unveiled a nine-point plan or ‘contract’ through his World Wide Foundation to ‘save the internet’ from ‘digital dystopia’. Some things sounded good until you knew the flip-side. Authors of this ‘contract’ included the hate-speech, censorship-obsessed French and German governments and major Silicon Valley censors like Google, Facebook and Microsoft. A highly-significant sentence said it was necessary to ‘develop technologies that support the best in humanity and challenge the worst’. When passed through an Orwellian translation unit this becomes ‘develop technologies to silence dissenters and renegades’. Who decides what is the ‘best’ and ‘worst’, Tim? Ah, The System does which wants to silence dissenters and renegades. Ah, gotcha. World Wide Web Foundation president and chief executive Adrian Lovett said prime issues include the problem of ‘disinformation’. Who decides what that is? Same answer. He said they will ‘track progress of all of those who have signed on, and others too who haven’t, and report that progress, make sure it’s public, make sure that we’re able to see who is going in the right direction and who is not.’ Who decides what direction is ‘right’? Same answer. The group hopes to enforce the contract through UN regulations and EU/national laws while companies that don’t sign up would be ostracised. The group says it will have succeeded when governments and companies that don’t back the contract ‘principles’ are ‘true outliers’ (defined as ‘a person or thing situated away or detached from the main body or system’). Companies and governments that broke the Internet are claiming to save it by taking a rock-hammer to what’s left of free expression. Claim you are stopping Internet dystopia while creating it and say at first this will be voluntary before enforcement by law. Does Berners-Lee know it’s a scam to advance Internet dictatorship? It doesn’t really matter. The corporations and the Cult do.

Wizard’s spell

Figure 231: The human plight and we have the power to change it.

Figure 232: In close-up what is it? Just blackness?

Figure 233: Expand your perspective and you see what it is. Expanding the mind has the same effect.

Pull all these strands together and you see that a human life is a cradle to grave download of Cult-desired perception. Postage Stamp parents are followed by Postage Stamp ‘education’, Postage Stamp media and Postage Stamp Silicon Valley. At the same time the arbiters of reality within human society are taken to be Postage Stamp scientists, Postage Stamp doctors, Postage Stamp academics, Postage Stamp government, Postage Stamp administrators, and Postage Stamp ‘experts’ of every kind. Their Postage Stamp narratives are enforced by Postage Stamp peer pressure and, should you be a public figure, by Postage Stamp journalists. A definition for my ‘Postage Stamp’ analogy is unconsciousness and my definition of unconscious for the purposes of this book is to be locked away in the perceptual Bubble of Body-Mind. Beliefs and perceptions enshrined in the Postage Stamp Consensus are designed to achieve just that end by suppressing awareness and firewalling people from frequencies where knowing can be accessed. Humanity has been mass-hypnotised every bit as much as the stooges in a hypnotist show (Fig 231 ). Do people on the stage shouting out on a word cue, playing a non-existent musical instrument or seeing the clothed audience as naked know they are hypnotised? Do those billions of people who respond to information and situations with their press-enter actions and behaviour know they are hypnotised? Of course they don’t because they are hypnotised. ‘Waking up’ and ‘The Awakening’ are terms for breaking the wizard’s spell. The idea is to so limit human awareness that we can’t see the picture. If people were asked what they were looking at in Figure 232 they would likely say ‘blackness’ and that would be the extent of it. Expand the image (awareness) and they’d see it was really an eye (Fig 233 ). Expand still further and you’d see the eye was a person in a room in a house in a street in a city in a world. The Cult wants to enslave perception in that symbolic blackness of myopia and it has achieved this spectacularly in generation after generation by controlling mainstream information and through the constant repetition from all directions of its perceptual program until it becomes an ‘everyone knows that’. German philosopher Arthur Schopenhauer said that ‘every man takes the limits of his own field of vision for the limits of the world’. This is The Program. Limit their sense of the possible and make them believe that their sense of the possible is the limit of the possible. The truth will then be dismissed and ridiculed and the ‘blackness’ perceived as the limit of possibility. Schopenhauer was born in 1788. The Program is not new, just more expanded. American Neuroscience researcher Joe Dispenza was on the money when he said: ‘Ninety-five percent of who we are by the time we’re 35 years old is a memorised set of behaviours, emotional reactions, unconscious habits, hardwired attitudes, beliefs and perceptions that function like a computer program.’ Why would it be any other way given what I have described in this chapter alone?

Always back to wavefields

Humanity has been vibrated into conformity on the wavefield level of reality by downloading a collective perception which forms a mass wave-entanglement between like-perceivers (like frequencies ). Confirmation of Postage Stamp reality does not only happen in the realm of the seen. It is being communicated through wave connections of frequency entanglement. This is the real level at which the herd mentality is formed. A study published in Current Biology by researchers from New York University and the Max Planck Institute of Empirical Aesthetics found that brainwaves synchronise into similar patterns when students pay attention and are ‘engaged’ with each other. Co-lead author Suzanne Dikker said: ‘We think that all these effects can be explained by shared attention mechanisms during dynamic group interactions.’ From that ‘shared attention’ comes wave entanglement. What we ‘see’ is only the decoded holographic version of that. Intimidating people into collective conformity is really vibrating them into line. If you place violins together vibrating to the same note any other violin placed alongside them will start to vibrate to the same note even though it was playing another or none before. The dominant frequency will ‘entrain’ other frequencies and make them vibrate to its tune. Perceptions and pre-conceived ideas are frequencies and can both entrain others and prevent the person themselves from seeing other possibilities. Technological frequencies such as 5G are designed to have this effect on human brain activity. Some people go into politics with a genuine desire to make a positive difference and then transmute into everything they went into politics to challenge. They have been vibrated into line. Everything is a vibrational field including a parliament, political party or ideology and in the way of the violins the dominant frequency will prevail and absorb others into itself. The same is true of all groups and organisations, schools, universities, science, doctors, media, the whole lot. There’s a saying that goes: ‘When you dance with the Devil, the Devil doesn’t change, the Devil changes you.’ The dance in this case is frequency – oscillation – and the Devil is the Cult agenda.

Figure 234: The Cult controls by suppressing and leeching the power of humanity through perceptual programming – not through power of its own.

The Devil doesn’t have to change you and the opposite can be true if you open your heart and mind to connect with consciousness way more powerful than the Cult and its ‘gods’. They can only enslave humanity by making us more ignorant than they are (quite a task). We are not looking at some all-powerful force. It’s more like the one-eyed man who can only be king in the land of the blind (Fig 234 ). The all-seeing eye is not all-seeing. It’s a seven-stone weakling compared with humanity in its Infinite power. I’ve been exposing the Cult for 30 years and they have not vibrated me into line. Nor will they ever do so. It will be the other way round.

CHAPTER SEVEN

How are we manipulated?

Facts do not cease to exist because they are ignored – Aldous Huxley

H ere’s a way to read the world: Know the outcome and you’ll see the journey. The Cult is desperate for you not to know what is planned for humanity because once we do the steps towards that end become crystal-clearly obvious day by day. Know the outcome and you’ll see the journey, or see the ‘where’ and you’ll see the ‘why?’ (Fig 235 ).

Figure 235: A brilliant way to ‘read’ daily events.

The Cult and its agents (knowing and overwhelmingly unknowing) in government, media and The System in general present everything in the form of dots. It is vital to maintain the illusion that policies, laws, media reports and ‘education’ depict a world in which everything stands apart from everything else. This policy is not connected to that policy, this law to that law, or this change to that change. When you perceive society from that perspective daily life appears to be a series of random and unfathomable events across the great spectrum of human experience. What the hell is going on? Why is this happening? Why are they doing that? Amid such bewilderment many people switch off and don’t even try to work it out. I mean, what’s the point? It’s impossible to understand, right? No – wrong . At its core it’s all very simple. Human society consists of fields of consciousness – some called ‘human’ – making wave entanglements on the basis of compatible frequencies generated by perception . Control perception and you dictate the entanglements that decide the nature of human interaction collectively known as ‘society’. How do you control perception? You control information from which people form perception and at all costs you keep your targets in ignorance of one simple fact: What they see and experience are not the work of random chance but of carefully calculated steps in pursuit of a very specific and extraordinarily sinister end.

Figure 236: Both are controlled by the Cult network of Sabbatian-Frankism and so both work to the same script.

I’ll give you a great example of this coldly coordinated ‘random’ before exposing the wider goals of the Cult and how humanity is manipulated to achieve them. I describe a sequence of events in detail in my mega-work, The Trigger , and mentioned them briefly at the start of the book. They involve the network within the Cult known as Sabbatian-Frankism which emerged in the 17th century and infiltrated communities, cultures and religions of all kinds. Sabbatian-Frankists pose as members of communities and followers of religions while infiltrating and directing them to serve the Cult’s desired agenda. Sabbatian-Frankists (who hate Jewish people, by the way) control Israel; they are the Saudi fake ‘royal’ family; and they have networks across the world, especially in North America and Europe. Wait – aren’t Israel and Saudi Arabia opponents? Not at the level of the Cult they’re not. They are on the same team and any public divisions (increasingly few) are to hide these connections (Fig 236 ). Once you realise that apparent opponents ultimately answer to the same masters the cataracts of ‘random’ fall from the eyes. I have already explained how the Bible of Sabbatian-Frankism is the Kabbalah, the Jewish esoteric/’spiritual’/nature of reality work. Most important to them is the part known as the Zohar which means ‘radiance’ or ‘illumination’. Three Sabbatian-Frankists chose the name ‘Illuminati’ for a Cult network they founded officially in 1776. They were Mayer Amschel Rothschild, founder of the Rothschild dynasty, Jacob Frank (hence ‘Frankism’) and Illuminati frontman, Adam Weishaupt. All the detailed background is in The Trigger . Sabbatian-Frankists, their Illuminati and Kabbalah, are yet another example of how global manipulation is founded on the knowledge of how reality works while keeping that knowledge from the target population.

Figure 237: The document that listed countries for regime change in September, 2000, which presidents of ‘different’ parties have pursued ever since. It said that a ‘new Pearl Harbor’ would be needed to justify the plan and that’s what we got – 9/11.

Figure 238: See The Trigger for who was really behind the 9/11 attacks and it wasn’t Osama bin Laden.

Sabbatian-Frankists have long infiltrated America to the point of control and they created a ‘think tank’ in 1996 called the Project for the New American Century. Among their number were those who would be major players in the United States government and the Pentagon at the time of 9/11 during the regime of child-like puppet president, Boy George Bush. They included Dick Cheney (9/11 vice-president and de facto president); Donald Rumsfeld (9/11 Secretary of Defense); Paul Wolfowitz (9/11 Deputy Secretary of Defense); Dov Zakheim (9/11 Pentagon comptroller in charge of the entire military budget); and a long list of others either working within government and the Pentagon on 9/11 or promoting wars in the media in response to 9/11. The Project for the New American Century published a document in September, 2000, calling for American troops and military influence to be used to force regime-change in a series of countries including Iraq, Libya, Syria, Iran and North Korea leading in the end to regime-change in China. The document demanded (on behalf of the Sabbatian-Frankists) that American troops ‘fight and decisively win simultaneous major theater wars’ to achieve the desired regime change. It said, however, that this ‘process of transformation’ would be slow ‘absent some catastrophic and catalysing event like a New Pearl Harbor’ to justify attacks on target countries and the necessary gigantic increases in military spending. A year to the month after the document was published and nine months after those who wrote it came to power with Bush in January, 2001, America had what Bush called at the time ‘the Pearl Harbor of the 21st century’ – 9/11 (Fig 237 ). As a result of those horrific attacks a ‘war on terror’ was launched and the very countries named in the document have been targeted for regime change ever since under presidents and UK prime ministers of different (and apparently opposing) political parties. At the level of the Cult, which controls the always-there permanent government I described earlier, countries are one-party states. Whoever you vote for the Cult is in power. The sequence I have described is much longer and more detailed than outlined here and you’ll find the full story in The Trigger which demolishes the official story of 9/11 and names those really involved – not 19 Arab hijackers (Fig 238 ). The point is that if you see each point in the sequence as an isolated in-and-of-itself event there seems to be no pattern and all appears random. Arab hijackers controlled by Osama bin Laden attacked America and the military invaded Afghanistan to find him; then along came the invasion of Iraq which was to stop Saddam Hussein and his non-existent ‘weapons of mass destruction’; Libya was attacked and Colonel Gadhafi was killed to protect the people from Gadhafi violence; Syria was invaded to stop President Assad ‘killing his own people’; Iran is being targeted for developing nuclear weapons and sponsoring terrorism. We are asked to believe that none of these events are linked in any way. Connect the dots while knowing the planned outcome and a very different picture can be seen.

Create the problem so you can impose the solution

Figure 239: War as creative destruction. Nothing changes a society quicker and more than war and that’s why we’ve had so many.

The media, by emphasis and censorship, presents everything as random so the truth can be hidden and the great majority of journalists are doing this through ignorance, not calculation. Any who do make the connections and want to report them are out the door very fast. It doesn’t take many people to control the media so long as the Cult dominates the positions of ownership, editorial policy and hire and fire. This applies to every organisation and institution – government, ‘education’, banking, business, etc. The attacks of 9/11, regime-change wars and externally-manipulated ‘people’s revolutions’ that followed are examples of two mass mind-control techniques that I dubbed decades ago Problem-Reaction-Solution (PRS) and the Totalitarian Tiptoe (TT). PRS is the mind-trick by which you covertly create a problem while blaming someone else (9/11); then you tell the public through an unquestioning mainstream media the version of the problem you want people to believe (Bin Laden and 19 Arab hijackers ‘did it’) to illicit the reaction of ‘something must be done’; finally you offer the solution to the problem you have covertly created (a ‘war on terror’ to regime change countries as you planned all along). There is another version as I mentioned earlier that I call No-Problem-Reaction-Solution when you don’t even need a real problem only the perception of one. The lie about ‘weapons of mass destruction’ to justify the catastrophic invasion of Iraq in 2003 is an obvious case and as we will see later so is the ‘Covid-19’ hoax. Iraq was on the hit-list and there was no reason to invade so the Cult made one up and had it promoted by Boy Bush and UK Prime Minister Tony Blair. The stablemate of PRS is the Totalitarian Tiptoe in which you instigate a series of happenings and changes that are all connected and leading the world in your desired direction while being presented as unconnected random events. Wars transform the world step-by-step as each follows the other in the Totalitarian Tiptoe technique of ‘creative destruction’. A war destroys the status quo and creates a new one. The next war destroys that status quo and so on. With each new status quo you are moving closer and closer to your end goal. Look how the two world wars utterly transformed global society (Fig 239 ). The European Union is a Totalitarian Tiptoe planned from the start to be a centralised bureaucratic (Cult) superstate which they could never have openly admitted. The public backlash and resistance would have blocked it at birth. Instead they sold the superstate tyranny at first as just a free trade zone (the ‘Common Market’) before, step-by-step, incessantly centralising power to delete national sovereignty on the journey to what was planned from the start – a bureaucratically-controlled United States of Europe. Observe the world with this knowledge and you will see Problem-Reaction-Solution and the Totalitarian Tiptoe constantly at work across the entirety of human life. When something new is introduced by the Tiptoe technique where it starts is never where it is intended to finish. Taser stun guns unleashing 55,000 volts of electricity were introduced by police ‘only for trained firearms officers’, but it was obvious to anyone who understands the game and the Tiptoe that they would soon be widely distributed. By the year to March, 2019, Tasers were used thousands of times in England and Wales alone and broke all previous records. We now have 70-year-old grandmothers being Tasered multiple times in America by psychopathic goons in uniform for asking them to show a warrant before entering their home. Crucial to making PRS and TT techniques effective is to program the population to believe your version of why these manufactured events happen and to keep the real reason hidden. The alternative media and alternative opinion is being censored to ever greater extremes by the Cult-owned Internet giants to stop the truth being exposed about PRS and TT events (which went into overdrive to stop exposure of the ‘Covid-19’ hoax).

Cult movie

What I am about to describe really is a movie in the sense there is a script designed to tell you what you are seeing and experiencing. If you watch a series of pictures with no commentary or voiceover you can reach your own conclusions about what they mean. Instead a reporter will tell you what you are seeing and what the pictures mean when often what is said is not true at all. Most of the time the reporter doesn’t know what is happening. They get their information from official sources, repeat that in the voiceover and call it ‘journalism’. Whatever the event may be – a terrorist attack, war, financial collapse – the media is telling you the official version 99 percent of the time. We are back to one of the most profound techniques of mind control which is repetition. Media sources may seem numerous but they will be quoting the same official narrative ad infinitum until it fuses into ‘everyone knows that’ and a widely accepted version of history (memory). Stop people in the street anywhere in the world and ask them what happened in an historical or more recent event and they will invariably give you the official version (often thanks to Hollywood or ‘Tinseltown’). Hollywood is a Cult creation to program perceptions of the global masses. Ask many people for a version of history and it will come from the script of a Hollywood movie. That John Wayne was a war hero wasn’t he? No, he was in make-up in LA while the guns were firing on the other side of the world. Wayne was there to tell you what to believe about the guns firing on the other side of the world. Moment by illusory moment you are being told what to think – to perceive – about everything . I will pull together over the next few chapters the elements of a coordinated global control system which are happening before our eyes every day while being presented as random events.

Figure 240: The structure of the planned global tyranny.

The foundation manipulation is centralisation of power which has been unrelenting thanks to the Cult. A few can’t control the many without centralisation of power. The more power is devolved from the centre the less control the global Cult at the centre can have. Humans once organised in tribal groups which decided what happened to the tribe. Then tribes were brought together under centralised control called nations and countries and a few people could dictate to all the former tribes. Today nations are being centrally controlled through superstates like the EU, trading blocs, United Nations agencies, the World Health Organization, World Trade Organization, International Monetary Fund, World Bank and so many more. The all-encompassing name for this phenomenon is ‘globalisation’ – the centralisation of global power in every area of human life which I have been warning about for 30 years. Globalisation is the Totalitarian Tiptoe to the imposition of a world government, army, central bank and currency underpinned by a microchipped population connected to AI (Fig 240 ). The more you centralise power the more power you have at the centre to centralise even quicker and centralisation gets faster and faster. The European Union has been created this way as each power-grabbing and centralising step has followed another. A single world currency, which I have again been predicting since the early 1990s, is meant to be purely digital with the deletion of cash. We are seeing cash disappearing so fast in favour of digital transactions through cards and smartphones in the Tiptoe to this end with planned microchips waiting to take over from them. Bank branches and ATMs are being closed and removed to make it ever harder to have cash transactions. The plan is to make it near-impossible to function without a smartphone. I went to a railway station car park during the writing of this book and the only way I could pay was by a smartphone which I don’t use. It meant I couldn’t park there and this is the way those who don’t want to succumb to the agenda are being pressured into doing so. The sequence in all subject areas goes like this … voluntary … can’t function without doing it ‘voluntarily’… compulsory. Individual cash currencies are disappearing with the Cult-created EU deleting many European currencies through the introduction of the euro that itself is planned to be assimilated into the world currency (look at the utter demonisation of cash and refusal to deal in cash transactions as a result of the ‘Covid-19’ hoax). Global government would not even be run by elected people as I have long warned. Rulers would be bureaucrats and technocrats serving the Cult through what is termed a technocracy – ‘Government or control of society or industry by an elite of technical experts’. Silicon Valley which already has far more power than governments is this very emerging technocracy at work as are the unelected bureaucrat dictators of the European Union. A world army is designed to impose the will of the world dictatorship on those who resist. Recent plans for a European Union army (which I predicted in the 1990s) and the long-established European Central Bank are Totalitarian Tiptoes to the world army and world central bank, as is NATO. The same goes with regard to world government with the World Health Organization, World Trade Organization, International Monetary Fund and World Bank. The biggest stalking horse of all for the world government structure is the Cult-created-and-controlled United Nations which is being transformed step-by-step into a world government dictatorship. I’ll say more about this when I deal with the climate change hoax being driven through the UN.

Hunger Games Society

Unrelenting centralisation of global power is sold as ‘the world coming together’. This illusion and lie has been bought in its totality by desperately naive ‘Woke’ progressives and their associated Climate Cult which is an offshoot of The Cult although only a few of its advocates will know that. Do they really believe that a Cult obsessed with driving people apart to divide and rule wants the world to ‘come together’? It’s about centralisation of total power in the hands of a few at a global level from where they will control AI which, by then, will be connected to the human brain. Hellooooooo!!! My God – wake the hell up, people. It is a skin-pincher to think that the political ‘Left’ that I grew up with – the one that stood for freedom of speech and challenged elite power – has now been so hijacked by the fake ‘progressive’ ‘Woke’ mentality that it demands freedom of speech is deleted through Cult-created political correctness (PC) and that the elite be handed ever more power through the Cult-created EU. Who will eventually reap the consequences of the tyranny they are demanding to be implemented? They will – and their kids and grandkids still more so. The original truly liberal Left has been so absorbed by Cult-created ‘Woke’ that real liberals are today condemned as ‘far-right’ and ‘Nazis’ for defending basic liberal values like freedom of speech. The label ‘Woke’ which this mentality awards itself is a serious misrepresentation of its origin and maybe, ironically, ‘cultural appropriation’ in the language of PC. ‘Woke’ is apparently a political term used in African-American culture since the 1900s and relates to an awareness of social and racial justice. Its use by fake ‘progressives’, however, does not mean that although they claim it does. ‘New Woke’, as I will call it from here-on, means campaigning for the agenda of the very Cult responsible for social injustice of all kinds throughout what we perceive as human history. This includes the slavery and oppression of black and other non-white people and the oppression of most white people.

Hunger Games – the real-life movie

Figure 241: The Hunger Games Society I have warned about for decades that is now clearly being imposed. (Image Neil Hague.)

Figure 242: The Hunger Games Society is a global fascistic society.

I have long described where the Cult and New Wokeness are leading us as the ‘Hunger Games Society’ and the Tiptoe to that continues every day worldwide. Clearly my phrase comes from the Hunger Games movie series which portrays a privileged elite hoarding all the wealth and power while living in a hi-tech city of mega luxury. They are protected by a vicious and merciless police/military state from the rest of the population working as slaves to the elite (today’s Cult-connected One-percent) in abject poverty under extreme levels of surveillance and control. The masses are isolated in ‘sectors’ to prevent a unified response (divide and rule). I have been warning for decades that this is the very structure the Cult seeks to impose with a brain link to AI thrown in (Fig 241 ). Scan the world and you can’t miss the pieces being put into place ever more quickly. I saw an image of Adolf Hitler at a mass Nazi rally. He stood alone at the front delivering his psychopathy to a massive military presence and beyond them were thousands of people kept in line by that military to ensure whatever Hitler demanded would be done. I had that image flipped upside down and overlaid on the Hunger Games Society structure and they are exactly the same. We are indeed looking at a global version of Nazi Germany with the added control-system of advanced-technology and AI (Fig 242 ). Now add the ‘virus’ lockdowns to what I said there.

Figure 243: People die of hunger and sleep in the streets while a handful of multi-billionaires like these hijack the world’s wealth. The fact that many claim to be ‘caring’ and have ‘values’ is a real challenge to the stomach.

Figure 244: A cause and effect that never fails.

The plan is for the leaders and key agents of the Cult to control the wealth and power at the top of the pyramid in the way of the Hunger Games movies. We have already reached the point where we talk about a ‘One-percent’ and an Oxfam report in 2019 estimated that the world’s 26 richest men owned as much wealth as the poorest half of the global population – some 3.8 billion people at the time (Fig 243 ). The 26 are themselves in hierarchical order with the top few dominating the wealth and multi-billionaires Jeff Bezos at Amazon and Bill Gates at Microsoft up there at the top. By 2020 the world had a record 2,816 billionaires worth $11.2 trillion which is more than the gross national product of every country except the United States and China. Another Oxfam report in 2020 said the wealthiest 2,153 people have more money than the poorest 4.6 billion while the 22 richest men have more than all the women in Africa. We should be careful even then of believing these are the wealthiest people. Behind the scenes Cult leaders have wealth way beyond a Bezos or Gates who are relative artisans and gofers compared with those with the most power who don’t put themselves on public display. They hide the extent of their holdings through a stream of nominees and proxies. The One-percent and their operatives own governments and buy politicians and parties (Fig 244 ). Multi-billionaire financier George Soros owns the Democrats in the United States along with much of the New Woke network of organisations while multi-billionaire Sheldon Adelson owns the Republican Party and has been Donald Trump’s biggest funder. The Cult technique is control all sides and you control the game. The Sabbatian-Frankist House of Rothschild is a player even above all of those I have mentioned and they are global experts at hiding the extent of their wealth and power. Cult-controlled corporations are far richer than countries. Sixty-nine of the world’s leading economic entities are corporations not countries and 157 of the top 200. Corporations such as Walmart, Apple and Shell attract more wealth than countries like Russia, Belgium and Sweden while a mere one percent of the wealth of Jeff Bezos is equivalent to the entire health budget of Ethiopia with its 105 million people. Mega corporations own governments, dictate laws – and wars – and hand themselves all the aces at the expense of potential competition. You have laws making it ever more difficult (on purpose) for small and medium size non-Cult businesses to survive while Cult corporations get what they like (update – look what has happened to small business and even bigger ones all over the world because of the ‘virus’ hoax lockdowns). Control of governments and the system in general means that billionaires and their corporations pay a far smaller percentage of their income in taxation than people struggling to survive. Google paid just £6 million in tax in 2011 on a turnover of £365 million and avoids tax like the other vampires by moving tens of billions into shell companies in offshore tax havens. They and their famous front people have utter contempt for you. Fair Tax Mark, a group campaigning for tax transparency, reported in 2019 that the big six US tech firms Amazon, Facebook, Google, Netflix, Apple and Microsoft had ‘aggressively’ avoided $100 billion of global tax over the previous decade. It claimed that in this period Amazon paid only $3.4 billion in tax on revenues of $960.5 billion and profits of $26.8 billion. How can smaller less connected companies compete with that? They can’t. How can they compete with those like Amazon and global taxi firm Uber who have apparently unlimited funding to buy and expand their way to monopoly? They can’t and that’s the idea.

Global sweatshop

The Cult controls – indeed created – the global banking and financial system in which it conjures money out of fresh air called ‘credit’ and its financial pot is therefore unlimited. The gathering monopoly of Amazon alone has devastated bricks and mortar shops, mom and pop businesses, and dominates the book industry at the expense of independent stores which are driven out of business (see ‘virus’ hoax lockdowns which have left Amazon with a massively-increased global market share). US retail giant Walmart, the largest company in the world by revenue, has done something similar in the bricks and mortar sector through a business model described by one commentator as ‘selling foreign goods to domestic consumers, cheap Chinese garbage manufactured offshore in factories that pay slave wages – wages that American manufacturers could never match’. One study estimated that America lost 400,000 jobs between 2001 and 2013 because of Walmart’s Chinese imports and this devastated many towns especially in rural areas. This depopulation of rural land just happens to be a major Cult agenda as you will see. Walmart even has a policy of selling goods at a loss until competitors are destroyed to secure a monopoly (see Amazon) and employs mostly part-time staff to avoid paying them benefits while knowing that the taxpayer via the government will top up the wages with welfare payments. This goes on while the Walmart family is reported to be worth $150 billion . Walmart and its methods are straight from the Cult playbook. It’s a disgusting company exploiting and living off the backs of the poor. Walmart was once widely condemned by genuine liberals of the genuine Left, but not by New Woke since the Walmart family, the richest in America, began spouting the language and agenda of New Woke. Monopoly means control and the plan is for Cult corporations to dominate every sector and market so that you buy from them or no one. Where do the bankrupt business owners and their employees go? They slide into the lower reaches of the Hunger Games Society along with everyone else – look at the effect of the ‘virus’ hoax lockdowns which have accelerated this process on a staggering scale (Fig 245 ).

Figure 245: The global dynamic.

While global wealth is sucked into the One-percent and the Cult the poor and what are called the middle class are being stripped of income and assets in line with the Hunger Games pyramid. I warned long ago that those who thought none of this applied to them were in for a shock. By that I mean those at the time who had a well-paid job, nice car, good home and money for holidays. I pointed out that the Cult had its sights on them, too. The plan is for everyone outside the elite to be enslaved in dependency and poverty by controlling the wealth and replacing people with AI. The Cult-instigated financial crash of 2008 contributed immensely to this while the mega-rich went on getting mega-richer. Figures I saw for 2017 and 2018 revealed that a new billionaire was created every two days as formerly ‘comfortable’ or even ‘well-off’ people were finding themselves on the street. A headline captured the trend: ‘In rich countries, the middle class is getting smaller and smaller, generation by generation.’ It describes the Totalitarian Tiptoe to the Hunger Games Society. Many people who once thought that what I was exposing did not affect them are now sleeping in tent cities or shop doorways and this is planned to continually expand until the Cult’s job is done. Suicide rates in America have increased by 40 percent in 17 years and many of them are among those termed ‘blue collar’ workers or ‘working class’ who have been profoundly affected by One-percent accumulation of wealth and systematic mass immigration competing in their job market. Vast numbers of people even in work are living from week to week with a missed pay check or two meaning financial disaster and a lost home. A national survey by UK homelessness charity Beam found that the average British person is only two pay cheques away from homelessness at a time when AI is sweeping away jobs traditionally done by humans (and that was before the lockdown). This has all been planned. Food charity Move for Hunger says that one in eight Americans or 40 million people are food insecure with more than twelve million children and five million seniors not sure where their next meal is coming from (again before lockdown). Homelessness was rising all over the world through lower incomes, unemployment and social factors even before the ‘pandemic’ with the cost of housing right up there as a prime cause. British homeless charity Shelter said in December, 2019, that a child becomes homeless in the UK every eight minutes. None of this has to happen when you consider that the United States government has spent $2 trillion (at least) on the Cult-created unwinnable war in Afghanistan, the longest in American history. Much of that $2 trillion has ended up in the coffers of Cult-owned arms and ‘defence’ corporations while homeless numbers incessantly rise. Why would they spend the money on the population when they want to make the masses impoverished, destitute and dependent on them? I have described the Hunger Games agenda in all its form at length in Everything You Need To Know and if you want the detailed background for all I am saying in this book then Everything is a must-read.

Gather them in cities

I have long exposed the agenda for financially forcing people out of the rural areas into mega cities controlled by AI where they would live in micro-homes – some the size of a single decker bus and many even less. All these years after I made that warning those micro-homes are being built all over the world and the movement of people from financially-devastated rural communities into the cities where they can be kept under surveillance 24/7 gathers apace (Fig 246 ). The US federal government already owns 28 percent of the land in America and there’s a lot more to come. Patrick Wood at Technocracy.news described how this process is happening even more directly in China where vicious government control has allowed no opposition:

… China unveiled a plan in 2014 to summarily move 250 million farmers off their land by 2026 and into megacities that had already been constructed but sat vacant. The vacated farm land is being combined into giant factory farms to be operated by advanced technology such as agricultural robots and automated tractors. Ostensibly, the farmers who refuse to leave will be helped along with the barrel of a gun.

Figure 246:Micro-homes for the serfs being built around the world for the Hunger Games masses in AI-controlled cities.

Figure 247: ‘Ghost cities’ built all over China waiting for the masses to be forced to relocate from the land.

For years people have been asking why China has been building a stream of new ‘ghost cities’ with few or no one living there (Fig 247 ). This is why. The guiding rule for the West is China today and you tomorrow or in fact not even tomorrow. Abandoned homes, family farms, shops and factories can now be seen right across rural America between the coasts thanks to companies like Walmart with its imports from Chinese sweatshops and pricing to destroy competition. Then there are hedge fund billionaires who asset-strip local employers and devastate rural areas. American cable news host Tucker Carlson, one of the last proper journalists on US television, highlighted one sickening example involving ultra-Zionist New York-based hedge fund manager Paul Singer who has a personal fortune according to Forbes of more than $3 billion. Carlson told the story of how Singer’s predatory hedge fund targeted the only major employer in the small town of Sidney, Nebraska, and destroyed it for a fat profit. The town lost 2,000 jobs in a population of 6,000. No wonder Bloomberg News dubbed Singer as ‘the world’s most feared investor’ and he is reported to be ‘a strong opponent of raising taxes for the wealthiest 1% of taxpayers’. You don’t say. At the time of writing ultra-Zionist Singer is reported to be buying shares in Twitter to oust chief executive Jack Dorsey. Carlson described Singer-like asset-stripping practices as ‘vulture capitalism feeding off the carcass of a dying nation’. He said of the Sidney disaster: ‘A heartbreakingly familiar cascade began: people left, property values collapsed, and then people couldn’t leave. They were trapped there. One of the last thriving small towns in America went under.’ This is happening systematically all over America to drive people into the cities and a life of poverty, which means dependency, which means control. A further aspect of this agenda is the Cult’s campaign for people to eat a vegan diet in response to the climate change hoax which would ultimately cause many animals to disappear from land that could then be absorbed in state and One-percent land grabs from which the public in the mega-cities would be excluded. You could drive there? Your autonomous car won’t take you. Fracking is endangering the viability of rural life. Each fracking well consumes between 1.5 million and 16 million gallons of water while whole communities don’t have enough to drink and have to leave the country for the cities. Injected water used in fracking to access oil and gas fields is polluted with hundreds of chemicals which then seep into ground water further reducing supplies to drink.

Figure 248: Exploit any disaster or human catastrophe to advance your agenda.

Figure 249: Smart cities with everything controlled by AI and human choice deleted are referred to as ‘human settlement zones’ in official documents.

Figure 250: The ginormous smart city being built by Sabbatian-Frankist-controlled Saudi Arabia not far from Sabbatian-Frankist-controlled Israel which is planned to be the key centre of the global smart control grid.

Around 2010 the world passed the point where more people live in urban areas than rural and it has been speeding in that direction ever since. In Australia people are being forced out of rural areas by catastrophic forest fires (hardly difficult to start) and lack of water as rivers dry up. They blame human-caused climate change when honest Australian scientists have admitted there is no evidence to link climate change to either fires or drought and dwindling rivers. In fact, water is being siphoned off before it reaches communities by dams owned by private corporations who use it for their own ends including mega-cotton production operations for the benefit of Chinese and Japanese ‘investors’. I recommend the Internet videos of Max Igan with regard to Australian fires and water shortages. Climate Cult child goddess Greta Thunberg of course blamed the 2019/2020 catastrophe in Australia on ‘climate change’ when forest fires have always been part of Australian life and were once mitigated by controlled burning in the winter to create barriers that fires struggled to jump (Fig 248 ). Non-burning policy instigated at the behest of the Greens has since created a disaster waiting to happen. But, no, hey, it’s global warming – the script says so – and the fact that nearly 200 people were arrested for ‘fire-related offenses’ according to New South Wales police, including some for deliberately starting them, is not at all relevant. There have been horrific fires in other regions including Indonesia which also have human and not climate change origins through forest and land mismanagement by timber and farming companies. At their most extreme these fires have produced more carbon dioxide than the US economy to put industrial production of CO2 into perspective and killed monumental numbers of animals including many from endangered species. The same has happened in Australia with one biodiversity specialist estimating that a billion animals had been killed in the fires of 2019/2020. The real causes of this don’t matter to the climate obsessives – only their agenda that everything is ‘climate change’ – and still more people are forced out of rural areas into urban centres. Mega-cities where the masses are being forced to relocate from rural areas are known as ‘Smart Cities’ which is code for densely-populated centres of mass surveillance and control of everything through artificial intelligence with no private means of movement and only state-controlled driverless vehicles and communal transport systems. You go where the state says you can go and nowhere else. Current cities are being transformed into Smart Cities while others are being built from scratch around the world as in China (Fig 249 overleaf). To give you an idea of what I mean Saudi Arabia, controlled by the Sabbatian-Frankist fake royal House of Saud, is developing a $500 billion Smart City dubbed the ‘NEOM project’ which is planned to be 33-times the size of New York (Fig 250 ). NEOM means ‘New Future’, but ‘Cult agenda’ would be more accurate.

Prison camp cities

We have in San Francisco and Los Angeles perfect examples of the Cult’s Hunger Games programme and also California in its entirety. New Woke California has twelve percent of the American population but 25 percent of its homeless and 25 percent of people in the state are poor amid incredible wealth (what must it be now with the lockdown?). There have been outbreaks of typhus among the shit-laden, piss-laden, streets of Los Angeles with fears that the plague will follow while the millionaires and billionaires of the Hollywood elite look the other way from their ivory towers and conspicuous wealth. Human waste goes into the LA River bypassing sewage treatment and how does anyone think that will turn out? If you want to see the Hunger Games Society let’s go to San Francisco and this time there’ll be no need for flowers in your hair. Watching where you walk will be far more important. San Francisco and the associated Silicon Valley is the most unequal society on Planet Earth. I have been to the ‘Golden Gate’ city many times starting before the emergence of the billionaire technocracy when the city really was a place to sing about. I have been there recently and it’s a shithole – literally. ‘New Woke’ owners of Google, Facebook, Twitter and the like live in their multi-million walled mansions with private security while the streets of San Francisco are awash with homeless people, human piss and shit, and spent needles left by addicts often desperately trying to escape from their daily nightmare while suffering from mental illness. There are now more drug addicts in San Francisco than high school students. Residents reported about 5,500 cases of human shit in the city’s streets in 2011 and by 2018 it was more than 28,000. One bloke I saw on video defecated in a supermarket aisle. San Francisco’s response to all this has been to stop prosecuting people that piss and shit in public places which of course has made the situation far worse. Seattle in Washington State is another city that has taken the route of San Francisco with all the same consequences. The multi-billionaire George Soros and other One-percenters behind New Woke have been funding their gofers to become district attorneys across America and when they win office crimes are downgraded or no longer prosecuted. The aim is to destroy human society and let rule by the mob take over. The result in the same period has been a surge in murders in America as well as other crime. San Francisco has just such a district attorney in Chesa Boudin whose parents were jailed for what would today be called Woke terrorism with a group called the ‘Weather Underground’. Boudin’s city has the highest rate of property crime of any big city in the country with an average of 60 cars broken into every day. San Francisco’s Board of Supervisors decided to act decisively in true New Woke fashion by deleting the term ‘convicted felons’ to be replaced with ‘justice-involved individuals’ which is the term also used for the targets of crime. We have the same term for both robber and robbed, attacker and attacked. Young people committing crime are now ‘young people impacted by the juvenile justice system’. Drug addicts are ‘people with a history of substance use’. The Cult New Woke technique is to ignore the problem (it wants the problem) and instead delete the language that makes talking about the problem in factual detail impossible. New York has done something similar by abolishing cash bail for certain crimes. In the first month after introduction car theft surged 67 percent and robbery 33 percent with six suspected drug dealers accused of running a $7 million operation given this get out of jail card. Will any of these people come back for trial? A former New York police commissioner described how people have been arrested for rape, been let go and raped again, while others have been arrested on serious charges, let go, and committed murder. There are many people in jail who shouldn’t be, but that’s not the motivation here. It’s about still keeping the wrong people in jail while setting free those who should be there. New Woke California voted to make crime involving less than $950 a misdemeanour with likely no investigation or consequences. You’ll never guess what has happened. I mean who could have predicted it? Crime in that category has soared with some thieves even carrying calculators to make sure their shoplifting booty totals less than $950. Small businesses are being especially badly hit and anyone who wants society to be a see-want-take lawless free-for-all would be ecstatic. California even reduced penalties for knowingly exposing a sexual partner to HIV and the same with knowingly donating HIV-infected blood. What about those infected? New Woke is not interested in real victims, only inventing fake ones. Ultra-Zionist multi-billionaire one-time Democratic presidential candidate Michael Bloomberg described California despite all this as a model for all of America. To the Cult it is.

I have been exposing for decades the systematic drugging of American and other communities worldwide to enslave the population in addiction with the Bush and Clinton families centrally involved in the Cult drug networks that control the drug cartels. China is circulating drugs in America via Mexican drug gangs crossing large swathes of the basically undefended southern border (see The Trigger for background to Cult drug networks and the Bush/Clinton/CIA/Israeli Mossad involvement). Addiction to opioids, a class of drugs derived from the opium poppy plant, has been devastating for America and especially a synthetic opioid called Fentanyl which is some 100 times more powerful than morphine and overwhelmingly sourced to China. Opioids are brain manipulators promoted as painkillers and have been mass-circulated by Purdue Pharma owned by the multi-billionaire Sackler family. The result of their mega-marketed drug OxyContin can be seen in horrific numbers of deaths, destroyed lives and destruction of whole communities. OxyContin was promoted with big help from Purdue-funded Washington Deep State Zionist ‘think tank’, the American Enterprise Institute, which had many connections to the Project for the New American Century. A commentator described how ‘many hundreds of thousands of Americans have entered into a death spiral of addiction after being prescribed these drugs by doctors’. Purdue is offering compensation pay-outs of $12 billion which does not even nearly match the horrors that its drug has perpetrated. Addiction to drugs, alcohol, smartphones and all the rest is fuelled by despair and the need to escape from the life people are living as the Cult dismantles countries, lives, and psyches in pursuit of the Hunger Games Society. Opioid deaths have been sharply higher in American communities where Cult-owned vehicle-makers have closed their US plants and outsourced jobs to other countries where they can pay people less. This is ‘globalisation’ at work. The manipulated problem of homelessness is waiting for a solution that will advance the Hunger Games Society even further on behalf of the Cult and its Sabbatian-Frankist network. American website Politico reported that ‘the growing homeless encampments — which have led to a rise in human waste, trash and open-air drug dealing — have united unlikely allies’. They were talking about Republican Donald Trump and ultra-Zionist San Francisco Democrat state senator Scott Wiener. This guy cares, you see: ‘The crisis is so bad people’s minds are really opening up and the policies are shifting … Legislation that would have had no chance five or ten years ago can pass.’ Problem-Reaction-Solution. Wiener’s ‘solution’ is the forced internment of homeless people under certain circumstances (which the state would interpret) using the Orwellian term ‘involuntary commitment’. These ‘circumstances’ will be planned to constantly expand until it involves all homeless people. Julie Winter, mayor of Redding, California, has suggested that the homeless be put in a ‘shelter’ which they would not be allowed to leave until they ‘demonstrate self-sufficiency’. In other words she is talking about internment in a de-facto jail for the crime of being homeless. These may currently be isolated attempts at authoritarian laws but they will grow and not least because populations of towns and cities are going to be impacted more and more by the homeless crisis. The Cult doesn’t want a real solution. To these empathy-deleted, stone-hearted crazies, the homeless are a means to an end.

Guaranteed poverty and control

Figure 251: The fantastic mass-surveillance system in China in the process of coming to the West.

Another Cult agenda to exploit the plunge to the Hunger Games Society is a guaranteed income. When multi-billionaire New Woke professional frauds like Facebook’s Mark Zuckerberg support a ‘universal basic income’ you know it’s not what it seems. I have believed since childhood that there should be a level below which no one should be allowed to fall in a civilised society, but that is not what the Cult’s guaranteed or basic income plans are all about. The motivation is control . Billions and billions are planned to be forced into the lower reaches of the Hunger Games pyramid by manipulation of the financial system, giant corporations and hedge funds destroying communities and job opportunities, and by the utter devastation of employment with the AI takeover (this was again written even before the lockdowns). AI means still more money being transferred to ever fewer hands in that AI doesn’t get paid. Technology represents the most crucial factor in the creation of a Hunger Games world (along with the effects of lockdowns). One ‘solution’ to this ‘problem’ is the guaranteed income which will be guaranteed by whom and on what basis? Look no further than China for the answer. Cult-assets of the state will decide who gets what on the basis of acquiesce to the state. China is the fast-developing blueprint for the Cult control system. New Woke billionaires far from criticising China work to support its psychopathic dictators in the creation of the very system planned for the West and the rest of the world. One Chinese city alone has 2.6 million cameras and the country has a surveillance system that scans facial features to create a virtual map of the face in real time to be checked by AI against a state database (Fig 251 overleaf). The same system is fast coming to the West thanks to the Cult and its Silicon Valley multi-billionaire celebrity technocrats. ‘Smart’ technology (I’ll explain the real context in a later chapter) allows for constant mass surveillance and China’s communist/fascist (same thing) government is exploiting this potential for its ‘social credit’ system. This tracks the behaviour of the entire population and awards or deletes credits based on that behaviour. Do what the government wants and you gets credits; do what the government doesn’t want and they are taken away with major consequences. A government document in 2014 said the system is designed to ‘allow the trustworthy to roam everywhere under heaven while making it hard for the discredited to take a single step’. They are not kidding. By the end of 2018 the National Public Credit Information Centre revealed that Chinese courts had banned the purchase of plane tickets 17.5 million times and 5.5 million for train tickets for becoming officially ‘discredited’ (the fake ‘pandemic’ is being exploited to do the same in the West). Apply this to a guaranteed (tiny) income that would be paid only if you conform to what governments demand. That’s the real story behind guaranteed income and why One-percenter frauds and censors like Zuckerberg give it their support while promoting themselves as kind and caring. A small guaranteed income with no alternative way of earning money = the Hunger Games Society. A glimpse of how the China system is being introduced in the West can be seen with the Silicon Valley company Airbnb which is causing people to be thrown out of their permanent homes around the world as they are rented to tourists through Airbnb just as Silicon Valley’s Uber is destroying local taxi firms across the globe in its money-no-object business plan leading to autonomous taxis. Airbnb has developed technology to scour the internet and social media accounts to check potential renters for character traits. The company’s ‘trait analyser’ software employs artificial intelligence to give black marks to people ‘associated’ with ‘drugs or alcohol, “hate websites”, or sex work’ by ‘scanning keywords, images and video footage across the internet linked to a potential customer to assess their trustworthiness’. The programme assesses their ‘behavioural and personality traits’ including ‘conscientiousness and openness’ – see China’s social credit system.

Cult gun-grab

Figure 252: Police are looking and acting like the miltary because they are planned to fuse into a global police-military state.

This brings me to the middle section of the Hunger Games pyramid – the police/military state emerging before our eyes all over the world. Its role is to protect the One-percent from the Hunger Games masses and enforce the will of the One-percent upon the rest of humanity as per Hunger Games movies (see the lockdowns). The plan is to eventually fuse police and military into one force and we have the police looking more like the military with every passing year (Fig 252 ). Police officers are armed to the enamel on their teeth at the same time that constant pressure is being applied to disarm Americans even including those living in isolated homes with no chance of a swift police response. Is this a coincidence? Not a chance. I speak as someone who wishes there were no guns. I can’t stand them and I have never used one except to win – or not – a coconut at the fair; but we need to see the world as it is and not only as we would like it to be. If you have a heavily-armed Cult-controlled police and military and an unarmed population how is that going to end? It is such a cinch with today’s sophisticated mind-control techniques to program kids and others to go on shooting sprees in schools and shopping malls to increase the demand for gun confiscation. Do people really think that criminals and crazies won’t locate and use guns because the law says they should not? They are criminals and crazies for goodness sake. Are armed criminals more likely to attack a home where they don’t know if the occupants are armed or one where they know they are defenceless against their weapons? Ultra-Zionist multi-billionaire Michael Bloomberg, former Mayor of New York and failed Democrat presidential wannabe, is funding campaigns to target gun owners in a move that promotes the Cult agenda. The desire to remove guns from the law-abiding population cannot be divorced from the extraordinary level of surveillance now in place because it’s all connected. It’s the Totalitarian Tiptoe to a global Cult-controlled police-military world army state to impose the agenda of the Cult-controlled world government. China’s social credit system is only a glimpse at how extreme this is meant to be. Cult-owned Silicon Valley and associated Cult technology giants around the world in countries like China have constructed an immense and ever-expanding network of 24/7 surveillance in which your every action is logged and stored on databases planned to become one global database. You are watched and recorded by smart televisions, smart phones, smart personal assistants, cameras, increasingly with face-recognition, and through your every action online. The list is becoming endless. Smart streets with microphones in lamp posts are another development and the roll-out of 5G will expand the tracking and data-gathering potential by gigantic leaps. A beyond-Orwellian technological tyranny has been introduced so fast.

Open the borders

I have exposed Cult insiders over the years describing how they want to impose the ‘law of the jungle’ in which people are constantly in states of fear and anxiety and open to more Orwellian control to protect them from what they have been manipulated to fear. Part of the fear and chaos agenda is opening the southern border of America to psychopathic gangs arriving through Mexico such as MS-13 with its lovely motto ‘kill, rape and control’. Mexican drug cartels that have taken psychopathy and brutality to still new depths of depravity exploit the near-open border areas to flood America with drugs and they are major suppliers worldwide. Mexico is run by those cartels and law and order has basically been deleted. The idea is for the situation to get so bad that there will be an exodus of people into the US on such a scale from the south that it is unstoppable. Many who cross the border illegally give birth to children in the United States to secure them US citizenship in the knowledge that the rest of the family will then not be sent home. The number of so-called ‘anchor babies’ born to those living illegally in America was reported to be 372,000 in 2019 which was greater than US citizen birth rates in 48 states. Billionaire financier George Soros, part of the ultra-Zionist global network no matter how much he may try to hide that, is funding both the movement of illegal migrants into America and Europe and election campaigns of New Woke district attorneys across America who then refuse to prosecute illegal migrants, criminals (including killers) and decriminalise a list of offences. This is creating the ‘jungle’ that Cult insiders talk about. We can also see the real meaning behind this Bloomberg pledge: ‘I believe we can once again be a country that welcomes immigrants, values immigrants, respects immigrants, and empowers them to pursue the American Dream.’

Figure 253: The reason for mass migration of cultures and the obsession with seeing ‘racism’ everywhere and in everything. (Image Gareth Icke.)

Mass migration into Europe and the United States is a frontline Cult agenda to transform societies with the goal among many other things of creating conflict (divide and rule) between indigenous and incoming cultures (Fig 253 ). The Cult doesn’t give a shit about the migrants. They are just pawns in a game to secure the will of the same Cult that has bombed their countries and turned them asunder in places like Libya and Syria in the full-knowledge that it would start a trek to the north into Europe in search of safety. I am all for giving succour to migrants fleeing persecution and wars mostly of the Cult’s making via the West to create chaos and control. The point that needs to be made is the great majority of migrants are not fleeing war. They only want to get into Europe and the United States and if I were them I would want to do the same. Some perspective is urgently required, however, on what that means for European and American society. German newspaper Die Welt has conceded that most of the migrants arriving in Europe across the Mediterranean are not genuine refugees: ‘Contrary to popular belief, the majority of those arriving in Italy are not refugees … the main countries of origin for boat migrants in January 2020 were Algeria, Ivory Coast, and Bangladesh.’ Italian Interior Ministry figures suggest that large numbers are arriving from Tunisia, Algeria, and Turkey. Most of these people are not given asylum or refugee status but most stay in Europe anyway. Germany’s Federal Office for Migration and Refugees agreed that only a small fraction of failed asylum seekers from Africa had been deported and that most probably never will be. Those that are deported just come back. The time is planned when an unstoppable exodus of people will head into Europe and the United States from the south. I said in The Trigger that Turkey would at some point lift its ban agreed with the EU on migrants crossing its border into Europe and that would lead to potentially millions more migrants heading northwards. In late February, 2020, the Turkish government of the tyrannical President Erdogan said it would no longer hold back people from Syria and other countries who wish to go to Europe and seek asylum there. Turkish officials spoke of ‘opening the floodgates of migrants on Europe’. I’m not a prophet. I just know what the game is and that makes predicting events quite straightforward. Erdogan said the situation would continue until the EU renegotiated the deal and even if that happens the threat is ongoing. This tyrant is supposed to be ‘anti-Israel’, but somehow manages to promote the Israel-based Sabbatian-Frankist cult plans for both flooding European society with migrants and continuing the efforts launched by the ultra-Zionist Project for the New American Century to remove President Assad in Syria. Maybe he’s just confused, eh? I publish evidence in my last two books that Mustafa Kemal Atatürk, first president of the Republic of Turkey, was a Sabbatian-Frankist fake Muslim interloper.

None of this is a condemnation of migrants who are looking for a better life. It is simply laying out what the plan is. I have been warning about this agenda for many years since mass migration began and it went mainstream in 2020 when Hungarian foreign minister Péter Szijjártó warned that the (Cult-created-and-controlled) United Nations is funding a program of mass migration that threatens ‘the whole of humanity’. He told a United Nations conference in Vienna that the UN is funding agencies encouraging people to leave their homelands and head to western countries. Szijjártó was talking about the UN Compact on Migration passed in 2018 to press Western governments to assimilate ever more migrants from other cultures which then British MEP Janice Atkinson said could lead to Europe being faced with 59 million new migrants within a few years. Watch for criticism of mass migration and its consequences being criminalised as ‘hate speech’ to protect the cultural elimination policy from exposure. We are close already. The long-planned theme is confirmed by the UN document in 2001 called ‘Replacement Migration: Is It a Solution to Declining and Ageing Populations?’. This said that dealing with a declining population would mean potentially hundreds of millions of migrants heading for Europe. It estimated that Europe would need at least 159 million migrant workers to arrive by 2025 ‘to maintain the current balance of 4 to 5 workers for a pensioner’ with perhaps at the most extreme 1.4 billion migrants required by 2050 at an average of 25.2 million a year. At that time 1.7 billion migrants, or their descendants, would make up nearly three quarters of the total population of 2.3 billion. The document said that in the United States ‘it would be necessary to have 593 million migrants from 1995 to 2050, an average of 10.8 million per year’ and ‘by 2050, out of a United States total population of 1.1 billion, 775 million, or 73 per cent, would be post 1995 immigrants or their descendants.’ It is chilling in the light of this to watch Internet videos by ultra-Zionist and Sabbatian-Frankist extremists and ‘rabbis’ saying openly that they are using Islam to transform European society and destroy ‘Edom’ – Rome and Christianity. David Touitou, a ‘Rav’ or Hebrew ‘teacher/spiritual guide’, said: ‘You will have no place to run. Islam is the broom of Israel.’ These crazies say that the Jewish Messiah will only return when Europe and Christianity are ‘totally destroyed’ (see also the United States). Touitou, who is far, far from alone in his shocking extremism, said:

So I ask you. Is it good news that Islam invades Europe? It is excellent news! It means the coming of the Messiah who will rule the whole world from Israel … You will pay dearly for it Europeans. To such an extent you have no idea … You will have no place to run to. Because of all the evil you have done to Israel you will pay for it a hundredfold.

When Italy will be gone … when Edom (Rome) … when that place is gone, and that’s what Islam is going to go. Islam is the broom of Israel and you have to know it.

Figure 254:Mass migration of people and cultures into Europe and the United States is being driven by the Cult and its One-percent cheered on by the ‘Woke’ that claim to oppose the One-percent. Babes in bloody arms.

Once ‘Edom’ was gone the same insanity will turn its attention to destroying Islam and so on. See The Trigger for the detailed background to what is being orchestrated out of Israel by the Sabbatian-Frankist Satanists and you will see why the definition of ‘anti-Semitism’ is constantly being expanded and enforced by censorship through the Sabbatian-Frankist ‘Anti-Semitism’ Protection Racket to stop any of this being exposed and debated. The New Woke mentality funded by billionaires like ultra-Zionist frontman George Soros is keen for open borders while considering none of the consequences (which the Cult wants) for countries and their current populations including former migrants. They certainly don’t realise – except the inner core – that they are promoting a population transformation agenda directed by the One-percent. There is no rational contemplation of what must surely follow when all that matters to New Wokers is posturing their self-purity in a constant exercise of round-the-clock virtue-signalling. This New Woke mindset – or emotionset – is a perception-virus that first infested political parties supposedly of the ‘Left’ and then expanded into centre and even ‘conservative’ parties having long infected almost the entirety of the self-obsessed celebrity ‘Luvvies’ who fly first class or in private jets to and from their walled mansions to lecture the great unwashed on the urgency to save the planet from climate change, help the poor and needy, and oppose border walls like the ones they have around their own properties. Unchecked migration is a disaster more than anything – as usual – for the poor and unemployed and yet wonderful for the rich. Wages at the lowest end are driven down by competition from people amid a labour surplus willing to work for less and job opportunities are reduced. The rich meanwhile see their wage-bill fall and enjoy a limitless supply of servants and cleaners at very reasonable rates in their big houses (Fig 254 ). Black communities in America have been particularly hit by this predictable sequence and it’s happening in all countries with mass immigration. Billionaires benefit and the poor lose out thanks to an outrageous and transparent deception incessantly promoted by New Wokers who call themselves ‘social justice warriors’. If it wasn’t so tragic for those who take the consequences this claim would be comedy club territory.

Tiptoe-by-Tiptoe

The long-planned outcome is being brought about by a series of interconnected steps that generate a domino effect to impose the Cult’s transformation of Western society:

1) Manipulate wars in the Middle and Near East and support drug gangs and crime cartels to terrorise communities in Central and South America while financially trashing those societies to create a combination of extreme danger and deprivation.

2) You know that great numbers will seek to flee and with both the Middle and Near East and Central and South America you know they will head north into Europe and the United States.

3) Fund groups that will aid their passage and encourage far bigger numbers to join them in a piggy-back operation in which you assure them they will reach their ‘promised land’. George Soros networks have been centrally involved in this.

4) You instigate such a mass movement of people that your target countries are overwhelmed with the support of the Cult-created European Union and leaders like Cult asset Chancellor Merkel in Germany who opened her borders and said ‘let them all in’. The same happened in Sweden and the full force of New Woke Democrats in America cry ‘open the borders to everyone’. The Swedish Employment Service revealed that just 6.1 per cent of new arrival migrants were able to find full-time work not subsidised by the government in 2019. Migrants are only a means to an end.

5) Democrat-controlled New Woke city and state governments introduce ‘sanctuary cities’ to protect those who have crossed the border illegally from US Immigration and Customs Enforcement, or ‘ICE’, which you demonise and demand be disbanded.

6) Calls to build a wall or fence to secure borders are condemned as racist bigotry and Nazi ideology in a black and white fantasy that says all migrants are good and anyone questioning the numbers and their effect is automatically evil and must be silenced. Censorship is then provided by billionaire heads of Silicon Valley giants who promote their New Woke credentials from their corporate headquarters and walled mansions – ‘Make some tea, Sergio, and there’s still dirt on that floor’.

7) The often catastrophic consequences of these events for jobs, crime, and economics in countries such as Sweden and Germany are suppressed through a compliant gutless media and by attacking anyone speaking the truth as a bigot, racist and Nazi leading to vilification and lost employment. Observers with the same concerns stay quiet in fear of similar repercussions. In this way you silence dissent and give yourself free-rein to expand the influx and increase the consequences.

8) The point is reached – as now in Sweden – where the truth can no longer be hidden amid bombings, arson, murder and rape. Swedish Moderate Party leader Ulf Kristersson cited figures from the Crime Prevention Council about 230 bombings in 2019 alone as proof that the government had lost control of the country. By now it doesn’t matter with the job done and irreversible.

9) Even more extreme New Woke governments are elected, the floodgates open, the target society is transformed, and the Hunger Games structure installed.

Group protection

Figure 255: If you want the truth about the ‘Woke’ tyranny invert everything they say and claim to stand for.

What I am saying here is not a condemnation or mass-labelling of migrants. I want instead to expose the cold and calculated exploitation of often tragic people for political ends and the insanity of judging migrants and minorities en masse as groups and not through individual behaviour. Show me any racial, cultural, sexual or religious group and I will show you nice people, okay people and psychopaths – every time. Cult-programmed New Wokeness cannot process, or cope with, such basic subtlety. It sees only black and white racially and literally and inclusivity becomes exclusivity in that white is bad in totality and other shades are all victims of the bad white people. White supremacy and privilege extends to white homeless living amid the shit in San Francisco. My goodness, the billionaires behind New Wokeness know how to manipulate a mind. New Woke is another term for inversion – everything is inverted (Fig 255 ). The Cult New Woke agenda for the end of America in any form even close to what we have known is laid out in the Democrat-sponsored New Way Forward Act proposed by Mexican-born socialist Jesús García, a member for Illinois in the US House of Representatives. The bill would decriminalise illegal immigration and remove any disincentive for untold numbers to walk across the often weakly-defended border. Once in the US the bill would make it very difficult for illegal migrants to be deported and that goes even for violent criminals. The bill would open the way for those who have committed serious crimes in other countries to be allowed to settle in America. Immigration law and enforcement would basically disappear. What would be the point of border patrols when it’s not illegal to cross and those who do can’t be detained? Cable news host Tucker Carlson, who alerted the public to the context of the bill that was being virtually ignored by the New Woke media, said:

Under current US law, legal US immigrants can be deported if they commit an ‘aggravated felony’ or a ‘crime of moral turpitude’ – that is, a vile, depraved act, like molesting a child. Under the New Way Forward Act, ‘crimes of moral turpitude’ are eliminated entirely as a justification for deportation. And the category of ‘aggravated felony’ gets circumscribed too. What does that mean?

Consider this: Under current law, immigrants who commit serious crimes – such as robbery, fraud, or child sexual abuse – must be deported, regardless of the sentence they receive. Other crimes – less severe ones like racketeering – require deportation as long as the perpetrator receives at least a one-year sentence. But if this bill passes the House and Senate and is signed into law by the president, there will no longer be any crimes that automatically require deportation. None.

The minimum prison sentence under the bill for crimes that still require deportation would rise from one year to five and even then judges would be given the discretion not to deport. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) would have to convince a court that an illegal migrant was dangerous or a flight risk, but officers would be banned from quoting prior criminal behavior to prove this – including rape, child molestation and drug trafficking. Even more insane is the provision compelling the government to create a ‘pathway for those previously deported to apply to return to their homes and families in the United States’ if they would not have been deported under the new rules. It is a retrospective open border. Taxpayers would have to pay for the previously deported to be located and brought ‘back home’ from where they had been removed for criminality. To put this in perspective 480,000 were deported for illegal entry or re-entry into America between 2002 and 2018 and they would be eligible to ‘come home’. The bill has next to no chance of being successful before the scheduled 2020 election when it would have to be signed by Donald Trump and to do so would be electoral suicide. The bill does indicate, however, what would happen once New Woke came to power and confirms the Cult agenda to destroy America by setting criminals free to create mayhem and the domination of the strongest. For this open border plan with Mexico to be proposed by a Mexican-born US politician, Jesús García, shows that they don’t care if you see they have no integrity or have any wish to hide their intent. They are now quite happy to put that on public display. There is a chasm of difference between migrants seeking a better life for themselves and their family or fleeing from war and the psychopaths of America’s MS-13 and violent gangs in Sweden, Germany and France which terrorise once-peaceful communities. There is a gathering list of no-go areas in Sweden where police won’t go except in numbers and ambulance crews won’t go after migrant attacks. The response was to launch an initiative to recruit a ‘more diverse’ police force with ‘language and cultural competence’. This was soon in trouble when half the applicants failed the admission tests. Never mind – watch the admission criteria be reduced. Sweden’s top migration official Mikael Ribbenvik, head of the Swedish Migration Agency, went public to warn Swedes that their country was becoming a ‘safe haven for war criminals and potential terrorists’ with the government giving passports and benefits to suspected dangerous criminals that were protected by law from deportation (see the common theme). Ribbenvik said that other countries ‘have a hard time understanding how we consider people dangerous but still continue to give them passports and residence permits’. Once you realise that the idea is destroy white Swedish culture and turn its society into an arena of fear and might-is-right there is no longer any ‘hard time’ in understanding why such things are happening. Political correctness and ‘hate speech’ are smokescreens to stop this being openly discussed and exposed.

Figure 256: MS-13 are only ‘fleeing tyranny’ to impose a new one in the United States. What’s wrong with that you rascist?

Pakistani and Asian gangs raping and trafficking underage and teenage white girls in British cities were ignored by police and politicians who knew what was going on for years before officially coming to light and it’s still happening on an industrial scale. One girl was forced to have sex with 300 ‘men’ by the age of 15 in the northern town of Huddersfield. They are called ‘grooming’ gangs when rapists, psychopaths and child traffickers is what they are. They are brutal, sexist, racist, and everything and more that New Woke rails against – if you’re white. New Woke silence is deafening otherwise. Exposing these psychopaths challenges the mass immigration narrative and that is far more important to The System than shockingly abused young girls. Had they been white gangs and Pakistani girls the police would have been on them in an instant and quite right, but you see the systematic bias based on race which, of course, is blatant racism. ‘Grooming’ (rape) gangs are clearly still operating across the UK with new cases now regularly coming to light and how many more – far more – are not being caught? A leaked document from the French internal security service, the General Directorate for Internal Security, said that up to 150 communities in France are controlled, or ‘held’, by Islamist radicals. The document was classified to stop the information being known by the public and to protect the agenda. This is not how all migrants behave, the great majority do not. The fact is, however, that some do and political correctness is silencing their exposure and the scale of the problem. The El Salvadorian migrant gangs of MS-13 are terrifying communities in US cities with their signature savagery of dismembering people with machetes and their prime target is other migrants from El Salvador (one in three El Salvadorians now live in America). Donald Trump was furiously attacked by New Woke Democrats and media when he described MS-13 as ‘animals’. Chopping people up with machetes? Bless ‘em (Fig 256 ).

The more the merrier

There is clearly a policy of encouraging more migrants to cross the border illegally with moves to give them driving licences, the right to vote and free health care. At least tens of thousands, some claim far more, enter the United States on a visa and never leave. These policies are protected from scrutiny by making criticism of them increasingly illegal or a reason for censorship. There is a fundamental difference between those willing to respect the culture and traditions of countries they enter and cultural supremacists and bigots who seek to impose their society and prejudices on everyone else including migrant sharia police telling Swedish girls what they can wear. Those that have allowed this human disaster to happen in Sweden, Germany and elsewhere should be in a prison cell for crimes against The People and for The Cult. What does all this do collectively? It creates the very daily fear and anxiety that the Cult wants to impose everywhere. The House wins yet again. I have charted the mass migration agenda in other books back to at least the 1920s and those connected to the Habsburg and ultra-Zionist banking families behind the creation of the EU. I have quoted the extraordinarily accurate predictions of ultra-Zionist doctor and Rockefeller family insider Richard Day who told a meeting of paediatricians in Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania, in 1969 how the world was going to change across a wide range of subjects and all of which have happened or are happening (you’ll find a summary in Appendix 1 ). Day knew for the same reason that George Orwell knew 20 years earlier in his Nineteen Eighty-Four and Aldous Huxley knew in 1932 in Brave New World . If you are either part of the agenda (as with Day) or have access to the plan through research or contacts you can comfortably predict the ‘future’ because unless something intervenes to stop the plan it will play out. See my book Phantom Self for the detail of what Day said in 1969 which will take you aback in the light of what has happened since. He predicted among so much more the emergence of the Internet, the surveillance state, smart televisions, the plan to ‘make boys and girls the same’, clearing rural areas and forcing everyone into cities, and calculated mass migration to transform Western society. Lawrence Dunegan, one of the paediatricians present, took notes and in 2004 he recounted in audio interviews with an alternative website what Day said that night. Dunegan was prompted to do so when he saw the predictions were happening. He quotes Day as saying this in 1969 about the plan for mass migration:

There will be mass movements and migrations of people without roots in their new locations because traditions are easier to change in a place where there are a lot of transplanted people, as compared to trying to change traditions in a place where people grew up and had an extended family, where they had roots.

This is the real reason for mass immigration – to manipulate an infusion of people from other cultures that have no connection to the history and traditions on which target societies are founded. Those with a sense of nationhood will resist the deletion of nations and countries under a world government dictatorship and the more you dilute that sense of nation and culture the more you dilute that resistance. As older people die out and the young take over who know nothing except the current society the historical and cultural foundations fall and disappear. The manipulation and dilution of the indigenous sense of nationhood is further systematically undermined by denigration of the culture as we have seen so clearly in Sweden. This has included an advertisement by SAS, the biggest airline in Sweden, Denmark and Norway, promoting the belief that there is no Swedish culture and nothing ‘truly Scandinavian’. Swedish politicians supporting mass immigration and TV documentaries by the state broadcaster have said the same. SAS featured a black guy saying ‘We are no better than our Viking ancestors’ and the advertisement (propaganda) said everything considered ‘Swedish’ was a copied culture which came from foreign lands. Swathes of the public were outraged, but the theme will continue because it’s the Cult agenda. Something similar is emerging in America with Democrat politicians saying that migrants are ‘more American’ than Americans. The absorption of national sovereignty into superstates like the European Union is part of the same plan and explains why the same people who plotted in the 1920s to introduce the EU also plotted even then the mass movement of people that we have today (see Everything You Need To Know).

The takeover sequence

There is another sequence that follows in the overthrow of the indigenous culture in any country in the face of mass immigration. Not immigration at all – mass , basically open-border, immigration. First you have an influx from another culture that tends to gather in certain areas and transform their cultural nature. Members of the indigenous population move out into familiar surroundings. This has happened in the extreme in the East End of London where its cultural status has been utterly transformed in little more than a generation. I have seen this referred to as people losing their ‘cultural security’ in the face of the incoming culture or cultures. Next the numbers reach levels where how new culture communities vote decides who is elected to local councils and as Members of Parliament. At this point parties of Left, Right and Centre begin to pander to the new cultures with their election-deciding potential. At the same time they ignore and take for granted those parts of the wider community who would normally vote for them. I call this the ‘gimme vote’ and gimme voters get nothing from political parties – ‘they’ll always vote for us anyway’. The British New Woke pro-mass immigration Labour Party found in the 2019 national election that those days are now over as the kick-back after decades of ‘gimme’ exploitation of the white urban class demolished their support. New cultures become the focus as their numbers continue to rise. Politicians from incoming cultures start to be elected and eventually they become leaders with an ever-increasing body of support with new culture birth-rates far exceeding those of the indigenous culture. This is happening as Western women have children later or not at all in the ridiculous and encouraged assumption that this will save the world from ‘climate change’. Fertility rates for white women were down in every US state in 2017 according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) and the same is happening in countries like Germany. They have fallen below the rate needed for the population to replace itself. Pointing out these facts is not racism. It is to expose the agenda behind it and that affects us all no matter what your racial background and skin colour. London now has a white minority population as does my birth city, Leicester, with Birmingham, Britain’s second biggest city, going the same way. The transformation has happened in 50 years with the speed increasing. The BBC reported in 2018 on a study projecting university places which predicted that three in four London students will be from ethnic minorities by 2030. A British ‘journalist’ and self-proclaimed communist activist called Ash Sarkar, British-born of Bengali descent, pointed out in a 2016 video that the white population of London had fallen by 600,000 while non-whites had increased by 1.2 million. Her response to this was: ‘So yes, lads, we’re winning.’ She claimed she was joking (I don’t think so) when people were appalled by the remark, but it showed once again how we live in a two-tier system of political correctness. Had a white person said the same if the figures were reversed they would be condemned and banned in a fury of ‘racist, bigot, Nazi’ and Ash Sarkar with breathtaking hypocrisy would be leading the charge. To Sarkar white Britain is a racist society and in line with true New Woke orthodoxy only white people can be racist and not those of Bengali descent who describe the white population of London falling and the non-white increasing as ‘we are winning’. The bias and unfairness is transparent and systematic. Census projections in the United States predict that whites will be a minority by 2045 with Hispanics the next biggest group. If the One-percent-controlled New Woke mentality gets political power it will be much sooner. We should not forget that white people occupied the land that was once the domain of Native Americans and it is not the demographic change by itself that is the point here. It is why it is being systematically manipulated by the Cult and to what end and why white people are being so targeted.

Figure 257: Don’t reveal what he’s actually doing or you are an ‘anti-Semite’.

While this sequence of societal change unfolds any criticism or exposure of what is happening, any complaints from the indigenous population about their home areas being transformed into what is to them a foreign land, are dismissed and silenced by political correctness. New Woke thought police brand every dissenting voice as racist. They demand that people must be ‘non-judgemental’ (while themselves being constantly so) when in fact ‘non-judgemental’ is Orwellian code for having ‘no opinion’ outside the New Woke perceptual prison camp. The sub-text here is that if people are not allowed to criticise what people and the Cult are doing this automatically blocks all exposure of what is happening to enslave and manipulate the population. New Wokeness pervades the Cult-owned media to ensure PC reporting of events and government agencies are infused with Wokeness including the police as laws are introduced to make illegal any criticism of the impact of incoming cultures on the indigenous culture. Legitimate criticism is labelled ‘hate speech’. The cumulative effect eventually is that incoming cultures override and replace the original culture and legislation is passed to change the cultural basis on which the country is governed. It’s no good New Wokers shouting bigot at me for pointing this out which is ridiculous given my view of reality and the Oneness of everything. The sequence I have described is factually how it works and this has been made to happen by the Cult and its agents like war criminal British Prime Minister Tony Blair to serve its agenda for the cultural and racial transformation of Western Society. If people don’t like me speaking the obvious truth I have a finger that I will gladly put on public display.

Soros money

Figure 258: Have you thought this through, people? Have you thought at all? It seems not.

I have exposed billionaire manipulator George Soros in great detail in many other books including The Trigger and Everything You Need To Know (Fig 257 ). His global vehicle operating in 100 countries is the Open Society Foundations (OSF) to which he has given at the time of writing some $32 billion . OSF is dubbed an NGO, or non-governmental organisation, and these along with ‘think tanks’ are a major source of Cult manipulation and government policy. Note the giveaway name – Open Society. This is code for open borders and the end of countries and nations which just happens to be the goal of the Cult as I have been highlighting for 30 years. The Cult’s planned global structure requires an end to countries to make way for a world government overseeing superstates like the EU with regional entities replacing nations and countries. Maps of a regionalised Europe have come to light through the EU. People would be designated ‘global citizens’ and be subject to the impositions of an unelected global government run by ‘experts’ and technocrats directing the ‘Smart’ technological control grid. Making countries disappear means borders must disappear and this is the whole idea of what is happening. Without borders there can be no countries, individual value systems, or safety nets for the poor, disabled, sick and destitute – you know, all those things the New Woke social justice warriors claim to care about (Fig 258 ). Anyone just walks in to the land of a former country no matter what their background and attitudes and demands they are looked after; but by whom and with what? Very soon after open borders the game would be up. There would not be the money, jobs, housing, healthcare, ‘education’ for all those who would want them as hordes of people move in. I shake my head when I hear New Wokers demanding open borders and more spending on healthcare, housing, unemployment and schools. They have no self-awareness to see the obvious contradictions. New Woke is purely about virtue-signalling and not rational thought. Ask them if they could stop a jug running over while the tap was still on and they might say ‘of course, not’. Then they would call for open borders and more spending on healthcare, housing, unemployment and schools while believing that at some point there would be enough for everyone. No such point could ever be reached. The more you spend on healthcare, housing, unemployment and schools the even more would be needed to meet ever-increasing demand through ever-increasing numbers. Cabal asset Soros directs his tens of billions at all the facets of the agenda and funds Open Society operations to overthrow governments, control politicians and parties, impose the New Woke agenda, and encourage mass migration into Europe and the United States. He also bankrolled organisations in an effort to stop the UK leaving the European Union or at least in a way that could genuinely be called ‘Brexit’. Soros money from someone who lives in the United States and is not British was directed against Brexit. The sheer arrogance of it is mind-numbing. The Strategic Culture Foundation website detailed in a 2017 article the control that Soros has over the European Union:

It’s an open secret that the ‘Soros network’ has an extensive sphere of influence in the European Parliament and in other European Union institutions. The list of Soros ‘reliable allies’ has been made public recently. The document lists 226 MEPs from all sides of the political spectrum, including former President of the European Parliament Martin Schulz, former Belgian PM Guy Verhofstadt a major opponent of Brexit, seven vice-presidents, and a number of committee heads, coordinators, and quaestors. These people promote the ideas of Soros, such as bringing in more migrants, same-sex marriages, integration of Ukraine into the EU, and countering Russia. There are 751 members of the European Parliament. It means that the Soros friends have more than one third of seats.

George Soros, a Hungarian-American investor and the founder and owner of Open Society Foundations NGO, was able to meet with President of the European Commission Jean-Claude Juncker with ‘no transparent agenda for their closed-door meeting’, and it was pointed out how EU proposals to redistribute quotas of migrants across the EU are eerily familiar to Soros’s own self-published plan for dealing with the crisis.

The report is talking about ways to respond to the very migration ‘crisis’ created by Soros, his masters and his Open Society Foundations – Problem-Reaction-Solution. The European Center for Law and Justice revealed in 2020 that in the period 2009-2019 nearly a quarter of the judges on the bench of European Court of Human Rights have had strong links to the Soros Open Society Foundations or to organisations that he funds including Amnesty International which has received $100 million since 2010. The study found that some NGOs are so funded by the Soros networks that they are effectively wholly-owned subsidiaries. But there’s no conspiracy, George Soros is a shining light of unimpeachable virtue, and it is ‘anti-Semitic’ to say otherwise.

‘Soros Spring’ technique

Soros-funded groups have a particular role in manipulating protests against target governments to give the illusion of spontaneous ‘people’s revolutions’. If the Cult continually invades countries with military force the pattern will be clear and opposition will gather with each one. Instead the ideal is to manipulate the population in the country to overthrow the government as you hide in the shadows saying ‘Who, me? ’ Open Society place-people and agent provocateurs instigate the unrest and this is followed by thousands from the population who have no idea that it’s all a scam. Cult-controlled American and European governments then give public support to the protestors and demonise the country’s leader. This is often quite straightforward with so many psychopaths of all kinds that kill, terrorise and otherwise manipulate themselves to power in country after country. The Open Society Foundations of Soros were frontline players in the so-called ‘Arab Spring’ when protests across the Arab world removed governments and replaced them with military dictatorships as in Egypt and warring warlords trafficking children in open slave markets as in Libya. If the Soros network can’t overthrow a regime by protest alone American and European governments send in the bombers to finish them off under the PR cover of ‘saving the people from violence’ – by bombing them from the sky. Precisely this happened in Libya when the country with the highest per-capita income in Africa was bombed into the Stone Age by Cult-created-and-owned NATO. Countries targeted by Soros and US/NATO psychopaths happened to be the same ones demanded for regime-change by the Cult’s Project for the New American Century organisation founded in the United States by Sabbatian-Frankist ultra-Zionists that included the major players in the White House and Pentagon in 2001 when the Cult-orchestrated 9/11 gave them the excuse to start picking off the list. Another Open Society-manipulated overthrow was that of President Viktor Yanukovych in Ukraine in 2014 and was overseen by ultra-Zionist Victoria Nuland, Assistant Secretary of State for European and Eurasian Affairs at the US State Department, and the wife of ultra-Zionist Robert Kagan, co-founder of … the Project for the New American Century. More than 2,200 Open Society Foundation documents secured by the group DC Leaks reveal the manipulation of Soros and his lackeys including US policy toward Ukraine after the 2014 coup during the fake-liberal Obama administration. One document described the ‘New Ukraine’ as a key that ‘reshapes the European map by offering the opportunity to go back to the original essence of European integration’ (the plan for the tyrannical centralisation of power over the whole of European by Cult-controlled bureaucrats which explains why Soros sought to thwart Brexit). British academic Frank Furedi has personal experience of the arrogance, reach and agenda of the Soros network and exposed what he saw in a British national newspaper. He said he was a guest speaker at an event funded by a Soros foundation in Budapest, Hungary, where Soros was born. Furedi recalled:

It was later during lunch at a plush Budapest hotel that I encountered the full force of the arrogant ethos promoted by the Soros network of organisations. At my table I listened to Dutch, American, British, Ukrainian and Hungarian representatives of Soros NGOs boast about their achievements. Some claimed that they played a major role in the Arab Spring in Egypt. Others voiced their pride in their contribution to the democratisation of the Ukraine. Some bragged about their influence in preparing the ground for the overthrow of the Gadhafi regime in Libya. I sat quietly and felt uncomfortable with a group of people who so casually assumed that they had the right to play God throughout the world.

At one point, the head of the table – a Hungarian leader of a Soros NGO – asked me what I thought about their work. Not wishing to offend, I quietly remarked that I wasn’t sure whether the external imposition of their idea of democracy on the people of Libya was legitimate nor that it would work. Without a second’s hesitation, my interlocutor rounded me with the response: ‘I don’t think that we have the luxury of waiting until the Libyan people come with their own Jefferson.’

The overthrow of Colonel Gadhafi in the Soros foundation ‘people’s revolution’, and manipulation in other countries including Syria, led to the start of the mass movement of people out of the Middle and Near East and Africa into Europe aided by the same Open Society Foundations as you can read in detail in Everything You Need To Know where you will also see how Soros-funded groups are behind the attempts to relocate masses of people from Central and South America into the United States. Yet another Cult think tank was launched in 2018 called the New Center that campaigns for an amnesty for all ‘illegal aliens’ in the United States to allow them to stay permanently. The New Center is headed by William Galston of the Brookings Institute and … ultra-Zionist William Kristol, co-founder of the Project for the New American Century . The demands of the ‘New Center’ are supported to their DNA by the New Woke mentality funded to a pivotal extent by … George Soros . The Soros Open Society network officially left Hungary, the country of his birth, in 2018 after Prime Minister Viktor Orban’s government passed the ‘Stop Soros’ law to criminalise the organisation’s manipulation of the country (Fig 259 ). Others have seen through the Soros game with Russia banning Open Society activities as representing ‘a threat to the foundations of the constitutional system of the Russian Federation and the security of the state’.

Figure 259: The Hungarian government knows what the Soros game is and displayed these posters exposing his activities.

The defence-mechanism to stop exposure of Soros is that he is Jewish and any criticism of him must be ‘anti-Semitic’. This is the Anti-Semitism Industry and Protection Racket at work blocking legitimate investigation into anyone who is Jewish or Zionist purely because they are Jewish and Zionist. Is that supremacist or what? A whole new definition of ‘anti-Semitism’ is being introduced by governments and institutions around the world that includes criticism of Israel for the specific reason of expanding the definition to dub ever more information and opinion as ‘anti-Semitic’ to protect the Cult and its operatives from exposure. Is it really discriminatory to ask why 0.2 percent of the world population and two percent of the American population have so much power over politics, finance and censorship by the mainstream media and Silicon Valley? It is a very legitimate question in a society that values its freedom.

The Cult doesn’t want these questions asked because its Sabbatian-Frankist wing, which hates Jews, would soon be secret no more – not least to Jews. This would be a mortal blow when hiding behind and within the Jewish community is their essential cover. Few make these points or ask these questions for fear of being condemned as ‘anti-Semitic’. I don’t give a shit. I want the truth and if that means taking an onslaught of misrepresentation and abuse then so be it. For now the incessant intimidation of the non-New Woke population means that what the Cult wants the Cult gets and it will go on doing so until humanity stiffens its backbone and summons some self-respect.

We’d better do that fast – like now – before the chance is gone.

CHAPTER EIGHT

Why demonise the gas of life?

Belief can be manipulated. Only knowledge is dangerous – Frank Herbert

New Wokeness is a cult religion in every sense and its sub-section known as ‘human-caused climate change’ is most certainly so. Climate orthodoxy is a theology, a term which derives from two Greek words together meaning ‘the study of God’. In this case the ‘God’ is the Virtuous Self and the Devil is carbon dioxide (Fig 260 ).

Figure 260: The Climate Cult and its constituent parts like Extinction Rebellion are just another religion and tick every box. ‘Rebel for life’ means rebel for the One-percent. Like all religions the Climate Cult is a perception program to ensnare its followers. (Image Gareth Icke.)

Religions have an orthodoxy founded on unsupportable beliefs that include walking on water and virgin births and so does the Climate Cult. Religions label non-believers of these unsupportable beliefs as heretics and blasphemers and so does the Climate Cult. Religions have had inquisitions to demonise and silence such heretics and blasphemers and so does the Climate Cult. Religions dictate a narrative and tell followers to unquestioningly believe whatever it claims and so does the Climate Cult. Religions say that belief in the orthodoxy must be founded on faith and not facts and so does the Climate Cult. You must believe the crap spewed out by faith-based religions like Extinction Rebellion and the Climate Cult priesthood in the form of people like New York New Woke congresswoman Alexandria Ocasio Cortez or you are a ‘climate change denier’ (see heretics and blasphemers). Don’t question – believe . These methods are straight from the Cult manual for its ‘astroturf’ fake protest groups described by former CBS News investigative reporter Sharyl Attkisson:

Hallmarks of astroturf include use of inflammatory language such as ‘crank’, ‘quack’, ‘nutty’, ‘lies,’ ‘paranoid’, ‘pseudo’, and ‘conspiracy’. Astroturfers often claim to debunk myths that aren’t myths at all. Use of the charged language test well. People hear something’s a myth, maybe they find it on Snopes, and they instantly declare themselves too smart to fall for it. But what if the whole notion of the myth is itself a myth, and you and Snopes fell for that? Beware when interests attack an issue by controversialising or attacking the people, personalities, and organisations surrounding it rather than addressing the facts. That could be astroturf.

And most of all astroturfers tend to reserve all of their public scepticism for those exposing wrongdoing rather than the wrongdoers. In other words, instead of questioning authority, they question those who question authority. You might start to see things a little more clearly. It’s like taking off your glasses, wiping them, and putting them back on, realising, for the first time, how foggy they’d been all along. I can’t resolve these issues, but I hope that I’ve given you some information that will at least motivate you to take off your glasses and wipe them, and become a wiser consumer of information in an increasingly artificial, paid-for reality.

Questioning those who question authority is at the very core of Climate Cult and New Woke propaganda in general and both are drowning in astroturf fronts because they are a means through which human society is being transformed into a global dictatorship by the Cult as we’ll see in following chapters. In this chapter I want to first unpick the truly mendacious climate change narrative.

Cult doctrine and its many faces

Here are some archetypal traits of a cult: Unquestioning submission to leaders of the cult and what they insist you believe; those beliefs are the only truth; control cult members through the constant repetition and indoctrination of this orthodoxy; invoke an ‘us’ against ‘them’ mentality and claim that any outside challenge is ‘persecution’; salvation through association with the cult – only we can save the world by everyone doing what we demand; group think with pressure by the group to conform and target any individual with doubts; if doubters persist shun or expel them so they don’t pollute the group-think with legitimate questions; avoid critical thinking and ignore blatant contradictions in the orthodoxy; often impose a cult form of clothing or uniform so a cult member can be recognised purely by what they wear or what they do with their hair. All of these traits can be observed with the Climate Cult which has been funded and manipulated into existence by billionaires like George Soros (again) and decades of climate change indoctrination in the schools and universities. This has led to great swathes of whole generations believing utter baloney because that’s all they’ve heard. Climate Cult theology is founded on one of the most powerful forms of perception control – repetition of the orthodoxy at the exclusion of other views, opinions and information. Even Princeton professors who don’t accept climate hoax theology after a lifetime of expertise in climate science and the effects of carbon dioxide have their YouTube videos tagged to a Wikipedia page promoting the official lies (which goes without saying when Wikipedia actually exists to promote official lies). I typed in key words for YouTube videos that questioned climate change doctrine and the Wikipedia page parroting that doctrine was at the top of even that list. What a con job by this Cult propaganda operation YouTube owned by Google.

The Climate Cult demands that people ‘listen to the science’ when the Cult is anti-science. It’s not interested in allowing all scientific opinion and research to be heard in a spirit of openness and balanced understanding. The aim as with all New Woke agendas is to silence opposition and block open debate which they know they would lose. George Soros, a member of the United Nations High Level Advisory Group on Climate Change Financing, funds a list of organisations seeking to silence ‘denial’ of climate change orthodoxy. These include Avaaz (‘Voice’) which has been described as ‘the globe’s largest and most powerful online activist network’. It was established in 2007 by two other Soros-funded groups, Res Publica and MoveOn.org . Avaaz claims to have 55 million members with campaign teams operating in 30 countries and presents itself as a global grassroots operation working in pursuit of ‘people-powered politics’. It campaigns in 15 languages with a ‘core team’ on six continents and this Soros-funded group is leading a campaign to have Google-owned YouTube ban all information and opinions challenging the official propaganda about human-caused climate change. Avaaz (‘Voice’) doesn’t want others to have one. We have also had a Soros-connected Democrat Congressional committee (New Woke political wing) demanding that Google-owned YouTube censor videos that contain ‘climate misinformation’ which means challenging the official narrative. Fascistic committee members wrote to Google CEO Sundar Pichai to urge that YouTube stop ‘driving millions of viewers to climate misinformation videos every single day’. The contempt for freedom is extraordinary, but it suits the Cult agenda perfectly. Avaaz claims that ‘climate denial = death’ which is only another way of saying that if you can’t win a debate – ban it. ‘Grassroots’ Avaaz has a long record of campaigning for items on the Cult wish-list. It has helped Iranian protestors demanding the removal of the country’s government that the Cult has long worked to remove; supported a no-fly zone for Libyan military aircraft which allowed America, Britain and NATO to bomb the country and its people shitless without challenge and delete Colonel Gadhafi; supported the US-instigated ‘civil uprising’ against Cult-target President Assad in Syria and this was reported to include training activists and delivering $1.5 million of Internet communication technology to protesters. Avaaz claims to ‘unite practical idealists‘ to make the world a better place when its support for Western (Cult) actions against Libya and Syria alone played a part in the human nightmare that followed in a frenzy of death and destruction of the innocent. All those countries were on the September, 2000, list of targets named by the ultra-Zionist Sabbatian-Frankist Project for the New American Century.

To those who trust Avaaz I would suggest a call to Naivety Anonymous. To those who trust George Soros I would say don’t waste a call – even they can’t help you. How could anyone if you believe that a man who has caused financial mayhem for whole populations by targeting their currencies for financial gain is funding ‘progressive’ ‘people-power’ groups from the kindness of his heart. The best of luck finding that, by the way. Soros has also funded groups behind the worldwide Friday school ‘climate strikes’ fronted by the Climate Cult’s Greta Thunberg who has copyrighted the terms ‘school strikes for climate’ and ‘Friday’s for future’. America’s Media Research Center, a non-profit conservative media watchdog, reported that at least 22 activist groups listed as partners in the Global Climate Strike received almost $25 million from Soros through his Open Society network between 2000 and 2017. They included Fund for Global Human Rights, Global Greengrants Fund, 350.org , Amnesty International, Avaaz, Color of Change and People’s Action. Has the penny dropped yet Green movement? Unfortunately probably not, but maybe it will when we get to why human-caused climate change is being hoaxed. A major funder of Extinction Rebellion is Sir Chris Hohn who heads one of the world’s biggest hedge funds valued at multiple billions. The UK Mail on Sunday revealed the fund’s investments in companies at the centre of environmental scandals. Everywhere the Climate Cult and New Woke have a remarkable ability to attract billionaire sponsorship and support. Amazon’s mega-billionaire Jeff Bezos announced in early 2020 that he would spend $10 billion on ‘fighting climate change’ by funding ‘scientists, activists and non-governmental organisations (see Soros) through a new ‘Bezos Earth Fund’. It was still more confirmation that human-caused climate change is a One-percent hoax. Bezos picked up the script and said the climate was changing faster than had been predicted. ‘Those predictions were bad but what is actually happening is dire’. Bloody yawn. He said that Amazon was ordering 100,000 electric delivery vehicles from Michigan-based, Amazon-invested Rivian, which again is straight from the Cult agenda. To underscore the power of programming hundreds of Amazon workers, who face losing their jobs to ‘climate-friendly’ (it’s not) AI, had protested that Bezos was not doing enough about climate change. Manipulate the serfs to demand that you do what you want to do anyway (it happens all the time). The Climate Cult works to silence the ever-growing list of scientists worldwide who can see that climate change orthodoxy is mendacious nonsense. They are demonised, targeted in the courts, denied access to the media, and their careers and income disappear. By contrast those self-proclaimed ‘scientists’ prepared to sing from the song-sheet (the ones Bezos will support) are constantly wheeled out by the Cult-owned media and can dip their snouts in an almost unlimited trough of protection money – money to protect the lies.

The cult (literally) of New Woke climate celebrity

Once belief in the orthodoxy is secured in the mainstream it becomes ‘cool’ to support that orthodoxy. If you are a virtue-signalling celebrity it’s a must to build your own image and support-base. New Woke is ‘in’ while not being New Woke can be the death knell for a career in the media, entertainment and comedy. It’s the same technique that controls scientists. Say what we want and you get a stack of money or tell your truth and we’ll destroy you. Do you want lots of likes on Facebook or a Twitter storm? As a result we have a lengthening list of celebrity arselickers proclaiming Climate Cult orthodoxy of ‘Thou Shalt not fly’ while heading in private jets to climate conferences and protests. In the case of virtue-signal world champions like actor Leonardo DiCaprio this involves taking private jets to receive climate protection awards. Celebrities are used by the Cult for their public platform to spread the message while almost every one of them won’t have a clue who is really pulling their strings and why. Britain’s Prince Harry and his American wife Meghan Markle constantly virtue-signal their climate change New Wokeness while being driven in limousines to private jets and telling others to reduce their ‘carbon footprint’. Isn’t that hypocrisy? No, no – I said you must reduce your footprint, not me . Harry’s contribution to saving the planet has been limited to the New Woke posturing of making a speech in bare feet. Put your shoes on, mate, or you’ll hurt your feet on the tarmac when you leave. The couple announced in January, 2020, they were ‘stepping down’ as ‘senior royals’ and heading for Canada. Part of this will involve super-Woke Markle being able to publicly promote her virtue-signalling super-Wokeness (including climate change theology) while Harry follows behind doing what he’s told and apologising for being a white male. New Wokers supported the move because the pair are New Woke while the now hijacked original Left would have been exposing their unearned privilege, opportunism and narcissism. Oh, how the Cult is going to exploit them both – and make them very rich – to promote the climate change and New Woke agenda. Their first big, big pay-day came with a ‘speech’ to the assembled mega-rich One-percent fake Woke at a JP Morgan Chase event in February, 2020, for which they were reported to be paid between $750,000 and $1 million. JP Morgan Chase is America’s biggest bank and the world’s sixth biggest with assets of $2.6 trillion. Here we have fake Wokers selling their souls to speak for big bucks to other fake Wokers with limitless pockets whose investments have done so much to devastate the environment and create widespread inequality and injustice. The hypocrisy and lack of self-awareness of these royals-on-the-make is chilling.

Figure 261: Sad, real sad.

The ‘royal’ couple, said they were seeking to become ‘financially independent’ which means exploiting their royal connections and privilege to make lots of money and freeing Markle from her royal restrictions to stay out of party politics. Now she can campaign for the New Woke agenda including all the demands of the Climate Cult which she and her husband appear to ignore at every turn. Prince Harry was caught on tape by two Russian pranksters thinking he was talking to Greta Thunberg. The result was toe-curling and absolute confirmation that he just repeats the climate hoax script word-for-word without a thought of his own. How Woke and aware Markle really is can be gleaned by her closeness to the Clintons, particularly Hillary, one of the most corrupt partnerships on Planet Earth. We can expect the royal private jet passengers to be even more vocal now in support of the Climate Cult and every last facet of New Woke while living their own life in the ‘privilege’ that New Woke claims to despise. The System will give them every support. American TV host Tucker Carlson accurately described celebrity climate New Wokeness as ‘the theology of the private jet class’. Meanwhile we are told that the rest of us will soon be flying in planes (as a stepping-stone to not flying at all) that fly together in V-shape formations like migrating birds to save fuel and CO2 emissions by reducing air resistance like racing cars that get close to the one in front. As someone who has experienced what happens to a plane when it gets too close to another and is twisted by the air turbulence I can’t wait. Swedish Climate Cult goddess Greta Thunberg has been used to promote the Swedish term ’flygskam’, or ‘flight shame’, to pressure people to stop flying (except the private jet class). The shame that Thunberg will feel when she realises the scale on which she has been manipulated does not bear thinking about (Fig 261 ). She and the Climate Cult have created a situation so crazy that the UK’s University of Derby introduced ‘climate anxiety classes’ for staff and students worried about the planet and the eco-system. The university said the classes are aimed at dealing with feelings of anger, guilt and grief and combatting their ‘sense of loss’. I mean – pinch me. One student said the ‘climate emergency’ made her feel she ‘isn’t going to have a future’. Oh, congratulations Greta and your handlers. Well done you. Dr Jamie Bird, university deputy head of health and social care research, said people suffer ‘climate grief’ when they see what they are losing. They are not losing anything except their bloody minds. Despite incessant public indoctrination great numbers of people can see through the garbage, but most are frightened to say so for fear of the backlash and consequences. Perhaps, however, we saw a turning point in 2019 when narcissistic, self-obsessed Extinction Rebellion protestors were pulled off the roofs of London Tube trains by commuters who just wanted to get home after a day’s work. They’d had enough and rightly so. We’ve all had enough.

Monumental mendacity

A key component of mass indoctrination is the sheer scale of deceit which the Nazis described in terms of the bigger the lie the more will believe it. Lie a little bit and you may get caught out on the basis that people are open to smaller-scale lies. What most resist are the ginormous super-whoppers pedalled by the Cult. Okay, people say, they might lie here and there to support climate change orthodoxy, but they wouldn’t lie about the whole shebang would they? Oh yes they would and they have and they are. They lie both about the individual components of the climate hoax and about the hoax in its entirety. I’ll explain why shortly. In fact, the entirety of the hoax is the totality of the individual hoaxes. The Cult seeks to protect this fact from exposure by silencing and demonising dissenters to ensure only one version is ever heard by most people. The foundation of the hoax is the ever-repeated claim that ‘the science is settled’ when it is absolutely not and becomes less so by the day. Pedro Sanchez, acting prime minister of Spain, reached still new levels of ridiculous when he said: ‘Only a handful of fanatics deny the evidence.’ He’s talking about an ever-increasing list of experts in their fields worldwide who are exposing climate change orthodoxy as the claptrap that it is. All Sanchez and almost every other politician will have heard is the official version ultimately emanating from the Cult through The Web and they repeat that orthodoxy as solid-gold unquestionable truth. This is what teachers and academics are doing with their daily indoctrination of the young to believe in climate change mendacity. You don’t want to indoctrinate the kids? Then find another job and we’ll replace you with someone who will. It’s the programmed programming the next generation of programmed. Once the orthodoxy is established as accepted reality political leaders and parties compete with each other (with a few exceptions) over who will do the most to ‘fight’ a problem that doesn’t exist. To question the climate change religion is political suicide especially on the New Woke ‘Left’ and those who have seen through the hoax zip their mouths as they seek election. The Cult knows that from the moment it secures official belief in the ‘conventional wisdom’ about any subject the dominoes will begin to fall right across society with all institutions making decisions and introducing laws on the basis of that flawed and manipulated ‘wisdom’. The climate change hoax is such a wonderful example. The official narrative is taught in the schools and universities, promoted by the mainstream media and infused into the law of the land while dissenters are silenced, abused and demonised. No wonder that narrative has become accepted ‘truth’ among those who don’t question. I am no supporter of Donald Trump for many reasons, but at least he has spoken out against climate orthodoxy while others cower or believe what they’re told.

In support of ‘the science is settled’ baloney we have the associated lie about 97 percent of climate scientists believing that humans are the main cause of climate change (a climate that is always changing and has been since the Earth was formed). I saw Jonathan Bartley, co-leader of the Green Party for England and Wales, parroting this deceitful figure on a BBC programme while he berated the BBC for allowing ‘climate deniers’ to appear. I was a national spokesman for the UK Greens for a short time in the 1980s when it still campaigned for freedom of speech and wider environmental issues before it was completely hijacked by New Woke. Even the establishment Wall Street Journal has debunked the 97 percent claim. When you track back to where it came from, and on what basis, this figure being cited as fact by those who wish to sell the orthodoxy is ludicrous. Al Gore just pulled the figure out of nowhere and subsequently the most quoted source is John Cook, ‘Climate Communication Fellow’ for the Global Change Institute at the University of Queensland who is not a climate scientist. He just promotes the official story. I have read many articles explaining how Cook examined 11,944 papers by climate scientists and found that 97 percent agreed that humans were the main cause of ‘warming’. This is not the case at all. In his own words Cook writes that 32.6 percent endorsed human-caused warming (though very few as the main cause) while 0.7 percent rejected that and 0.3 percent were uncertain. Now here’s the most important figure … 66.4 percent expressed no position . I see it claimed again and again by the Climate Cult and the media that 97 percent of climate scientists say humans are the main cause of climate change when even by Cook’s flawed methodology the figure refers only to those who expressed a view and not the scientists in totality. One study of Cook’s figures found that only 64 of the 11,944 papers – (0.5 percent ) – said humans are the main cause of global warming and nowhere was mentioned terms such as ‘crisis’ or ‘emergency’. Even if you apply this to the 3,974 papers that did express a view the figure of 64 pointing the finger at humans as the main culprit plays out as 1.6 percent . A later study of Cook’s source papers found that in fact only 41 of the 64 papers endorsed the view that humans are the main cause of warming. That’s 41 out of 11,944 . Where does the 97 percent of climate scientists agree come from? They made it up like they have made up virtually everything else. Science is about evidence not a show of bloody hands from song-sheet scientists with their nose in the climate trough and nor is it about fiddling temperature figures to support your case because the actual temperatures don’t do that. This has been exposed over and over and if you are telling the truth you don’t need to manipulate the data. How many people know that US Senator Timothy Wirth admitted they even manipulated the temperature of the room when NASA scientist James Hansen really kicked off the global warming scare at a Senate hearing in 1988? Wirth said:

… We … went in the night before and opened all the windows, I will admit, right? So that the air conditioning wasn’t working inside the room and so … when the hearing occurred there was not only bliss, which is television cameras in double figures, but it was really hot …

… So Hansen’s giving this testimony, you’ve got these television cameras back there heating up the room, and the air conditioning in the room didn’t appear to work. So it was sort of a perfect collection of events that happened that day, with the wonderful Jim Hansen, who was wiping his brow at the witness table and giving this remarkable testimony …

Senator Wirth also said:

Believe it or not, we called the Weather Bureau and found out what historically was the hottest day of the summer. Well, it was June 6 or June 9 or whatever it was, so we scheduled the hearing that day, and bingo: It was the hottest day on record in Washington, or close to it. It was stiflingly hot that summer. At the same time you had this drought all across the country, so the linkage between the Hansen hearing and the drought became very intense.

You can see that from the start the climate change hoax was not about facts, but manipulating perception to believe a fantasy.

You were saying?

Figure 262: Al Gore, the One-percent gofer to sell the lie.

Hansen’s dire claims that day more than 30 years ago have not happened and it’s the same with long-time Cult asset Al Gore who became the global sales-pitcher for the Big Lie and has made a fortune from being so (Fig 262 ). Gore said in 2006: We have ten years to save the planet (big-time wrong); the Arctic will be ice-free by 2014 (big-time wrong); the Gulf Stream will slow down (it’s been speeding up); polar bears are in danger of becoming extinct (big-time wrong); sea levels will rise by 20 feet in the near future (big-time wrong). Read some of my other books and you’ll see the background to Gore who has a personal carbon footprint the size of Godzilla. He was a vice-president to Bill Clinton and you don’t get that job if you have any inclination whatsoever to tell the truth. The Cult controls the Nobel Peace Prize, which is why so many Cult-asset war-mongers and mass killers have been recipients, and it also dictates Oscar winners whenever that would promote the agenda. Gore, you will not be shocked to know, was handed both awards for lying about climate change and frightening the life out of whole generations of children and the young. Prince Charles said in 2009 that we had twelve years to save the world from irretrievable climate and ecosystem collapse (big-time wrong) and with extraordinary idiocy he claimed that climate change was the ‘root cause’ of the Syrian conflict which was actually triggered by terrorists funded and armed by the United States and Gulf State allies like Saudi Arabia. Here are some other climate and environmental catastrophe warnings that turned out to be utter crap around the period that the annual Earth Day was established in 1970 :

Harvard biologist George Wald:

‘Civilization will end within 15 or 30 years unless immediate action is taken against problems facing mankind.’

American biologist Paul Ehrlich:

‘The death rate will increase until at least 100-200 million people per year will be starving to death during the next ten years.’

Peter Gunter, a North Texas State University professor:

‘Demographers agree almost unanimously see 97 percent of climate scientists agree on the following grim timetable: by 1975 widespread famines will begin in India; these will spread by 1990 to include all of India, Pakistan, China and the Near East, Africa. By the year 2000, or conceivably sooner, South and Central America will exist under famine conditions … By the year 2000, thirty years from now, the entire world, with the exception of Western Europe, North America, and Australia, will be in famine.’

Then there was the climate temperature prediction in 1970 from ecologist Kenneth Watt:

‘The world has been chilling sharply for about twenty years. If present trends continue, the world will be about four degrees colder for the global mean temperature in 1990, but eleven degrees colder in the year 2000. This is about twice what it would take to put us into an ice age.’

The threat to human existence went from an ice age to runaway super-heating in the blink of an eye. How could that happen? They just changed the propaganda. The lies are constant and apparently without end.

Make-it-up mythology

Figure 263: The Medieval Warm Period began around 1,000 years ago when temperatures were warmer than today without industrialisation. Then came the Little Ice Age when freezing temperatures were the winter norm which makes temperature comparisons between that period and now utterly irrelevant.

Figure 264: Depiction of the frozen-over River Thames during the Little Ice Age.

Figure 265: The correlation between solar activity measured by sunspots and Earth temperature. It is an obvious comparison and connection which the Climate Cult ignores because it destroys the narrative. The ‘Maunder Minimum’ corresponded with the coldest point of the Little Ice Age.

Figure 266: Another sunspot-Earth temperature chart.

We hear claims about the ‘hottest day ever recorded’ and even when you factor out manipulated data the key word is recorded . Many times this will be deleted in headlines to read ‘hottest day ever’. Some background before I make my point. The planet has been hotter for much of its life than it is today and there was the Medieval Warm Period that began around 1,000 years ago which eclipsed current temperatures when there were no factories or 4 x 4s or indeed any carbon producing vehicles at all (Fig 263 ). The warm period was also a time of abundance compared with cold periods. Grapes were grown for wine in the far north of England and even Scotland. There was, in short, no climate catastrophe. Temperatures began to cool and previous abundance disappeared in what is called the Little Ice Age between the 16th and 19th centuries (some say it started earlier). It was so cold in this period they held ice fairs on the River Thames in London which froze over every year. Some Christmas cards still depict the scenes (Fig 264 ). It was highly significant that during the Little Ice Age fantastic explosions of energy on the Sun known as sunspots, which indicate solar activity, all but disappeared. This is known as the sunspot ‘Maunder Minimum’ after the man who conducted the research studies (Fig 265 ). You don’t think there could be a connection between Sun activity and Earth temperature do you? There can’t be, surely, or the Climate Cult would mention the Sun sometimes instead of being utterly obsessed with carbon dioxide. Maybe they think it’s just a coincidence that when the Sun comes out it gets warmer; or perhaps they think that when solar energy projected at the Earth increases this couldn’t possibly affect our temperature (Fig 266 ). They are experts after all. Scientists at CERN recorded an extremely close correlation between Earth temperature and the penetration of cosmic rays into our atmosphere. Records of ‘the hottest day/year since records began’ started mostly as we were still coming out of the Little Ice Age and of course temperatures are going to be warmer now. What use is a comparison between an extremely cold period and one after that period ended? It’s a pointless comparison unless you are trying to mislead which they are. Why would the trough-snout scientists of the Climate Cult seek in leaked emails and documents to delete from the record the existence of the Medieval Warm Period and make it appear that today’s temperatures are ‘unprecedented’ and caused by the industrial era? To mislead, of course, and people mislead to hide the fact that they’re lying. Here are some other climate propaganda myths:

• The migrant crisis is caused by climate change lowering crop yields that force people to relocate in search of food: This has been alleged to explain why so many are heading out of Central America to the United States border and supports the Cult migration agenda which I have described. In fact, crop yields in Honduras, Costa Rica, Mexico, Panama, Ecuador, etc., have been consistently increasing.

• Climate change will empty the North American Great Lakes: This is shown to be without substance by all-time recorded high water levels and no downward trend over 100 years. These high volumes were reported with the question: ‘Why are water levels on the Great Lakes fluctuating so widely?’ How about through misrepresentation of the trend?

• Climate change will mean ever-greater extremes of weather such as tornadoes and hurricanes: Strong tornadoes and devastating landfall hurricanes have been steady in number or in decline in recent decades according to peer-reviewed scientific literature that says the same about droughts, floods, and other extreme weather events. The worldwide death rate caused by weather events has dropped more than 98 percent since the 1920s.

• Polar bears are heading for extinction as climate change makes their ice habitat disappear: Polar Bears became the poster children of the Climate Cult as a symbol for a terrifying future. Polar bear specialists like Dr Susan Crockford, former adjunct professor at the University of Victoria in Canada and a forensic zoologist, demolishes the official narrative in her book, The Polar Bear Catastrophe That Never Happened . Indeed she destroys the polar bear hoax so well that she lost her role at the university in what she described as ‘an academic hanging without a trial, conducted behind closed doors’. This is what happens when you challenge Climate Cult orthodoxy.

Figure 267:You can always bet on the BBC’s David Attenborough parroting (appropriately) the official narrative.

Crockford shows how polar bears are flourishing and communities are either stable or increasing. Polar bears in part of the Barents Sea increased by 42 percent between 2004 and 2015; in Baffin Bay where bears were predicted to decline by 25 percent they increased by 36 percent; and in Kane Basin they more than doubled. The global average had risen to more than 30,000 bears which Crockford says is ‘far and away the highest estimate in more than 50 years’. Crockford exposes the BBC’s climate change propagandist David Attenborough for misleading the public on polar bears and much else in an Internet video Attenborough’s Arctic Betrayal (Fig 267 ). Greta Thunberg said she became an activist on climate change after watching reports of polar bear decline that isn’t happening. The same BBC of course gave her a TV programme (program) to promote her propaganda.

• Images show belching chimneys pouring out ‘dangerous’ carbon dioxide: CO2 is invisible to the human eye and what they are showing you is pollution and not CO2 which is the gas of life and without it there would be no plants and so no humans or animals (Fig 268 ). They show you pictures of pollution to make you believe that carbon dioxide is a pollutant. Most of the ‘journalists’ who do this don’t know the difference themselves in yet another exercise in the blind leading the blind.

Protecting make-it-up mythology

How could a hoax based on so many lies become accepted fact in the minds of so many – especially the young – and drive much of government policy? The hoax has been possible by control of information to indoctrinate a belief system underscored by the fear that ‘we’re all going to die’. I’ve said that once you implant the orthodoxy of ‘everyone knows that’ the rest follows largely unaided. Older people are more sceptical of the climate claims because they’ve not had a lifetime of climate propaganda in the schools and universities. The young have and it’s clear why many children and young people believe the lie pedalled through all Cult institutions of government, ‘education’, and crucially the media. Unless people seek out information beyond the Mainstream Everything they live in a one-track world. Without alternative sources of information the population is only being told what the Cult wants them to think. Pictures of distressed polar bears have been explained as the consequences of ‘global warming’ when the cause of their distress and emaciated state were later revealed to have had other origins unrelated to climate. Show a bear in trouble and say it is climate change and most people believe that to be true when it fits the narrative they have already been suckered to believe in. I read an excellent book by American meteorologist and weather forecaster, Joe Bastardi, a vehement and outspoken exposer of the climate lie. He describes in The Climate Chronicles how he has studied weather patterns going way back to show that weather now being blamed on human-caused climate change has happened in a recurring sequence long before the industrial era. The difference is that before the climate hysteria the same weather was just weather. Today it’s always caused by global warming (which became ‘climate change’ when temperatures stopped rising and then the ‘climate crisis’ as the scare was ramped up). It’s so easy to be scammed if people don’t check the facts. We have a hurricane – it’s global warming!; tornado – it’s global warming!; drought – it’s global warming!. It’s hot – it’s global warming! It’s cold – it’s global warming! Bastardi calls them Climate ambulance chasers. He says: ‘What happened before naturally is happening again, as is to be expected given the cyclical nature of the climate due to the design of the planet.’ Bastardi presents many examples of these cycles now blamed on human activity and this is one relating to droughts in the United States:

… Major US dry periods are a product of a cooling tropical Pacific. In the decades such as the 1950s through the 1970s, when the tropical Pacific is cooler overall, the US is drier than normal in much of the nation.

It is exactly the opposite in the years the Pacific warms, which, by the way correlates nicely to an increase in global temperatures until the atmosphere adjusts to the warming tropical ocean and temperatures level off. But the idea that global warming causes droughts here in the US is the opposite of the facts! It’s when the Pacific starts to cool and global temperatures start to drop that we see it dry out.

Bastardi’s book is highly recommended as is The Politically Incorrect Guide to Climate Change by Republican insider Marc Morano who charts the blatant political manipulation behind the climate hoax. A good website for hoax-challenging information is the Global Warming Policy Foundation at thegwpf.com . We should not forget that all the projections upon projections about climate Armageddon don’t come from observing the climate. They result from putting data and assumptions into computer models and believing what they tell you is going to happen. The fact that they have been wrong by shocking margins so many times might have given them a clue by now that this doesn’t work due to a simple cause and effect: If you factor in shit the computer will process that shit to produce ‘predictions’ that are nothing more than a feedback loop of shit-in and shit-out. Assume something with your input and you’ll get the answer you want, but rarely the truth. There are so many variables and influences that affect climate that long-term predictions are a mug’s game anyway. Follow the cycles that have happened before if you want to predict the climate. There’s another angle to this that we should be constantly vigilant about. Technology to manipulate weather is now highly-advanced and there would not be international treaties agreeing not to manipulate weather if it was not technologically possible to do that. See Everything You Need To Know for detailed background about how extremes of weather can be made to happen and we can expect the Cult to continue to strike in this way around the world to convince people climate disaster is at hand.

The gas of life

Figure 269: Carbon dioxide is the gas of life and the natural world’s version of oxygen. I know – let’s demonise the gas of life and transform society into the global centralised tyranny to make sure we have less of it.

The Cult takes facts and inverts them to become the very opposite of the truth before selling the inversion as ‘conventional wisdom’. This way the public perception of reality becomes the opposite of actual reality. We are told we face ‘catastrophe’ when if what the Climate Cult demands are followed through we will have a real, not imagined, human catastrophe in economics, food production and energy supplies (this was written before the ‘virus’ lockdowns which have had the same effect). Global society would be devastated by plans to be ‘carbon neutral’ by 2025 to 2030 or 2050. There can, however, be no better or more blatant example of inversion than carbon dioxide (CO2) itself. This is the gas of life without which we really would all be dead and yet CO2 has been thoroughly demonised (Fig 269 ). If it was human it could sue for libel. You’ll find interviews at Davidicke.com with professors at Princeton University emphasising both the central role played by carbon dioxide in human life and that far from having too much in the atmosphere we don’t have enough . This will be amazing to people who have bought the carbon-is-a-pollutant narrative and it reveals the scale of inversion that we are dealing with. William Happer, Professor of Physics at Princeton University and long-time government advisor on climate, is one scientist who says the planet has a CO2 deficiency and needs more for optimal plant growth and food production. Such views have made him a big hate figure for the Climate Cult as the truth always does. He says that most of the warming in the last 100 years happened as we emerged from the Little Ice Age and was over by 1940. Happer points out that in a peak year for warming in 1988 there was a ‘monster El Nino’ which is a natural and cyclical warming of the Pacific that affects global weather patterns and temperature and has nothing to do with ‘climate change’. He says the nature of the CO2 effect can be likened to painting a wall with red paint. Once two or three coats have been applied it doesn’t matter how much more paint you add the wall will not get much redder. He explains that almost all the effect of the rise in CO2 has already occurred and the amount in the atmosphere would now have to double for even a single degree increase in temperature:

I know a lot about CO2 compared with most climate scientists … there’s an interesting thing about CO2 which is unique to CO2 – it’s not true, for example, of water vapour, methane. This is that if you get one degree of warming from doubling CO2, so going from say 400 parts per million for simplicity to 800 … then to get another degree of warming you have to double 800, you have to go to 1,600. So it gets harder and harder to warm. Technically they call that the logarithmic dependence of temperature rise on CO2 concentration.

Happer said that this fact was realised early in the climate hysteria and to overcome such a demolition of the orthodoxy we had advocates of the hoax inventing theories about ‘feedback loops’ amplifying the CO2 effect. These are the doom-laden predictions that you constantly hear parroted by climate activists including Greta Thunberg. Happer said he laughs when he hears about ‘carbon pollution’ given that people, plants and animals are made of carbon and without it there would be no life. He said that an increase in CO2 in the atmosphere would make plants more drought resistant because when plants open holes in their leaves to absorb CO2 they leak water and the holes have to be open for longer to take in enough carbon dioxide amid what he calls a ‘CO2 famine’. Happer emphasised that CO2 increases since industrialisation have had a ‘huge effect’ on plants and increased their growth: ‘When people talk about the social cost of carbon it’s absurd. The social cost is negative of CO2.’ He said climate computer models don’t look at the world as it is, but at other computer models . How much funding would the modellers get, by the way, if their predictions did not support the Climate Cult hypothesis? Imperial College in London which has produced many of the ridiculous ‘climate change’ models was also responsible for the computer models warning of insane numbers of ‘Covid-19’ deaths in the UK, United States and other countries which led to the lockdowns that have destroyed the lives of billions. Needless to say the insane ‘projections’ did not materialise, but provided the excuse for global house arrest.

Too much CO2? We don’t have enough

The central importance of CO2 was a theme developed by Greenpeace co-founder Patrick Moore in a presentation to the Global Warming Policy Foundation. Scientist Moore left Greenpeace in 1986 and has criticised the green movement for scare tactics and disinformation with particular emphasis on climate change. He makes the point that other scientists have made about how dangerous it is to have low levels of CO2. Plants start to die at 150 parts per million and Moore says that even when CO2 fell to 180 ppm 18,000 years ago plants began to starve. This only turned around when the temperature went up for reasons I will shortly explain. Calling for a reduction in carbon dioxide is the plant equivalent of humans demanding a reduction in oxygen – CO2 is, in effect, plant oxygen. Today Moore says CO2 stands at around 400 ppm and plant life is still ‘relatively starved of nutrition’ with the optimum levels for plant growth five times higher at 2,000 ppm and in some periods of the Earth’s history the ratio has reached 4,000 ppm. These facts explain why since CO2 levels began to rise with industrialisation the Earth is getting greener as CO2 has risen from 280 ppm in an 1880 measurement in Hawaii to 413 ppm in 2019. The Climate Cult that claims to be ‘saving the planet’ wants to reverse that process! Why do they think people pump extra carbon dioxide into greenhouses?? The Climate Cult contends amid its mass-hysteria that we face extinction when the gas of life is at way below optimum planet-growth levels and 500 million years ago there was 17 times more CO2 in the atmosphere than we have today. Patrick Moore said levels have been falling for hundreds of millions of years as it was absorbed from the atmosphere and locked away by many and various sources. Over the last 150 million years CO2 levels in Earth’s atmosphere had reduced by 90 percent . By the time humans began releasing carbon dioxide through fossil fuels Moore said we were at ‘38 seconds to midnight’ in terms of threats to plant life (thus all life) through plummeting levels of CO2. Not only aren’t humans causing extinction they are preventing it. ‘Release of CO2 has turned around the constant fall’, Moore said, and in this sense ‘Humans are the Earth’s salvation’. Moore also noted that only half the CO2 emitted by fossil fuels ends up in the atmosphere. You read these facts about the fundamental importance of CO2 and then hear as I did an interview with ‘carbon footprint expert’ Mike Berners-Lee, a professor at the Institute for Social Futures at the UK’s Lancaster University, and brother of Tim Berners-Lee who is credited with inventing the World Wide Web. The interview was on the London-based TalkRadio in which Mike Berners-Lee told an unchallenging host how emails add to carbon emissions and that ‘a low-carbon world is better than a high-carbon world’. Breathes deeply, shakes head, moves on. Some other information in Patrick Moore’s speech that the Climate Cult should know: The Earth has been in a major cooling period since the maximum of 50 million years ago when it was as much as 16 degrees warmer. Today’s poles were ice free and covered in forests. The ancestors of today’s species came through that temperature period fine, but a two percent rise is now supposed to threaten mass extinction! Even in our current interglacial period we are experiencing one of the coldest climates in the Earth’s history. The Medieval Warm Period (long before fossil fuels) was still cooler than temperatures in the last 10,000 years, Moore said.

Temperature doesn’t follow CO2 – it’s the other way round

Figure 270: CO2 is a tiny fraction of greenhouse gases which are almost entirely water vapour and clouds. What’s more the great majority of that CO2 is naturally-occurring and nothing to do with humans.

Oh, Climate Cultists may say, higher CO2 might be better for plants, but it will cause the Earth to heat catastrophically. I mean, Greta Thunberg says we should believe that our house is on fire and she wouldn’t mislead us, right? Well, if she has been mercilessly mislead herself I think she probably would. In fact, temperature rises don’t follow increases in CO2 – it’s the other way round as the records clearly show. In the last 400,000 years CO2 has lagged temperature by an average of 800 years. As Patrick Moore rightly says carbon dioxide cannot be the cause of rising temperature when the increase in temperature comes before the increase in CO2. How can the effect come before the cause? It can’t. So here’s a shocker for New Wokers … temperature must be affecting CO2 levels and not vice-versa. Here we have yet another classic Cult inversion of the truth. How could temperature increase CO2? The ocean contains 45 times more CO2 than we have in the atmosphere and the ocean releases carbon dioxide in warm periods and absorbs it in colder periods. The lag between the two is around 800 years and look what was happening 800 years ago …. the Medieval Warm Period . Carbon dioxide does not cause the Earth to catastrophically warm. The history of CO2 correlation with temperature shows that for immense periods the two have been completely out of kilter. Temperatures have risen and remained high as CO2 went down. Carbon dioxide is also only 0.117 percent of what are called greenhouse gases while more than 90 percent of those gases are water vapour and clouds (Fig 270 ). Only a fraction of that 0.117 percent is CO2 caused by human activity and the rest happens naturally. Professional conman Al Gore tried to obscure this fact by saying that if you ‘take water vapour out of the equation CO2 is 30 percent of greenhouse gases’. Don’t buy a used car from that man or even a new one. How can you ‘take water vapour out of the equation’ when that together with clouds makes up close to the entirety of greenhouse gases? To deceive – that’s how. Calculated demonisation of CO2 is so transparent. Professor Leslie Woodcock, Emeritus Professor at the University of Manchester, fellow of the Royal Society of Chemical Engineering, a recipient of a Max Plank Society Visiting Fellowship, and former NASA researcher, said:

Water is a much more powerful greenhouse gas, and there is 20 times more of it in our atmosphere, around one percent of the atmosphere, whereas CO2 is only 0.04 percent. Carbon dioxide has been made out to be some kind of toxic gas, but the truth is that it’s the gas of life. We breathe it out, plants breathe it in and it’s not caused by us. Global warming is nonsense.

British scientist James Lovelock was a one-time Green icon with his Gaia theory of the Earth as a living entity (true). He became even more acclaimed by climate alarmists when he predicted in his book The Revenge of Gaia that ‘billions will die’ and humanity was doomed. Lovelock wrote that any survivors would have to live in the Arctic which would be one of the few habitable places on Earth. Then reality dawned and to his enormous credit he had the courage to publicly change his mind. Humanity was not in imminent peril after all. Lovelock now says that climate alarmism is not ‘remotely scientific’, computer models are unreliable and anyone who tries to ‘predict more than five to ten years is a bit of an idiot’. A single volcano can make more difference to global warming than humans ever could, he has stated. He accuses the Greens of exaggeration and behaving ‘deplorably’. Weather Channel founder John Coleman has said human-caused global warming is a myth and the list of scientists saying the same is getting longer by the week. Such honesty often comes at a cost, however, in the form of lost jobs and income. Dr Judith Curry, a respected climatologist and tenured professor at Georgia Tech University, left her ‘dream job’ when she refused to pledge unquestioning obedience to the Climate Cult. She told Fox News:

I’ve been vilified by some of my colleagues who are activists and don’t like anybody challenging their big story … I walk around with knives sticking out of my back … In the university environment I felt like I was just beating my head against the wall.

Curry is a target of an establishment-promoted ‘climate advocacy group’ called Skeptical Science which operates a ‘blacklist’ of scientists who won’t comply with Climate Cult orthodoxy. Dana Nuccitelli, one of the principals of Skeptical Science, wrote of Curry: ‘If you look at the statements we cataloged and debunked … it should make her unhirable in academia.’ Judith Curry is a former chair of the School of Earth and Atmospheric Sciences at Georgia Tech and a Fellow of both the American Geophysical Union and American Meteorological Society. She was only ‘unhirable’ because the Climate Cult made it so. Curry was asked to step down by her university for her views on climate and had ‘numerous inquiries from academic headhunters encouraging me to apply for major administration positions, ranging from Dean to Vice Chancellor for Research’. She didn’t even make the shortlist. Curry said in a Forbes interview:

They thought I was an outstanding candidate, looked excellent on paper, articulated a strong vision, and interviewed very well in person. The show stopper was my public profile in the climate debate, as evidenced by a simple Google search.

Figure 271:Refuse to sing from the song-sheet and you’re gone.

Google is so helpful in ensuring that Skeptical Science is on the first page and sometimes the top listing for a word search for Judith or Judy Curry. This is the tyranny that genuine academics and scientists are facing from the Climate Cult in all its forms. Who created Skeptical Science? John Cook , the Australian bloke most quoted about ‘97 percent of climate scientists’ agreeing that humans are most responsible for climate change when his ‘research’ doesn’t say that at all. Small world, eh? Those that don’t accept climate change orthodoxy are labelled ‘anti-science’ when questioning every hypothesis is what real science is all about. It’s the Climate Cult that is anti-science (another inversion). French television weatherman Philippe Verdier was fired by the France 2 channel for publishing a book accusing ‘climate experts’ of misleading the public and the Cult-controlled UN Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change of publishing deliberately misleading data (Fig 271 ). What he said is true and he was sacked because it is true. Programmed New Woke trade union members at the station demanded he was dismissed. Verdier wrote his book after French Foreign Minister Laurent Fabius asked TV meteorologists to highlight climate change issues in their broadcasts. ‘I was horrified by this speech,’ Verdier said.

Cult narrative: humanity is the enemy

Figure 272: An academic promoting the end of humanity. She is teaching young people, right? Wow. Her extreme of extreme views are fine with Woke. It’s when you say men and women are biologically different that you trigger their ire.

Greenpeace co-founder Patrick Moore is a scientist who says the Greens have abandoned science and replaced it with emotion and sensationalism based on an ‘anti-human’ agenda that paints humanity as the enemy of the Earth. If you are a Death Cult targeting humanity would you not want them to believe that they were the problem? Wouldn’t you want them to despise themselves and turn against themselves? You surely would. We breathe out carbon dioxide and even the act of breathing is harming the planet – ahhhhh!!! Humans are deadly. We must kill them. A vegan father-of-four voiced this anti-human mentality when he called a UK radio station to say humans shouldn’t breed to produce more offspring to ‘harm animals’. He urged people to encourage a ‘graceful ending of our time on the planet’. The caller, who gave the name ‘Danny’, said he had recently discovered ‘anti-natalism’ – ‘the idea that we shouldn’t be breeding humans when it causes so much unnecessary suffering to animals, especially people who bring up children to eat meat’. Should we then not allow animals to breed when they cause so much harm to each other in the killing fields that are the ‘natural world’? ‘Danny’ said there was nothing wrong with human extinction and admitted that he tells his nine-year-old son and older daughters to question their own reproduction and whether they should be here in the first place. ‘I don’t want grandchildren, and I don’t want them to impose life on another generation for no good reason.’ He’s not psychologically damaged or anything and this is not in any way psychological abuse of his children. These views may seem seriously extreme, but the guy is far from alone and they are just the attitudes you want to engender when you are a Death Cult led by unseen ‘gods’ that wish to replace humanity as we know it today (more later). It would be easy to dismiss an anonymous caller to a radio station if what he said was not being promoted by academics such as Patricia MacCormack, a professor of continental philosophy at Anglia Ruskin University in Cambridge. She argues in her book, The Ahuman Manifesto , that ‘the only solution for climate change is letting the human race become extinct’ (Fig 272 ). This was the headline in an interview with MacCormack in which she set out a ‘positive view’ for the future of Earth without humans. She said she came to these conclusions through her interest in feminism and ‘queer theory’ and railed against ‘this hierarchal world where white, male, heterosexual and able-bodied people are succeeding, and people of different races, genders, sexualities and those with disabilities are struggling to get that’. Well, best get rid of everyone then.

MacCormack further argues that we need to dismantle religion while clearly not realising that she is a member of one. She said that humans are already enslaved to the point of ‘zombiedom’ (oh, the irony) by ‘capitalism’ and because of the damage this has caused ‘phasing out reproduction is the only way to repair the damage done to the world’. This is straight from the Cult agenda for a mass human cull as will become clear and she will be utterly oblivious to that. The realisation that such mentalities are teaching young people is very sobering while at the same time explains so much about where New Woke is coming from.

To summarise what Patrick Moore has said, and what I have observed for decades, the Green movement that he and I remember has been hijacked by New Woke and real environmental issues are being marginalised and sacrificed on the altar of global warming. We have the obsession with ‘climate change’ while genuine pollution increases, including radiation pollution, and US Green New Deal promotor Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez represents a district awash with trash in the streets. I am so glad I was briefly a national spokesman for the Green Party in the 1980s. It has given me such an insight into the mentality that drives the tyranny of the New Woke Climate Cult today. Moore brings sanity to the debate when he says that carbon dioxide is a building block for all life on earth and without its presence in the global atmosphere in sufficient concentrations this would be a dead planet. He says that all life is carbon-based including our own and he describes carbon dioxide as ‘the currency of life’ and the most important building block for terrestrial life. ‘Yet today our children and our publics are taught that CO2 is a toxic pollutant that will destroy life and bring civilisation to its knees.’ Once again if you were a Death Cult with humanity in its gunsights wouldn’t you want them to believe that what keeps them alive threatens their existence? Wouldn’t you want them to dismantle what gives them life? What a testament to the programming of human perception that so many believe this absurdity to their core.

Climate Cult veganism – not so simple

We have a perfect system in which humans breathe in oxygen and breathe out carbon dioxide (how dare we?) while plant life and trees absorb carbon dioxide and produce oxygen during the day by converting sunlight, carbon dioxide and water into carbohydrates and oxygen in a process called photosynthesis. The Sun, like carbon dioxide, is obviously essential to life on Earth and notice that both are being targeted. We are encouraged to fear the Sun through the climate hoax on the grounds that it generates heat (while not presenting the Sun as a source of global temperature!) and we are urged to cover our skin with cancer-causing chemicals in sun lotion when the skin turns sunlight into the essential vitamin D so vital to human health. This process of synthesising sunlight into vitamin D is achieved through cholesterol in the skin cells – the same cholesterol that is also vilified as we are urged to ‘lower your cholesterol’ and take ongoing, health-destroying statin drugs to do so (ka-ching say the Big Pharma tills). We are told by officialdom that LDL cholesterol, or low-density lipoproteins, is ‘bad cholesterol’ and can cause heart disease. To save ourselves we should take statins. A global team of 17 doctors published a study of nearly 1.3 million people in 2018 that concluded there is no link between high LDL cholesterol and heart disease and that statins were, with serious understatement, of ‘doubtful benefit’. The study, published in the Expert Review of Clinical Pharmacology , exposed the demonisation of cholesterol and reported that heart attack patients were shown to have lower than normal levels of LDL or ‘bad cholesterol’. Professor Sherif Sultan, one of the authors, said the ‘strongest finding’ was elderly people with high levels of LDL live the longest. The big rule of thumb to remember: If ‘The System’ is pushing something it’s bad for humanity. If it is targeting something it’s good for humanity. It works every time. The highest concentration of cholesterol is in the brain – 20 percent of the body total. The brain is 60 percent fats and without cholesterol it cannot function effectively. This explanation comes from Psychologytoday.com :

Synapses – the magical areas where communication between brain cells takes place – are lined by cholesterol-rich membranes responsible for passing neurotransmitters like serotonin, GABA, and dopamine back and forth. Myelin, the white matter that insulates brain circuits, is made from tightly-wound membranes containing 75% of the brain’s cholesterol.

Cholesterol also helps guide developing nerve endings to their destinations on ‘lipid rafts’. If the brain is too low in cholesterol, its membranes, synapses, myelin and lipid rafts can’t form or function properly, bringing all brain activity – including mood regulation, learning, and memory – to a screeching halt.

We are witnessing soaring numbers of people with forms of dementia. Is this a coincidence? No, it’s not. There are other reasons for this, too, but if you significantly lower or eliminate cholesterol and fat consumption this is what happens. Check the facts for yourself. Every vegan and vegetarian should read for their own sake the book by David Evans called Low Cholesterol Leads to an Early Death: Evidence from 101 Scientific Papers . There are also the books of Barry Groves including Trick and Treat: How healthy eating is making us ill . I am not saying vegans and vegetarians should change their lifestyle – that’s none of my business. I am saying check the facts first and you won’t get them only by reading mainstream sources. Is it still another ‘by chance’ that the Climate Cult (a stooge of the Death Cult) is demanding a major decrease (ideally the elimination) of meat consumption with its mega sources of cholesterol and fats? The theme is being promoted by pathetically-named documentaries such as Apocalypse Cow: How Meat Killed The Planet fronted by Guardian ‘journalist’ virtue-signaller and fast-asleep New Woker ‘vegan’ George Monbiot who bizarrely shot a deer on the programme and ate it as a burger. Go figure. I understand why vegetarians and vegans choose not to eat animal products and I absolutely respect the intent. I was a vegetarian myself for some 15 years. It is not, however, that simple. Firstly vegans and vegetarians might consider that all life is conscious including the plants they eat themselves. I have written a number of times over the years about research revealing how plants and trees feel pain and stress which can even be generated by the tone of voice and someone’s intent towards them. When people ‘talk’ to plants it generates a wave interaction with the frequency field of the voice and this is picked up by the plant. They may not understand human words, but they pick up the ‘vibe’. A team of scientists at Tel Aviv University published a study in 2019 revealing that tomato and tobacco plants emitted multiple ultrasonic ‘stress’ sounds between 20 and 100 kilohertz when deprived of water or their stems were cut. Plants with no environmental threat or damage emitted less than one ultrasonic sound per hour. Many other experiments have confirmed the theme – plant life is conscious and feels forms of emotional pain and stress when threatened. What does a tree feel when it is cut down? What do other trees feel when it is well established that trees operate in ‘families’ and communicate?

There is no consumption of food in higher frequencies and these moral dilemmas do not arise. Within the simulation there is such density and a comparative deficit of energy that the difference is made up by consuming ‘physical’ food which is really wavefields. I wish that didn’t have to be, but the point to remember is that everything is conscious. We are told that meat eating must end to protect animals when animals eat each other second by second. It is the way the simulation is set up to be a killing field. Animals eat each other to secure the sustenance they need to survive and biologically humans have the same basic make-up and nutritional requirements. We may wish it was different, okay, agreed. But for now that’s how it is. Animals that provide the basis for human food will, of course, disappear altogether as a consequence of what is being demanded by a few imposing their lifestyle choice on everyone else. The meat industry is going to be subjected to full-blown demonisation and financial attacks to secure the desired Cult outcome by claiming it is ‘not sustainable’ – I’ll explain the real significance of ‘sustainable’ in the next chapter. Vegans should make their choices as they see fit and have those choices respected. I just wish the same respect came the other way and self-righteous vegan activists didn’t act like another cult with its deep connections to the Climate Cult which is largely the unknowing puppet of the Death Cult. By all means campaign for animals to be treated humanely – I’m with you – but please open your eyes to what you are being used to bring about. I am not telling people what they should eat. I am saying look at the pattern and how the climate hoax and other excuses are being used to target carbon dioxide, sunlight and cholesterol which, without sufficient quantities, there would truly be extinction. I find the same perceptual arrogance at the extreme end (not everyone) of those who contend that the Earth is flat. If people want to believe that then good luck to them I say. Unfortunately the same respect often doesn’t come the other way. If you don’t accept what they claim you are subject to attacks and dubbed an agent of the elite – even those who have spent their lives exposing the elite and who do more to that end in a month than ‘flat Earth’ extreme obsessives will do in a lifetime. The Earth is ‘flat’ in a sense at the level of its wavefield construct or ‘interference pattern’. Its holographic decoded projection called the ‘physical’ Earth is quite something else. Those who see this differently have every right to do so and I won’t call them agents of the elite just because they believe something that I don’t. Why do so many people insist that what they believe must be accepted by everybody? This book is my view and research. I don’t insist for a second that people have to believe it if it doesn’t make sense to them.

The Cult is exploiting the climate change hoax to pressure people to be vegan and that should start alarm bells ringing. I can tell you after tracking these people for 30 years that they do nothing without intent to harm humanity and if they want the population to be vegan it’s for a reason that benefits the agenda. Some schools are imposing vegan food and banning meat including one in Sweden where preschool teacher Markus Sandström said: ‘The more we thought about it, the better it seemed … sustainable development is our starting point and the meat has a great impact on climate.’ Sandström doesn’t know what he’s talking about. He’s just repeating what he has been programmed to believe so he will pass on that programming to children and enforce it in this case. This is what teachers are there to do from the Cult’s point of view. Vegetarian and vegan diets imposed by schools is a gathering trend with a school in Oxford, England, banning children from bringing their own packed lunches if they are not meat and fish free. We see yet again how the New Woke and climate tyranny works. It is not about winning arguments with freely-debated facts; it’s about imposition. Head teacher Kay Wood said that the move allowed them to serve better quality meals for the same price. Okay, so explain how that scans with banning packed lunches brought from home. How would price be significant when the school is not paying? Who says they are better quality meals when many nutritionists have the opinion that meat and fish are essential to a balanced intake of what the body and brain needs? Who is Ms Wood to make those decisions about what children can eat and its effect on their well-being? A second reason she cited was the yawn, yawn, ‘huge environmental and sustainability benefits’ as she once again repeated the Cult script while not knowing there even is a Cult. Reason number three was that banning meat ‘allows students of all faiths and different dietary requirements to eat together’. She wouldn’t be able to see the deeper consequences of this which is imposing one set of beliefs on everyone. Why wouldn’t you justify that to yourself when I am right. One parent at the school said banning meat and fish had made her children and other pupils hungry, but none of this matters – I am right . A UK property company Igloo Regeneration has decreed that all corporate entertaining and catering must be vegetarian and meals including meat cannot be reimbursed on expenses after they bought the same lie as the schools. They certainly won’t be the last and watch this theme expand because it’s a Cult agenda. There is pressure to introduce meat taxes and we even have people taking neighbours to court for the smell of their barbeques. I am right has spoken and you will comply! Why should you have choice when you are wrong ? There are many lovely vegans who understand this defence of basic freedom. I’m sure others will be cocking their abuse ready to fire. If you want self-righteous abuse by the truckload tell an extreme vegan activist that the world is not as black and white as they think it is. You will see as we go along what the endless references of ‘sustainability’ really mean although these teachers won’t have a clue what that is. They are just repeaters like the entire system in all its forms – repeating the Totalitarian Tiptoe agenda of the Cult like a broken record while thinking it’s true. Where the delete-meat Cult agenda is really going, via veganism, is to laboratory-produced synthetic food for reasons I will be explaining.

So the gas of life is being demonised to provide the foundation of the religious orthodoxy promoted by the Climate Cult and all its associated offshoots like changing what people eat. The next question is why the global Death Cult would go to such lengths to convince us that humans are threatening the planet’s very existence of the world we have come to know. The answer is both clear – and devastating.

CHAPTER EIGHT

Why demonise the gas of life?

Belief can be manipulated. Only knowledge is dangerous – Frank Herbert

New Wokeness is a cult religion in every sense and its sub-section known as ‘human-caused climate change’ is most certainly so. Climate orthodoxy is a theology, a term which derives from two Greek words together meaning ‘the study of God’. In this case the ‘God’ is the Virtuous Self and the Devil is carbon dioxide (Fig 260 ).

Figure 260: The Climate Cult and its constituent parts like Extinction Rebellion are just another religion and tick every box. ‘Rebel for life’ means rebel for the One-percent. Like all religions the Climate Cult is a perception program to ensnare its followers. (Image Gareth Icke.)

Religions have an orthodoxy founded on unsupportable beliefs that include walking on water and virgin births and so does the Climate Cult. Religions label non-believers of these unsupportable beliefs as heretics and blasphemers and so does the Climate Cult. Religions have had inquisitions to demonise and silence such heretics and blasphemers and so does the Climate Cult. Religions dictate a narrative and tell followers to unquestioningly believe whatever it claims and so does the Climate Cult. Religions say that belief in the orthodoxy must be founded on faith and not facts and so does the Climate Cult. You must believe the crap spewed out by faith-based religions like Extinction Rebellion and the Climate Cult priesthood in the form of people like New York New Woke congresswoman Alexandria Ocasio Cortez or you are a ‘climate change denier’ (see heretics and blasphemers). Don’t question – believe . These methods are straight from the Cult manual for its ‘astroturf’ fake protest groups described by former CBS News investigative reporter Sharyl Attkisson:

Hallmarks of astroturf include use of inflammatory language such as ‘crank’, ‘quack’, ‘nutty’, ‘lies,’ ‘paranoid’, ‘pseudo’, and ‘conspiracy’. Astroturfers often claim to debunk myths that aren’t myths at all. Use of the charged language test well. People hear something’s a myth, maybe they find it on Snopes, and they instantly declare themselves too smart to fall for it. But what if the whole notion of the myth is itself a myth, and you and Snopes fell for that? Beware when interests attack an issue by controversialising or attacking the people, personalities, and organisations surrounding it rather than addressing the facts. That could be astroturf.

And most of all astroturfers tend to reserve all of their public scepticism for those exposing wrongdoing rather than the wrongdoers. In other words, instead of questioning authority, they question those who question authority. You might start to see things a little more clearly. It’s like taking off your glasses, wiping them, and putting them back on, realising, for the first time, how foggy they’d been all along. I can’t resolve these issues, but I hope that I’ve given you some information that will at least motivate you to take off your glasses and wipe them, and become a wiser consumer of information in an increasingly artificial, paid-for reality.

Questioning those who question authority is at the very core of Climate Cult and New Woke propaganda in general and both are drowning in astroturf fronts because they are a means through which human society is being transformed into a global dictatorship by the Cult as we’ll see in following chapters. In this chapter I want to first unpick the truly mendacious climate change narrative.

Cult doctrine and its many faces

Here are some archetypal traits of a cult: Unquestioning submission to leaders of the cult and what they insist you believe; those beliefs are the only truth; control cult members through the constant repetition and indoctrination of this orthodoxy; invoke an ‘us’ against ‘them’ mentality and claim that any outside challenge is ‘persecution’; salvation through association with the cult – only we can save the world by everyone doing what we demand; group think with pressure by the group to conform and target any individual with doubts; if doubters persist shun or expel them so they don’t pollute the group-think with legitimate questions; avoid critical thinking and ignore blatant contradictions in the orthodoxy; often impose a cult form of clothing or uniform so a cult member can be recognised purely by what they wear or what they do with their hair. All of these traits can be observed with the Climate Cult which has been funded and manipulated into existence by billionaires like George Soros (again) and decades of climate change indoctrination in the schools and universities. This has led to great swathes of whole generations believing utter baloney because that’s all they’ve heard. Climate Cult theology is founded on one of the most powerful forms of perception control – repetition of the orthodoxy at the exclusion of other views, opinions and information. Even Princeton professors who don’t accept climate hoax theology after a lifetime of expertise in climate science and the effects of carbon dioxide have their YouTube videos tagged to a Wikipedia page promoting the official lies (which goes without saying when Wikipedia actually exists to promote official lies). I typed in key words for YouTube videos that questioned climate change doctrine and the Wikipedia page parroting that doctrine was at the top of even that list. What a con job by this Cult propaganda operation YouTube owned by Google.

The Climate Cult demands that people ‘listen to the science’ when the Cult is anti-science. It’s not interested in allowing all scientific opinion and research to be heard in a spirit of openness and balanced understanding. The aim as with all New Woke agendas is to silence opposition and block open debate which they know they would lose. George Soros, a member of the United Nations High Level Advisory Group on Climate Change Financing, funds a list of organisations seeking to silence ‘denial’ of climate change orthodoxy. These include Avaaz (‘Voice’) which has been described as ‘the globe’s largest and most powerful online activist network’. It was established in 2007 by two other Soros-funded groups, Res Publica and MoveOn.org . Avaaz claims to have 55 million members with campaign teams operating in 30 countries and presents itself as a global grassroots operation working in pursuit of ‘people-powered politics’. It campaigns in 15 languages with a ‘core team’ on six continents and this Soros-funded group is leading a campaign to have Google-owned YouTube ban all information and opinions challenging the official propaganda about human-caused climate change. Avaaz (‘Voice’) doesn’t want others to have one. We have also had a Soros-connected Democrat Congressional committee (New Woke political wing) demanding that Google-owned YouTube censor videos that contain ‘climate misinformation’ which means challenging the official narrative. Fascistic committee members wrote to Google CEO Sundar Pichai to urge that YouTube stop ‘driving millions of viewers to climate misinformation videos every single day’. The contempt for freedom is extraordinary, but it suits the Cult agenda perfectly. Avaaz claims that ‘climate denial = death’ which is only another way of saying that if you can’t win a debate – ban it. ‘Grassroots’ Avaaz has a long record of campaigning for items on the Cult wish-list. It has helped Iranian protestors demanding the removal of the country’s government that the Cult has long worked to remove; supported a no-fly zone for Libyan military aircraft which allowed America, Britain and NATO to bomb the country and its people shitless without challenge and delete Colonel Gadhafi; supported the US-instigated ‘civil uprising’ against Cult-target President Assad in Syria and this was reported to include training activists and delivering $1.5 million of Internet communication technology to protesters. Avaaz claims to ‘unite practical idealists‘ to make the world a better place when its support for Western (Cult) actions against Libya and Syria alone played a part in the human nightmare that followed in a frenzy of death and destruction of the innocent. All those countries were on the September, 2000, list of targets named by the ultra-Zionist Sabbatian-Frankist Project for the New American Century.

To those who trust Avaaz I would suggest a call to Naivety Anonymous. To those who trust George Soros I would say don’t waste a call – even they can’t help you. How could anyone if you believe that a man who has caused financial mayhem for whole populations by targeting their currencies for financial gain is funding ‘progressive’ ‘people-power’ groups from the kindness of his heart. The best of luck finding that, by the way. Soros has also funded groups behind the worldwide Friday school ‘climate strikes’ fronted by the Climate Cult’s Greta Thunberg who has copyrighted the terms ‘school strikes for climate’ and ‘Friday’s for future’. America’s Media Research Center, a non-profit conservative media watchdog, reported that at least 22 activist groups listed as partners in the Global Climate Strike received almost $25 million from Soros through his Open Society network between 2000 and 2017. They included Fund for Global Human Rights, Global Greengrants Fund, 350.org , Amnesty International, Avaaz, Color of Change and People’s Action. Has the penny dropped yet Green movement? Unfortunately probably not, but maybe it will when we get to why human-caused climate change is being hoaxed. A major funder of Extinction Rebellion is Sir Chris Hohn who heads one of the world’s biggest hedge funds valued at multiple billions. The UK Mail on Sunday revealed the fund’s investments in companies at the centre of environmental scandals. Everywhere the Climate Cult and New Woke have a remarkable ability to attract billionaire sponsorship and support. Amazon’s mega-billionaire Jeff Bezos announced in early 2020 that he would spend $10 billion on ‘fighting climate change’ by funding ‘scientists, activists and non-governmental organisations (see Soros) through a new ‘Bezos Earth Fund’. It was still more confirmation that human-caused climate change is a One-percent hoax. Bezos picked up the script and said the climate was changing faster than had been predicted. ‘Those predictions were bad but what is actually happening is dire’. Bloody yawn. He said that Amazon was ordering 100,000 electric delivery vehicles from Michigan-based, Amazon-invested Rivian, which again is straight from the Cult agenda. To underscore the power of programming hundreds of Amazon workers, who face losing their jobs to ‘climate-friendly’ (it’s not) AI, had protested that Bezos was not doing enough about climate change. Manipulate the serfs to demand that you do what you want to do anyway (it happens all the time). The Climate Cult works to silence the ever-growing list of scientists worldwide who can see that climate change orthodoxy is mendacious nonsense. They are demonised, targeted in the courts, denied access to the media, and their careers and income disappear. By contrast those self-proclaimed ‘scientists’ prepared to sing from the song-sheet (the ones Bezos will support) are constantly wheeled out by the Cult-owned media and can dip their snouts in an almost unlimited trough of protection money – money to protect the lies.

The cult (literally) of New Woke climate celebrity

Once belief in the orthodoxy is secured in the mainstream it becomes ‘cool’ to support that orthodoxy. If you are a virtue-signalling celebrity it’s a must to build your own image and support-base. New Woke is ‘in’ while not being New Woke can be the death knell for a career in the media, entertainment and comedy. It’s the same technique that controls scientists. Say what we want and you get a stack of money or tell your truth and we’ll destroy you. Do you want lots of likes on Facebook or a Twitter storm? As a result we have a lengthening list of celebrity arselickers proclaiming Climate Cult orthodoxy of ‘Thou Shalt not fly’ while heading in private jets to climate conferences and protests. In the case of virtue-signal world champions like actor Leonardo DiCaprio this involves taking private jets to receive climate protection awards. Celebrities are used by the Cult for their public platform to spread the message while almost every one of them won’t have a clue who is really pulling their strings and why. Britain’s Prince Harry and his American wife Meghan Markle constantly virtue-signal their climate change New Wokeness while being driven in limousines to private jets and telling others to reduce their ‘carbon footprint’. Isn’t that hypocrisy? No, no – I said you must reduce your footprint, not me . Harry’s contribution to saving the planet has been limited to the New Woke posturing of making a speech in bare feet. Put your shoes on, mate, or you’ll hurt your feet on the tarmac when you leave. The couple announced in January, 2020, they were ‘stepping down’ as ‘senior royals’ and heading for Canada. Part of this will involve super-Woke Markle being able to publicly promote her virtue-signalling super-Wokeness (including climate change theology) while Harry follows behind doing what he’s told and apologising for being a white male. New Wokers supported the move because the pair are New Woke while the now hijacked original Left would have been exposing their unearned privilege, opportunism and narcissism. Oh, how the Cult is going to exploit them both – and make them very rich – to promote the climate change and New Woke agenda. Their first big, big pay-day came with a ‘speech’ to the assembled mega-rich One-percent fake Woke at a JP Morgan Chase event in February, 2020, for which they were reported to be paid between $750,000 and $1 million. JP Morgan Chase is America’s biggest bank and the world’s sixth biggest with assets of $2.6 trillion. Here we have fake Wokers selling their souls to speak for big bucks to other fake Wokers with limitless pockets whose investments have done so much to devastate the environment and create widespread inequality and injustice. The hypocrisy and lack of self-awareness of these royals-on-the-make is chilling.

Figure 261: Sad, real sad.

The ‘royal’ couple, said they were seeking to become ‘financially independent’ which means exploiting their royal connections and privilege to make lots of money and freeing Markle from her royal restrictions to stay out of party politics. Now she can campaign for the New Woke agenda including all the demands of the Climate Cult which she and her husband appear to ignore at every turn. Prince Harry was caught on tape by two Russian pranksters thinking he was talking to Greta Thunberg. The result was toe-curling and absolute confirmation that he just repeats the climate hoax script word-for-word without a thought of his own. How Woke and aware Markle really is can be gleaned by her closeness to the Clintons, particularly Hillary, one of the most corrupt partnerships on Planet Earth. We can expect the royal private jet passengers to be even more vocal now in support of the Climate Cult and every last facet of New Woke while living their own life in the ‘privilege’ that New Woke claims to despise. The System will give them every support. American TV host Tucker Carlson accurately described celebrity climate New Wokeness as ‘the theology of the private jet class’. Meanwhile we are told that the rest of us will soon be flying in planes (as a stepping-stone to not flying at all) that fly together in V-shape formations like migrating birds to save fuel and CO2 emissions by reducing air resistance like racing cars that get close to the one in front. As someone who has experienced what happens to a plane when it gets too close to another and is twisted by the air turbulence I can’t wait. Swedish Climate Cult goddess Greta Thunberg has been used to promote the Swedish term ’flygskam’, or ‘flight shame’, to pressure people to stop flying (except the private jet class). The shame that Thunberg will feel when she realises the scale on which she has been manipulated does not bear thinking about (Fig 261 ). She and the Climate Cult have created a situation so crazy that the UK’s University of Derby introduced ‘climate anxiety classes’ for staff and students worried about the planet and the eco-system. The university said the classes are aimed at dealing with feelings of anger, guilt and grief and combatting their ‘sense of loss’. I mean – pinch me. One student said the ‘climate emergency’ made her feel she ‘isn’t going to have a future’. Oh, congratulations Greta and your handlers. Well done you. Dr Jamie Bird, university deputy head of health and social care research, said people suffer ‘climate grief’ when they see what they are losing. They are not losing anything except their bloody minds. Despite incessant public indoctrination great numbers of people can see through the garbage, but most are frightened to say so for fear of the backlash and consequences. Perhaps, however, we saw a turning point in 2019 when narcissistic, self-obsessed Extinction Rebellion protestors were pulled off the roofs of London Tube trains by commuters who just wanted to get home after a day’s work. They’d had enough and rightly so. We’ve all had enough.

Monumental mendacity

A key component of mass indoctrination is the sheer scale of deceit which the Nazis described in terms of the bigger the lie the more will believe it. Lie a little bit and you may get caught out on the basis that people are open to smaller-scale lies. What most resist are the ginormous super-whoppers pedalled by the Cult. Okay, people say, they might lie here and there to support climate change orthodoxy, but they wouldn’t lie about the whole shebang would they? Oh yes they would and they have and they are. They lie both about the individual components of the climate hoax and about the hoax in its entirety. I’ll explain why shortly. In fact, the entirety of the hoax is the totality of the individual hoaxes. The Cult seeks to protect this fact from exposure by silencing and demonising dissenters to ensure only one version is ever heard by most people. The foundation of the hoax is the ever-repeated claim that ‘the science is settled’ when it is absolutely not and becomes less so by the day. Pedro Sanchez, acting prime minister of Spain, reached still new levels of ridiculous when he said: ‘Only a handful of fanatics deny the evidence.’ He’s talking about an ever-increasing list of experts in their fields worldwide who are exposing climate change orthodoxy as the claptrap that it is. All Sanchez and almost every other politician will have heard is the official version ultimately emanating from the Cult through The Web and they repeat that orthodoxy as solid-gold unquestionable truth. This is what teachers and academics are doing with their daily indoctrination of the young to believe in climate change mendacity. You don’t want to indoctrinate the kids? Then find another job and we’ll replace you with someone who will. It’s the programmed programming the next generation of programmed. Once the orthodoxy is established as accepted reality political leaders and parties compete with each other (with a few exceptions) over who will do the most to ‘fight’ a problem that doesn’t exist. To question the climate change religion is political suicide especially on the New Woke ‘Left’ and those who have seen through the hoax zip their mouths as they seek election. The Cult knows that from the moment it secures official belief in the ‘conventional wisdom’ about any subject the dominoes will begin to fall right across society with all institutions making decisions and introducing laws on the basis of that flawed and manipulated ‘wisdom’. The climate change hoax is such a wonderful example. The official narrative is taught in the schools and universities, promoted by the mainstream media and infused into the law of the land while dissenters are silenced, abused and demonised. No wonder that narrative has become accepted ‘truth’ among those who don’t question. I am no supporter of Donald Trump for many reasons, but at least he has spoken out against climate orthodoxy while others cower or believe what they’re told.

In support of ‘the science is settled’ baloney we have the associated lie about 97 percent of climate scientists believing that humans are the main cause of climate change (a climate that is always changing and has been since the Earth was formed). I saw Jonathan Bartley, co-leader of the Green Party for England and Wales, parroting this deceitful figure on a BBC programme while he berated the BBC for allowing ‘climate deniers’ to appear. I was a national spokesman for the UK Greens for a short time in the 1980s when it still campaigned for freedom of speech and wider environmental issues before it was completely hijacked by New Woke. Even the establishment Wall Street Journal has debunked the 97 percent claim. When you track back to where it came from, and on what basis, this figure being cited as fact by those who wish to sell the orthodoxy is ludicrous. Al Gore just pulled the figure out of nowhere and subsequently the most quoted source is John Cook, ‘Climate Communication Fellow’ for the Global Change Institute at the University of Queensland who is not a climate scientist. He just promotes the official story. I have read many articles explaining how Cook examined 11,944 papers by climate scientists and found that 97 percent agreed that humans were the main cause of ‘warming’. This is not the case at all. In his own words Cook writes that 32.6 percent endorsed human-caused warming (though very few as the main cause) while 0.7 percent rejected that and 0.3 percent were uncertain. Now here’s the most important figure … 66.4 percent expressed no position . I see it claimed again and again by the Climate Cult and the media that 97 percent of climate scientists say humans are the main cause of climate change when even by Cook’s flawed methodology the figure refers only to those who expressed a view and not the scientists in totality. One study of Cook’s figures found that only 64 of the 11,944 papers – (0.5 percent ) – said humans are the main cause of global warming and nowhere was mentioned terms such as ‘crisis’ or ‘emergency’. Even if you apply this to the 3,974 papers that did express a view the figure of 64 pointing the finger at humans as the main culprit plays out as 1.6 percent . A later study of Cook’s source papers found that in fact only 41 of the 64 papers endorsed the view that humans are the main cause of warming. That’s 41 out of 11,944 . Where does the 97 percent of climate scientists agree come from? They made it up like they have made up virtually everything else. Science is about evidence not a show of bloody hands from song-sheet scientists with their nose in the climate trough and nor is it about fiddling temperature figures to support your case because the actual temperatures don’t do that. This has been exposed over and over and if you are telling the truth you don’t need to manipulate the data. How many people know that US Senator Timothy Wirth admitted they even manipulated the temperature of the room when NASA scientist James Hansen really kicked off the global warming scare at a Senate hearing in 1988? Wirth said:

… We … went in the night before and opened all the windows, I will admit, right? So that the air conditioning wasn’t working inside the room and so … when the hearing occurred there was not only bliss, which is television cameras in double figures, but it was really hot …

… So Hansen’s giving this testimony, you’ve got these television cameras back there heating up the room, and the air conditioning in the room didn’t appear to work. So it was sort of a perfect collection of events that happened that day, with the wonderful Jim Hansen, who was wiping his brow at the witness table and giving this remarkable testimony …

Senator Wirth also said:

Believe it or not, we called the Weather Bureau and found out what historically was the hottest day of the summer. Well, it was June 6 or June 9 or whatever it was, so we scheduled the hearing that day, and bingo: It was the hottest day on record in Washington, or close to it. It was stiflingly hot that summer. At the same time you had this drought all across the country, so the linkage between the Hansen hearing and the drought became very intense.

You can see that from the start the climate change hoax was not about facts, but manipulating perception to believe a fantasy.

You were saying?

Figure 262: Al Gore, the One-percent gofer to sell the lie.

Hansen’s dire claims that day more than 30 years ago have not happened and it’s the same with long-time Cult asset Al Gore who became the global sales-pitcher for the Big Lie and has made a fortune from being so (Fig 262 ). Gore said in 2006: We have ten years to save the planet (big-time wrong); the Arctic will be ice-free by 2014 (big-time wrong); the Gulf Stream will slow down (it’s been speeding up); polar bears are in danger of becoming extinct (big-time wrong); sea levels will rise by 20 feet in the near future (big-time wrong). Read some of my other books and you’ll see the background to Gore who has a personal carbon footprint the size of Godzilla. He was a vice-president to Bill Clinton and you don’t get that job if you have any inclination whatsoever to tell the truth. The Cult controls the Nobel Peace Prize, which is why so many Cult-asset war-mongers and mass killers have been recipients, and it also dictates Oscar winners whenever that would promote the agenda. Gore, you will not be shocked to know, was handed both awards for lying about climate change and frightening the life out of whole generations of children and the young. Prince Charles said in 2009 that we had twelve years to save the world from irretrievable climate and ecosystem collapse (big-time wrong) and with extraordinary idiocy he claimed that climate change was the ‘root cause’ of the Syrian conflict which was actually triggered by terrorists funded and armed by the United States and Gulf State allies like Saudi Arabia. Here are some other climate and environmental catastrophe warnings that turned out to be utter crap around the period that the annual Earth Day was established in 1970 :

Harvard biologist George Wald:

‘Civilization will end within 15 or 30 years unless immediate action is taken against problems facing mankind.’

American biologist Paul Ehrlich:

‘The death rate will increase until at least 100-200 million people per year will be starving to death during the next ten years.’

Peter Gunter, a North Texas State University professor:

‘Demographers agree almost unanimously see 97 percent of climate scientists agree on the following grim timetable: by 1975 widespread famines will begin in India; these will spread by 1990 to include all of India, Pakistan, China and the Near East, Africa. By the year 2000, or conceivably sooner, South and Central America will exist under famine conditions … By the year 2000, thirty years from now, the entire world, with the exception of Western Europe, North America, and Australia, will be in famine.’

Then there was the climate temperature prediction in 1970 from ecologist Kenneth Watt:

‘The world has been chilling sharply for about twenty years. If present trends continue, the world will be about four degrees colder for the global mean temperature in 1990, but eleven degrees colder in the year 2000. This is about twice what it would take to put us into an ice age.’

The threat to human existence went from an ice age to runaway super-heating in the blink of an eye. How could that happen? They just changed the propaganda. The lies are constant and apparently without end.

Make-it-up mythology

Figure 263: The Medieval Warm Period began around 1,000 years ago when temperatures were warmer than today without industrialisation. Then came the Little Ice Age when freezing temperatures were the winter norm which makes temperature comparisons between that period and now utterly irrelevant.

Figure 264: Depiction of the frozen-over River Thames during the Little Ice Age.

Figure 265: The correlation between solar activity measured by sunspots and Earth temperature. It is an obvious comparison and connection which the Climate Cult ignores because it destroys the narrative. The ‘Maunder Minimum’ corresponded with the coldest point of the Little Ice Age.

Figure 266: Another sunspot-Earth temperature chart.

We hear claims about the ‘hottest day ever recorded’ and even when you factor out manipulated data the key word is recorded . Many times this will be deleted in headlines to read ‘hottest day ever’. Some background before I make my point. The planet has been hotter for much of its life than it is today and there was the Medieval Warm Period that began around 1,000 years ago which eclipsed current temperatures when there were no factories or 4 x 4s or indeed any carbon producing vehicles at all (Fig 263 ). The warm period was also a time of abundance compared with cold periods. Grapes were grown for wine in the far north of England and even Scotland. There was, in short, no climate catastrophe. Temperatures began to cool and previous abundance disappeared in what is called the Little Ice Age between the 16th and 19th centuries (some say it started earlier). It was so cold in this period they held ice fairs on the River Thames in London which froze over every year. Some Christmas cards still depict the scenes (Fig 264 ). It was highly significant that during the Little Ice Age fantastic explosions of energy on the Sun known as sunspots, which indicate solar activity, all but disappeared. This is known as the sunspot ‘Maunder Minimum’ after the man who conducted the research studies (Fig 265 ). You don’t think there could be a connection between Sun activity and Earth temperature do you? There can’t be, surely, or the Climate Cult would mention the Sun sometimes instead of being utterly obsessed with carbon dioxide. Maybe they think it’s just a coincidence that when the Sun comes out it gets warmer; or perhaps they think that when solar energy projected at the Earth increases this couldn’t possibly affect our temperature (Fig 266 ). They are experts after all. Scientists at CERN recorded an extremely close correlation between Earth temperature and the penetration of cosmic rays into our atmosphere. Records of ‘the hottest day/year since records began’ started mostly as we were still coming out of the Little Ice Age and of course temperatures are going to be warmer now. What use is a comparison between an extremely cold period and one after that period ended? It’s a pointless comparison unless you are trying to mislead which they are. Why would the trough-snout scientists of the Climate Cult seek in leaked emails and documents to delete from the record the existence of the Medieval Warm Period and make it appear that today’s temperatures are ‘unprecedented’ and caused by the industrial era? To mislead, of course, and people mislead to hide the fact that they’re lying. Here are some other climate propaganda myths:

• The migrant crisis is caused by climate change lowering crop yields that force people to relocate in search of food: This has been alleged to explain why so many are heading out of Central America to the United States border and supports the Cult migration agenda which I have described. In fact, crop yields in Honduras, Costa Rica, Mexico, Panama, Ecuador, etc., have been consistently increasing.

• Climate change will empty the North American Great Lakes: This is shown to be without substance by all-time recorded high water levels and no downward trend over 100 years. These high volumes were reported with the question: ‘Why are water levels on the Great Lakes fluctuating so widely?’ How about through misrepresentation of the trend?

• Climate change will mean ever-greater extremes of weather such as tornadoes and hurricanes: Strong tornadoes and devastating landfall hurricanes have been steady in number or in decline in recent decades according to peer-reviewed scientific literature that says the same about droughts, floods, and other extreme weather events. The worldwide death rate caused by weather events has dropped more than 98 percent since the 1920s.

• Polar bears are heading for extinction as climate change makes their ice habitat disappear: Polar Bears became the poster children of the Climate Cult as a symbol for a terrifying future. Polar bear specialists like Dr Susan Crockford, former adjunct professor at the University of Victoria in Canada and a forensic zoologist, demolishes the official narrative in her book, The Polar Bear Catastrophe That Never Happened . Indeed she destroys the polar bear hoax so well that she lost her role at the university in what she described as ‘an academic hanging without a trial, conducted behind closed doors’. This is what happens when you challenge Climate Cult orthodoxy.

Figure 267:You can always bet on the BBC’s David Attenborough parroting (appropriately) the official narrative.

Figure 268: Yet another constant misrepresentation to promote CO2 as a pollutant.

Crockford shows how polar bears are flourishing and communities are either stable or increasing. Polar bears in part of the Barents Sea increased by 42 percent between 2004 and 2015; in Baffin Bay where bears were predicted to decline by 25 percent they increased by 36 percent; and in Kane Basin they more than doubled. The global average had risen to more than 30,000 bears which Crockford says is ‘far and away the highest estimate in more than 50 years’. Crockford exposes the BBC’s climate change propagandist David Attenborough for misleading the public on polar bears and much else in an Internet video Attenborough’s Arctic Betrayal (Fig 267 ). Greta Thunberg said she became an activist on climate change after watching reports of polar bear decline that isn’t happening. The same BBC of course gave her a TV programme (program) to promote her propaganda.

• Images show belching chimneys pouring out ‘dangerous’ carbon dioxide: CO2 is invisible to the human eye and what they are showing you is pollution and not CO2 which is the gas of life and without it there would be no plants and so no humans or animals (Fig 268 ). They show you pictures of pollution to make you believe that carbon dioxide is a pollutant. Most of the ‘journalists’ who do this don’t know the difference themselves in yet another exercise in the blind leading the blind.

Protecting make-it-up mythology

How could a hoax based on so many lies become accepted fact in the minds of so many – especially the young – and drive much of government policy? The hoax has been possible by control of information to indoctrinate a belief system underscored by the fear that ‘we’re all going to die’. I’ve said that once you implant the orthodoxy of ‘everyone knows that’ the rest follows largely unaided. Older people are more sceptical of the climate claims because they’ve not had a lifetime of climate propaganda in the schools and universities. The young have and it’s clear why many children and young people believe the lie pedalled through all Cult institutions of government, ‘education’, and crucially the media. Unless people seek out information beyond the Mainstream Everything they live in a one-track world. Without alternative sources of information the population is only being told what the Cult wants them to think. Pictures of distressed polar bears have been explained as the consequences of ‘global warming’ when the cause of their distress and emaciated state were later revealed to have had other origins unrelated to climate. Show a bear in trouble and say it is climate change and most people believe that to be true when it fits the narrative they have already been suckered to believe in. I read an excellent book by American meteorologist and weather forecaster, Joe Bastardi, a vehement and outspoken exposer of the climate lie. He describes in The Climate Chronicles how he has studied weather patterns going way back to show that weather now being blamed on human-caused climate change has happened in a recurring sequence long before the industrial era. The difference is that before the climate hysteria the same weather was just weather. Today it’s always caused by global warming (which became ‘climate change’ when temperatures stopped rising and then the ‘climate crisis’ as the scare was ramped up). It’s so easy to be scammed if people don’t check the facts. We have a hurricane – it’s global warming!; tornado – it’s global warming!; drought – it’s global warming!. It’s hot – it’s global warming! It’s cold – it’s global warming! Bastardi calls them Climate ambulance chasers. He says: ‘What happened before naturally is happening again, as is to be expected given the cyclical nature of the climate due to the design of the planet.’ Bastardi presents many examples of these cycles now blamed on human activity and this is one relating to droughts in the United States:

… Major US dry periods are a product of a cooling tropical Pacific. In the decades such as the 1950s through the 1970s, when the tropical Pacific is cooler overall, the US is drier than normal in much of the nation.

It is exactly the opposite in the years the Pacific warms, which, by the way correlates nicely to an increase in global temperatures until the atmosphere adjusts to the warming tropical ocean and temperatures level off. But the idea that global warming causes droughts here in the US is the opposite of the facts! It’s when the Pacific starts to cool and global temperatures start to drop that we see it dry out.

Bastardi’s book is highly recommended as is The Politically Incorrect Guide to Climate Change by Republican insider Marc Morano who charts the blatant political manipulation behind the climate hoax. A good website for hoax-challenging information is the Global Warming Policy Foundation at thegwpf.com . We should not forget that all the projections upon projections about climate Armageddon don’t come from observing the climate. They result from putting data and assumptions into computer models and believing what they tell you is going to happen. The fact that they have been wrong by shocking margins so many times might have given them a clue by now that this doesn’t work due to a simple cause and effect: If you factor in shit the computer will process that shit to produce ‘predictions’ that are nothing more than a feedback loop of shit-in and shit-out. Assume something with your input and you’ll get the answer you want, but rarely the truth. There are so many variables and influences that affect climate that long-term predictions are a mug’s game anyway. Follow the cycles that have happened before if you want to predict the climate. There’s another angle to this that we should be constantly vigilant about. Technology to manipulate weather is now highly-advanced and there would not be international treaties agreeing not to manipulate weather if it was not technologically possible to do that. See Everything You Need To Know for detailed background about how extremes of weather can be made to happen and we can expect the Cult to continue to strike in this way around the world to convince people climate disaster is at hand.

The gas of life

Figure 269: Carbon dioxide is the gas of life and the natural world’s version of oxygen. I know – let’s demonise the gas of life and transform society into the global centralised tyranny to make sure we have less of it.

The Cult takes facts and inverts them to become the very opposite of the truth before selling the inversion as ‘conventional wisdom’. This way the public perception of reality becomes the opposite of actual reality. We are told we face ‘catastrophe’ when if what the Climate Cult demands are followed through we will have a real, not imagined, human catastrophe in economics, food production and energy supplies (this was written before the ‘virus’ lockdowns which have had the same effect). Global society would be devastated by plans to be ‘carbon neutral’ by 2025 to 2030 or 2050. There can, however, be no better or more blatant example of inversion than carbon dioxide (CO2) itself. This is the gas of life without which we really would all be dead and yet CO2 has been thoroughly demonised (Fig 269 ). If it was human it could sue for libel. You’ll find interviews at Davidicke.com with professors at Princeton University emphasising both the central role played by carbon dioxide in human life and that far from having too much in the atmosphere we don’t have enough . This will be amazing to people who have bought the carbon-is-a-pollutant narrative and it reveals the scale of inversion that we are dealing with. William Happer, Professor of Physics at Princeton University and long-time government advisor on climate, is one scientist who says the planet has a CO2 deficiency and needs more for optimal plant growth and food production. Such views have made him a big hate figure for the Climate Cult as the truth always does. He says that most of the warming in the last 100 years happened as we emerged from the Little Ice Age and was over by 1940. Happer points out that in a peak year for warming in 1988 there was a ‘monster El Nino’ which is a natural and cyclical warming of the Pacific that affects global weather patterns and temperature and has nothing to do with ‘climate change’. He says the nature of the CO2 effect can be likened to painting a wall with red paint. Once two or three coats have been applied it doesn’t matter how much more paint you add the wall will not get much redder. He explains that almost all the effect of the rise in CO2 has already occurred and the amount in the atmosphere would now have to double for even a single degree increase in temperature:

I know a lot about CO2 compared with most climate scientists … there’s an interesting thing about CO2 which is unique to CO2 – it’s not true, for example, of water vapour, methane. This is that if you get one degree of warming from doubling CO2, so going from say 400 parts per million for simplicity to 800 … then to get another degree of warming you have to double 800, you have to go to 1,600. So it gets harder and harder to warm. Technically they call that the logarithmic dependence of temperature rise on CO2 concentration.

Happer said that this fact was realised early in the climate hysteria and to overcome such a demolition of the orthodoxy we had advocates of the hoax inventing theories about ‘feedback loops’ amplifying the CO2 effect. These are the doom-laden predictions that you constantly hear parroted by climate activists including Greta Thunberg. Happer said he laughs when he hears about ‘carbon pollution’ given that people, plants and animals are made of carbon and without it there would be no life. He said that an increase in CO2 in the atmosphere would make plants more drought resistant because when plants open holes in their leaves to absorb CO2 they leak water and the holes have to be open for longer to take in enough carbon dioxide amid what he calls a ‘CO2 famine’. Happer emphasised that CO2 increases since industrialisation have had a ‘huge effect’ on plants and increased their growth: ‘When people talk about the social cost of carbon it’s absurd. The social cost is negative of CO2.’ He said climate computer models don’t look at the world as it is, but at other computer models . How much funding would the modellers get, by the way, if their predictions did not support the Climate Cult hypothesis? Imperial College in London which has produced many of the ridiculous ‘climate change’ models was also responsible for the computer models warning of insane numbers of ‘Covid-19’ deaths in the UK, United States and other countries which led to the lockdowns that have destroyed the lives of billions. Needless to say the insane ‘projections’ did not materialise, but provided the excuse for global house arrest.

Too much CO2? We don’t have enough

The central importance of CO2 was a theme developed by Greenpeace co-founder Patrick Moore in a presentation to the Global Warming Policy Foundation. Scientist Moore left Greenpeace in 1986 and has criticised the green movement for scare tactics and disinformation with particular emphasis on climate change. He makes the point that other scientists have made about how dangerous it is to have low levels of CO2. Plants start to die at 150 parts per million and Moore says that even when CO2 fell to 180 ppm 18,000 years ago plants began to starve. This only turned around when the temperature went up for reasons I will shortly explain. Calling for a reduction in carbon dioxide is the plant equivalent of humans demanding a reduction in oxygen – CO2 is, in effect, plant oxygen. Today Moore says CO2 stands at around 400 ppm and plant life is still ‘relatively starved of nutrition’ with the optimum levels for plant growth five times higher at 2,000 ppm and in some periods of the Earth’s history the ratio has reached 4,000 ppm. These facts explain why since CO2 levels began to rise with industrialisation the Earth is getting greener as CO2 has risen from 280 ppm in an 1880 measurement in Hawaii to 413 ppm in 2019. The Climate Cult that claims to be ‘saving the planet’ wants to reverse that process! Why do they think people pump extra carbon dioxide into greenhouses?? The Climate Cult contends amid its mass-hysteria that we face extinction when the gas of life is at way below optimum planet-growth levels and 500 million years ago there was 17 times more CO2 in the atmosphere than we have today. Patrick Moore said levels have been falling for hundreds of millions of years as it was absorbed from the atmosphere and locked away by many and various sources. Over the last 150 million years CO2 levels in Earth’s atmosphere had reduced by 90 percent . By the time humans began releasing carbon dioxide through fossil fuels Moore said we were at ‘38 seconds to midnight’ in terms of threats to plant life (thus all life) through plummeting levels of CO2. Not only aren’t humans causing extinction they are preventing it. ‘Release of CO2 has turned around the constant fall’, Moore said, and in this sense ‘Humans are the Earth’s salvation’. Moore also noted that only half the CO2 emitted by fossil fuels ends up in the atmosphere. You read these facts about the fundamental importance of CO2 and then hear as I did an interview with ‘carbon footprint expert’ Mike Berners-Lee, a professor at the Institute for Social Futures at the UK’s Lancaster University, and brother of Tim Berners-Lee who is credited with inventing the World Wide Web. The interview was on the London-based TalkRadio in which Mike Berners-Lee told an unchallenging host how emails add to carbon emissions and that ‘a low-carbon world is better than a high-carbon world’. Breathes deeply, shakes head, moves on. Some other information in Patrick Moore’s speech that the Climate Cult should know: The Earth has been in a major cooling period since the maximum of 50 million years ago when it was as much as 16 degrees warmer. Today’s poles were ice free and covered in forests. The ancestors of today’s species came through that temperature period fine, but a two percent rise is now supposed to threaten mass extinction! Even in our current interglacial period we are experiencing one of the coldest climates in the Earth’s history. The Medieval Warm Period (long before fossil fuels) was still cooler than temperatures in the last 10,000 years, Moore said.

Temperature doesn’t follow CO2 – it’s the other way round

Figure 270: CO2 is a tiny fraction of greenhouse gases which are almost entirely water vapour and clouds. What’s more the great majority of that CO2 is naturally-occurring and nothing to do with humans.

Oh, Climate Cultists may say, higher CO2 might be better for plants, but it will cause the Earth to heat catastrophically. I mean, Greta Thunberg says we should believe that our house is on fire and she wouldn’t mislead us, right? Well, if she has been mercilessly mislead herself I think she probably would. In fact, temperature rises don’t follow increases in CO2 – it’s the other way round as the records clearly show. In the last 400,000 years CO2 has lagged temperature by an average of 800 years. As Patrick Moore rightly says carbon dioxide cannot be the cause of rising temperature when the increase in temperature comes before the increase in CO2. How can the effect come before the cause? It can’t. So here’s a shocker for New Wokers … temperature must be affecting CO2 levels and not vice-versa. Here we have yet another classic Cult inversion of the truth. How could temperature increase CO2? The ocean contains 45 times more CO2 than we have in the atmosphere and the ocean releases carbon dioxide in warm periods and absorbs it in colder periods. The lag between the two is around 800 years and look what was happening 800 years ago …. the Medieval Warm Period . Carbon dioxide does not cause the Earth to catastrophically warm. The history of CO2 correlation with temperature shows that for immense periods the two have been completely out of kilter. Temperatures have risen and remained high as CO2 went down. Carbon dioxide is also only 0.117 percent of what are called greenhouse gases while more than 90 percent of those gases are water vapour and clouds (Fig 270 ). Only a fraction of that 0.117 percent is CO2 caused by human activity and the rest happens naturally. Professional conman Al Gore tried to obscure this fact by saying that if you ‘take water vapour out of the equation CO2 is 30 percent of greenhouse gases’. Don’t buy a used car from that man or even a new one. How can you ‘take water vapour out of the equation’ when that together with clouds makes up close to the entirety of greenhouse gases? To deceive – that’s how. Calculated demonisation of CO2 is so transparent. Professor Leslie Woodcock, Emeritus Professor at the University of Manchester, fellow of the Royal Society of Chemical Engineering, a recipient of a Max Plank Society Visiting Fellowship, and former NASA researcher, said:

Water is a much more powerful greenhouse gas, and there is 20 times more of it in our atmosphere, around one percent of the atmosphere, whereas CO2 is only 0.04 percent. Carbon dioxide has been made out to be some kind of toxic gas, but the truth is that it’s the gas of life. We breathe it out, plants breathe it in and it’s not caused by us. Global warming is nonsense.

British scientist James Lovelock was a one-time Green icon with his Gaia theory of the Earth as a living entity (true). He became even more acclaimed by climate alarmists when he predicted in his book The Revenge of Gaia that ‘billions will die’ and humanity was doomed. Lovelock wrote that any survivors would have to live in the Arctic which would be one of the few habitable places on Earth. Then reality dawned and to his enormous credit he had the courage to publicly change his mind. Humanity was not in imminent peril after all. Lovelock now says that climate alarmism is not ‘remotely scientific’, computer models are unreliable and anyone who tries to ‘predict more than five to ten years is a bit of an idiot’. A single volcano can make more difference to global warming than humans ever could, he has stated. He accuses the Greens of exaggeration and behaving ‘deplorably’. Weather Channel founder John Coleman has said human-caused global warming is a myth and the list of scientists saying the same is getting longer by the week. Such honesty often comes at a cost, however, in the form of lost jobs and income. Dr Judith Curry, a respected climatologist and tenured professor at Georgia Tech University, left her ‘dream job’ when she refused to pledge unquestioning obedience to the Climate Cult. She told Fox News:

I’ve been vilified by some of my colleagues who are activists and don’t like anybody challenging their big story … I walk around with knives sticking out of my back … In the university environment I felt like I was just beating my head against the wall.

Curry is a target of an establishment-promoted ‘climate advocacy group’ called Skeptical Science which operates a ‘blacklist’ of scientists who won’t comply with Climate Cult orthodoxy. Dana Nuccitelli, one of the principals of Skeptical Science, wrote of Curry: ‘If you look at the statements we cataloged and debunked … it should make her unhirable in academia.’ Judith Curry is a former chair of the School of Earth and Atmospheric Sciences at Georgia Tech and a Fellow of both the American Geophysical Union and American Meteorological Society. She was only ‘unhirable’ because the Climate Cult made it so. Curry was asked to step down by her university for her views on climate and had ‘numerous inquiries from academic headhunters encouraging me to apply for major administration positions, ranging from Dean to Vice Chancellor for Research’. She didn’t even make the shortlist. Curry said in a Forbes interview:

They thought I was an outstanding candidate, looked excellent on paper, articulated a strong vision, and interviewed very well in person. The show stopper was my public profile in the climate debate, as evidenced by a simple Google search.

Figure 271:Refuse to sing from the song-sheet and you’re gone.

Google is so helpful in ensuring that Skeptical Science is on the first page and sometimes the top listing for a word search for Judith or Judy Curry. This is the tyranny that genuine academics and scientists are facing from the Climate Cult in all its forms. Who created Skeptical Science? John Cook , the Australian bloke most quoted about ‘97 percent of climate scientists’ agreeing that humans are most responsible for climate change when his ‘research’ doesn’t say that at all. Small world, eh? Those that don’t accept climate change orthodoxy are labelled ‘anti-science’ when questioning every hypothesis is what real science is all about. It’s the Climate Cult that is anti-science (another inversion). French television weatherman Philippe Verdier was fired by the France 2 channel for publishing a book accusing ‘climate experts’ of misleading the public and the Cult-controlled UN Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change of publishing deliberately misleading data (Fig 271 ). What he said is true and he was sacked because it is true. Programmed New Woke trade union members at the station demanded he was dismissed. Verdier wrote his book after French Foreign Minister Laurent Fabius asked TV meteorologists to highlight climate change issues in their broadcasts. ‘I was horrified by this speech,’ Verdier said.

Cult narrative: humanity is the enemy

Figure 272: An academic promoting the end of humanity. She is teaching young people, right? Wow. Her extreme of extreme views are fine with Woke. It’s when you say men and women are biologically different that you trigger their ire.

Greenpeace co-founder Patrick Moore is a scientist who says the Greens have abandoned science and replaced it with emotion and sensationalism based on an ‘anti-human’ agenda that paints humanity as the enemy of the Earth. If you are a Death Cult targeting humanity would you not want them to believe that they were the problem? Wouldn’t you want them to despise themselves and turn against themselves? You surely would. We breathe out carbon dioxide and even the act of breathing is harming the planet – ahhhhh!!! Humans are deadly. We must kill them. A vegan father-of-four voiced this anti-human mentality when he called a UK radio station to say humans shouldn’t breed to produce more offspring to ‘harm animals’. He urged people to encourage a ‘graceful ending of our time on the planet’. The caller, who gave the name ‘Danny’, said he had recently discovered ‘anti-natalism’ – ‘the idea that we shouldn’t be breeding humans when it causes so much unnecessary suffering to animals, especially people who bring up children to eat meat’. Should we then not allow animals to breed when they cause so much harm to each other in the killing fields that are the ‘natural world’? ‘Danny’ said there was nothing wrong with human extinction and admitted that he tells his nine-year-old son and older daughters to question their own reproduction and whether they should be here in the first place. ‘I don’t want grandchildren, and I don’t want them to impose life on another generation for no good reason.’ He’s not psychologically damaged or anything and this is not in any way psychological abuse of his children. These views may seem seriously extreme, but the guy is far from alone and they are just the attitudes you want to engender when you are a Death Cult led by unseen ‘gods’ that wish to replace humanity as we know it today (more later). It would be easy to dismiss an anonymous caller to a radio station if what he said was not being promoted by academics such as Patricia MacCormack, a professor of continental philosophy at Anglia Ruskin University in Cambridge. She argues in her book, The Ahuman Manifesto , that ‘the only solution for climate change is letting the human race become extinct’ (Fig 272 ). This was the headline in an interview with MacCormack in which she set out a ‘positive view’ for the future of Earth without humans. She said she came to these conclusions through her interest in feminism and ‘queer theory’ and railed against ‘this hierarchal world where white, male, heterosexual and able-bodied people are succeeding, and people of different races, genders, sexualities and those with disabilities are struggling to get that’. Well, best get rid of everyone then.

MacCormack further argues that we need to dismantle religion while clearly not realising that she is a member of one. She said that humans are already enslaved to the point of ‘zombiedom’ (oh, the irony) by ‘capitalism’ and because of the damage this has caused ‘phasing out reproduction is the only way to repair the damage done to the world’. This is straight from the Cult agenda for a mass human cull as will become clear and she will be utterly oblivious to that. The realisation that such mentalities are teaching young people is very sobering while at the same time explains so much about where New Woke is coming from.

To summarise what Patrick Moore has said, and what I have observed for decades, the Green movement that he and I remember has been hijacked by New Woke and real environmental issues are being marginalised and sacrificed on the altar of global warming. We have the obsession with ‘climate change’ while genuine pollution increases, including radiation pollution, and US Green New Deal promotor Alexandria Ocasio-Cortez represents a district awash with trash in the streets. I am so glad I was briefly a national spokesman for the Green Party in the 1980s. It has given me such an insight into the mentality that drives the tyranny of the New Woke Climate Cult today. Moore brings sanity to the debate when he says that carbon dioxide is a building block for all life on earth and without its presence in the global atmosphere in sufficient concentrations this would be a dead planet. He says that all life is carbon-based including our own and he describes carbon dioxide as ‘the currency of life’ and the most important building block for terrestrial life. ‘Yet today our children and our publics are taught that CO2 is a toxic pollutant that will destroy life and bring civilisation to its knees.’ Once again if you were a Death Cult with humanity in its gunsights wouldn’t you want them to believe that what keeps them alive threatens their existence? Wouldn’t you want them to dismantle what gives them life? What a testament to the programming of human perception that so many believe this absurdity to their core.

Climate Cult veganism – not so simple

We have a perfect system in which humans breathe in oxygen and breathe out carbon dioxide (how dare we?) while plant life and trees absorb carbon dioxide and produce oxygen during the day by converting sunlight, carbon dioxide and water into carbohydrates and oxygen in a process called photosynthesis. The Sun, like carbon dioxide, is obviously essential to life on Earth and notice that both are being targeted. We are encouraged to fear the Sun through the climate hoax on the grounds that it generates heat (while not presenting the Sun as a source of global temperature!) and we are urged to cover our skin with cancer-causing chemicals in sun lotion when the skin turns sunlight into the essential vitamin D so vital to human health. This process of synthesising sunlight into vitamin D is achieved through cholesterol in the skin cells – the same cholesterol that is also vilified as we are urged to ‘lower your cholesterol’ and take ongoing, health-destroying statin drugs to do so (ka-ching say the Big Pharma tills). We are told by officialdom that LDL cholesterol, or low-density lipoproteins, is ‘bad cholesterol’ and can cause heart disease. To save ourselves we should take statins. A global team of 17 doctors published a study of nearly 1.3 million people in 2018 that concluded there is no link between high LDL cholesterol and heart disease and that statins were, with serious understatement, of ‘doubtful benefit’. The study, published in the Expert Review of Clinical Pharmacology , exposed the demonisation of cholesterol and reported that heart attack patients were shown to have lower than normal levels of LDL or ‘bad cholesterol’. Professor Sherif Sultan, one of the authors, said the ‘strongest finding’ was elderly people with high levels of LDL live the longest. The big rule of thumb to remember: If ‘The System’ is pushing something it’s bad for humanity. If it is targeting something it’s good for humanity. It works every time. The highest concentration of cholesterol is in the brain – 20 percent of the body total. The brain is 60 percent fats and without cholesterol it cannot function effectively. This explanation comes from Psychologytoday.com :

Synapses – the magical areas where communication between brain cells takes place – are lined by cholesterol-rich membranes responsible for passing neurotransmitters like serotonin, GABA, and dopamine back and forth. Myelin, the white matter that insulates brain circuits, is made from tightly-wound membranes containing 75% of the brain’s cholesterol.

Cholesterol also helps guide developing nerve endings to their destinations on ‘lipid rafts’. If the brain is too low in cholesterol, its membranes, synapses, myelin and lipid rafts can’t form or function properly, bringing all brain activity – including mood regulation, learning, and memory – to a screeching halt.

We are witnessing soaring numbers of people with forms of dementia. Is this a coincidence? No, it’s not. There are other reasons for this, too, but if you significantly lower or eliminate cholesterol and fat consumption this is what happens. Check the facts for yourself. Every vegan and vegetarian should read for their own sake the book by David Evans called Low Cholesterol Leads to an Early Death: Evidence from 101 Scientific Papers . There are also the books of Barry Groves including Trick and Treat: How healthy eating is making us ill . I am not saying vegans and vegetarians should change their lifestyle – that’s none of my business. I am saying check the facts first and you won’t get them only by reading mainstream sources. Is it still another ‘by chance’ that the Climate Cult (a stooge of the Death Cult) is demanding a major decrease (ideally the elimination) of meat consumption with its mega sources of cholesterol and fats? The theme is being promoted by pathetically-named documentaries such as Apocalypse Cow: How Meat Killed The Planet fronted by Guardian ‘journalist’ virtue-signaller and fast-asleep New Woker ‘vegan’ George Monbiot who bizarrely shot a deer on the programme and ate it as a burger. Go figure. I understand why vegetarians and vegans choose not to eat animal products and I absolutely respect the intent. I was a vegetarian myself for some 15 years. It is not, however, that simple. Firstly vegans and vegetarians might consider that all life is conscious including the plants they eat themselves. I have written a number of times over the years about research revealing how plants and trees feel pain and stress which can even be generated by the tone of voice and someone’s intent towards them. When people ‘talk’ to plants it generates a wave interaction with the frequency field of the voice and this is picked up by the plant. They may not understand human words, but they pick up the ‘vibe’. A team of scientists at Tel Aviv University published a study in 2019 revealing that tomato and tobacco plants emitted multiple ultrasonic ‘stress’ sounds between 20 and 100 kilohertz when deprived of water or their stems were cut. Plants with no environmental threat or damage emitted less than one ultrasonic sound per hour. Many other experiments have confirmed the theme – plant life is conscious and feels forms of emotional pain and stress when threatened. What does a tree feel when it is cut down? What do other trees feel when it is well established that trees operate in ‘families’ and communicate?

There is no consumption of food in higher frequencies and these moral dilemmas do not arise. Within the simulation there is such density and a comparative deficit of energy that the difference is made up by consuming ‘physical’ food which is really wavefields. I wish that didn’t have to be, but the point to remember is that everything is conscious. We are told that meat eating must end to protect animals when animals eat each other second by second. It is the way the simulation is set up to be a killing field. Animals eat each other to secure the sustenance they need to survive and biologically humans have the same basic make-up and nutritional requirements. We may wish it was different, okay, agreed. But for now that’s how it is. Animals that provide the basis for human food will, of course, disappear altogether as a consequence of what is being demanded by a few imposing their lifestyle choice on everyone else. The meat industry is going to be subjected to full-blown demonisation and financial attacks to secure the desired Cult outcome by claiming it is ‘not sustainable’ – I’ll explain the real significance of ‘sustainable’ in the next chapter. Vegans should make their choices as they see fit and have those choices respected. I just wish the same respect came the other way and self-righteous vegan activists didn’t act like another cult with its deep connections to the Climate Cult which is largely the unknowing puppet of the Death Cult. By all means campaign for animals to be treated humanely – I’m with you – but please open your eyes to what you are being used to bring about. I am not telling people what they should eat. I am saying look at the pattern and how the climate hoax and other excuses are being used to target carbon dioxide, sunlight and cholesterol which, without sufficient quantities, there would truly be extinction. I find the same perceptual arrogance at the extreme end (not everyone) of those who contend that the Earth is flat. If people want to believe that then good luck to them I say. Unfortunately the same respect often doesn’t come the other way. If you don’t accept what they claim you are subject to attacks and dubbed an agent of the elite – even those who have spent their lives exposing the elite and who do more to that end in a month than ‘flat Earth’ extreme obsessives will do in a lifetime. The Earth is ‘flat’ in a sense at the level of its wavefield construct or ‘interference pattern’. Its holographic decoded projection called the ‘physical’ Earth is quite something else. Those who see this differently have every right to do so and I won’t call them agents of the elite just because they believe something that I don’t. Why do so many people insist that what they believe must be accepted by everybody? This book is my view and research. I don’t insist for a second that people have to believe it if it doesn’t make sense to them.

The Cult is exploiting the climate change hoax to pressure people to be vegan and that should start alarm bells ringing. I can tell you after tracking these people for 30 years that they do nothing without intent to harm humanity and if they want the population to be vegan it’s for a reason that benefits the agenda. Some schools are imposing vegan food and banning meat including one in Sweden where preschool teacher Markus Sandström said: ‘The more we thought about it, the better it seemed … sustainable development is our starting point and the meat has a great impact on climate.’ Sandström doesn’t know what he’s talking about. He’s just repeating what he has been programmed to believe so he will pass on that programming to children and enforce it in this case. This is what teachers are there to do from the Cult’s point of view. Vegetarian and vegan diets imposed by schools is a gathering trend with a school in Oxford, England, banning children from bringing their own packed lunches if they are not meat and fish free. We see yet again how the New Woke and climate tyranny works. It is not about winning arguments with freely-debated facts; it’s about imposition. Head teacher Kay Wood said that the move allowed them to serve better quality meals for the same price. Okay, so explain how that scans with banning packed lunches brought from home. How would price be significant when the school is not paying? Who says they are better quality meals when many nutritionists have the opinion that meat and fish are essential to a balanced intake of what the body and brain needs? Who is Ms Wood to make those decisions about what children can eat and its effect on their well-being? A second reason she cited was the yawn, yawn, ‘huge environmental and sustainability benefits’ as she once again repeated the Cult script while not knowing there even is a Cult. Reason number three was that banning meat ‘allows students of all faiths and different dietary requirements to eat together’. She wouldn’t be able to see the deeper consequences of this which is imposing one set of beliefs on everyone. Why wouldn’t you justify that to yourself when I am right. One parent at the school said banning meat and fish had made her children and other pupils hungry, but none of this matters – I am right . A UK property company Igloo Regeneration has decreed that all corporate entertaining and catering must be vegetarian and meals including meat cannot be reimbursed on expenses after they bought the same lie as the schools. They certainly won’t be the last and watch this theme expand because it’s a Cult agenda. There is pressure to introduce meat taxes and we even have people taking neighbours to court for the smell of their barbeques. I am right has spoken and you will comply! Why should you have choice when you are wrong ? There are many lovely vegans who understand this defence of basic freedom. I’m sure others will be cocking their abuse ready to fire. If you want self-righteous abuse by the truckload tell an extreme vegan activist that the world is not as black and white as they think it is. You will see as we go along what the endless references of ‘sustainability’ really mean although these teachers won’t have a clue what that is. They are just repeaters like the entire system in all its forms – repeating the Totalitarian Tiptoe agenda of the Cult like a broken record while thinking it’s true. Where the delete-meat Cult agenda is really going, via veganism, is to laboratory-produced synthetic food for reasons I will be explaining.

So the gas of life is being demonised to provide the foundation of the religious orthodoxy promoted by the Climate Cult and all its associated offshoots like changing what people eat. The next question is why the global Death Cult would go to such lengths to convince us that humans are threatening the planet’s very existence of the world we have come to know. The answer is both clear – and devastating.